SMA SERIES 4

SYNCHRONOUS
MULTIPLEXER EQUIPMENT

USER MANUAL
1PHA60071AAY

This Manual consists of the following files:

1PHA60071AAY ENU status 05–00–00 (all pages at Issue 05)

Date of issue: 13–08–2002
TITLE PAGE AND ENU
STATEMENT

Marconi Communications Ltd. and the Marconi logo are trade marks of Marconi plc.
Microsoft, MS and MS–DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America and other countries.
Hewlett Packard and HP are registered trademarks of Hewlett–Packard Company.
UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T.

e Marconi Corporation plc. 2000 All rights reserved.

The information contained herein is the property of Marconi plc. and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part
may be reproduced, disclosed or used except as authorised by contract or other written permission. The copyright and
foregoing restriction on reproduction and use extend to all media in which the information may be embodied.

Marconi Communications Ltd., Marconi Communications SpA.,

New Century Park, 1A, via Negrone 16153,
PO Box 53, Coventry CV3 1HJ, England Genova, Cornigliano,
Telephone: +44 (0)24 7656 2000 Italy.
Fax:+44 (0)24 7656 7000 Telephone: +39–010–60021
Telex: 31361 MARCOV Fax: +39–010–6501897
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TITLE PAGE AND ENU STATEMENT

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 2) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

IEC (AFTER IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2:2001–01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

CDRH/ANSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IEC Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

IEC (BEFORE IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2:2001–01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Safe Working Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

OPTICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

HIGH VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Protective Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

TOXIC SUBSTANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Toxic Fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Weight 46
High Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sharp Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

USE OF NON–MARCONI EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

SERVICING POLICY AND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Marconi (Page 3) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

COMPATIBILITY WITH EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

READERS COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

SECTION 1:
PRODUCT OUTLINES AND OVERVIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

CHAPTER 1:
TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

1.1 TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

1.2 MANUAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

CHAPTER 2:
PRODUCT OUTLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

2.2 APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.2.1 POINT TO POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

2.3 SMA–1/4CP PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

2.3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.3.2 BASE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.3.3 EXPANSION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.3.4 POWER AND BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.3.5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2.4 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

2.5 APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2.6 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4 PRODUCT OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.6.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.6.2 TRAFFIC UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.6.3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

2.7 OPERATION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

2.7.2 Back–up and Restore, Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.8 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.8.1 Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.8.2 Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.8.3 Cross–connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.8.4 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Marconi (Page 4) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.8.5 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.8.6 Event/Performance Processing And Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

2.9 NT1 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

2.9.1 Network Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.9.2 Loopback From Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2.9.3 Loopback Towards Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2.10 PORT STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

CHAPTER 3:
PRODUCT OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.1.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.1.2 SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.1.3 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

3.2 UNIT AND SHELF LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

3.2.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3.2.2 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.2.3 SMA1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.2.4 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.2.5 Tributary Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2.6 Technical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2.7 Main Hardware Differences between SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) 95

3.3 CORE CARD FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3.4 COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3.4.1 SMA–1/4CP Software Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.2 SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) Software Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4.3 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3.5 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

3.6 SYNCHRONISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.6.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.6.2 SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.6.3 SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

3.7 POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

3.7.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.7.2 SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.7.3 SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

3.8 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3.9 EVENT MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Marconi (Page 5) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.9.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.9.2 SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.9.3 SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.10 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3.10.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.10.2 SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.11 COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.11.1 DCC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.11.2 Transparent Message Routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.11.3 Communications Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

3.12 INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

3.12.1 External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.12.2 Ancillary Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

SECTION 2:
PRODUCT FUNCTIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

CHAPTER 4:
MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.2 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4.3 VIRTUAL CONTAINERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.4 OVERHEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.5 POINTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.6 TRIBUTARY UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

4.7 ADMINISTRATIVE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.8 STM–N FRAME STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CHAPTER 5:
SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.2 CROSS–CONNECTION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

5.2.1 SDH STM–N to STM–N Port Cross–connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.2.2 STM–N Port to 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.2.3 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port to 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . . 119
5.2.4 STM–N Port to 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Marconi (Page 6) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.2.5 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port to 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . 119

5.2.6 STM–N Port to 140Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.2.7 140Mbit/s Trib Port to 140Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections . . . . . . . 120

5.3 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.3.1 Adding Cross Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.4 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4 (4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

5.4.1 Addition of Higher Order (VC–4) Cross–Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.4.2 Addition of Lower Order Cross–Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

CHAPTER 6:
SYNCHRONISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

6.2 SYNCHRONISATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.3 FREE–RUN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.4 SINGLE SETG TIMING SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

6.5 SINGLE SETG TIMING MODE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

6.5.1 Line Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.5.2 Tributary Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.5.3 External Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.5.4 SASE Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

6.6 SYNCHRONISATION SOURCE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.7 SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE BYTE (SSMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6.7.1 SSMB Mode Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.7.2 SSMB Mode Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.7.3 Holdover Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.7.4 Reversion Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6.8 EXTERNAL SYNC INPUTS AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6.9 PRIMARY RATE RE–TIMING BUFFERS FOR 2MBIT/S TRIBUTARY CARDS

131
6.9.1 Normal Timing (Re–timing Mode 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.9.2 Synchronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 2) . . . . . . 132
6.9.3 Plesiochronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 3) . . . . 133
6.9.4 Synchronous Channel Timing Buffer
(Re–timing Mode 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.9.5 Wander Buffer (Re–timing Mode 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.10 LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION/CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

6.11 APPLICATION TO SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6.11.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Marconi (Page 7) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.11.2 Timing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.11.3 Timing Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.11.4 Outputs Synchronised to a Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.11.5 X.21 Timing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.11.6 Internal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.11.7 Synchronisation Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.11.8 Synchronisation Configuration on Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.11.9 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

6.12 APPLICATION TO SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . 140

6.12.1 Timing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.12.2 Timing Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.12.3 Tributary Recovered Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.12.4 External Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.12.5 Nominated External Source Quality Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.12.6 Outputs Synchronised to a Timing Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.12.7 Internal Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.12.8 Synchronisation Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.12.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.12.10 Synchronisation Configuration on Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.12.11 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

CHAPTER 7:
PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

7.2 1+1 STM–N MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION (MSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

7.2.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.2.2 Automatic Protection Switching (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.2.3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.2.4 Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.2.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

7.3 CARD PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7.4 PSU PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7.5 SUMMARY OF PROTECTION STATE INITIATION CONDITIONS . . . . . . . 160

7.6 1:N TRIBUTARY CARD PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

7.6.1 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

7.7 34/45/140MBIT/S, 34M TRANSMUX, VC–AM, STM–1 TRIBUTARY CARDS .

162

7.8 1+1 PDH TRIBUTARY PORT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

7.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.8.2 Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Marconi (Page 8) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.8.3 Protection Switching Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

7.8.4 Protection Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

7.9 ILLUSTRATION OF SERIES 4 PROTECTION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

7.9.1 SMA–1/4c /uc 2M Tributary Card Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.9.2 SMA–1/4c /uc Higher Order Tributary Card Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.9.3 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 1.5/2M Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.9.4 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 1+1 Core Tributary Mode Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 170
7.9.5 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 34/45M, 34M Transmux, 140M, STM–1 and VCAM
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.9.6 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – ATM and ETA Tributary Card Protection . . . . . . . 173

CHAPTER 8:
COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

8.2 PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

8.3 IMPLEMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

8.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.3.2 End Systems, Intermediate Systems and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.3.3 Ethernet Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

8.4 COMMUNICATIONS ROUTEING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

8.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.4.2 Data Communications Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.4.3 LAPD Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.4.4 IS–IS Routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
8.4.5 Multiple Areas Working in IS–IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.4.6 Network Service Access Points (NSAPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.4.7 Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.4.8 Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.4.9 Manual Adjacency (MA) and Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP) . . . . 185
8.4.10 CLNS Ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

8.5 COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS USING THE AUXILIARY CARD . . 186

8.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.5.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.5.3 Auxiliary LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.5.4 By–pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.5.5 Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.5.6 A/B Line Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.5.7 Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.5.8 Auxiliary Card Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

8.6 SETTING UP SUB–NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Marconi (Page 9) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.7 COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS FOR SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

8.8 COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS OF THE COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD .

198
8.8.1 SMA–1/4c /uc and SMA1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

CHAPTER 9:
EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.2 PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

9.3 ALARM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

9.3.1 Alarm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.3.2 Event Recognition And Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.3.3 Fault Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.3.4 Persistency and Consequential Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.5 Inversion State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.3.6 Alarm Inhibit/Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

9.4 REPORTING AND DISPLAY FACILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.4.1 Event Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.2 Current Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.3 Historical Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.4 Active Source Alarms Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.4.5 Display and Action all Local Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

9.5 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

9.6 ALARM SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

9.6.1 TEP1E Alarm Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

9.7 BW7R ALARM SCHEME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

9.7.2 Subrack Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
9.7.3 Rack Alarm Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.7.4 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.7.5 Station Alarm Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

9.8 FAULT DICTIONARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

CHAPTER 10:
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.1.1 Data Accumulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.1.2 Performance Threshold Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.1.3 2Mbit/s Traffic Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
10.1.4 Synchronisation Threshold Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Marconi (Page 10) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.1.5 CSES Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

10.1.6 USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.1.7 DEG Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.1.8 Performance Data Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

10.2 TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

CHAPTER 11:
OPERATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

11.2 OPERATOR CONTROL FROM AN ELEMENT MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

11.3 OPERATOR CONTROL FROM AN LCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

11.4 SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

11.4.1 Element Manager Operator Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
11.4.2 Element Manager Operator Control of LCT Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
11.4.3 LCT Operator Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

CHAPTER 12:
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

12.1 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

12.1.1 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.1.2 Backing–up the SMA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.1.3 Restoring the SMA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.1.4 Software/Memory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

SECTION 3:
ADDITIONAL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

CHAPTER 13:
APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

13.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

CHAPTER 14:
ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

14.1 EXAMPLE APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

14.1.1 SMA–1(4+4) and SMA–1(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
14.1.2 SMA–4(4+4) and SMA–4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

14.2 NETWORK APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Marconi (Page 11) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

14.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

14.2.2 Gateway Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.2.3 Ring Master Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
14.2.4 Fibre Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
14.2.5 Terminal Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
14.2.6 Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
14.2.7 Cross Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

CHAPTER 15:
VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

15.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

15.1.1 Configuration(VC–AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
15.1.2 Comms Protection (VC–AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

15.2 I421 FUNCTIONALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

15.2.1 2M NT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

CHAPTER 16:
SINGLE FIBRE WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

16.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

16.2 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

16.2.1 Contra–Directional and Co–directional Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.2.2 Contra–Directional Single Fibre Working for 1310/1550nm system . . . 236
16.2.3 Co–Directional Single Fibre Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.2.4 Single Fibre Working for Red/Blue System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.2.5 Contra–Directional Single Fibre Woking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
16.2.6 Co–Directional Single Fibre Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

16.3 SINGLE FIBRE WORKING FILTER/COUPLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

16.3.1 1310/1550 nm Co/ Contra–Directional Filter/ Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
16.3.2 “Red/Blue” Contra–Directional Filters and Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
16.3.3 Red/Blue Co–Directional Filters and Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
16.3.4 Fibre handling for Single Fibre Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

16.4 AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

16.4.1 DUAL FIBRE WORKING WITH ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.4.2 Single Fibre Working with ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.4.3 ALS Using LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16.4.4 ALS Using Receipt Of Transmitted Section Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.4.5 ALS Using J0 Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
16.4.6 CONFIGURING ALS FOR SINGLE FIBRE WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
16.4.7 SETTING THE TRACE SECTION FOR ALS WITH SFW . . . . . . . . . . . 244
16.4.8 USING THE DUAL STM–1 OPTICAL CARD WITH SFW . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Marconi (Page 12) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

16.5 LINK SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

CHAPTER 17:
TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

17.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

17.2 TRUE TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

17.2.1 Pseudo TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
17.2.2 TCM Equipping Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

CHAPTER 18:
CELLSPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

18.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

18.1.1 Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
18.1.2 ATM Traffic Adapter Card (ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
18.1.3 ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
18.1.4 ATM Traffic Extender (ATX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

18.2 APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

18.2.1 ATM NTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
18.2.2 Consolidation of ATM Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
18.2.3 Point–to–multipoint and Trunk Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
18.2.4 ATM Traffic Adapter (ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

CHAPTER 19:
PACKETSPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

19.1 PACKETSPAN LINK PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

19.2 PACKETSPAN MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

19.3 APPLICATION TO SERIES 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

CHAPTER 20:
AUXILIARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

20.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

20.1.1 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
20.1.2 EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

20.2 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

20.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
20.2.2 Management of AUX on SMA1/4c /uc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
20.2.3 AUX/EOW OH Byte Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
20.2.4 AUX/EOW A/B Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
20.2.5 DCC AUX Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Marconi (Page 13) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

20.2.6 Management of AUX on SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

20.2.7 AUX A/B Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

CHAPTER 21:
EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION FOR SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

21.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

21.1.1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
21.1.2 Card variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

21.2 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

21.2.1 Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
21.2.2 Push–button Switch States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
21.2.3 Overhead Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
21.2.4 Ring Master/Slave Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
21.2.5 Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
21.2.6 Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
21.2.7 EOW Network Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
21.2.8 64 kbit/s Co–directional Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
21.2.9 Handset Loop Disconnect/DTMF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
21.2.10 Power–up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

21.3 2–WIRE EOW OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

21.3.1 Using the EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
21.3.2 Audible and Visible Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
21.3.3 Awaiting Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

21.4 4–WIRE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

21.4.1 EOW Network Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
21.4.2 Alternative EOW System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

SECTION 4:
SPECIFIC SHELF CONFIGURATION DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

CHAPTER 22:
SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4C,
SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

22.1 SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO SMA–1/4CP . . . . . 275

22.1.1 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
22.1.2 Physical Card and Slot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
22.1.3 Minimum Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
22.1.4 DCC Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
22.1.5 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Marconi (Page 14) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

22.1.6 ADDRESSING SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

22.2 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO SMA–1/4C,

SMA-1/4UC, SMA–1/4(4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
22.2.1 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
22.2.2 PHYSICAL CARD/SLOT ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
22.2.3 CARD TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
22.2.4 MINIMUM SUBRACK CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
22.2.5 DCC ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
22.2.6 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
22.2.7 ADDRESSING SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
22.2.8 Backplane slot addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

SECTION 5:
INSTALLATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

CHAPTER 23:
LINE TERMINATION UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

23.1 POPULATION OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

23.2 POWER LINE TERMINATION UNITS (LTUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

23.2.1 Triple Feed Power LTU – (1HAM60778ABH)
SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23.2.2 Dual Feed Power LTU (Italtel) 1HAM60779ABK
SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

23.3 LOCAL TERMINAL (LCT) LTU (1HAM60783 AAU) SMA–1/4(4+4) AND

SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

23.4 ANCILLARY LTUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

23.4.1 Core Ancillary LTU for SMA–1/4C, /UC 1HAM61038ABW . . . . . . . . . . 292
23.4.2 Core Ancillary LTU with Bw7R Alarm Scheme for SMA–1/4C, /UC. . . 293
23.4.3 Enhanced Ancillary LTU for SMA–1/4c, /uc 1HAM61039ABY. . . . . . . . 296
23.4.4 Bw7R Alarm LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60780AAN 297
23.4.5 TEP1E Alarm LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60781AAQ . .
299
23.4.6 TEP1E Alarms Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
23.4.7 User Alarms LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60782AAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
23.4.8 Q/B3Access Unit Interface (Comms AUI) LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and
SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60789 AAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
23.4.9 Auxiliary LTU (Low Bit Rate) 1HAM60786AAB
SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
23.4.10 9.6kbit/s Access (V0 and V0.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
23.4.11 64kbit/s Access (V0.1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
23.4.12 Aux 1 and Aux 3 connections for EOW Card Application . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Marconi (Page 15) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

23.4.13 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU – 1HAM60888AAM

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
23.4.14 Types of Cable Used for External Synchronisation Connections . . . . . 308
23.4.15 Synchronisation LTUs (1HAM60785 AAY/1HAM60784 AAW) . . . . . . . 309

23.5 TRAFFIC INTERFACE AREA LTU COMPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

23.5.1 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTUs (Core LTU) – SMA–1/4c, /uc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
23.5.2 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary LTUs
SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
23.5.3 34Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60796AAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
23.5.4 45Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60797AAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
23.5.5 140/155Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU
SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60798ABN . . . . 322
23.5.6 Link LTU – SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60839AAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
23.5.7 155Mbit/s Electrical LTU – 1HAM60865ACK
SMA–1/4c, /uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

23.6 VC–AM LTU – SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC, SMA–1/4(4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8) .. 324

23.6.1 Optical LTU (1HAM60840AAJ/AAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
23.6.2 Single Fibre Working Optical LTU (1HAM60892AEJ/ABG/ACY) . . . . . 326
23.6.3 VC–AM LTU Auxiliary Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
23.6.4 Electrical LTU (1HAM60854AAH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

23.7 LTU LINK/SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

23.7.1 Power LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
23.7.2 Local Terminal LTU 1HAM60783AAU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.3 Alarm LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.4 User Alarm LTU 1HAM60782AAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.5 AUI LTU 1HAM60789AAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.6 Auxiliary LTU 1HAM60786AAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.7 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.8 Sync Balanced LTU (1HAM60784AAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
23.7.9 Sync Unbalanced LTU (1HAM60785AAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
23.7.10 1.5 Mbit/s Balanced LTU (G703) – 1HAM 60623 AAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
23.7.11 1.5 Mbit/s Balanced LTU (G703) – 1HAM 60793AAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
23.7.12 2Mbit/s Balanced LTU (D Type) – 1HAM 60834AAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
23.7.13 2Mbit/s Un–balanced LTU (D Type) – 1HAM 60833AAA . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
23.7.14 34Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – 1HAM 60796AAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
23.7.15 45Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – 1HAM 60797AAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

23.8 POWER CONSUMPTION FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

23.9 RECOMMENDED CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Marconi (Page 16) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 24:
SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

24.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

24.1.1 Management Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

24.2 CARD COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

24.2.1 Hardware Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
24.2.2 Card Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
24.2.3 Installing the Cards into the Correct Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
24.2.4 Front Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
24.2.5 Power Consumption Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
24.2.6 Typical Power Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
24.2.7 Unit and Card Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

24.3 CARD LABEL POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

24.4 POWER SUPPLY UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

24.4.1 PSU Low Voltage Inhibit Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
24.4.2 Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
24.4.3 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

24.5 SYSTEM POWER–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

24.6 CORE CARD (1HAT60877AAR) AND COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD

(1HAT60876AAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

24.7 OPTICAL TRAFFIC CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

24.7.1 Optical Card Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
24.7.2 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
24.7.3 External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
24.7.4 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
24.7.5 Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

24.8 AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

24.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
24.8.2 ALS Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
24.8.3 ALS Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
24.8.4 ALS Enabled, Auto Laser Restart Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
24.8.5 STM–1 (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
24.8.6 Laser Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
24.8.7 Disabling ALS on Core Card (for SMA1/4(4+4)(8), SMA1/4c and /uc
. . . . 348
24.8.8 Disabling ALS on SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

24.9 TRAFFIC CARD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

24.9.1 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
24.9.2 1:N Protection (1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
24.9.3 34/45/140Mbit/s, Transmux,VC–AM, and STM–1 Tributary Cards . . . . 351

Marconi (Page 17) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

24.9.4 1:N Tributary Card protection (Not VC–AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

24.9.5 1:1 Tributary Card protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
24.9.6 Optical Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
24.9.7 Electrical Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
24.9.8 Quad STM–1 TCM Electrical Card (1HAT60914AAA) – SMA1/4c only 357
24.9.9 140Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60624BFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
24.9.10 45Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60623BAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
24.9.11 34Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60622BAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
24.9.12 34Mbit/s Transmux Card (1HAT60979AAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
24.9.13 VC–AM Card (1HAT60917AAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

24.10 OVERHEAD BUS ACCESS CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

24.10.1 Auxiliary Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
24.10.2 Version ‘0’ (1HAT60004ADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
24.10.3 Version ‘0.1’ (1HAT60647ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
24.10.4 Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
24.10.5 EOW Ring Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
24.10.6 EOW Fixed Ringmaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
24.10.7 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

24.11 TEST BUS/MONITOR POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

24.11.1 PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
24.11.2 34/45/140MBit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
24.11.3 Conventional STM–1 Optical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
24.11.4 Dual STM–1 Optical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
24.11.5 Conventional STM–1 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
24.11.6 Dual STM–1 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
24.11.7 2MBIT/S Testbus LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

24.12 RECOMMENDED CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

CHAPTER 25:
OPTICAL MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

25.1 HARDWARE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

25.1.1 SMA1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
25.1.2 SMA–1/4CP FITTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
25.1.3 SMA1/4c, /uc, SMA1/4(4+4) and SMA1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
25.1.4 PROCEDURE FOR FITTING OPTICAL MODULES TO CORE CARD
AND DUAL STM–1 OPTICAL CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

25.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

25.3 STM–1 OPTICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

25.4 STM–1 TRANSMIT WAVELENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

25.5 STM–4 OPTICAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Marconi (Page 18) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

25.6 STM–4 TRANSMIT WAVELENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

25.7 OPTICAL CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

25.8 STM–N OPTICAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

25.9 OPTICAL TRANSMIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

25.9.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
25.9.2 Laser Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

25.10 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

25.10.1 Inward Mux Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
25.10.2 Outward Line Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

25.11 DATA PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

25.12 POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.12.1 Input Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.13 RELIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.13.1 Service Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
25.13.2 Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.14 OPTICAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.15 HOT SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.16 ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

25.17 EQUIPMENT PRACTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

25.18 MODULE WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

CHAPTER 26:
LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

26.1 TRAFFIC CARD LINK/SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

26.2 CORE CARD (1HAT60877AAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

26.3 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

26.4 CONVENTIONAL CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

26.4.1 1.5/2Mbit/s (16x2) Tributary Card – 1HAT60736 AAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
26.4.2 1.5/2Mbit/s (32x2) Tributary Card – 1HAT60707 AAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
26.4.3 34Mbit/s Transmux Card – 1HAT60979AAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
26.4.4 34/45Mbit/s Tributary Cards – 1HAT60622BAN/
1HAT60623BAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
26.4.5 140Mbit/s Tributary Cards – (1HAT60624BFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
26.4.6 VC–AM Card – 1HAT60917AAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

26.5 POWER SUPPLY UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

26.5.1 Power Supply 1HAK60550 BAC/BCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Marconi (Page 19) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

26.5.2 Power Supply 1HAK60669 AAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

26.5.3 EOW Card DIL Switches and Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
26.5.4 Auxiliary Card (V ‘0’) 9.6kbit/s 1HAT60004 AAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
26.5.5 Auxiliary Card (V 0.1) 64kbit/s 1HAT60647 ABA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

26.6 ENGINEERS ORDER WIRE (EOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

26.7 TCM TRAFFIC CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

26.7.1 STM–1 Optical Mux Card (TCM) – (1HAT60791***) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
26.7.2 STM–1 Electrical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60803ABT)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
26.7.3 STM–1 Dual Electrical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60918AAJ)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
26.7.4 STM–1 Dual Optical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60878***)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
26.7.5 Optical Module (1HAT60874AAK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

26.8 SMA–1/4C AND /UC ENHANCED ANCILLARY LTU (1HAM61039ABY) . . . 390

26.9 SFW VARIANT LINK SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

26.9.1 STM–1 Variant Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
26.9.2 STM–4 Variant Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

26.10 SFW VARIANT LINK SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

26.10.1 STM–1 ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
26.10.2 STM–4 ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
26.10.3 34MBit/s and 45MBit/s Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

CHAPTER 27:
POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

27.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

27.1.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
27.1.2 PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
27.1.3 Signal Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
27.1.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
27.1.5 Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
27.1.6 Dual power feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
27.1.7 Installation requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
27.1.8 BATTERY BACK UP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

27.2 SMA–1/4C AND /UC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

27.2.1 Station 48V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
27.2.2 Mains Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
27.2.3 PSU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
27.2.4 Battery Backup Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
27.2.5 Power Module with Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
27.2.6 PSU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Marconi (Page 20) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

27.2.7 Battery Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

27.2.8 Battery/Mains Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
27.2.9 DC Input Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
27.2.10 Battery Low Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
27.2.11 Mains Input Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
27.2.12 Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
27.2.13 Shelf Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
27.2.14 Maximum Loading – Full Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
27.2.15 Maximum Loading – Protected CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
27.2.16 Dual Power Feeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

27.3 SMA–1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

27.3.1 Station 48V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
27.3.2 PSU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
27.3.3 Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
27.3.4 Shelf Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

CHAPTER 28:
INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

28.1 SMA–1/4CP BASE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

28.2 SMA–1/4CP INSTALLATION KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

28.3 SMA–1/4CP POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

28.4 SMA–1/4CP EXPANSION MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

28.5 SMA–1/4CP CORE INTERFACE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

28.6 SMA–1/4CP OPTICAL MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

28.7 SMA–1/4CP EXPANSION CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

28.8 BASE UNIT DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

28.8.1 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
28.8.2 Mechanical Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

28.9 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

28.10 FITTING THE BASE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

28.10.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
28.10.2 Protective Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
28.10.3 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
28.10.4 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
28.10.5 Wall Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
28.10.6 Direct Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
28.10.7 Fibre Management Tray Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
28.10.8 Wall Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Marconi (Page 21) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

28.10.9 SMA1/4CP MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

28.10.10 SMA1/4CP Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
28.10.11 SMA–1/4CP Fan Module (1HAM61048AAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

28.11 COMMS/CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

28.12 SWITCHING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

28.13 SMA–1/4CP SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

28.13.1 System Backup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
28.13.2 Local Terminal Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

28.14 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

28.14.1 Ethernet Network Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
28.14.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
28.14.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
28.14.4 10BaseT Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

CHAPTER 29:
INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C AND /UC SUB–RACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

29.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

29.1.1 Equipment Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

29.2 EQUIPMENT RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

29.2.1 Multiple Subrack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

29.3 SUB–RACK DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

29.3.1 Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
29.3.2 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

29.4 EXTERNAL SUB–RACK CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

29.4.1 Slide–In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
29.4.2 Ancillary LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
29.4.3 Power LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

29.5 SUB–RACK BASIC ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

29.5.1 Card–Cage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
29.5.2 Fibre Management Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

29.6 SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

29.6.1 SMA–1/4c and /uc Subrack (1HAG60557AAK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

29.7 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

29.7.1 Fitting the Sub–Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
29.7.2 Ancillary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
29.7.3 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

29.8 CARD CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Marconi (Page 22) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

29.9 PSU, COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD, CORE CARD SWITCHING AND

ROUTEING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
29.9.1 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
29.9.2 Comms/Controller Card (1HAT60876AAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
29.9.3 Core Card Switching and Routeing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

29.10 SMA–1/4C SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

29.10.1 SMA–1/4c Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
29.10.2 System Memory KOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
29.10.3 System Backup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
29.10.4 Local Terminal Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

29.11 EMC COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

29.12 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

29.12.1 Ethernet Network Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
29.12.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
29.12.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
29.12.4 10BaseT Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

CHAPTER 30:
INSTALLATION–SMA1/4(4+4) AND SMA1/4(8) SUBRACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

30.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

30.1.1 Equipment Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

30.2 EQUIPMENT RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

30.2.1 Multiple Subrack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

30.3 SUBRACK DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

30.3.1 Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
30.3.2 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

30.4 EXTERNAL SUB–RACK CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

30.4.1 Slide In Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
30.4.2 Ancillary LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
30.4.3 Power LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

30.5 SUB–RACK BASIC ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

30.5.1 Card–Cage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
30.5.2 Fibre Management Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

30.6 SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

30.6.1 SMA–1/4(4+4) Subrack (1HAG60596AAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
30.6.2 SMA–1/4(8) Subrack (1HAG60594AAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

30.7 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

30.7.1 Fitting the Sub–Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
30.7.2 Ancillary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Marconi (Page 23) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

30.7.3 Ancillary and Traffic Blanking LTU Facias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

30.7.4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

30.8 CARD CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

30.9 PSU, COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD, CORE CARD SWITCHING AND

ROUTEING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
30.9.1 Power Supply Unit (1HAK60669AAW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
30.9.2 Comms/Controller Card (1HAT60876AAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
30.9.3 Core Card Switching and Routeing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

30.10 SMA–1/4 (4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

30.10.1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
30.10.2 System Memory KOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
30.10.3 System Backup Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
30.10.4 Local Terminal Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

30.11 EMC COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

30.12 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

30.12.1 Ethernet Network Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
30.12.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
30.12.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
30.12.4 10BaseT Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

CHAPTER 31:
SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

31.1 STM–1 OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER, STM–4 OPTICAL INTERFACE CARD

SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

31.2 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

31.3 SMA–1/4CP STM–N UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

31.4 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) STM–N UPGRADE . . . . . 463

SECTION 6:
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

CHAPTER 32:
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.1 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.2 SAFE WORKING PRACTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES FOR OPTICAL CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.3.1 Optical Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Marconi (Page 24) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

32.3.2 Static Sensitive Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.4 TEST EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

32.5 PRELIMINARY SMA EQUIPMENT CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

32.5.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
32.5.2 Card/LTU Link and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

32.6 POWER SUPPLY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

32.6.1 Fuse Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
32.6.2 Power Connector Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

32.7 SHELF CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

32.8 SYSTEM POWER–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

32.9 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

32.10 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AT SMA NODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

32.11 NETWORK CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

32.11.1 Information Required from the Network Operating Authority . . . . . . . . . 472
32.11.2 Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

SECTION 7:
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

CHAPTER 33:
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

33.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

33.2 CLEANING PROCEDURES FOR OPTICAL CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . 477

33.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
33.2.2 Materials Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
33.2.3 Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
33.2.4 Cleaning of Optical Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
33.2.5 Cleaning of Optical Coupler – Where Practical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

GLOSSARY OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Marconi (Page 25) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TABLE OF CONTENTS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 26) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 2.1 SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 2.2 Rear View of 4 x 2 SMA–1/4CP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 2.3 Front View of SMA–1/4CP
with Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 2.4 Example Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 2.5 Point to Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 2.6 Expansion Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 2.7 SMA functional element applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 2.8 Example Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 2.9 Element Manager and Local Terminal (LCT) Connections . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 2.10 NT1 Function (only) in Transmission Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 2.11 NT1 and LT Functions in Transmission Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 3.1 Rear View of 4 x 2 SMA–1/4CP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 3.2 Core LTU variants for the SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 3.3 8 x 2M Expansion Module Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 3.4 16 x 2MExpansion Module Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 3.5 Front view of the SMA–1/4CP ADM enclosure with Expansion Module. 91
Figure 3.6 SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 3.7 Core LTUs– 32 x 2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 3.8 Variants of the ancillary panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 3.9 SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 3.10 SMA–1/4(4+4) Single Row LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 3.11 Core Card Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 3.12 SMA–1/4CP Software Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 3.13 SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) Software Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 3.14 SMA–1/4CP Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 3.15 SMA–1/4c Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 3.16 SMA–1/4 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 4.1 SMA Multiplexing Structure For STM–N Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 4.2 STM–N Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 5.1 STM–N VC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 5.2 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 2Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 5.3 VC Connectivity 1.5/2Mbit/s Port <–> 1.5/2Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 5.4 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 34/45Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 5.5 VC Connectivity 34/45Mbit/s Port <–> 34/45Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 5.6 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 140Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 5.7 VC Connectivity 140Mbit/s Port <–> 140Mbit/s Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 6.1 SMA–N synchronisation timing areas and timing signal source options.123
Figure 6.2 Freerun Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 6.3 Line Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 6.4 Tributary Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Marconi (Page 27) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 6.5 External Timing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Figure 6.6 Stand Alone Synchronisation Equipment Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 6.7 Synchronous Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 6.8 Plesiochronous Data On Synchronous Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 6.9 Wander Buffers On Synchronous Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 6.10 SMA–1/4CP Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 6.11 SMA–1/4c Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 6.12 Core Card and Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 7.1 SMA–n Protection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 7.2 1+1 STM–1 Line Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 7.3 SNC Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 7.4 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card 1:N protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 7.5 High–order Tributary Card 1:N protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 7.6 Tributary Port Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 7.7 2Mbit/s protected from the Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 7.8 2Mbit/s solution, protected or non–protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 7.9 Non 2M solution (34M/45M, 140M, STM–1, Cellspan, VCAM) protected and
non protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 7.10 1.5/2M Protection for SMA–1/4(4+4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 7.11 Fig A: Core Trib Mode Fig B: ‘Normal’ 1:N Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 7.12 SMA–1/4(8) – 34/45M, 140M, STM–1 and VCAM Protection . . . . . . . 172
Figure 7.13 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – ATM and ETA Tributary Card Protection . . . . . . . 173
Figure 8.1 Communications In SDH Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 8.2 Network Element Management Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 8.3 IS–IS Routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 8.4 IS–IS Area Partitioning for Hierarchical Element Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 8.5 NSAP Address Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 8.6 Auxiliary Card V0.1 DIL Switch Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 8.7 Auxiliary Card: System Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 8.8 Control and Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 8.9 Network Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 8.10 Example of DIL Switch Settings for the Configuration of Figure 8.9 . 195
Figure 8.11 Setting up Communications for a simple Sub–network . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 9.1 SMA–N Event Processing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 9.2 Alarm Event Type Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 11.1 Element Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 14.1 Add-Drop configuration (SMA-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 14.2 Add-Drop Multiplexer Configuration (SMA-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 14.3 Examples of Add-Drop Multiplexer applications in STM-N networks . 227
Figure 14.4 Terminal Multiplexer and Fibre Hub applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 14.5 Terminal Multiplexer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 14.6 Broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 14.7 Cross Connect Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Marconi (Page 28) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 15.1 VC-AMs Installed in an SMA Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Figure 15.2 Typical VCTS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 15.3 VC–TM Protection in IS–IS Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 16.1 Single Fibre Operation (Contra–Directional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 16.2 1310/1550nm Single Fibre Operation (Contra–Directional) . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 16.3 1310/1550 Single Fibre Co–directional Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 16.4 (Red/Blue) Single Fibre Contra–Directional operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 16.5 (Red/Blue) Single Fibre Co–directional Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 16.6 WD1315U–GPT1 COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 16.7 WD1515RB–GPT1 COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 16.8 WD1515RR–GPT1 COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 16.9 Fibre Tray with 1310/1550nm Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 16.10 ALS Dual Fibre Working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 16.11 ALS Single Fibre Working Reflection of Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 16.12 ALS Single Fibre Working with Section Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 17.1 Example of Operator Domain Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 17.2 Relationship between Logical and Physical TC Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 18.1 ATA Location and Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Figure 18.2 ATA/ATC Differentiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 18.3 Position of the CellSpan Units in an SDH Access Network . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 18.4 Consolidation (‘Hubbing’) ATA Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 18.5 CellSpan – Point to Point Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 18.6 ATA Gives Access Efficiency when Carrying ATM in the SDH Network255
Figure 20.1 AUX Switching on SMA–1/4c Ancillary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 20.2 AUX Switching on the SMA–1/4 AUX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Figure 21.1 Selective and Omnibus Buzzer Cadences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 21.2 Supervisory Tone Cadences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 22.1 SMA–1/4CP Line Termination representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Figure 23.1 Triple Feed Power LTU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 23.2 Dual–feed Power LTU (Italtel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 23.3 Local Terminal LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 23.4 SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 23.5 SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU supporting Bw7R alarm scheme . . . . . 294
Figure 23.6 SMA–1/4c Enhanced Ancillary LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 23.7 Bw7R Alarm LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 23.8 TEP1E Alarm LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 23.9 User Alarm LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 23.10 User Alarm Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 23.11 AUI LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 23.12 Generic Auxiliary LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 23.13 2Mbit/s Test LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 23.14 Un–Balanced Sync LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 23.15 Balanced Sync LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Marconi (Page 29) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 23.16 Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU (SMA–1/4c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Figure 23.17 Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU (SMA–1/4c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Figure 23.18 SMA1/4c – 32 x 2M Unbalanced LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Figure 23.19 1.5Mbit/s Balanced LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 23.20 Un–Balanced 2Mbit/s LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 23.21 2Mbit/s Balanced LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 23.22 34Mbit/s Tributary
Unbalanced LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 23.23 45Mbit/s Un–Balanced LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 23.24 140Mbit/s/STM–1 LTU
and Link LTU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 23.25 34Mbit/s VC–AM LTU Traffic Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 23.26 VC–AM Electrical LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 24.1 PSU Front Panel LED Indications and Monitor Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 24.2 Power Supply Unit View Showing Location of Switch SW1 . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 24.3 Power Supply Unit View Showing Location of Switch SW2 . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 24.4 External fibre–optic connectors (FC/PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 24.5 Procedure for Disabling ALS on Series 4 Core Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 24.6 Procedure for Disabling ALS on SMA–1/4CP and use of other pins . 350
Figure 24.7 Dual STM–1 Optical Card Core Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 24.8 Quad STM–1 Optical Card (SMA–1/4c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 24.9 Electrical STM–1 and
140Mbit/s Tributary Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 24.10 Dual STM–1 Electrical Trib Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 24.11 Quad STM–1 Electrical Card (SMA–1/4c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 24.12 34/45Mbit/s Tributary
34Mbit/s Transmux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 24.13 VC–AM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 24.14 On–card Connectors for 64kbit/s Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 25.1 SMA–1/4CP Optical Module Fitting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Figure 25.2 Procedure for Fitting Optical Modules
to Core Card and Dual STM–1 Optical Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Figure 25.3 Optical Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 26.1 EOW Card Switches and Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Figure 26.2 Example of DIL Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Figure 27.1 SMA–1/4CP Powered from External Mains Brick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 27.2 Battery Box Utilised with Mains Brick to Support Battery Back–up . . 394
Figure 27.3 Power Module to Support Battery Back–Up with ATX/16x2M Expansion
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 27.4 SMA–1/4CP Power Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 27.5 Battery Box Connection to SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 27.6 Power Module Connection to SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 27.7 SMA–1/4c with Station Supplying –48V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Figure 27.8 SMA–1/4c with Single External Mains PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Figure 27.9 SMA–1/4c with Dual External Mains PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Marconi (Page 30) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 27.10 External PSU for SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Figure 27.11 SMA–1/4c with External Mains PSU and Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . 404
Figure 27.12 Mains Power Module with Battery Backup for SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . 405
Figure 27.13 Battery/Mains Monitoring on SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Figure 27.14 SMA–1/4 with Station Supplying –48V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Figure 28.1 SMA–1/4CP Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 28.2 Front View of SMA–1/4CP
with Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 28.3 8 x 2M Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 28.4 16 x 2M Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Figure 28.5 Rear View of 4 x 2 SMA–1/4CP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Figure 28.6 Core LTU variants for the SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 28.7 16 x 2M Unbalanced Base Unit (1HAN60511AAH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Figure 28.8 Mounting the SMA1/4CP directly to a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Figure 28.9 Mounting Arrangement on Fibre Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Figure 28.10 SMA1/4CP Wall Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Figure 28.11 Mounting Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Figure 28.12 SMA1/4CP Rack Mounting Kit of Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Figure 28.13 SMA–1/4CP Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Figure 28.14 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Figure 28.15 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Figure 28.16 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub . . . . . . . . . . 431
Figure 29.1 SMA–1/4c Sub–Rack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Figure 29.2 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Figure 29.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Figure 29.4 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub . . . . . . . . . . 444
Figure 30.1 SMA–1/4(4+4) Sub–Rack Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Figure 30.2 SMA–1/4(8) Sub–Rack Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Figure 30.3 PSU and Comms/Controller Card Front Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Figure 30.4 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Figure 30.5 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Figure 30.6 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub . . . . . . . . . . 460
Figure 31.1 Process for Performing Line Module Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Figure 31.2 STM–N Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Figure 32.1 PSU Front Panel LED Indications and Monitor Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Marconi (Page 31) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF FIGURES

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 32) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF TABLES

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1: Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Table 2.1: Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 3.1: Tributary Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 3.2: Main Differences Between SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 3.3: Series 4 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 3.4: SFW Optical Budget Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 3.5: Electrical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 5.1: Addition of Higher Order Cross–Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 5.2: Addition of Lower Order Cross–Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 6.1: Default Quality Levels and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 6.2: On/Off Thresholds for System PLL Out–of–Limits and System Holdover . . . . 147
Table 7.1: Series 4 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 7.2: MSP Protection State Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Table 7.3: VC Protection Demand State Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 7.4: Summary of Protection State Initiation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 7.5: SMA Protected PDH Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Table 7.6: Priority of Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Table 8.1: Communications Routeing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Table 8.2: IS–IS Element Routeing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Table 8.3: Aux Channel Access Routes (V0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table 8.4: Aux Channel Access Routes V0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Table 8.5: DCC Accessing Configuration for SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 9.1: LED Location Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Table 9.2: SMA–1/4CP Alarms – Relay 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 9.3: SMA–1/4CP Alarms – Relay 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table 18.1: ATA and ATC Interface Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Table 20.1: SOH Byte Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table 21.1: EOW Card Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Table 21.2: EOW Ring Slave/Ring Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Table 22.1: SMA–1/4CP Base Unit Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 22.2: SMA–1/4CP Expansion Unit Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 22.3: SMA–1/4CP Physical Card and Slot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Table 22.4: SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4), SMA–1/4(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Table 22.5: SMA–1/4(8) Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Table 22.6: SMA–1/4 (4+4) Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Table 22.7: SMA–1/4(8) and SMA–1/4(4+4) Ancillary LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table 22.8: SMA–1/4c Shelf Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Table 22.9: SMA–1/4c Ancillary LTUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Table 22.10: Permissible Card/Slot Allocations for SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) . . . . 281
Table 22.11: Permissible Card/Slot Allocations for SMA–1/4c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Marconi (Page 33) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF TABLES

Table 22.12: SMA–1/4 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Table 22.13: Backplane Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Table 23.1: LTU Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Table 23.2: LCT LTU Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Table 23.3: SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (Except PWR) . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 23.4: SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (PWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 23.5: SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (Except PWR) . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 23.6: Bw7R Alarm Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Table 23.7: SMA–1/4c Connector Pinouts (PWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 23.8: SMA–1/4c Enhanced Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Table 23.9: BW7R Alarm Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 23.10: TEP1E Alarm Cabling Connector Pin Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Table 23.11: User Alarm Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Table 23.12: AUI Port Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Table 23.13: Aux LTU Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Table 23.14: 9.6 kbit/s LTU Access (V0 Card Fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Table 23.15: 9.6 kbit/s LTU Access (V0.1 Card Fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Table 23.16: Aux LTU Connector Pinouts For EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Table 23.17: Test Bus LTU Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 23.18: External Sync (Balanced) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Table 23.19: Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Table 23.20: Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Table 23.21: 1.5Mbit/s Balanced Traffic LTU Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Table 23.22: 2Mbit/s Balanced Traffic LTU Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Table 23.23: SK3 9–Way RJ45 Type Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 23.24: TEP1E & BW7R Alarm LTU Factory Link settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table 23.25: Termination Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 23.26: Termination Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 23.27: LTU Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Table 24.1: Slide–in Card Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Table 24.2: Typical Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 24.3: Unit and Card Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Table 24.4: Summary of Switch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table 24.5: Channel / VCTS Line Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Table 24.6: 64kbit/s Access Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Table 25.1: STM–1 Dual Fibre Working Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Table 25.2: STM–1 Single Fibre Working Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP
370
Table 25.3: STM–4 Dual Fibre Working Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Table 25.4: STM–4 Single Fibre Working Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP
370
Table 25.5: STM–1 Dual Fibre Working Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
372

Marconi (Page 34) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF TABLES

Table 25.6: STM–1 Single Fibre Working Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c and
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Table 25.7: STM–4 Dual Fibre Working Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
372
Table 25.8: STM–4 Single Fibre Working Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c and
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Table 25.9: Operating Wavelengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Table 25.10: Operating Wavelengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Table 26.1: Core Card Link Settings (Jumper Block PL5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Table 26.2: Core Card Link Settings (Jumper Block PL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Table 26.3: SMA–1/4CP Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 26.4: 16 x 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 26.5: 32 x 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary card link settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 26.6: 34Mbit/s Transmux card link settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Table 26.7: 34M/45bit/s Tributary card link settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Table 26.8: 140Mbit/s Tributary card link settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Table 26.9: VC–AM Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table 26.10: Power Supply Unit/s Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table 26.11: Power Supply Unit/s Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table 26.12: 9.6kbit/s Auxiliary Card (Version 0.0) Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 26.13: Auxiliary Card (Version 0.1) Channel Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Table 26.14: DIL Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Table 26.15: STM–1 (TCM) Optical Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table 26.16: STM–1 (TCM) Electrical Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Table 26.17: STM–1 (TCM) Dual Electrical Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Table 26.18: STM–1 (TCM) Dual Optical Card Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Table 26.19: Optical Module Link Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table 26.20: SMA1/4c Enhanced Ancillary LTU Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table 26.21: SFW Default Link Settings (STM–1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Table 26.22: SFW Default Link Settings (STM–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 26.23: Link Settings to Enable/Disable ALS for STM–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 26.24: Link Settings to Enable/Disable ALS for STM–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Table 27.1: Indicative Battery Back–Up Times for Battery Back–Up Solution + Mains Brick .
400
Table 27.2: Indicative Battery Back–up Times for Power Module Solution with Internal Mains
PSU (75W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Table 28.1: SMA–1/4CP Base Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table 28.2: SMA–1/4CP Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Table 28.3: SMA–1/4CP Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Table 28.4: SMA–1/4CP Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Table 28.5: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Table 29.1: SMA–1/4c Subrack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Table 29.2: SMA–1/4c Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Table 29.3: EMC Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Table 29.4: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Marconi (Page 35) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF TABLES

Table 30.1: Ancillary and Traffic Blanking LTU Facias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Table 30.2: SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) Subrack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Table 30.3: SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Table 30.4: EMC Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Table 30.5: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Table 32.1: Voltage Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Marconi (Page 36) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

SAFETY INFORMATION

This document contains safety notices in accordance with British and European
standards. In the interests of conformity with the TCIF standards for North America
the equivalent TCIF admonishments are also shown.

Any installation, adjustment, maintenance and repair of the apparatus must only be
carried out by trained, authorised personnel. At all times, personnel must comply
with associated safety notices and instructions.

Specific hazards are indicated by symbol labels on or near the affected parts of the
equipment. The labels conform to BS5378, are triangular in shape, and are coloured
black on a yellow background. An informative text label may also accompany the
symbol label.

Hazard labelling is supplemented by safety notices in the appropriate handbook.

These notices contain additional information on the nature of the hazard and may
also specify precautions. The notices are categorised as either Warnings or
Cautions/Alerts and are presented in the format shown below.

Note: In order to comply with safety standards EN60950, UL1950 and IEC 950, the
equipment shall be professionally installed in a restricted access location.

! WARNING

These draw the attention of personnel to hazards which may cause death or injury to
the operator or others. Examples of use are cases of high voltage, laser emission,
toxic substances, point of high temperature, etc.

! ALERT/CAUTION

These draw the attention of personnel to hazards which may cause damage to the
equipment. An example of use is the case of static electricity hazard.

Caution notices may also be used in the handbook to draw attention to matters that
do not constitute a risk of causing damage to the equipment but where there is a
possibility of seriously impairing its performance, e.g. by mishandling or gross
maladjustment.

The following pages contain safety notices and illustrations of typical labels pertinent
to equipment covered by this handbook. Warnings and Cautions within the main text
do not incorporate labels and may be in shortened form.

]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]

Marconi (Page 37) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! WARNING

IEC (AFTER IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2:2001–01)

Optical Safety
Equipment Labels

Hazard Level 1

SOLID STATE LASER

HAZARD LEVEL 1 MAX POWER: XX mw cw
LASER PRODUCT WAVELENGTH: XXXX nm

IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2 2001–1

Hazard Level 1M

LASER RADIATION SOLID STATE LASER

DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH MAX POWER: XXX mw cw
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS (MAGNIFIERS) WAVELENGTH: XXXX nm
HAZARD LEVEL 1M LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2 2001–1

Optical Safety Hazards

There are optical source devices used in Marconi equipment which have been
classified by their manufacturers under BS EN 60825–1: 1994 as Class 3B laser
products, and so can potentially emit invisible optical radiation up to Class 3B.

However, control circuitry is used to limit the power available from the devices such
that the radiation actually accessible to the user, meets the Hazard Level 1 or
Hazard Level 1M classification as derived from IEC 60825–1 Amendment 2:
2001–01, and IEC 76/224/ISH.

No attempt should be made to adjust or tamper with the laser or its control circuitry
as this may result in the Class 1 or Class 1M accessible emission limits being
exceeded. High output power latch circuits are provided to ensure the that the output
power cannot exceed its specified operating limits. In the event of a fault occurring,
these circuits remove power from the laser drive circuitry.

External Connection

Connection to other than proprietary Marconi equipment may result in optical output
power levels in excess of Class 1 or Class 1M limits thereby exceeding
Hazard Level 1 or Hazard Level 1M. For appropriate laser safety information, refer
to the associated equipment handbook.

Marconi (Page 38) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

CDRH/ANSI

IEC Conformity

Guidance on Laser Products– Conformance with IEC 60825–1Am. 2 and IEC

60601–2–22 (Laser Notice No. 50) dated May 27 2001, states that CDRH accepts
conformance with the comparable sections of IEC 60825–1, as amended by
Amendment 2 of January 2001 in lieu of conformance with the following sections of
21 CFR §1040:

• 1040.10(c)(1)
Classification

• 1040.10(d)
Accessible emission limits

• 1040.10(g)
Labelling requirements

IEC (BEFORE IEC 60825–1 AMENDMENT 2:2001–01)

Class 1 Optical Safety Equipment Labels

CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT

Optical Safety Hazards

Optical Source Devices (Semi–conductor Lasers) are contained within this unit.
Laser drive, power monitoring, and control circuitry are used to limit the power
available from such devices; and the design and setting–up of the equipment
ensures that the product meets Class 1 limits.

No attempt should be made to adjust or tamper with the laser or it’s control
circuitry as this may result in the class 1 accessible emission limits being
exceeded. High output power latch circuits are provided to ensure the that the
output power cannot exceed it’s specified operating limits. In the event of a fault
occurring, these circuits remove power from the laser drive circuitry.

The optical source devices which are used in Marconi SDH equipment have been
classified by their manufacturers, under Laser Radiation Safety Standards IEC
60825–1 (Bs En 60825–1: 1994) And Iec 60825–2 (Bs En 60825–2: 1995), as
Class 3B laser products, and so potentially can emit invisible optical radiation in
excess of the inherently safe Class 1 limits defined by these standards.

Connection to other than proprietary Marconi equipment may result in optical

output power levels in excess of Class 1 or Class 3A. For appropriate laser safety
information, refer to the associated equipment handbook.

Marconi (Page 39) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! WARNING

Class 3A Optical Safety Equipment Labels

CLASS 3A Laser Product

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
Do not stare into beam or view
directly with optical instruments

Optical Safety Hazards

Optical source devices (semi–conductor lasers) are contained within this unit.
Laser drive, power monitoring, and control circuitry are used to limit the power
available from the devices; and the design and setting–up of the equipment
ensures that the product meets the Class 1 or Class 3A limits.

Note: Class 1 applies provided ALS is active and access to the fibre is not permitted within
one second of the fibre break. If the user chooses to disable ALS, the system will meet Class
3A.

No attempt should be made to adjust or tamper with the laser or it’s control
circuitry as this may result in the Class 1 emission limits being exceeded. The ALS
mechanism provided limits the emission duration of the transmitted output power
in the event of a fibre breakage to a maximum of 4.6 seconds at Class 1 output
power and a maximum of 1.1 seconds at Class 3A output power. High output
power latch circuits are provided to ensure the that the output power cannot
exceed it’s specified operating limits. In the event of a fault occurring, these
circuits remove power from the laser drive circuitry.

The optical source devices which are used in Marconi SDH equipment have been
classified by their manufacturers, under Laser Radiation Safety Standards
IEC 60825–1 (BS EN 60825–1: 1994) and IEC 60825–2 (BS EN 60825–2: 1995),
as Class 3B laser products, and so potentially can emit invisible optical radiation in
excess of the inherently safe Class 1 limits defined by these standards.

Marconi (Page 40) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Safe Working Practices

When working on optical equipment, in addition to complying with the provisions of

any safety notices displayed on the equipment or highlighted in this manual, the
working practices outlined below must be adopted. Personnel must not be allowed to
work on the equipment unless they have received adequate instruction in the
techniques involved and the relevant safety precautions.

Note: In order to comply with safety requirements EN60950, the equipment must be
professionally installed in a restricted access location. A protective earth connection should
be made.

• Before making or breaking an optical connection ensure that the power to the
optical source is off.

• Always ensure that the optical source is off (confirm by using an optical power
meter) before viewing or inspecting any optical port, fibre, or optical connector.

• Handle optical fibre carefully as broken fibre can be very sharp. Keep exposed
fibre ends away from the eye.

• Never use a magnifying glass (eg. watch-makers eyeglass) as an aid to

viewing any part of an optical system, fibre, or optical connector. If it is required
to inspect a terminated fibre end an approved microscope should be used.

• Use only approved methods and materials for cleaning optical connectors.

Measurements

When making optical measurements involving the use of a test lead ensure that:

• The connection to the optical source is the last to be made and the first to be
broken.

• The optical measurement path is closed before re–applying power to the optical
source.

• Do not apply power to optical source cards when they are not fitted in the
sub–rack.

• Do not connect an optical output to line unless the distant end is safely
terminated.

House Keeping

Maintain good ‘housekeeping’ practices. In particular:

• Pieces of glass fibre (e.g. off–cuts, etc.), however small, must be collected and
properly disposed of in a suitable container.

• When working above another PMA or SMA sub–rack, care must be taken not to
drop small items, particularly metal items such as screws. The mesh of the
screen at the top of a sub–rack is large enough to allow very small objects
through.

Marconi (Page 41) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

OPTICAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

As a minimum, the following precautions should be observed.

• DO NOT POINT AN UNTERMINATED OR BROKEN OPTICAL FIBRE END

OR UN–MATED CONNECTOR TOWARDS THE EYE.

• NEVER VIEW AN UN–TERMINATED OR BROKEN OPTICAL FIBRE END OR

UN–MATED CONNECTOR, EITHER DIRECTLY OR BY REFLECTION,
PARTICULARLY WITH A MICROSCOPE, unless the optical power source
HAS BEEN TURNED OFF.

• UNDER CERTAIN FAULT CONDITIONS, WHEN OPERATING UNDER

AUTOMATIC LASER SHUT–DOWN (ALS), IT IS POSSIBLE FOR THE
LASER TO RESTART AUTOMATICALLY FOR A TEST PERIOD. TESTING
FOR OUTPUT POWER IS THEREFORE NOT A GUARANTEE OF LASER
SAFETY.

• HANDLE OPTICAL FIBRE CAREFULLY AS BROKEN FIBRE CAN BE VERY

SHARP AND CAN CAUSE EYE OR SKIN INJURY.

• The user must never use unfiltered optical aids to inspect optical interfaces of
Hazard Level 1M or higher. This includes any cases where local terminal or
network management commands such as ’Laser Off’ or ’Disable Auto Restart’
have been issued. The user must not make the assumption that issuing such a
command, or commands, means that the associated interfaces can safely be
inspected with unfiltered aids. Failure to follow this advice could result in a
serious eye injury.

Marconi (Page 42) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

Voltages over 42.4v peak AC (60v DC) existing in a circuit which does not meet the
requirements for either a Limited Current Circuit or a TNV circuit, are categorised
within safety standards BS EN 60950; 1992, UL1950 and IEC 950 as hazardous and
can under certain circumstances, be lethal. Operators and maintenance personnel
are warned to take all precautions against electric shock.

The risk of electric shock can be minimised by following the precautions in the local
health and safety regulations, as well as those given in British Standards BS415,
BS5378 AND BS6204.

This equipment may contain voltages in excess of the levels classified as hazardous
in British Standards. The equipment should not be operated with the protective
guards on the equipment cards removed. The warning label below identifies the
cards carrying such voltages.

Protective Earthing

!
Before any external cables are connected, the equipment shelf–frame must be
connected to protective earth via the shelf support metalwork. The frame must
remain connected to protective earth until all external cables are removed.

Note: Units should not be removed/detached until all associated cables are disconnected.

Á
Á DANGER
! Á
HAZARDOUS
VOLTAGES PRESENT

Marconi (Page 43) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! WARNING

TOXIC SUBSTANCES

Beryllium Copper

The EMC spring fingers used within the cards and shelf may contain Beryllium
Copper. This material can, if not properly handled, constitute a serious hazard to
health. Under no circumstances should these items be exposed to fire, broken or
abraded.

Scrap items must be placed in a container which is clearly labelled:

‘DANGER : BERYLLIUM/BERYLLIUM OXIDE IN THIS CONTAINER’

Subsequent Action Must Be In Accordance With The Appropriate National

Regulations For Disposal Of Hazardous Toxic Waste Materials.

Lithium Batteries

Lithium becomes a fire and corrosion hazard if exposed to air and water. The
electrolyte in this battery is highly flammable. If Exposed to fire or extreme heat,
the battery may give off toxic fumes. In These conditions, safety equipment
including breathing apparatus should be used in accordance with the appropriate
national safety instructions.

Battery Disposal

The substances contained within the battery are hazardous to health. Precautions
taken when disposing of batteries must be in accordance with the appropriate
national regulations for disposal of hazardous toxic waste materials. If necessary the
item can be returned to Marconi plc for safe disposal.

Marconi (Page 44) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

Toxic Fumes

Certain items within this equipment contain material which, if exposed to fire or
extreme heat, may give off toxic fumes. Breathing apparatus should be worn in
these conditions.

Marconi (Page 45) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! WARNING

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

!
Weight

A fully equipped sub–rack may exceed 10kg in weight. It is therefore recommended

that shelves are fitted/removed from the equipment rack with the cards removed
from the shelf.

High Temperature

!
Even in normal use, the heat sinks on certain units/components can get extremely
hot. Such units should be handled so as to avoid contact with the heat sink.

Sharp Edges

!
Optical fibre should be handled carefully as broken fibre may be extremely sharp and
can cause eye or skin injury.
EMC fingers are constructed from stainless steel and are very thin. They should be
handled with care as damaged EMC Fingers may cause cuts or abrasions.

Marconi (Page 46) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

! ALERT/CAUTION

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES

This equipment may contain devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Where

such is the case the equipment carries a warning label, precautions applicable to the
handling of such equipment must be taken. British standard BS5783 Gives guidance
in the handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.

Personnel working on the equipment must wear a static protection wrist strap which
is connected to the rack framework Earth Protection Point.

]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]

Marconi (Page 47) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SAFETY NOTICES AND ADMONISHMENTS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 48) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

The following Typographical Conventions are used throughout this

document:

• Press <Return>to exit.

Text within chevrons indicates a physical key that must be pressed to perform an
associated action.

• [Network Element Details]

The full title of a screen (Window or Bulletin Board) is shown within squared
brackets. The text is displayed in Italic/Bold font.

• [Cross–connection Details]

The full title of a screen drop–down menu option is shown within squared brackets.
The text is displayed in Italic font.

• Non Revertive

The full title of a screen field (Window or Bulletin Board) is shown displayed in
Italic font.

• Apply

Text displayed in Italic/Bold font indicates a screen button (Window or Bulletin

Board) that must be clicked to perform an action, or a configuration menu option,
or a slider/popup menu/stepper that can be selected to populate a screen field.

• Are you sure ? Y/N

Text displayed in standard courier font (above) denotes a screen message, or a

system query, that may require a response.

• 123456

Text displayed in a Bold font indicates a screen field entry that must be input
exactly as printed.

• Listed information (having no hierarchical order) is ranged to a bullet.

• Enter 123456.

Each operator action is presented as a bullet entry (shown above), or when

sequential operations are mandatory, the operation actions must be shown as a
numbered step (shown below).

1. Select the XYZ field.

2. Enter 123456.

Marconi (Page 49) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

Note: This does not always apply

Text displayed in Italic font preceded by this symbol indicates additional

information, or an aid which may apply to some users only.

Note: All data entered may be lost

Text displayed in Italic/Bold font preceded by this symbol indicates a caution which
must be noted and acted upon before proceeding.

Marconi (Page 50) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
USE OF NON–MARCONI EQUIPMENT

USE OF NON–MARCONI EQUIPMENT

Before use, customers must ensure that any non–Marconi equipment is correctly
installed and configured as defined in that manufacturer’s handbook.

Users must also observe all information provided by the manufacturer relating to
the safe operation of the equipment and to any equipment directly or indirectly
connected to it.

Marconi (Page 51) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
USE OF NON–MARCONI EQUIPMENT

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 52) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SERVICING POLICYAND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

SERVICING POLICY AND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

The repair of individual units and cards of this equipment is not considered
practicable without factory facilities. It is, therefore, the policy of Marconi plc. to
offer a service whereby faulty units or cards are returned to the company for
repair. To enable an efficient, prompt after sales service to be provided for the
diagnosis, repair and return of any faulty equipment, please comply with the
following requirements.

Items to be sent for repair should be packaged so as to provide both electrostatic

and physical protection and a Repair Service Request (as shown on previous
pages) completed giving the following information:

• As much detail as possible concerning the nature of the fault and any
contributary factors.

• Type of system and equipment in which the item is installed, together with time
in service if known.

• If under warranty, the contract number under which supplied.

• The address to which the item should be returned when repaired.

This request must be included with the item for repair.

Subject to operating authority policy (see NOTE below), items for repair should be
sent to the following address:

Marconi plc,
Customer Repair Department,
New Horizon Park,
Waterman Road,
Off Red Lane,
COVENTRY,
CV6 5TT
United Kingdom

Note: Some customers have established their own Repair Centres for the receipt of faulty
items from a designated area. Under such circumstances, staff should comply with local
instructions, but it would be helpful if the information requested above is supplied with the
returned item.

Marconi (Page 53) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 Section 2. Service Request
Issue: 05

TRANSMISSION PRODUCTS a. Fault Description

Marconi
REPAIR SERVICE REQUEST Repair Modification
1PHA60071AAY

Advance Replacement i. Current Level

Section 1. Reported Faults
a. Verification ii. Required Level
Manufacturers

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page

Item Code b. Address for Repair
Customers Marconi Communications Limited
Item Code
Product Support Centre
Item Description New Horizon Park
Waterman Road
Serial Number Build COVENTRY
Level CV6 5TT
ENGLAND

c. Bill To: Return Address

b. Fault Description
COVENTRY EXCHANGE
COVENTRY ROAD
COVENTRY
Post Code Post Code CV1 2EX

(Page 54)
BELOW FOR Marconi plc USE ONLY
c. Fault Type
Y N ELEC * MECH * d.
Defective on Receipt R98765
(* as appropriate) Serial Number
Commissioning Failure
Contract Number 621232
Intermittent Time to Fail IMMEDIATE

Customers Purchase Order No.

d. Site Details Customer Fault Reference No. 432/5/084

Site Name e.
COVENTRY EXCHANGE Date Received 2 June 1995
Site Contact Date
Joe Smith 10:15
Time Received
Telephone Number FAX Number
01203–123455 01203–123456
User MANUAL
SERVICING POLICYAND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

Return to Contents
 TRANSMISSION PRODUCTS
Issue: 05

REPAIR SERVICE REQUEST

Marconi
1PHA60071AAY

EXPLANATORY NOTES

Section 1. Reported Faults

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page

a. Site Name. The site where the fault occurred.
Manufacturers Item Code. The code assigned by the manufacturer
e.g. 1HAK60558.
Site Contact. The engineer on site who can be contacted should further fault
information be required.
Customers Item Code.The code assigned by the customer.
Date. The date of the fault.
Item Description. The designation of the item, e.g. Subs Card, 10 channel
Telephone Number and Fax Number (if available). Contact numbers of the
Serial Number. The unique serial number of the item. engineer on site.
Build Level. The modification level of the unit, usually found near the part
number and prefixed with either BSC or ENU.
Section 2. Service Request.
b. Fault Description.
a. Service Required.
A summary of the fault symptoms including, where relevent, usage of the card,
switch settings, LED indications, etc. at the time of failure.

(Page 55)
Repair. Standard repair and return of the item.
c. Fault Type
Defective on Receipt.This gives an indication of whether the item was faulty Advance Replacement.Replacement of the item prior to its repair and return
(if contracted).
on receipt e.g. would not power up or connection broken. If YES , then the
appropriate ELEC for electrical type or MECH for mechanical defects should
be indicated.. Verification. To confirm the status of the item if it is not certain the item is faulty.
This gives an indication of whether the item failed
Commissioning Failure. Modification. Whether the item requires upgrading (e.g. possibly by means of
number and prefixed with either BSC or ENU.during commissioning or whilst a recall notice). If so, complete the boxes ‘Current Level’ and ‘Required Level’
in service and carrying traffic of modification.
Intermittent Fault. This gives an indication of whether the fault is permanent
or periodic. Address for Repair.The address to which the faulty item is to be returned.
Time to Fail. This is the time taken for the fault to occur e.g. 10minutes,
1 hour, etc. c.
d. Site Details Bill to: The address to which the bill for repair should be sent, if appropriate.
Customer Fault Reference.The unique refernce number given to the fault Return Address.The address to which the repaired item, or advance
by the customer. replacement, is to be sent
User MANUAL
SERVICING POLICYAND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

Product Support Centre Reference:PSC/RSR0962 Issue 02 (June 1995)

Return to Contents
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SERVICING POLICYAND RETURN OF EQUIPMENT

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 56) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
COMPATIBILITY WITH EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

COMPATIBILITY WITH EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

PRODUCT 1ADR60693AAB SMA Series 4

The equipment meets the following European Directives:

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (EN55022 class B radiated emission limit)
TTE Directive 91/263/EEC (CTR–12 approved).

A list of the cards making up these products will be found later in this manual.

Marconi (Page 57) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
COMPATIBILITY WITH EUROPEAN DIRECTIVES

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 58) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
READERS COMMENTS

READERS COMMENTS

Whilst every endeavour is made to ensure the accuracy of this and all Marconi
Communications documents, there is always the possibility that an inaccuracy or
omission could occur.

In order that any amendment/remedial action can be carried out promptly, we

would appreciate your co–operation in filling out and returning a photocopy of this
customer reply sheet as soon as possible.

Customer Information :

Name: Title:

Company: Date:

Address:

Town:
County:
Telephone
Post Code: number:

Customer Comments:
Handbook Title:
1PHA60071AAY
Issue Number: Issue: 05

Page No: Para No: Line No: Fig No:

Details of
inaccuracies:

Other comments: Level of detail

etc.

Marconi (Page 59) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
READERS COMMENTS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 60) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
PRODUCT OUTLINES AND OVERVIEWS

SECTION 1:
PRODUCT OUTLINES AND OVERVIEWS

CHAPTER 1 . . . . . . TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 63

CHAPTER 2 . . . . . PRODUCT OUTLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 67

CHAPTER 3 . . . . . . PRODUCT OVERVIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 87

Marconi (Page 61) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
PRODUCT OUTLINES AND OVERVIEWS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 62) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 1: TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE

CHAPTER 1:
TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE

1.1 TERMINOLOGY

There are five main products in the SMA Series 4 range. These are referred to in
this manual as follows:

• SMA–1/4CP
• SMA–1/4c
• SMA–1/4(4+4)
• SMA–1/4(8)

The SMA–1/4CP is customer premises equipment. Note that the CP suffix is

always in capitals.

The SMA–1/4c has a small c suffix. This is a compact version of the larger
shelf–based products.

The SMA–1/4(4+4) is a midsize shelf which has a single row of LTUs.

The SMA–1/4(8) is the full size shelf with two rows of LTUs.

Note: Where reference to both SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) is required, this is done by
reference to either SMA–1/4 or SMA–1/4(4+4)(8).

The SMA Series 4 product range is primarily for use in street cabinets and
customer premises applications. The range complements the current STM–1 and
STM–4 products in the SMA and MSH families – for example, SMA–1, SMA–4,
SMA–4c, MSH11C, MCH11CP and MSH41C.

1.2 MANUAL STRUCTURE

The structure of the manual is as set out in the following table:

Table 1.1: Manual Structure

Section Section Purpose Chapters
Product Outline and Overview To explain terminology and man-
ual structure, and provide brief
product outlines. To give an over-
view and introduction to all of the
Series 4 products.
Terminology and Manual Structure
Product Outline
Product Overview

Marconi (Page 63) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 1: TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE

Table 1.1:(Cont)Manual Structure

Section Section Purpose Chapters
Product Description To explain Series 4 generic
subjects as per chapter headings.
Product differences are indicated
in the chapters.
Multiplexing Structure
SMA–N Cross Connections
Synchronisation
Protection
Communications
Events
Performance
Operator Control
Software Download
Additional Features This section explains particular
additional subjects, usually in gen-
eric terms.
Applications
Add–Drop Multiplexer
VCAM
Single Fibre Working
Tandem Connection Monitoring
Cellspan
Packetspan
Auxiliary
Engineer Order Wire
System Management This is a separate section covering Specific Shelf Configuration
shelf configuration features spe- Features
cific to different Series 4 products.
This section should be read in
conjunction with the separate
installation chapters (see below).
Installation Information To provide information on installa-
tion for all the Series 4 products as
per chapter headings. Note that
there are three separate installa-
tion chapters for SMA–1/4CP,
SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc,
SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8).
Line Termination Units
Slide–In Card Units
Optical Modules
Link and Switch Configuration
Power Supply Options
Installation – SMA1/4CP
Installation SMA1/4c and /uc
Installation – SMA1/4(4+4) and
SMA1/4(8)
SMA Upgrade Information

Marconi (Page 64) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 1: TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE

Table 1.1:(Cont)Manual Structure

Section Section Purpose Chapters
Commissioning To provide basic commissioning Commissioning Procedure
information.
Maintenance To provide basic maintenance in- General Maintenance Information
formation.

Marconi (Page 65) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 1: TERMINOLOGY AND MANUAL STRUCTURE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 66) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

CHAPTER 2:
PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.1 SMA–1/4CP

The Series 4 SMA–1CP and SMA–4CP are full feature ADMs, optimised for both
SDH ring and terminal applications. They are primarily solutions for customer
premises.

SMA–1CP and SMA–4CP build on the SMA, SDH Extender and MSH products.
They complement these products which are already deployed extensively in SDH
Access networks – in street cabinets, local exchanges and directly on customer
premises. SMA–1CP and SMA–4CP are designed to be deployed in networks with
these existing products, in mixed rings and subtended from existing multiplexers.

SMA–1/4CP supports the full range of conventional traffic interfaces, from 2Mbit/s
to STM–1 and STM–4, and also IP and ATM interfaces. SMA–1/4CP can be
managed centrally by a Marconi network management system or by a local
terminal.

Figure 2.1 SMA–1/4CP

Marconi (Page 67) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

SMA1/4CP Rear View

Earth
Stud
220mm

PWR2 SYNC AUX2 USER I/O2

LSR TEST
W E Pwr1
Pwr2 Cust Core interface area 53mm
2s 2s
Pwr
90s 90s
Alarm PWR1 AUX1 Test
LCT USER I/O1
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Line West Line East

Optical Module Area

438mm

Figure 2.2 Rear View of 4 x 2 SMA–1/4CP.

The compact nature of SMA–1/4CP makes it ideal for applications where space is
at a premium. The main features of SMA–1/4CP are as follows:

• SDH add/drop multiplexer with full, non–blocking cross–connection capability.

• Compatible with Marconi range of synchronous multiplexers.
• Two Line interfaces supporting ring and protected terminal applications.
• Supports SNCP and 1+1 MSP traffic protection.
• STM–1 (155Mbit/s) and STM–4 (622Mbit/s) aggregate options.
• Full configuration, fault and performance management features.
• Traffic ports:
— 2Mbit/s, 34Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s, STM–1
— Ethernet 10 BASE–T,
— ATM 34Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s, STM–1
— Expandable in service
— X.21 traffic interface option for 2Mbit/s unstructured and N x 64kbit/s leased
lines.
— Support of I.421 for primary rate ISDN
— TCM for termination of inter–operator paths.

Marconi (Page 68) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

‘Front View’

ALARM
CUST

TEST
Expansion Module

Customer ADM – Base Unit

CUST
POWER
TEST

ALARM
Figure 2.3 Front View of SMA–1/4CP
with Expansion Module

2.2 APPLICATIONS

SMA–1/4CP is designed to be deployed extensively, as Network Termination

Equipment (NTE), on customer premises. Applications include campus rings and
multi–tenanted buildings. It is designed to be deployed either as a terminal, in
hubbing architectures, or as a ring–based ADM. Traffic protection may be
employed for both these applications, either 1+1 Multiplex Section Protection
(MSP) or Sub Network Connection Protection (SNCP).

SMA–1/4CP can also be deployed within the access network, particularly in street
side cabinets. Example applications include mass telephony where the product
would be deployed alongside primary multiplexers, delivering narrowband services
to residential customers. The product can also be deployed in mobile radio
networks for the collection of traffic from radio base stations.

Marconi (Page 69) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

SDH Core Network

Conventional ADM (e.g. SMA)

STM–1 or STM–4 links

SMA1CP / SMA4CP
SDH Ring
(STM–1 or STM–4)

ExpansionModule SMA1CP / SMA4CP

SMA1CP / SMA4CP Dual Parenting Configuration

(shown in terminal application)
Terminal Configuration
(showing optionalprotected feed)

Ring Based ADM Configuration

(shown deployed with other types ofelements)

Figure 2.4 Example Network Configurations

2.2.1 POINT TO POINT

Although primarily intended as a solution for integration within an SDH network,

SMA–1/4CP can also be used for point to point systems. This configuration,
managed via the LCT, can be used to support up to 16 x 2 Mbit/s for services such
as 2Mbit/s leased lines and direct connection to PBXs. SMA–1/4CP can also be
used in point to point applications for delivering data and higher bandwidth
services (when deployed with an expansion module).

Marconi (Page 70) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

n x 2Mbit/s n x 2Mbit/s

Local Craft Termi nal

Figure 2.5 Point to Point Operation

2.3 SMA–1/4CP PRODUCT OUTLINE

2.3.1 GENERAL

SMA–1/4CP is designed for use in customer premises and can be wall, desk or
rack mounted. It consists of a Base Unit, which supports the multiplexer
functionality and delivers a range of traffic interfaces, and an optional Expansion
Module, which provides additional traffic interfaces.

Expansion Modules may be equipped during product installation, or as a later

upgrade to provide additional services. Upgrade is easily accomplished by simply
fitting on the expansion module, and this does not affect traffic.

Marconi (Page 71) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

Expansion Unit

Base Unit Expanded Solution

Figure 2.6 Expansion Solution

2.3.2 BASE UNITS

There are a number of variants of base unit as shown below:

4 x 2Mbit/s with X.21

16 x 2Mbit/s balanced
16 x 2Mbit/s unbalanced

Each is provided with one or two SDH aggregate interfaces and may be deployed
in both STM–1 and STM–4 ring or terminal applications. As an ADM the base unit
provides full VC cross–connect capability. A range of aggregate interface options
are supported, for both dual fibre and single fibre working (SFW) operation.

2.3.3 EXPANSION MODULES

Expansion modules are similar in style to the base ADM unit. The two units are
simply fitted together to create the new configuration. Power and optical line
interface and management functions are supported from the base unit, making the
upgrade process straightforward.

A range of expansion modules are supported by SMA–1/4CP including those

detailed in the following table:

Table 2.1: Expansion Modules

34Mbit/s 45Mbit/s STM–1 Op-
tical
Bit Rate 34.368 44.763 155.52
(kbit/s)
Inter- 3 3 1
faces
Classi- ITU–T G.703 ITU–T G.703 Intra–office
fication multimode

Marconi (Page 72) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

Interface BNC 75 ohm BNC 75 ohm

Type unbalanced unbalanced
Note 1: The 8 x 2Mbit/s module delivers 8 off, 2Mbit/s
ports. Each port is presented with a balanced (RJ45),
unbalanced (G.703 (BNC) and an X.21 interface (D–
type) in accordance with ITU–T G.703, ETS 300–2 ITU–
T X.21 for 2Mbit/s unstructured and nx64kbit/s leased
lines

Note: In addition to the TDM modules indicated in the above table, ATM and IP expansion
modules will be supported by CellSpan and PacketSpan. These products deliver a range of data
interfaces (such as ATM, UNI and Ethernet) and provide solutions for optimised transport of
cells (ATM) and packets (IP) across the SDH network.

2.3.4 POWER AND BATTERIES

The base units are equipped with duplicated power connectors for supply from a
nominal –48v feed. Battery back up is supported by an external module. Mains
working is supported via an in line mains PSU or in conjunction with a battery back
up module.

2.3.5 NETWORK MANAGEMENT

Management of SMA–1/4CP is via a Marconi element management system and/or

the local craft terminal. Network management information is carried over a DCC
channel contained in the SDH Section Overhead. The SOH also provides an
auxiliary channel for the transport of network management information for
co–located equipment – whether Marconi or other equipment.

The equipment management operations system uses Marconi’s standard

workstation terminal for providing management and control of the element.
Software download can be achieved from the LCT or from the element managers.

2.4 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4

Note: In the rest of this chapter, the term SMA–1/4 is used to refer to SMA–1/4(4+4) and
SMA–1/4(8) in general terms.

The Series 4 SMA range consists of a number of products providing optimum

solutions for the complete range of SDH access and outer core applications. The
products are identified as follows:

• SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc
• SMA–1/4

These products share common core modules and tributary units but differ with
respect to the number of tributary interfaces which may be supported and
aggregate interface type. SMA–1/4 may be equipped with up to eight tributary
units, whilst SMA–1/4c and /uc may be equipped with up to four tributary positions.

Marconi (Page 73) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 can be configured as a terminal , add/drop, hubbing

multiplexer or small cross–connect. They support flexible mapping/multiplexing
structures for different VC payloads and unrestricted traffic access at VC–12
granularity.

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 have compact subracks which provide flexible tributary
slots – these accommodate a comprehensive range of interchangeable tributary
units which provide PDH and SDH traffic access with both optical and electrical
interface options. The tributary slots may also be equipped with a range of ATM
and IP units from Marconi CellSpan and PacketSpan products. These deliver data
interfaces on customer premises and provide solutions for flexible, efficient and
cost effective transport of mixed traffic (TDM, ATM and IP) over an SDH
infrastructure. The traffic consolidation functions also minimise the number of
expensive traffic ports required on an operator’s ATM switches and IP routers.

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 deliver a higher number of tributary interfaces within a
given envelope than Series 3 SMA products. The compact nature of SMA–1/4c, /uc
and SMA–1/4 make them ideal for applications where space is limited. They can
be managed by a central network management system or by a local terminal.

The main features of SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 are as follows:

• Compatible with Marconi range of synchronous multiplexers.

• Full, non blocking, VC cross–connect capability with unrestricted access and full
connectivity at VC–12 granularity.
• STM–1 (155 Mbit/s) and STM–4 (622Mbit/s) aggregate options.
• Can be upgraded in service from STM–1 to STM–4.
• Remote management and control by Network and Element managers.
• Equipment protection including automatic 1:N card protection for tributary units.
• Traffic protection including Sub–Network Connection Protection (SNCP) and
Multiplex Section Protection (MSP).
• Wide range of tributary units including SDH, PDH, IP and ATM. Examples are
as follows:
— STM–1 interfaces
— SDH Extender interfaces
— 1.5, 2,34,45,140 Mbit/s PDH interfaces
— CellSpan range of ATM(cell) tributary units
— PacketSpan range of IP (packet) tributary units
• Tributary units compatible with Series 3 SMA multiplexers.
• High density tributary capability with up to eight dedicated tributary slots and two
ADM core slots with further interface capability. Examples of equipping
densities are as follows:
— 252 off 2Mbit/s G.703 interfaces
— 32 off SubSTM–1 interfaces (SDH Extender), or
— 20 off full capacity STM–1 interfaces
• Support of I.421 for primary rate ISDN.

Marconi (Page 74) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

• Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) for enhanced fault detection and

monitoring of performance across different network operator’s boundaries.
• Compact single row subrack design.

2.5 APPLICATIONS

The flexibility of SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 allows them to support the whole range
of network applications:

• Terminal Multiplexer: SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 provide 1+1 protected optical
line systems, for point to point operation or as a spur for remote traffic delivery.
• Add/Drop Multiplexer: SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 may be deployed in rings,
chains and meshed networks to provide grooming, consolidation and protection
of traffic.
• Hubbing Multiplexer: SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 (in particular) provides
consolidation and grooming of incoming traffic.
• Cross–Connect: When fully equipped with STM–1 interfaces SMA–1/4c, /uc and
SMA–1/4 form a 4/1 cross–connect.

These network applications are illustrated in Figure 2.7.

Marconi (Page 75) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER
ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER

Optional Dual feed

or 1+1
STM -N STM -N LINE WEST
1+1 1+1

Tributaries
Tributaries

STM -1

STM -N STM -N HUB CONFIGURATIONS

SDH Tributaries SDH Tributaries

PORT CROSS–CONNECT

Cross Connect at VC1, 3, 4, 12

Figure 2.7 SMA functional element applications

SMA–1/4 in particular can be deployed as a hubbing multiplexer (consolidation

unit) at operator nodes within the access network. For this application SMA–1/4
terminates transmission links (for example sub STM–1 and STM–1) from Network
Termination Equipment. It supports NTEs in both conventional star architecture or
as subtended SDH rings. Incoming traffic , consisting of a mix of TDM, cells and
packets, is groomed and consolidated prior to connection to:

• collocated service platforms (for example, PSTN switch or Broadband platform),

or
• the core transport network, or
• other hubbing multiplexers (either collocated or remote)

Marconi (Page 76) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

SMA1/4c and SMA1/4uc in particular can be deployed on customer premises

either as a terminal or as a ring based ADM. It complements SDH Extender and
SMA1/4CP as an NTE, principally for applications demanding card protection and/or
the delivery of high numbers of interfaces. For these NTE applications, SMA–1/4c
and SMA-1/4uc supports therequired physical interfaces to deliver the full range of
data services (including ATM, UNI and Ethernet).

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 can also be used for other applications within the access
network, typically within street side cabinets. Example applications include:

• Mass telephony where the product is deployed alongside primary multiplexers

to deliver PSTN services to residential customers.
• Access rings for collection and consolidation of mobile traffic from base stations.
• Access rings for the delivery of premium services to business customers.

The high hubbing capability and compact design are attributes which offer
significant advantages in conventional core applications, for example outer core
segments in rural areas.

SDH Core Network

Hubbing Configuration SDHConnection(s)to transport network
(showing example connections)

Connections to other platform(s)

(e.g. PSTN and Broadband switches)

Series 4SMA
STM–1 or
STM–1 or STM–4 links
subSTM–1 links

Subtended
SDH Access Rings

Series 4 SMA
Other SDH terminal equipment
(e.g. SDH Extender II) Other SDH equipment
Terminal Configuration
(e.g. SMA1CP)
(shown dual parented)
Remote Terminal
(shown optionally protected) Ring Based ADM Configurations
(shown deployed with other types of ADM)

Figure 2.8 Example Network Configurations

Marconi (Page 77) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.6 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4 PRODUCT OUTLINE

2.6.1 GENERAL

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 are designed for use in operators’ telecommunications
centres and in customer premises. The key unit within SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 is
the ADM unit. This provides a full functionality non blocking switch at VC–12
granularity, two SDH aggregate interfaces, a mapping function supporting
thirty–two 2Mbit/s ports, and the Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator
(SETG). Each ADM unit can be equipped with two aggregate interfaces at either
STM–1 (155Mbit/s) or STM–4 (622Mbit/s). A range of dual fibre options and Single
Fibre Working (SFW) options are supported.

Two ADM units can be equipped to provide 1+1 card protection of the core
functions. This capability also increases the delivery of SDH interfaces (in hubbing
and cross–connect applications) and supports four port operation (for stacked rings
and chain applications).

A central unit provides a complete micro based management system. This

supports the Synchronous Equipment Management Functions (SEMF), the
Management Communications Functions (MCF) and Communications functions.
The Communications function provides DCC processing to support remote
management of SDH elements and a Q Ethernet interface for local management
access in gateway applications. The unit also provides an F interface for local
terminal access.

2.6.2 TRAFFIC UNITS

A range of traffic units provide flexible, customised, equipping with access for PDH
rates of 1.5, 2, 34, 45 and 140Mbit/s and SDH rates of STM–1 and STM–4.

Special tributary units include:

• SubSTM–1 VC Access Module (SDH Extender).

• Integrated ATM/TDM transmission over SDH (CellSpan).
• Integrated IP/TDM transmission over SDH (PacketSpan).

CellSpan is an integrated solution for the efficient transportation of ATM and TDM
traffic over SDH networks. It enables network operators to link end users to ATM
switches located at the boundary of the core network in a manner which
consolidates traffic. It also has point to point and point to multipoint applications.

Two main elements of CellSpan are supported: ATM Traffic Adapter (ATA) cards
and ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC) cards. In the traffic consolidation application, the
ATA extends monitoring of ATM service down to the customer premises, providing
the 34Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s or 155Mbit/s ATM User Network Interface (UNI). The ATC
provides the ATM connection to the public ATM switch, and supports multiple ATAs
and the consolidation of ATM traffic. This consolidation function can significantly
reduce the required number of interface ports on the ATM switch platform. In the
point to point application, pairs of ATAs can be used. ATCs can also provide
customer located ATM UNIs when deployed to enable point to multipoint ATM
connections over SDH.

Marconi (Page 78) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

PacketSpan provides similar capabilities to CellSpan but is a solution for packet

based (IP) service. PacketSpan Link products provide point to point and point to
multipoint features based on integrated Ethernet delivery. PacketSpan Ring
products offer traffic consolidation and concentration. PacketSpan thus provides a
range of units for the efficient transport of packets and the delivery of IP services.

PacketSpan and CellSpan are complementary – both are deployed in networks

delivering mixed traffic consisting of TDM, ATM and IP.

2.6.3 NETWORK MANAGEMENT

Management of Series 4 equipment is via a Marconi element management system

and/or the local craft terminal. The equipment management operations system
uses Marconi’s standard workstation terminal for providing management and
control of the element. Software download can be achieved from the LCT or from
the element managers.

2.7 OPERATION AND CONTROL

2.7.1 Element Manager and Local Terminal (LCT)

Operator monitoring, control, commissioning and fault diagnosis is provided from

either a remotely located Element Management Operations System, or at any
element of a network by a Local Terminal (LCT) (IBM compatible PC) connected
via an RS232 interface (see Figure 2.9). The Element Manager and the Local
Terminal (LCT) have some similar and some unique functionalities.

Marconi (Page 79) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

ethernet/async

Element Manager Workstation Line

printer

gateway
Local Terminal
(LCT)
SMA-4

SMA-n STM–4 (622Mbit/s ring) SMA-n SMA-1

STM–1
(155Mbit/s) PDH
SMA-4c
Local Terminal (LCT) SMA-1

SMA-1 PDH

Figure 2.9 Element Manager and Local Terminal (LCT) Connections

The Element Manager can only be connected to a gateway multiplexer

configuration. A Local Terminal (LCT) can be connected to any configuration.

The Element Manager is a ‘workstation’ terminal connected via a CCITT ‘Q’

interface port, to a network element designated as a ‘gateway’ element. It
interfaces to other elements via the communications channels embedded within
the STM connections terminating on the element, and provides network
management facilities for the whole network.

The LCT is an IBM compatible PC that is connected, when required, either directly
to, or remotely from, the SMA–N network element to be controlled or monitored,
i.e. Single Ended Maintenance (SEM).

The PC is loaded with software necessary to perform the complete range of control
and monitoring functions. A password protected operator access system ensures
that the SMA database is not accessed by unauthorised users. In addition, LCT
access is restricted during normal system operation, i.e. when an Element
Manager is connected.

LCT software is menu driven. The basic provision is for keyboard operation but an
optional ‘mouse’ can be used for all functions.

Marconi (Page 80) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.7.2 Back–up and Restore, Software Download

The Back–up and Restore facility allows the functionality of the SMA to be
configured by downloading synchronisation, alarm, and performance parameter
default data from a floppy disk. The downloading is performed during
commissioning. Any subsequent minor alterations that may be required are made
by an operator using the LCT.

Once an SMA has been commissioned and configured, then part or the whole of
its firmware can be saved to file (Backed up). The configuration details can then be
restored to the network element at a later date (Restore).

Software Download is a facility that allows new versions of the operating software
to be downloaded from the LCT or Element Manager. See the chapter on Software
Download for further information.

2.8 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES

The functional features of operational significance are outlined under the following
sub–headings and described more fully in subsequent chapters.

2.8.1 Multiplexing Structure

The multiplexing structure of the STM signal defines the way the various lower
order bit–rate signals are combined, together with supervisory data and pointers, to
form the STM frame.

2.8.2 Synchronisation

Timing signals are required to provide synchronisation for internal

cross–connection functionality and STM output timing. These signals can be
provided from external sources, via a variety of interfaces. The signals are used to
phase–lock the SMA’s internal generators. The selection of external sources is
determined by the operator.

In the event of failure of any external timing signal, the SMA has the ability to ‘free
run’.

2.8.3 Cross–connections

Cross–connections (traffic paths), routed through the Switch Unit can be created
between: Line <–> Line, Line <–> Tributary and Tributary <–> Tributary.

2.8.4 Protection

Traffic can be lost if a card, port or bearer fails, therefore protection measures can
be incorporated (typically by duplication of the card, port or bearer) to reduce this
risk.

Marconi (Page 81) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.8.5 Communications

Communication channels are provided between:–

• The Element Manager (for use by an Operator) and the Gateway Multiplexer,
via an Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).
• The Gateway Multiplexer and the other SMA–N elements of the network, via
Data Communication Channel (DCC) bytes in the STM–1 frame.

The communications protocol between SMA–N Network Elements (NE) and

between the SMA Gateway Multiplexer and Element Manager is based on the
Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) seven–layer model. However, only the first four
layers of the OSI model are implemented for the SMA series. Each layer performs
a specific function and interfaces only with those layers directly adjacent to it.

Communications routeing can either be ‘Intermediate System – Intermediate

System’ (IS–IS) or ‘Default/Interim’. Either form of routeing gives every element in
a network the ability to route to any other element in the network and will
automatically provide an alternative route should the preferred route become
unavailable.

2.8.6 Event/Performance Processing And Reporting

2.8.6.1 Conventional

Event processing and reporting involves the capture, verification, classification,

logging, reporting and indications of change in the status of a Network Element
(NE). This involves the detection of changes in state of the configuration of an NE
(connectivity, alarm attributes, equipping levels, protection paths etc.) or a new
state of the set of fault monitors (changes) within an NE or the performance limits
being exceeded.

2.8.6.2 Tandem Connection Non–intrusive Performance Monitoring

(Pseudo TCM).

Tandem connection non–intrusive performance monitoring consists of enhanced

performance reporting from the existing VC path overhead monitor function.
Enhanced VC alarm reporting is also provided.

Tandem connection non–intrusive performance monitoring allows network

managers to monitor the quality of the VC through their equipment. Network
manager correlation is required to ascertain the change in performance between
the monitor points.

2.8.6.3 Tandem Connection Sub–layer Performance Monitoring (Full

TCM)

Tandem connection sub–layer performance monitoring allows the operator to

create another source of OH information where the VC enters their domain and to
terminate it where the trail leaves their domain. This allows network managers to
monitor the quality of the VC through their equipment.

Marconi (Page 82) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.9 NT1 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

2.9.1 Network Applications

NT1 functionality is normally offered at the 2Mbit/s VC–TM interface at the
customer end of an Access link whereas the LT function would optionally be
available at the Exchange end of the link, normally connected via a 2Mbit/s
tributary card. However, it is possible to enable either the NT1 function, the LT
function, or neither on any 2Mbit/s interface which supports I.421 functionality.
When neither function is enabled the corresponding 2Mbit/s signal is transparent in
both directions.

Figure 2.10 shows an application with the NT1 function supported by a VC–TM
card or 2Mbit/s tributary card at the customer end but without an LT function at the
exchange end.

Note: This option would always be used when the 2Mbit/s Tributary Card at the Exchange
end does not support I421.

In Figure 2.11 the NT1 function is supported by a VC–TM card card or 2Mbit/s
tributary card at the customer end, and the LT function supported by a 2Mbit/s
tributary card at the exchange (ET) end of the Digital Access Section.

When either of NT1 or LT functions are enabled, support of SSM (synchronisation)

detection and insertion is not possible.

Primary Rate Digital Access Section

Customer
VC–TM SMA SMA Exchange
(TE) STM–N
2Mbit/s VCTS 2Mbit/s
NT1 (ET)

SDH Transmission Path

’T’ ’V3’
Interface Interface

Customer
(TE) SMA SMA Exchange
2Mbit/s STM–N 2Mbit/s
NT1
(ET)

SDH Transmission Path

Figure 2.10 NT1 Function (only) in Transmission Network

Figure 2.11 gives a graphical representation of the direction, causes and

consequences of NT1 and LT maintenance when both functions are enabled.

Marconi (Page 83) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

Primary Rate Digital Access Section

Customer
(TE) VC–TM SMA
2Mbit/s SMA 2Mbit/s Exchange
NT1 STM–N
LT
VCTS (ET)

SDH Transmission Path

’T’ ’V3’
Interface Interface

Customer
(TE) SMA
2Mbit/s STM–N 2Mbit/s
SMA NT1 LT Exchange
(ET)

SDH Transmission Path

Figure 2.11 NT1 and LT Functions in Transmission Network

2.9.2 Loopback From Exchange

2.9.2.1 Transparent Bypass

The following components of the 2Mbit/s signal are passed through NT1
transparently:

• TS1–TS31 Traffic
• M–channel (Sa4)
• Maintenance Commands (Sa5, Sa6)
• Unused TS0 (Sa7, Sa8)
• RAI (‘A’ bit in TS0)

An exception to this is when AIS is injected onto the ‘T’ interface.

2.9.2.2 Loopback Control

A sequence of eight consecutive codewords of loop command are required before

applying a loopback. Eight consecutive codewords of loopback release command,
or eight codewords which do not contain the loopback command, or detection of
LFA will cause the loopback to be removed.

This loopback will not stop the traffic received from the Exchange from being sent
to the ‘T’ interface. The signal sent to the ‘T’ interface is processed in the same
manner as if the loopback was not present, with the exception of the ‘E’ bits which
are fixed to ONE, regardless of the number of CRC errors detected at the ‘T’
interface.

Marconi (Page 84) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

2.9.3 Loopback Towards Exchange

2.9.3.1 Transparent Bypass

The following components of the 2Mbit/s signal shall be passed through NT1
transparently:

TS1–TS31 Traffic

M–channel (Sa4)

Unused TS0 (Sa7, Sa8)

2.10 PORT STATUS

The status of ports on the SMA equipment is as follows, (refer to European Safety
Standard EN 60950 for full definitions of SELV and TNV conditions).

It is a requirement of European Safety Standard EN 60950 (2.10.1) that SELV

ports are connected to SELV ports, and TNV ports to TNV ports.

Ports which have been classed as ‘TNV–1 (operating within SELV limits)’ can be
connected to either TNV–1 or SELV ports, but the circuitry supporting the port must
meet TNV insulation requirements and operate at SELV voltages (below 60 V DC
or 42.4 V peak). It is an accepted designation which allows the interconnection of
SELV with TNV ports, and also covers environmental conditions where transient
voltages above SELV limits may be imposed on the connecting cable (lightning
surges etc).

2.10.1 SELV (Safe Extra–Low Voltage) ( < 60 V DC or 42.4 V peak)

• Local Terminal (LCT) Interface port.
• BW7R Alarm input and output ports.
• Alarms/Comms ports.
• External Timing input and output ports (Synch).
• 2 Mbit/s test bus port.
• PSU Monitor points.
• Auxiliary ports.
• SDH and PDH 35/45/140 Mbit/s Tributary Monitoring Ports.

2.10.1.1 TNV–3 (Telecommunications Network Voltage, Class 3)

• DC Power input port (for DC supply voltages up to 75 V).

2.10.1.2 TNV–1 (Operating within SELV limits, but subject to Transient

Over Voltages).
• 155 Mbit/s G.703 SDH STM–1 Electrical Mux input and output ports.
• 1.5/2 Mbit/s G.703 PDH Tributary traffic input and output ports.
• 140 Mbit/s G.703 PDH Tributary traffic input and output ports.

Marconi (Page 85) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT OUTLINES

• 34 Mbit/s G.703 PDH Tributary traffic input and output ports.

• 45 Mbit/s G.703 PDH Tributary traffic input and output ports.
• Element Manager Interface port.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 86) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 3:
PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides an overview of the whole product range. The range consists
of four products :–

• SMA–1/4CP
• SMA–1/4c
• SMA–1/4(4+4)
• SMA–1/4(8)
• SMA–1/4UC

SMA–1/4CP is a low cost, compact ADM which is primarily intended for use on
customer premises as a method of delivering broadband services.

SMA–1/4c and /uc are a small, low cost sub–rack primarily intended for use in one of the
following applications :–

• on customer premises as a method of delivering a range of broadband services

(for example ATM, highspeed PDH) to larger customers
• in street cabinets as a method of collecting voice and narrowband traffic from a
number of co–located access multiplexers.
• in street cabinets as a method collecting broadband traffic from a small number
of Extender IIs or customer ADMs
The only difference between SMA-1/4c and /uc is the size of the core subrack.

SMA–1/4(8) is a slightly larger subrack primarily intended for use in one of the
following applications :–

• in street cabinets or local exchanges as a method collecting broadband traffic

from a large number of Extender IIs, SMA–1/4c ADMs or customer ADMs.
• in exchange buildings as a low cost STM–4 ADM.

SMA–1/4(4+4) has only one row of LTUs and is primarily intended for use in one of
the following applications :–

• in street cabinets to replace SMA–1/4c.

• in street cabinets or local exchanges as a method collecting broadband traffic
from a large number of Extender IIs, SMA–1/4c ADMs or customer ADMs.
• in exchange buildings as a low cost STM–1 ADM.

All the products are based around a single chip SDH add/drop multiplexer.

Marconi (Page 87) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.1.1 SMA–1/4CP

SMA–1/4CP is based on one main core unit (PCB) containing the SCP ASIC. It
supports X21 and 2M interfaces as standard. Other interfaces are supported via
expansion module options.

Note: The expansion module can be added or replaced with the core unit in service.

Note: The 16x2 CP unit does not support X.21.

3.1.2 SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc

The compact ADM is a smaller version of the SMA–1/4 ADM. The product is
packaged in a 7U high (for SMA1/4c) and 6U high (for SMA1/4uc) both 19” wide sub–rack,
to allow it to be installed in communications rooms and street cabinets. The product is
based on a Core Card containing the SCP ASIC and Optical Modules (STM–1 or STM–4).

Note: See the chapter on Optical Modules for further information on these.

9 slots are supported containing

• 2 x Core Cards (for Card/MSP protection).

• 4 x Trib Card supporting the existing range of tributary card capability.
• 1 x Comms/Controller card
• 2 x PSUs (for SMA1/4c) and 1 x Power LTU two way A and B (for SMA1/4uc).
• LTU access is to 2 of the 4 trib slots.
• 2 x Ancillary LTUs.
• 1 x Core LTU

The system shall be powered by –48V.

3.1.3 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

The SMA–1/4(8) ADM takes the form of a 15U high 19” wide sub–rack, designed
for use in exchanges and street cabinets. The product is based on a Core Card
containing the SCP ASIC and Optical Modules (STM–1 or STM–4).

Note: See the chapter on Optical Modules for further information on these.

15 slots are supported containing

• 8 x Trib, supporting the existing range of SMA tributary card capability.

• 2 x Core Cards to allow Line MSP and Core card protection.
• 1 x Comms/Controller
• 1 x AUX (compatible with existing cards)
• 1 x EOW (compatible with existing cards)
• 2 x PSUs

The system is powered by –48V.

Marconi (Page 88) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The normal range of Protection schemes are supported – 1:n Tributary Card, 1+1
Core card , PSU, SNC/MSP. The tributaries are supported by two rows of Traffic
LTUs.

SMA–1/4(4+4) takes the form of a 12U high 19” wide sub–rack but otherwise it
provides the same capability as the SMA–1/4(8) ADM with the exception that LTU
access is to 4 of the 8 tributaries.

3.2 UNIT AND SHELF LAYOUT

3.2.1 SMA–1/4CP

The SMA–1/4CP ADM is housed in a similar plastic enclosure as that used for the
Extender II, with approximate dimensions of 438mm x 220mm x 73mm

SMA1/4CP Rear View

Earth
Stud
220mm

PWR2 SYNC AUX2 USER I/O2

LSR TEST
W E Pwr1
Pwr2 Cust Core interface area 73mm
2s 2s
Pwr
90s 90s
Alarm Test
PWR1 LCT AUX1 USER I/O1
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Line West Line East

Optical Module Area

438mm

Figure 3.1 Rear View of 4 x 2 SMA–1/4CP.

The Core interface area is capable of supporting different connector variants.

Various layout options are detailed below:

Marconi (Page 89) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

2” 4 x2M G.703 + X.21

2” 16 x2M G.703 (RJ45)

2” 16 x2M G.703 (Din 1.0/2.3)

Figure 3.2 Core LTU variants for the SMA–1/4CP

3.2.2 Expansion Modules

A number of expansion modules are supported. Some of these are shown below.

Earth
Stud 220mm

Port 5 Port 7 Port 9 Port 11

UNBAL. UNBAL. UNBAL.
OUT BAL. IN X.21 OUT BAL. IN X.21 X.21 OUT
UNBAL.
BAL. IN X.21 OUT BAL. IN

53mm
Port 6 Port 8 Port 10 Port 12

(incl. 2mm feet)

438mm
UNBAL.
OUT BAL. IN

Figure 3.3 8 x 2M Expansion Module Enclosure

Marconi (Page 90) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

220mm

53mm

16x2M balanced (RJ45)

16x2M unbalanced (Din 1.0/2.3)

Figure 3.4 16 x 2MExpansion Module Enclosure

‘Front View’
CUST
ALARM
TEST

Expansion Module
CUST
POWER
TEST

ALARM

CLE

Figure 3.5 Front view of the SMA–1/4CP

ADM enclosure with Expansion
Module.

3.2.3 SMA1/4c

A diagram of the SMA–1/4c shelf layout is shown below.

Marconi (Page 91) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Power LTU
Trib1 LTU

Trib2 LTU
LTU Area
2M LTU 2M LTU

}
SMA1/4c subrack
LTU Trib 3 2M

Ancillary / Aux LTU

Control / Comms

Traffic

ADM UNIT
ADM UNIT
AD M UN I T

AD M UN I T

PSU

PSU

Trib 1

Trib 2

Trib44
Trib 3
Tr i b 1

Tr i b 2

Tr i b 3

Tr i b 4
Unit

T B

TRI B

Trib
TRI
LTU Trib 4 Ancillary
Ancillary
LTU
LTU

Trib SMA1/4uc subrack

Interface Area

Figure 3.6 SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc

The Components that make up the shelf are:

• 1 x Comms/Controller card
• 2 x Core Cards
• 4 x Series 3 tributary cards
• 8 x Series 3 tributary LTUs (note tributaries 1 and 2 are front plug–up only).
• 2 x PSUs (for SMA1/4c) and 1 x Power LTU two way A and B (for SMA1/4uc).
• 1 x Core LTUs (specific to the SMA–1/4c only), supporting the following
variants:
• 32 x 2M unbalanced, Din 1.0/2.3 (see Figure 3.7)
• 32 x 2M balanced, 37–way D
• 1 x Ancillary panel.

As shown in the figure, the SMA–1/4c may be equipped with a 2M traffic unit
within the Core LTU area. In conjunction with the Core Card, this allows up to 32 x
2Mbit/s to be delivered without the need to equip a conventional 2M tributary card.
This function is protected when the Core units are duplicated.

32x2M (Din 1.0/2.3) 32x2M (16 Way D)

Area for backplane connector

Figure 3.7 Core LTUs– 32 x 2M

Marconi (Page 92) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Variants of the ancillary panel are shown in Figure 3.8.

AUX 1 AUX 2 SYNC OUT LCT

USER I/O1

AUX 2 SYNC OUT USER I/O2

Bw7R
AUI
2M TEST SYNC SYNC SYNC
LCT

IN1
AUX 1

IN2
OUT
PWR 1

PWR 1
PWR 2

PWR 2
LEDs
2.2” 1” Bw7R

Figure 3.8 Variants of the ancillary panel

3.2.4 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

A diagram of the SMA–1/4(8) ADM shelf is shown below. It supports a minimum of

8 tributary cards. An ancillary area is supported on top of the tributary cards.

LTU Trib Trib LTU Trib 3

1 LTU Trib 5 LTU Trib 7
Interface Area

LTU Trib 2 LTU Trib 4 LTU Trib 6 LTU Trib 8

Ancillary LTU area

Cont rol / Comms
AD M UNI T

AD M UNI T
Tr i butar y 1

Tr i butar y 2

Tr i butar y 3

Tr i butar y 4

Tr i butar y 5

Tr i butar y 6

Tr i butar y 7

Tr i butar y 8

PSU A
PSU B
EOW
AUX

Figure 3.9 SMA–1/4(8)

Note: Dedicated Core LTUs are not supported. One of the tributary LTUs is used to support
traffic from either the Core card or the tributary.

For SMA1/4(4+4)(8), the 2M traffic functions provided by the Core units are
usually used to provide the equivalent of 1:N card protection of standard 2M
tributary cards. However, for those applications requiring low numbers of 2Mbit/s
functions, the Core units may be used to provide up to 32 x 2Mbit/s.

Marconi (Page 93) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

A diagram for the minimised SMA–1/4(4+4) shelf, which supports 4 rather than 8
LTU’s, is shown below.

LTU Trib Trib

5 LTU Trib 6 LTU Trib 7 LTU Trib 8
Interface Area

Ancillary LTU area

Cont rol / Comm s

ADM UNI T

AD M U NIT
Tr i butary 1

Tr i butary 2

Tr i butary 3

Tr i butary 4

Tr i butary 5

Tr i butary 6

Tr i butary 7

Tr i butary 8

PSU B
PSU A
EO W
AU X

Figure 3.10 SMA–1/4(4+4) Single Row LTU

3.2.5 Tributary Units

Tributary details are shown in the following table:

Table 3.1: Tributary Units

Tributary Type Ports per Trib Card Notes
1.5 Mbit/s 32
2Mbit/s 32
34 Mbit/s 3
45Mbit/s 3
140Mbit/s 1
STM–1 Electrical 2 Single port variants available
STM–1 Optical 2 Quad STM–1 cards fit into the
SMA1/4c
Cellspan Range Various Range of solutions for delivering
(see associated product manual) ATM services on customer prem-
ises by providing efficient transport
of ATM (cells) over SDH networks
Packetspan Range Various Range of solutions for delivering
(see associated product manual) IP services on customer premises
by providing efficient transport of
IP (packets) over SDH networks.
VC–AM 4 Sub STM–1 VC–12
access module to SDH Extender I
and II (see associated product
manual).

Marconi (Page 94) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.2.6 Technical Details

• Optical Interfaces: Singe Fibre Working (SFW) and Dual Fibre options.

STM–4
STM–1
Sub STM–1/SDH Extender

Connector Type: FC/PC/SC options

• Electrical Interfaces: 1.5,2,34,45,140Mbit/s and STM–1

Connector Type: DIN 1.0/2.3

• LCT Control Interface: IBM compatible PC
• Synchronisation Inputs and Outputs: Configurable for 2Mhz or 1.5/2Mbit/s
• Supply voltage: –48v nominal via duplicated connectors
Note: Triple feed LTU only has one connector.

3.2.7 Main Hardware Differences between SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc

and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8)

The basic differences between the SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) are outlined
in the following table.

Table 3.2: Main Differences Between SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8)

Feature SMA1/4c and /uc SMA–1/4(4+4),(8)
Number of Tributary Slots 4 8
Number of Auxiliary Slots 0 2 (Aux 1 and 2)
Ancillary Functionality Reduced Full functionality
LTU Access 2 Tributaries 4 Tributaries / 8 Tributaries
Non Standard LTUs Core LTU/Ancillary 1 and 2 Full Series 3 LTU compatibility
2M Protection Schemes 1:N Core as 2M Protection tributary
Core Tributary Mode Isolated Tied to 1:n Protection

3.3 CORE CARD FEATURES

The Core Card combines the functionality of the Switch, two Lines, and core
2Mbit/s tributary functions. A single processor is used with a single S/W module to
control and configure this unit.

The Card provides connection for two STM1/4 optical modules, organised as Line
East and Line West. These modules can be plugged on to the card when used
with SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8).

As far as the Operator is concerned the optical modules and Core Trib function will
require configuring separately as if they are separate ’cards’. The modules and
Core Trib function configuration will include all aspects normally associated with a
Line or Trib card including such things as ’Card out’, ’wrong card fitted’ and ’card in
unconfigured slot’ etc.…..

Marconi (Page 95) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The SMA–1/4c and /uc shelf provides full dedicated LTUs for the Core Trib function.
When the Core Card is configured in the SMA–1/4c /uc shelf the Core Trib function is
available for connections. The Core Trib ports are associated with the Core Trib
function. Up to 32 (automatically protected if two Cores are fitted) Core Trib
connections can be made – the configuration of the connections to the Core Trib
functions is basically the same as connections to a standard Trib position.

In the SMA–1/4c and /uc shelf the Core Trib function is not used for 1:n Trib Card
protection. For 1:n (n= 2 maximum) protection, a 2M protection card is fitted in Trib
slot 1.

The SMA–1/4 shelf does not provide dedicated LTUs for the Core Trib function
and the Operator does not make connections directly to it. The function is used in
Core Trib Mode and in 1:n (n= 8 maximum) Trib protection but there is no Operator
configuration of connections directly to this function so it does not appear against
the Core Card.

See the chapter on Slide–In Card Units and the chapter on Optical Modules for
further information regarding optical modules.

The Core Card features are illustrated in Figure 3.11.

Marconi (Page 96) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

ALS Subsystem Line Interface Units PSU Regulation

ALS ALS STM–1/4 STM–1/4

East West Line West Line East 48 V Power
Conditioning

Board DC
Supplies

OverHead Function Rack DC

Supplies
AUX #1

AUX #2

SDH Core Processing (SCP)

ASIC
B/P Interface

Span Interface

Protection Trib.
Function
Tributary
Processing
2M Sync Clocks / Engine (P12)
(SSMB) Timing

Protection
Tributary Interface Control

Microprocessor Function
Backplane
Control Bus SDRAM Interface
Master / Slave
Serial I/F Logic
FLASH
Alarms Bus
Serial I/F 5407 Micro
BDM Port Processor

Reset Control

Figure 3.11 Core Card Features

Marconi (Page 97) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.4 COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD FEATURES

Series 4 products have a combined Comms/Controller card. The Card combines

the Comms and Mux Controller functionalities onto a single card.However there
are two processors on this unit so the Controller and Comms functions appear as
two separate ’functions’. Once the Comms/Controller card has been configured in
the shelf then it is possible to configure the Comms card.

The card also has the SMC as a replaceable module. (this is the equivalent of
System Memory Card in Series 3 terms).

It should be noted that the SMA–1/4CP has a single processor to carry out both
functions.

3.4.1 SMA–1/4CP Software Functions

NTE Card Expansion

Units
OS Processor Interrupt Processor
System Comms. Traffic
Traffic
Management Processing Processing
Processing
Function Function Function
Function

Figure 3.12 SMA–1/4CP Software Functions

The SMA–1/4CP software functions are shown in the above diagram.

3.4.2 SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) Software Functions

On the SMA1/4c, /uc and SMA1/4(4+4),(8) there is a seperate Comms/Controller

card to support system management and communications processing software.
The Core card only supports traffic processing software. This is illustrated in the
following diagram.

Master Slave Controller/Comms Card Tributary Cards

Core Card Core Card

Traffic Traffic System Comms. Traffic

Processing Processing Management Processing Processing
Function Function Function Function Function

Figure 3.13 SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4),(8) Software Functions

3.4.3 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

The Comms/Controller Card performs the system management software functions

listed below.

Marconi (Page 98) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.4.3.1 Equipment Configuration

On the SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4 the shelf and equipment level features are
configured by the Comms/Controller Card. This includes: inventory data, slot
configuration and end–of–shelf alarms.

On the SMA–1/4CP the equipment level features are configured by the

Comms/Controller processor. This includes: inventory data, and card alarms.

3.4.3.2 Traffic Configuration

On the SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) , in response to commands received from

the network management system to set up traffic paths the Comms/Controller
Card configures SDH domain traffic processing functions on the Core card and
any fitted tributary cards.

On the SMA–1/4CP, the Comms/Controller processor card configures traffic

functions on the traffic processor and expansion units in response to commands
received from the network management system to set up traffic paths in the SDH
domain.

3.4.3.3 SDH Tributary Card Management

On the SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), the Comms/Controller Card manages

the logical addition and card configuration variables for the core cards and all of
the tributary cards.

On the SMA–1/4CP, the logical addition and card configuration variables are
managed for any expansion units.

3.4.3.4 Secondary Domain Tributary Card Management

On the SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), the Comms/Controller Card

routes transparent messages for tributary cards or expansion units that have
seperately managed domains (for example, Cellspan and VCAM). The SDH
domain of these cards is managed by the Comms/Controller Card.

3.5 PROTECTION

Traffic and Card protection for the Series 4 products is summarised in the following
table:

Table 3.3: Series 4 Protection

SMA–1/4CP SMA–1/4c SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

Marconi (Page 99) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Traffic Protection MSP STM–1/STM–4 MSP STM–1/STM–4 MSP STM–1/STM–4

SNC SNC SNC
PDH Port PDH Port PDH Port
Card Protection Dual Power Supply Feed Duplicated centralised Duplicated centralised
(battery backup) PSUs provide trib card PSUs provide trib card
supplies. Comms/Con- supplies. Controller/
troller and Core Cards Comms and Core Cards
have dedicated PSUs. have dedicated PSUs.
1+1 Core Card Protec- 1+1 Core Card Protec-
tion. tion.
1:N Tributary Card 1:N Tributary Card
Protection Protection
Core Trib Ptotection

3.6 SYNCHRONISATION

3.6.1 SMA–1/4CP

SMA–1/4CP provides a single SETG function but without an external

synchronisation input.

Synchronisation sources for the SMA–1/4CP include STM–N line sources and
holdover/freerun clock. The following features are supported:

• Single SETG or Freerun modes

• SSMB enable/disable
• Revertive/non–revertive selection
• SSM quality assignment
• SSMB overwrite on STM–N inputs/outputs
• External output squelch on quality threshold
• System Clock and External Output priority tables
• External Output type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 2MHz, 1.5MHz)
• STM–N line traffic

3.6.2 SMA–1/4c and /uc

SMA–1/4c/uc provides a single SETG function, and external synchronisation inputs

and outputs are supported. The SETG function selects between line sources,
tributary card sources, external timing input sources and internal holdover.

The SETG function is protected. The master SETG function drives the external
timing output signals.

An ETS tributary timing bus is provided to supply tributary timing to the Core Card
for synchronising system timing. SDH tributary cards are also connected to the
non–ETS tributary timing bus to provide direct synchronisation of the external
timing outputs.

Marconi (Page 100) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Each line timing source on the Core Cards is passed to the protection Core Card
as a 9.72MHz clock signal. This allows the SETG selector to accomodate MSP
protected lines as seperate synchronisation sources.

Synchronisation sources for SMA–1/4c/uc include STM–N line sources, all tributary
synchronisation sources supported on SMA Series 3, External Timing inputs and
holdover/freerun clock. The following features are supported:

• Single SETG or Freerun modes

• SSMB enable/disable
• Revertive/non–revertive selection
• SSM quality assignment
• SSMB overwrite on STM–N inputs/outputs
• External output squelch on quality threshold
• Ext/Trib sources, System Clock and External Output priority tables
• External Output type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 2MHz, 1.5MHz)
• External Input type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 1.5Mbit/s, 2MHz,
1.5MHz)
• Synchronisation function protection (using duplicated core cards)

When using synchronisation protection the master Core always provides the
external output synchronisation source.

3.6.3 SMA–1/4

Synchronisation is the same as SMA–1/4c but with an increased number of tributary

cards connected to the timing buses.

3.7 POWER DISTRIBUTION

3.7.1 SMA–1/4CP

SMA–1/4CP is powered from nominal –48V input. A DC/DC convertor on the Core
shall provide the required voltages (eg. 1.8V, 2.5V, 3.3V, +–5V). Figure 3.14 shows
the power arrangement between Core and Expansion boxes.

3.7.2 SMA–1/4c and /uc

The power distribution for SMA–1/4c is shown in Figure 3.15.

Marconi (Page 101) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Active Passive

Expansion Module Expansion Module

–48V
Power I/F

Core

+1.8V
–5V
–48V +5V

Figure 3.14 SMA–1/4CP Power Distribution

*note not required if generated on
Ancillary 1 Ancillary 1
** –48V A –48V B
*
+5v

Î
–5v Core A
Core
LTU

Î
+5v

Î
–5v Core B

Î
+5v
Cont/

Î
–5v
Comms

Ancillary
Î
ÎÎ Î
PSU A PSU B

+5v –5v –12v +5v –5v –12v

Trib
LTUs

Trib 1–4

Figure 3.15 SMA–1/4c Power Distribution

3.7.3 SMA–1/4

The power distribution for SMA–1/4 is shown in Figure 3.16. PSUs (optionally
protected) are supported to provide the correct voltages to all cards and LTUs via the
backplane.Dual power feeds are supported via the Power LTU.

Marconi (Page 102) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

–48V A –48V B

Î
–5V

Î
+5V Core A
1

Î
–5V
+5V Core B
Î
ÎÎ
Cont/
comms
Trib
LTUs
ÎÎ Ancillary
LTU
PSU A PSU B
2–7

+5v –5v –12v

+5v –5v –12v

Tribs/AUX/EOW

Figure 3.16 SMA–1/4 Power Distribution

3.8 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The following global configuration options are supported:

• Analogue Monitoring (specific to STM–4 only).

• Laser Bias Current
• Deviation of Tx Power Level
• Rx Power Level
• Consequential Actions for Traffic Defects
• Date and Time (Real–Time Clock)
• Re–Configure Card/Unit
• Reset Card/Unit

Marconi (Page 103) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.9 EVENT MONITORING

3.9.1 SMA–1/4CP

Events supported on the SMA–1/4CP are a combination of SMA Line, Switch,

STM–1 tributary and 2Mbit/s tributary event types, scaled to the number of ports
and VCs. The Controller function events are a combination of SMA Mux Controller
and Comms Card event types.

A simple unit alarm LED and 2 x relay (6 input 2 output) contacts (via the USER
I/O) are provided to indicate that an equipment fault type exists on the system.

The Controller function on SMA–1/4CP collects alarm events from traffic functions
on a 1s polling basis and uses these to maintain historic alarm logs. Performance
and Status events are reported to the management system by the Controller
function.

3.9.2 SMA–1/4c and /uc

Core Card events are a combination of SMA Line, Switch and 2Mbit/s tributary
event types, scaled to the number of ports and VCs.

Bw7R is supported on SMA–1/4c.

Controller events are a combination of SMA Mux Controller and Comms Card
event types.

The Controller Card collects alarm events from traffic cards on a 1s polling basis
and uses these to maintain historic alarm logs. Performance and Status events are
reported to the management system by the Controller Card.

3.9.3 SMA–1/4

Tributary, Core Card and Controller/Comms Card events are as for SMA–1/4c.

TEP1E and Bw7R alarm schemes are supported.

The Controller/Comms Card collects alarm events from traffic cards on a 1s polling
basis and uses these to maintain historic alarm logs. Performance and Status
events are reported to the management system by the Controller/Comms Card.

3.10 PERFORMANCE MONITORING

3.10.1 SMA–1/4CP

Performance primitives supported on SMA–1/4CP are a combination of SMA Line,

Switch, STM–1 tributary and 2Mbit/s tributary performance primitive types, scaled
to the number of ports and VCs.

Marconi (Page 104) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

The Controller/Comms function on the SMA–1/4CP collects performance

information from traffic functions on a 1s polling basis and uses these to create 15
minute and 24 hour performance reports. Performance information on the
Controller/Comms function can be accessed by the management system.

3.10.2 SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc and SMA–1/4

Core Card performance primitives are a combination of SMA Line, Switch and
2Mbit/s tributary performance primitive types, scaled to the number of ports and
VCs.

Controller/Comms Card performance primitives are a combination of SMA Mux

Controller and Comms Card performance primitive types.

The Controller/Comms Card collects performance information from traffic cards on

a 1s polling basis and uses these to create 15 minute and 24 hour performance
reports. Performance information on the Controller/Comms Card can be accessed
by the management system.

3.11 COMMUNICATIONS

3.11.1 DCC Communications

On the SMA–1/4CP, the Communications function supports 4 DCC channels,

giving DCCr and DCCm access on the line ports only.

On the SMA–1/4c, /uc the Communications function supports 24 DCC (4 per

Tributary Card, 4 per Core Card) channels, giving both DCCr and DCCm access.

On the SMA–1/4, full support for 40 DCC (4 per Tributary Card, 4 per Core Card)
channels is provided.

IS–IS routeing is used to support the following Communications features:

• Level 1 and Level 2 routeing

• Packet throughput of up to 90pkts/s (SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4)
• Packet throughput of up to 135pkts/s (SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4)
• Up to 250 Level–1 nodes supported in routeing tables
• Up to 100 Level–2 nodes supported in routeing tables

3.11.2 Transparent Message Routeing

On the SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4, the traffic domains on some tributary cards are
managed directly from the network management system. Current tributary card
types include:

• ATA/ATC Tributary
• VCAM Tributary
• Ethernet Tributary

Marconi (Page 105) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

• Domain Dependant Expansion modules

Messages between Network Management and these card domains are routed
transparently through the Controller/Comms Card without being changed. The
Comms/Controller Card only checks the destination address of these messages
for routeing purposes.

3.11.3 Communications Management

SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4 are capable of supporting management communications

to co–located and subtended products. SMA–1/4CP is not intended to support
other products and so will not support communications on any of its tributary ports.

3.12 INTERFACES

3.12.1 External

Customer interface connections are positioned in such a way to enable customer

access without the need to access the interior of a unit.

3.12.2 Ancillary Interfaces

3.12.2.1 Local Craft Terminal

The LCT interface is a full duplex asynchronous serial communications link

(RS232) between the LCT and the multiplexer unit. The LCT is PC based.

The interface operates up to 19.2kbit/s (with 9600 default).

3.12.2.2 AUI Interface (Q/B3)

This interface is used to connect the unit to a management system such as

EMOS.

The Gateway functionality resides on the Comms/Controller Card and interfaces to

the AUI LTU.

This interface is not supported on the SMA–1/4CP.

This interface is supported on the SMA–1/4c/uc via the ancillary panel, presented on
a 15 way D.

3.12.2.3 Timing Output

A dedicated 2Mbit/s (SSM)/2MHz) connector, supporting balanced and

unbalanced options, is supported.

A single interface is supported on the SMA–1/4CP via an RJ45 (balanced and

unbalanced supported on one connector)

Marconi (Page 106) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Two interfaces are supported on the SMA–1/4c/uc on an ancillary panel, presented

on RJ45 (balanced and unbalanced supported on the one connector)

Two interfaces are supported on the SMA–1/4 via the LTU. Both balanced and
unbalanced options are supported (9 Way D (balanced) and DIN 1.6/5.6
(unbalanced).

3.12.2.4 Timing Input

This interface is not supported on the SMA–1/4CP.

Two interfaces are supported on the SMA–1/4c/uc on an ancillary panel, presented

on RJ45 (balanced and unbalanced supported on the one connector)

Two interfaces are supported on the SMA–1/4 via the LTU. Both balanced (9 Way
D) and unbalanced (DIN 1.6/5.6) options are supported.

3.12.2.5 Auxiliary Interface

This is a V.11, 64Kbit/s serial interface providing data and clock, suitable for
remote management of subtended equipment (i.e C–MUX 2).

The SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c hardware is capable of supporting 2 AUX ports.

The SMA–1/4 hardware is capable of supporting existing Series 3 SMA AUX ports.

3.12.2.6 User Alarm I/O

The SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c/uc support User Alarm inputs and outputs as
provided on the Extender II.

This interface is provided on a double stacked 9 way D type connector.

The SMA–1/4 supports User Alarm inputs and User Outputs. This interface is
supported via the LTU, presented on a 15 way D type.

3.12.2.7 Power Interface

For SMA–1/4CP, dual power interfaces are supported via 9 way D type
connectors. For SMA–1/4c/uc, dual power interfaces are supported via 15 way D type
connectors.

For SMA–1/4, power supplies and the power LTU supporting dual feeds are
supported. The DC power (–48V) enters the equipment through the Power LTU.

3.12.2.8 Local Alarm Scheme

This interface is supported on the SMA–1/4 only via the LTU.

Local alarms schemes BW7R and TEP–1E are supported.

Note: Bw7R is supported on SMA–1/4c/uc using a Bw7R basic ancillary LTU.

Marconi (Page 107) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

3.12.2.9 Engineer Order Wire (EOW)

EOW is not supported on the SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c.

For SMA–1/4 and SMA-1/4uc, EOW is supported. This interface is supported via the AUX LTUs.

EOW speech access to the equipment is via an order wire handset connector
mounted on the front of the card.

3.12.2.10 PSU Monitor Points

PSU monitor points are not supported on the SMA–1/4CP.

Within the SMA–1/4c, each LTU PSU has monitor points, which are accessible
through the front of the PSU cards. A 6–pin block type socket provides voltage
monitoring.

For SMA–1/4, the PSU monitor points are supported on the front of the PSUs.

3.12.2.11 2M Tributary Test Access

This allows the operator to be able to select a single port output interface for
connection to the output test bus.

This interface is not supported on the SMA–1/4CP.

Both balanced and unbalanced options are supported on the SMA–1/4c/uc via the
ancillary panel on an RJ45 connector.

Both balanced and unbalanced options are supported on the SMA–1/4 via the
LTU.

3.12.2.12 Line Optical Interfaces

Single Fibre Working Modules:

• STM–1, 1300Tx/Rx
• STM–1, 1300/1500
• STM–4, 1300/1500

• Connector Types: FC/PC, SC, DIN

The optical budget requirements for SFW are:

Table 3.4: SFW Optical Budget Requirements

TYPE O/P Power Rx Sensitivity S–R Budget
Low Power Laser –2 dbm Nominal –20 dbm 15 db minimum

3.12.2.13 Tributary Interfaces

Optical:As per existing SMA G.957 interfaces.

Marconi (Page 108) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

Electrical:As in the table below:

Table 3.5: Electrical Interfaces

STM–1 G.703 ; CMI
34Mbit/s G.703 ; HDB3
45Mbit/s G.703 ; B3ZS
2Mbit/s G.703 ; HDB3 Balanced and
Unbalanced
1.5Mbit/s G.703 ; B8ZS/AMI Balanced
140Mbit/s G.703 ; CMI
VCAM (34Mbit/s) G.703 ; HDB3

3.12.2.14 Expansion Interfaces

Two types of expansion interface are provided on the SMA–1/4CP only. One is
passive, providing access to dumb Expansion LTUs.The other is active, providing
access to Intelligent expansion modules.The latter is a standard Pseudo STM–1
interface.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 109) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 3: PRODUCT OVERVIEW

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 110) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 2: PRODUCT FUNCTIONALITY

SECTION 2:
PRODUCT FUNCTIONALITY

CHAPTER 4 . . . . . . MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 113

CHAPTER 5 . . . . . . CROSS–CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 117

CHAPTER 6 . . . . . . SYNCHRONISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 123

CHAPTER 7 . . . . . . PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 151

CHAPTER 8 . . . . . . COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 175

CHAPTER 9 . . . . . . EVENT HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 201

CHAPTER 10 . . . . . PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 211

CHAPTER 11 . . . . . OPERATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 215

CHAPTER 12 . . . . . SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 219

Marconi (Page 111) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 2: PRODUCT FUNCTIONALITY

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 112) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 4: MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE

CHAPTER 4:
MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE

4.1 INTRODUCTION

The multiplexing structure of the STM signal defines the way the various lower
order bit–rate signals are combined, together with supervisory data and pointers,
to form the STM frame. It also defines, therefore, the access path whereby the
SMA adds and drops tributaries, the points at which supervisory data can be
accessed and the levels at which cross connections can be made.

4.2 STRUCTURE

Figure 4.1 illustrates the STM–N structure (a subset of ITU Recommendation

G.709) and also shows the SMA access path.

ÇÇÇ Payload

ÇÇÇ
XN X1

ÇÇÇ
STM-N AUG AU-4 VC-4 C-4 140Mbit/s

X3
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
*45Mbit/s
TUG-3 TU-3 VC-3 C-3
34Mbit/s

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ X7

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
Pointer Processing

TUG-2
ÇÇÇ
TU-2 VC-2 C-2 *6.3Mbit/s

ÇÇÇ
Multiplexing
X3
Aligning

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
TU-12 VC-12 C-12 2Mbit/s
Mapping

VC-11 C-11 *1.5Mbit/s

*North American PDH bit rates

Figure 4.1 SMA Multiplexing Structure For STM–N Signals

The multiplexing structure shown above is a sub-set of G.709 (as determined by

ETSI) The structure is a hypothetical representation, showing all the possible
signal and traffic levels that may be supported. The 1.5Mbit/s signals are
effectively mapped into VC-12 containers using the same Trib Card as is used
for 2Mbit/s signals, but with a link position set to ensure `bit-stuffing' of the
excess bytes.

The structure is made up as follows:

• The lowest level is a Container (C), into which the tributary signal is mapped.

Marconi (Page 113) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 4: MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE

• A Virtual Container (VC) is created when a Path OverHead (POH), carrying

supervisory information, is added to the container data.
• The VC is re–timed (to SMA Clock) and a pointer added. This combination
becomes a Tributary Unit (TU).
• Tributary Units are multiplexed together, via intermediate Tributary Unit Groups
(TUG–2 & TUG–3), then to a higher order VC. The High Order VC also
contains a POH, i.e. a High Order POH.
• The High Order VC is re–timed (to STM–N Line Clock) and a pointer added.
This combination becomes an Administrative Unit (AU).
• A Section OverHead (SOH), carrying more supervisory information, is added to
form the STM–N signal frame.

4.3 VIRTUAL CONTAINERS

The SMA handles Virtual Containers for bit rates VC–2, 3, 4, 11 and 12, these are
terminated to tributary cards (34/45 140, 1.5 and 2Mbit/s respectively). They may
be used when creating traffic paths (cross–connections) between STM–N cards.

4.4 OVERHEADS

The Path and Section overheads incorporate a number of bytes used for
in–service monitoring of path and system performance. Path Over Heads provide
for monitoring of individual Path (Higher Order and Lower Order) performance,
some aspects allowing monitoring of remote elements. Section Over Heads
provide for performance monitoring of the repeater and multiplex functions.

4.5 POINTERS

A pointer is added to each virtual container. These pointers are used to adapt
signals between different timing clocks used within the network. The pointer
indicates the start of the VC within the Higher Order VC frame.

4.6 TRIBUTARY UNITS

The VC and associated pointer combination constitutes a Tributary Unit (TU), thus
a VC–12 and its associated pointer is a TU–12.

Multiple Tributary Units are grouped together to form Tributary Unit Groups
(TUGs). The method by which a TU–12, 2 and 3 are grouped into TUGs is shown
in Figure 4.1 . Further details of the Multiplexing Structure can be found in TSS
recommendation G.709. TU–12s are initially multiplexed into a TUG–2, seven
TUG–2s are then combined to form a TUG–3. The TUG–3 is then multiplexed into
a higher order Virtual Container, VC–4.

Marconi (Page 114) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 4: MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE

4.7 ADMINISTRATIVE UNITS

The higher order VC (VC–4) has a pointer added to it to produce an Administrative

Unit (AU–4). This is carried in the payload area of the STM–N frame. The Section
Overhead (SOH) bytes are added to the STM–N #1 signal.

The bytes of the SOH provide for a variety of ancillary functions associated with
the transmission of the STM–N data, e.g. for the SMA–4 these functions include
frame alignment bytes, error monitoring data and network communications
channels.

An AU pointer is added to the VC–4 forming an AU–4. This AU pointer provides a

method of allowing flexible and dynamic alignment of the VC within the AU frame.
This pointer indicates the position of the VC–4 in relation to the AU 4 frame. The
AU pointer constitutes the first 9xN bytes of the STM–N frame. With this
implementation the resultant frame consists of a complete STM–N signal.

An Administrative Unit Group (AUG) is a group of AUs which are multiplexed

together.

4.8 STM–N FRAME STRUCTURE

Figure 4.2 shows the structure of STM–N frames in terms of payload, AU pointer
and section overhead areas.

E.g. an STM–4 frame is (270X4)=1080 bytes by 9 bytes, with a frame period of

125 ms and constitutes four byte interleaved STM–1 frames.

270xN
9xN 261xN
1

2 Section STM-N PAYLOAD

Overhead
3

4 AU Pointer
5 9 bytes

6
Section
7
Overhead
8

Figure 4.2 STM–N Frame Structure

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 115) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 4: MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 116) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

CHAPTER 5:
SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

5.1 INTRODUCTION

Tributary card port access is as follows:–

• 2Mbit/s Tributary Card gives access to:

— 16x2Mbit/s or

— 32x2Mbit/s traffic ports

• VC–AM Cards give access to: VC–12

— Up to 14 x 2Mbit/s PDH ports

• 34Mbit/s Transmux Cards give access to:

— 16 de–multiplexed 2Mbit/s traffic signals

• 34/45Mbit/s Tributary Cards give access to:

— 3x34Mbit/s or VC–3

— 3x45Mbit/s traffic ports

• A 140Mbit/s Tributary Card gives access

to: VC–4

— A single 140Mbit/s traffic port.

• An STM–1 (Optical or Electrical) Card has the traffic

carrying capacity of:
1 x VC–4
— One 140Mbit/s PDH port or channel or
3 x VC–3
— Up to three 34/45Mbit/s PDH ports or channels or 63 x VC–12
— Up to 63x2Mbit/s ports or channels.
• An STM–4 Card has the traffic handling capacity of
four STM–1s.

Note: Tributary access is available for 100% of Line capacity at TU–12 level for SMA–1 and
SMA–4. Access is limited to the application and number of Trib/LTU combinations allocated.

Marconi (Page 117) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

5.2 CROSS–CONNECTION OPTIONS

Cross–connections (traffic paths), routed through the Switch Unit can be created
between Line – Line, Line – Tributary and Tributary – Tributary. In this context
‘Tributary’ means 1.5Mbit/s, 2Mbit/s or 34/40/45/140Mbit/s Tributary Cards,
34Mbit/s VC–AM or STM–N Cards fitted in Tributary slots, or optical or expansion
modules as listed below.

Cross–connections between various channels are performed at the VC level. The

order of VC Cross–connection is dependent upon the traffic cards between which
the cross–connection is to be made:

• 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Cards connect at the VC–12 level.

• 2Mbit/s Core Trib function on SMA–1/4CP connects at the VC–12 level.
• 2Mbit/s Expansion module connects at the VC–12 level.
• 34Mbit/s VC–AM / 34M Transmux cards connect at the VC–12 level.
• 34/45Mbit/s Trib Cards connect at the VC–3 level.
• 140Mbit/s Trib Cards connect at the VC–4 level.
• STM–N Cards can connect at VC–4, VC–3, VC–2, and/or VC–12 level.
• STM–N Modules can connect at the VC–4, VC–3, VC–2 and/or VC–12 level.

5.2.1 SDH STM–N to STM–N Port Cross–connections

SMA cross–connection capability is illustrated in Figure 5.1.

CROSS-CONNECT POINT

STM-N VC-4 VC-4 STM-N

VC-3 VC-3
STM-N PORT STM-N PORT
(LINE OR TRIB) (LINE OR TRIB)
VC-2 VC-2

VC-12 VC-12

Figure 5.1 STM–N VC Connectivity

Cross–connections can be made for VC–12s, VC–2s, VC–3s and VC–4s. Any
allowed mix of VCs can be multiplexed in to the STM–N signal and these VCs can
be time switched (Cross–connected) from one timeslot in an incoming STM–N
signal to another timeslot in the outgoing STM–N signal (and vice versa for the
signal in the opposite direction).

Marconi (Page 118) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

5.2.2 STM–N Port to 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections

Figure 5.2 shows the VC connectivity between an STM–N port and a 1.5/2Mbit/s
trib port. Only VC–12s can be cross–connected between these two types of cards.

STM-N CROSS-CONNECT POINT

VC-4
G702 2 Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY
VC-12 VC-12 PORT
STM-N PORT
(LINE OR TRIB)
C-12 2 Mbit/s

Figure 5.2 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 2Mbit/s Port

5.2.3 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port to 1.5/2Mbit/s Trib Port

Cross–connections

VC connectivity between 1.5/2Mbit/s plesiochronous ports is shown in Figure 5.3.

Only VC–12s can be Cross–connected between these cards.

CROSS-CONNECT POINT
G702 1.5/2 Mbit/s
G702 1.5/2 Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY VC-12 VC-12
PORT
PORT
1.5/2 Mbit/s C-12 C-12 1.5/2 Mbit/s

Figure 5.3 VC Connectivity 1.5/2Mbit/s Port <–> 1.5/2Mbit/s Port

5.2.4 STM–N Port to 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections

Figure 5.4 shows the VC connectivity between an STM–N port and a 34/45Mbit/s
trib port. Only VC–3s can be Cross–connected between these two types of cards.

CROSS-CONNECT POINT
STM-N VC-4 G702 34/45 Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY
VC-3 VC-3 PORT
STM-N PORT
(LINE OR TRIB)
C-3 34/45 Mbit/s

Figure 5.4 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 34/45Mbit/s Port

5.2.5 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port to 34/45Mbit/s Trib Port

Cross–connections

VC connectivity between 34/45Mbit/s plesiochronous ports is shown in Figure 5.5.

Only VC–3s can be Cross–connected between these cards.

Marconi (Page 119) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

CROSS-CONNECT POINT
G702 34/45Mbit/s G702 34/45Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY
VC-3 VC-3 PORT
PORT

34/45Mbit/s C-3 C-3 34/45 Mbit/s

Figure 5.5 VC Connectivity 34/45Mbit/s Port <–> 34/45Mbit/s Port

5.2.6 STM–N Port to 140Mbit/s Trib Port Cross–connections

Figure 5.6 shows the VC connectivity between an STM–N port and a 140Mbit/s
trib port. Only VC–4s can be Cross–connected between these two types of cards.

CROSS-CONNECT POINT
STM-N VC-4
G702 140Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY
VC-4 VC-4 PORT
STM-N PORT
(LINE OR TRIB)
C-4 140Mbit/s

Figure 5.6 VC Connectivity STM–N Port <–> 140Mbit/s Port

5.2.7 140Mbit/s Trib Port to 140Mbit/s Trib Port

Cross–connections

VC connectivity between 140Mbit/s plesiochronous ports is shown in Figure 5.7.

Only VC–4s can be Cross–connected between these cards.

CROSS-CONNECT POINT
G702 140Mbit/s G702 140Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY
PORT VC-4 VC-4 PORT

140Mbit/s C-4 C-4 140Mbit/s

Figure 5.7 VC Connectivity 140Mbit/s Port <–> 140Mbit/s Port

5.3 SMA–1/4CP

5.3.1 Adding Cross Connections

Adding a cross–connection is only allowed between source and destination

ports/channels supporting the same traffic type. Part of the validation process
ensures that payload capacity exists for a cross–connection to be added.

Note: When used, the ATX card acts as a termination point for the VCs in the SDH domain.
However, it does not support any Tributary ports in the SDH domain. This means that tributary
input/output port configuration is not configured/supported in the SDH domain.

The ETX card does not terminate the VCs, this is done by the base unit. The ETX card uses the

Marconi (Page 120) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

X.21 traffic signals and as such X.21 port configuration needs to be set up on the base unit
when an ETX card is configured.

5.4 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4 (4+4)(8)

5.4.1 Addition of Higher Order (VC–4) Cross–Connections

VC–4 connections are applicable to the Optical Modules and Switch on the Core
card.

Table 5.1: Addition of Higher Order Cross–Connections

Higher Order Cross–Connection Processing of VC–4 Signal
STM–N Module <==> STM–N Module STM–N Module passes all VC–4s through transparently.

STM–N Module <==> 140M or ATA/ATC Trib Trib card shall terminate / generate the VC–4.

STM–N Module shall pass the VC–4 through

transparently.
STM–N Module <==> STM–N Trib STM–N Module passes all VC–4s through transparently.

5.4.2 Addition of Lower Order Cross–Connections

Table 5.2: Addition of Lower Order Cross–Connections

Lower Order Cross–Connections Processing of Lower Order VC Signal
STM–N Module <==> STM–N Module STM–N Module passes the LO VC through
transparently.
The LO VC–POH shall not be terminated although it
shall be available for protection / performance
monitoring.
VC–AM <==> VC–AM/STM–N Module VC–AM/STM–N Module passes the VC–12 through
transparently.
The VC–12 POH shall not be terminated although it shall
be available for protection / performance monitoring.
STM–N Module <==> LOVC Trib LOVC–trib cards shall terminate / generate the LO VC.

The STM–N Module shall pass the LO–VC through

transparently. The POH shall be available for protection /
performance monitoring.
Note: Optical Modules are STM–1 and STM–4 only.

All VC–n are always passed transparently through the Switch function on the Core Card.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 121) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 5: SMA–N CROSS–CONNECTIONS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 122) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

CHAPTER 6:
SYNCHRONISATION

6.1 INTRODUCTION

The first part of this chapter describes synchronisation in generic terms. Specific
application to SMA–1/4CP and to SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) are outlined at
the end of the chapter.

An SMA has four synchronisation timing areas which are shown in Figure 6.1.

Maintaining accurate synchronisation of the various areas is based on the use of

Phase Locked Loop (PLL) oscillators.

EXTERNAL 1 EXTERNAL 2

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT) TIMING

LINE WEST TIMING SYNCHRONISATION LINE EAST TIMING
LINE WEST SYNCHRONISATION AREA SYNCHRONISATION LINE EAST
AREA AREA
Internal
system
timing
source

TRIBUTARY TIMING
SYNCHRONISATION
AREA

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.1 SMA–N synchronisation timing areas and timing signal source options.

Timing signals are required for these synchronisation timing areas. The timing
signals can be derived from:

• External sources – i.e. from a frequency standard via External 1 or 2 inputs or

from a Tributary.
• Line interfaces – i.e. Line West or Line East.
• An SMA internal oscillator (this condition is known as ‘freerun’ and is also the
default condition at commissioning).

Once commissioned, the selection of external or internal source can be altered by

the operator. In addition, within certain limits, the various destinations (sinks) of
timing signals can be configured independently to accept different externally
sourced signals. A detailed description of the setting up procedures is the subject
of a dedicated Local Terminal (LCT) operator manual.

Marconi (Page 123) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.2 SYNCHRONISATION MODES

An SMA has the following modes of operation:

• Freerun. This mode is the default situation supplied by the Mux Controller at
the Commissioning stage. When implemented, none of the timing source inputs
are used. All PLL’s are locked to a highly stable, but free running,
synchronisation source (internal oscillator situated on the Link Card section of
the Switch Unit).
• Single Synchronisation Equipment Timing Generation (SETG) mode. This
mode is operator implemented via the Local Terminal (LCT), allowing for the
selection of various timing source input(s) for locking the PLL, and is the
gateway to further configurations for a number of possible network timing
arrangements, together with an overriding quality check. Only one of these
arrangements can be used at a given time, but the operator can set up the
inoperative feature whilst the multiplexer continues working normally. The new
set–up can then be applied (when required) by the operator. This mode of
operation is as follows:
— In the Single SETG mode all the timing sinks are configured together, using the
same 38.88MHz equipment clock.
• Holdover. This is a standby mode that comes into operation automatically if all
timing source inputs fail for a particular PLL it is not operator initiated. In
holdover mode a PLL’s frequency is held to within close limits of that set by the
last used timing source.

6.3 FREE–RUN MODE

In Free–run Mode there are no input or extracted timing signals, synchronisation is

derived from a single PLL (on the Switch Unit) configured to run as a stable
free–run oscillator. This arrangement is illustrated in Figure 6.2.

Marconi (Page 124) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

EXTERNAL 1 EXTERNAL 2

LINE WEST LINE EAST

Internal
system
timing
source

LEGEND
TIMING

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.2 Freerun Mode

This mode is applicable when an SMA is used to provide the timing source for a
network of SMAs of which it is a part. In this case the slave multiplexers should be
set to recovered clock (turnaround mode). This use for network timing is only
suitable for SMA networks, for larger applications an external oscillator should be
provided and drive the master SMA via an External Sync port. Free–Run is also
the default mode, i.e. if an SMA is not configured it will default to Free–Run Mode
on power–up. It should also be noted that a programmable Synchronisation
Source Marker Byte (SSMB) code is always transmitted in Free–run mode.

6.4 SINGLE SETG TIMING SOURCES

In Single SETG Mode of operation an SMA–N Switch Card can derive timing
signals from a choice of seven inputs i.e. different sources as follows:–

• Incoming STM–N Line Port East A & B, STM–N Line Port West A & B.
• A tributary port: either STM–N, 140 Mbit/s, 34/45 Mbit/s or 1.5/2 Mbit/s.
• Two external timing signal ports (1.5/2Mbit/s or 2 MHz).

Selection of timing sources is performed by prioritising the timing sources using

the Local Terminal (LCT). The tributary timing source is pre–selected by the LCT
operator specifying which tributary card and the port on that card from which
tributary timing is to be derived.

One of the two dedicated external timing sources and the tributary source are
selected by operator prognostication. The selected External/Tributary timing
source is then fed to selectors for the nine timing sinks (Line West A/B, Line East
A/B and System Clock), thus reducing the number of simultaneous available
sources to five.

Marconi (Page 125) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

In the multiple SETG Mode each timing sink can be configured separately to select
one of the five timing sources for synchronisation independently of the other four
timing sinks. Configuration is performed by prioritisation of timing sources for each
timing sink. This independent configuration of timing sinks allows an SMA–N to be
operated using various network timing arrangements. The is for all timing sinks to
be configured identically, i.e. from a single source.

In single SETG Mode, all timing sinks are configured together, which means they
are configured identically from a single source. This is according to the
CCITT/ETSI recommended method.

Prioritisation, i.e. selection, of timing sources is performed at the Local Terminal

(LCT). For each timing sink, a priority is allocated to each available source, no two
sources being allocated the same priority. The highest priority is allocated to the
source that will normally be used. This method of source selection allows for
synchronisation continuity in the event of timing source failures.

6.5 SINGLE SETG TIMING MODE CONFIGURATION

When Single SETG mode is set, then the synchronisation architecture can be
configured, by prioritisation of timing sources, to support the following timing sync
modes:

• Line Timing Mode

• Tributary Timing Mode
• External Timing Mode
• SASE Timing Mode
Note: All the above modes are recommended by CCITT and ETSI.

If Line Timing is used ( Figure 6.3), an invalid SSMB code is transmitted on the
looped Line output. This is to avoid the creation of further timing loops.

6.5.1 Line Timing Mode

Figure 6.3 illustrates Line Timing. In this mode, timing is recovered from an
incoming STM line signal and used to synchronise the corresponding outgoing
STM line signal.

Marconi (Page 126) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

LINE WEST LINE EAST

Internal
system
timing
source

LEGEND
TIMING

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.3 Line Timing Mode

6.5.2 Tributary Timing Mode

Figure 6.4 illustrates the Tributary Timing Mode. In this mode, timing is recovered
from an incoming tributary channel and used to synchronise the outgoing STM–N
line signals.

LINE WEST LINE EAST

Internal
system
timing
source

LEGEND
TIMING

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.4 Tributary Timing Mode

Marconi (Page 127) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.5.3 External Timing Mode

Figure 6.5 illustrates the External Timing Mode. In this mode, timing is derived
from any one of two external synchronisation sources (inputs) and used to
synchronise the signal transmitted on the STM–N line ports.

Loss of the external signal will cause the SMA to go into Holdover or select
another synchronisation source until the preferred external synchronisation source
is restore (this is the case for all timing modes with the exception of free–run).

EXTERNAL 1 EXTERNAL 2

LINE WEST LINE EAST

Internal
system
timing
source

LEGEND
TIMING

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.5 External Timing Mode

6.5.4 SASE Timing Mode

Figure 6.6 illustrates SASE Timing (Stand Alone Synchronisation Equipment

Timing). This mode is an enhancement of external timing. Timing is recovered
from any one of the STM–N line inputs and used to generate an output for external
processing. After processing, it is returned as an external timing input that is used
to drive all of the traffic timing functions, i.e. STM–N outputs and internal system
timing.

EXTERNAL EXTERNAL 2 IN
TIMING
EQUIPMENT

EXTERNAL 1 OUT

LINE WEST LINE EAST

Internal
system
timing
source

LEGEND
TIMING

TRIB 1 TRIB N

Figure 6.6 Stand Alone Synchronisation Equipment Timing

Marconi (Page 128) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.6 SYNCHRONISATION SOURCE SELECTION

The basic continuity assurance scheme is that, if the currently used source fails,
another source is automatically selected. If necessary, the process is repeated
until all available sources have failed. This basic scheme is refined by
incorporation of the following features:

• The sources not currently in use are monitored for failure. If the current source
fails, any attempt to change to an already failed alternative is inhibited.
• The Holdover Mode is instituted temporarily on any failure of a currently in use
source, or permanently if all available sources fail.
• There is a facility for automatic reversion from a substitute source to a restored,
original source. The exact operating rules for this facility are subject to an
operator implemented option (paragraph 6.7.4).

6.7 SYNCHRONISATION STATUS MESSAGE BYTE (SSMB)

The Synchronisation Status Message Byte (SSMB) is a byte within the section
overhead (SOH) of the STM–N frame. Bits 1–4 of the SSMB are unused, but bits
5–8 carry coded information indicating the quality level of the synchronisation
source of the STM–N signal in which the SSMB is carried.

6.7.1 SSMB Mode Enabled

When SSMB operation is enabled the quality level of an STM–N signal source is
taken to be as defined by bits 5–8 of that received SSMB.

The SSMB bits 5–8 indicate quality levels between 1 and 16. Default assignment
of quality levels and codes are shown in Table 6.1. The code descriptions
correspond to G.708 recommendations.

Quality levels and codes can be re–assigned by the operator.

Table 6.1: Default Quality Levels and Codes

SSMB Code Bits Quality Level Description
b5 b6 b7 b8
0 0 0 0 16 Quality unknown
0 0 0 1 16 Undefined
0 0 1 0 1 Traceable to G811
0 0 1 1 16 Undefined
0 1 0 0 2 Traceable to G812 transit clock
0 1 0 1 16 Undefined
0 1 1 0 16 Undefined

Marconi (Page 129) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

0 1 1 1 16 Undefined
1 0 0 0 3 Traceable to G812 local clock
1 0 0 1 16 Undefined
1 0 1 0 16 Undefined
1 0 1 1 4 Traceable to G813 clock
1 1 0 0 16 Undefined
1 1 0 1 16 Undefined
1 1 1 0 16 Undefined
1 1 1 1 16 Not to be used for synchronisation

The SSMB code bits, extracted from an incoming STM–N signal, after a
persistence check, are assigned a quality level by the operator. These quality
levels are then utilised to select the source that is to be used. All non STM–N
sources are assigned an SSMB quality level by the operator.

When the quality level detected from two separate STM–N signals is the same
then the equipment selects the source to be used on the basis of the operator
configured priority.

When all sources in the Equipment Destination Priority Table fall below the Minimal
Quality Level an alarm is raised (Source Unacceptable).

6.7.2 SSMB Mode Disabled

When SSMB operation is disabled then the equipment will ignore the received
SSMB quality level and select the source on the basis of priority. No two sources
must be allocated the same priority for the same timing sink.

6.7.3 Holdover Mode

During normal operation, a memory function is continually updated as the PLL

tracks its timing source input. If the current timing source fails, the memory locks
the PLL to the ‘last read’ frequency of the failed source. The lock lasts until a new
source, or restored original source, is applied.

Depending on the type of signal being generated, in Holdover mode the 2Mbit/s
Ext Sync outputs are both disabled (no signal appears on these outputs). On
restoration of normal sync operation the outputs are no longer disabled and a
signal is re–established.

6.7.4 Reversion Facility

When the SSMB Marker is enabled, the basic rules for reversion from an
alternative timing source to a restored, previously failed, source is that reversion
takes place if any of the available sources quality value changes. If non–revertive
mode is configured then reversion only occurs when the quality value of the source
currently in use changes.

Marconi (Page 130) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

When the SSMB Marker is disabled, the basic rule for reversion from an
alternative timing source to a restored, previously failed, source is that reversion
takes place if the restored source is of higher priority than the alternative source. If
non–revertive mode is configured, then reversion only occurs after the source that
is currently in use fails.

In revertive and non–revertive mode, selection of a previously failed source is

subject to a delay set by the WTR Period option.

6.8 EXTERNAL SYNC INPUTS AND OUTPUT

Two ports are provided for the input of externally generated timing inputs to an
SMA. An SMA can be configured to accept either a 1.5/2Mbit/s HDB3 signal or a
1.5/2MHz signal conforming to G.703 Section 10 at these ports. Bit–rate is
configured via the Local Terminal (LCT) as part of the Set Sync Mode operation.

Two ports are provided for the output of a timing signal generated by System
Clock from timing sources available to the SMA. The port is configurable to one of
a choice of bit–rates via the Local Terminal (LCT) as part of the Set Sync Mode
operation.

When all sources in the External Output Priority Table fall below the Minimal
Quality Level (SSMB Enabled) set for that particular output, then the external
output is disabled and an alarm is raised (Source Unacceptable). The External
Output Off State can be configured by the LCT operator, the options are 0V, high
impedance and d.c. offset.

When SSMB mode is disabled however, then the External Outputs are disabled
when all sources in the External Output priority Table have failed.

6.9 PRIMARY RATE RE–TIMING BUFFERS FOR 2MBIT/S

TRIBUTARY CARDS

On specific 2Mbit/s Tributary cards the output ports can support five different
options for output synchronisation, i.e.:–

• Normal Timing (Re–timing Mode 1)

• Synchronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 2)
• Plesiochronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 3)
• Synchronous Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 4)
• Wander Buffer (Re–timing Mode 5)

After the selection of a specific 2Mbit/s Tributary Card via the Local Terminal (LCT)
the re–timing of buffer modes can be effected. These modes permit synchronous
and plesiochronous 2Mbit/s transport via the GPT SDH equipment, minimising the
usual consequences of pointer adjustments on output wander.

Marconi (Page 131) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

These modes are configurable on a per port basis, although only one mode is
possible for any given port at any one time. Operational and network applications
for these modes are explained in the following text.

6.9.1 Normal Timing (Re–timing Mode 1)

PDH output timing is derived from the inherent mapping and pointer information to
allow the transfer of asynchronous data to pass transparently through the SDH
network. It achieves this by way of a 2Mbit/s de–synchroniser which maintains an
average fill of an elastic store, the bandwidth of the de–synchroniser is 0.6Hz
(normal bandwidth) and 0.15Hz (narrow bandwidth). The response to bit
justification is second order and the response to byte justification is third order to
further smooth the output response.

Narrow bandwidth mode will change over to normal bandwidth for approximately
10 seconds if an abrupt data rate change threatens to overflow the store.

6.9.2 Synchronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing

Mode 2)

Under normal working conditions bit/byte justification is unnecessary in a

synchronous network. However, under failure conditions some form of justification
is required to prevent data slips from occurring, due to an overflow of the elastic
store.

A technique exists that utilises re–timing buffers which clock out the primary rate
signal using the recovered bearer clock, thus avoiding bit and byte justification.

In the synchronous network depicted in Figure 6.7, Node A maps 2Mbit/s data into
an SDH multiplexer synchronised to a locally available network timing reference.
Node B de–maps the traffic and feeds it back into the primary rate network.
Normally a separate timing 2Mbit/s feed must be supplied to Node B which is free
from byte justification. Using re–timing buffers Node B can be synchronised from
the 2Mbit/s traffic feeds that carries timing from Node A via the STM–N bearer.

ALTERNATIVE SEPARATE TIMING DISTRIBUTION

2Mbit/s
Timing Reference
2MHz/2Mbit/s Traffic
STM-N Bearer Node
Timing B
SMA SMA-N
Traffic 2Mbit/s STM-N
Node
A Data
Data and/or Data
Synch

RE-TIMING
BUFFER
Figure 6.7 Synchronous Network

Marconi (Page 132) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

In Synchronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 2) a 40 micro

second buffer is used, whilst re–timing the tributary 2Mbit/s output to the system
clock. This option requires that the 2Mbit/s data carried within the network should
also be frequency synchronous with the network. If the timing buffer starts to
overflow in this mode, due to a synchronisation failure in the SDH path, then a
phase leak–out (approx. 5 ms) will occur. Hysteresis in this leak–out process
ensures that as/if the store refills in the opposite direction a minimum of 40 micro
seconds must elapse before another leak–out occurs.

6.9.3 Plesiochronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing

Mode 3)

When a traffic connection across a network is not synchronous with the bearer
clock, then the modes mentioned in Paragraphs 6.9.1 and 6.9.2 cannot be used.
In this case timing information would normally be carried via a separate timing link
on a separate network. Figure 6.8 shows Node Y being synchronised to Node X by
this method.

However, the Plesiochronous Data Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 3)

allows third party timing to be carried in SDH. In this mode the de–synchroniser
uses the recovered bearer clock to re–time the 2Mbit/s output. However, the bit
de–justification function is activated to correctly de–map a signal which is not
synchronous to the SDH network. By using this method a network is capable of
carrying independent timing, whilst minimising the the effects of byte justifications
at the 2Mbit/s output (ie. TU–12 pointer changes are ignored by the
de–synchroniser whilst a plesiochronous signal is being transported across the
network).

Timing Reference
2MHz/2Mbit/s

SMA SMA-N
Traffic 2Mbit/s STM-N Traffic
Node Data Node
A B
Data and/or
Synch

2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s
Traffic Traffic
Node Node
X Y
(Third SEPARATE TIMING PATH (Third
Party) Party)

Figure 6.8 Plesiochronous Data On Synchronous Network

When a synchronisation failure occurs in the SDH network the buffer fill will
change. If the buffer is ready to overflow, then a phase leak–out of (approx. 5 ms)
would occur. Hysteresis in this leak–out process ensures that as/if the store refills
in the opposite direction a minimum of 40ms phase slip must occur before another
leak–out occurs.

Marconi (Page 133) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.9.4 Synchronous Channel Timing Buffer

(Re–timing Mode 4)

In Synchronous Channel Timing Buffer (Re–timing Mode 4), operation is almost

identical to that explained in Paragraph 6.9.2. The difference is that as the buffer is
about to overflow, then rather than a phase leak–out occurring, data is allowed to
slip by approximately 5 ms and a ’Data Slip Event ’ is reported to the operator.
Consequently in this mode, the phase of the 2Mbit/s line output rate would always
remain stable, thus permitting its use as a synchronisation link carrying low priority
data. This could be considered as a 2Mbit/s version of the 2MHz output timing.

6.9.5 Wander Buffer (Re–timing Mode 5)

When network wander levels exceed the wander tolerances of associated

equipments, then an external 40 micro seconds buffer store may be configured in
the SMA. (see Figure 6.9).

With Wander Buffer (Re–timing Mode 5) selected operation is similar to that

explained previously in paragraph 6.9.4, except that the reference used to clock
data out of the SMA is selected from an incoming 2Mbit/s signal.

SEPARATE TIMING PATH

Timing Reference

2MHz/2Mbit/s
Sync
SMA SMA-N
Traffic 2Mbit/s STM-N Sync Traffic
Node Data Node
A B
Data Data Data
Data

2Mbit/s WANDER
BUFFER

Figure 6.9 Wander Buffers On Synchronous Network

It is assumed that this incoming signal (Node B) is timed from a source that is
synchronous to the reference used to time data into the SDH path at Node A. This
will usually arrive at Node B over a separate timing path.

6.10 LOCAL TERMINAL OPERATION/CONFIGURATION

Configuration and the setting up of Synchronisation is achieved with the aid of the
Local Craft Terminal (LCT) once Commissioning has occurred. A designated
operator can:

• Set–up Quality Tables and various Synchronisation modes.

• Configure Priority s for each Synchronisation destination.
• Set–up minimum Quality Thresholds.
• Monitor Alarms for all Synchronisation modes/types of functions.
• Selecting a 2Mbit/s Wander Buffer Timing Source.

Marconi (Page 134) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

• 2Mbit/s Output Buffer Timing Configuration.

• CRC–4 Monitoring.
• 1.5Mbit/s PDH Ports Configuration.

The description of how to set–up synchronisation for this product can be found in a
dedicated Local Terminal (LCT) Operator Manual.

6.11 APPLICATION TO SMA–1/4CP

6.11.1 SMA–1/4CP

The timing and synchronisation system for SMA–1/4CP is based on the system as
described earlier in this chapter. Differences from this system are as outlined
below.

SMA–1/4CP provides a single SETG function but without an external synchronisation

input (T3) as illustrated in Figure 6.10.

Customer ADM
External
SETG Timing
Rx Line Function
Sync Output
Sources (T4)
Tx Line
(T1) System
Timing
(T0)

Controller/ Comms
Function
(Real Time Clock)

Figure 6.10 SMA–1/4CP Synchronisation

Synchronisation sources for the SMA–1/4CP include STM–N line sources and
holdover/freerun clock. The following features are supported:

• Single SETG or Freerun modes

• SSMB enable/disable
• Revertive/non–revertive selection
• SSM quality assignment
• SSMB overwrite on STM–N inputs/outputs
• External output squelch on quality threshold
• System Clock and External Output priority tables
• External Output type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 2MHz, 1.5MHz)
• STM–N line traffic

Marconi (Page 135) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.11.2 Timing Options

SMA–1/4CP only supports Equipment Freerun and line–timed Single SETG timing
options.

6.11.3 Timing Sources

Only line timing sources are supported. With regard to SDH line recovered clock,
up to 2 line sources are supported:

• Line East A
• Line West A

6.11.3.1 Nominated Line Source Quality Level

There is a new sync source failure criterion:

•
Frequency Error (line/trib)

A Frequency Error condition takes 10 seconds to detect. If any other sync failure
criteria occurs the Frequency Error condition clears. At start–up, and when all
other failure criteria raised against a sync source clear, the Frequency Error
condition remains clear for 10 seconds while the frequency is being measured.

6.11.4 Outputs Synchronised to a Timing Source

SMA–1/4CP supports two synchronisation ‘sinks’: one sink drives the equipment
or system clock (T0) and the other sink drives the external timing output (T4). This
is similar to Single SETG mode operation.

6.11.4.1 SDH Line Outputs

All line cards use the system clock and assume the source quality level of the
selected system clock source.

6.11.4.2 SDH Line SSMB Timing Marker Generation

“Fast SSMB Transmission” mode is not supported. The only condition where a line
function autonomously sets the SSMB value is during card power–up, until the
Comms/Controller function has configured the appropriate Tx SSMB.

6.11.4.3 SDH Tributary SSMB Timing Marker Generation

Note that this applies to both the standard STM–1 Expansion unit and the STM–1
ATX Expansion unit.

Marconi (Page 136) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.11.4.4 Equipment Clock

On the SMA–1/4CP the equipment clock is used to time all STM–N outputs. The
38.88MHz system traffic clock, distributed to all ‘active’ Expansion units, is used to
time standard and ATX STM–1 Expansion unit STM–1 outputs.

6.11.4.5 External Timing Output

There is only one output port supported and only the ‘Equipment output high
impedance’ external output off state is used.

6.11.4.6 Timing Buffers for 2Mbit/s Tributary Outputs

The 2Mbit/s timing buffers are also supported on all G.703 outputs.

6.11.5 X.21 Timing Modes

The X.21 traffic ports support the X.21 timing options, on a per port basis. These
modes are related to how data is clocked into/out of the network.

6.11.5.1 Master Mode

In this mode, the timing source for the individual X.21 function is the Equipment
clock, which can be in Freerun mode, Holdover mode or locked to a line source.
Also, the P12 Timing output buffer option should be set to Mode 4
(Synchronisation).

In Master timing source mode, the X.21 function can be configured to any one of
the following clock modes:

• S
• Hybrid
• X

6.11.5.2 S Mode (Master)

The “S clock” mode is the default for the SMA–1/4CP as it will be used for most
applications. It is supported for applications where the DTE is located close to the
DCE.

6.11.5.3 Hybrid Mode (Master)

The Hybrid mode is supported for applications where the DTE is located at a
distance from the DCE or if high data rates are used, where clock turn around
delays in the DTE may miss clocking the Tx data.

6.11.5.4 X Mode (Master)

The X clock mode is supported for applications where the Extender II is connected
to a DCE subtended from another network.

Marconi (Page 137) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.11.5.5 Slave

The individual X.21 function is timed from the clock recovered from the incoming
2M signal. The timing of this 2Mbit/s signal is such that it conveys the timing of the
far end DCE (whose timing source mode should be set to either “Master” or
“Customer X”).

In Slave mode, the X.21 function can be configured to any one of the following
clock modes:

• S
• Hybrid
• X

In this mode the P12 timing output buffer option should be set to Mode 3
(Plesiochronous).

6.11.5.6 S Mode (Slave)

The transmit and Receive data paths at the X.21 interface are both timed from the
internal S clock which has been sourced from the clock recovered from the
network. This clock is also used to clock the transmit and receive data paths at the
network interface.

6.11.5.7 Hybrid Mode (Slave)

The S clock used to time the receive data path at the X.21 interface is sourced
from the clock recovered from the network, which is also used to clock data at the
network interface.

The transmit path at the X.21 interface is clocked in by the X clock, which has
been sourced from the DTE turning the S clock round.

6.11.5.8 X Mode (Slave)

The Transmit and Receive data paths at the X.21 interface are both timed from an
X clock provided by the Local DTE. It is assumed that the X clock is externally
connected to the SDH network clock.

The data paths (Tx and Rx) at the network interface are clocked by the clock
recovered from the network. The recovered clock is also used to provide S.

6.11.5.9 Customer X

A third timing mode is available when the X–clock mode is configured. For this
timing mode, the individual X.21 function is timed from the incoming clock from the
DTE, presented on the X circuit of the X.21. interface. Justification takes place
(P12 function) to allow the 2M signal generated by the X.21 function to be mapped
into the SDH domain.

Note: In Customer X mode only, in the event of X Clock fail, the X.21 PLL will freerun.

Marconi (Page 138) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

In the Customer X mode, the X.21 function can be configured to any one of the
following clock modes:

• Hybrid
• X

In this mode the P12 Timing output buffer should be set to Mode 3
(Plesiochronous).

6.11.5.10 Hybrid Mode (Customer X)

The Local DTE provides the source clock, which is presented onto the X circuit.
This clock is used to time the transmit data path at the X.21 interface and the data
path into the network.

6.11.5.11 X Mode (Customer X)

The Local DTE provides the source clock, which is presented onto the X circuit.
This clock is used to time the transmit and receive data path at the X.21 interface.
The X clock is also used to clock the transmit data path at the network interface.
As the other end is in Slave mode, the X clock is recovered and turned around and
gets presented on the S circuit at the local DCE.

6.11.6 Internal Oscillator

The SMA–1/4CP implements Holdover and Freerun functions.

The holdover function is only supported by the system clock timing sink on the
Core card. A mechanism exists to cause the System PLL to enter/exit holdover
mode when an out–of–range frequency source is selected.

6.11.7 Synchronisation Architecture

The selection of timing source is performed on the Base unit and passed to all
other Expansion units and the external timing output. Recovered Line clocks from
the TSHOPP function are fed to the Sync function by internal SCP connections.

6.11.7.1 Base Unit

The Base unit contains the switch, sync and line card functions. Two selectors are
available for the equipment clock and external timing output clock sinks and each
associated PLL has a holdover function.

6.11.7.2 Timing Inputs

Each Base unit accepts two from the on–card line modules, Line E and Line W.

A ”Line Sync Source Fail” alarm is raised when loss of clock is detected by the
Sync function from the TSHOPP function in the SCP ASIC. There are 2 alarms in
total, one for each line interface.

Marconi (Page 139) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

Frequency monitoring is performed at the inputs to the Core card and used to
generate “Frequency Error” alarms.

Whenever a “Sync Source Fail” alarm is raised against a source the “Frequency
Error” alarm is cleared. When a “Sync Source Fail” alarm clears consecutive 10
second frequency measurements begin. When a 10 second count matures a
Frequency Error alarm is raised or cleared.

6.11.7.3 External Timing Output

A PLL after the external output selector is included to generate a 2048kHz clock
and provide an output in the absence of source to this selector. The PLL enters
holdover mode if loss of transitions is detected at the card input. If no transitions
are detected for greater than 10 seconds the output is inhibited autonomously by
the on–card firmware. This autonomous inhibit is removed as soon as transitions
are again detected.

6.11.8 Synchronisation Configuration on Reset

The following default configuration occurs for each card on power–up of the
SMA–1/4CP Base unit:

• The Comms/Controller function restores the configuration contained in NV

memory on the SMC. Until the configuration is restored or before the
equipment is declared operative the Comms/Controller function takes no action
and individual traffic function power up states will persist.
• During power up of the Base unit traffic function the microcontroller disables all
clock sink outputs and the equipment clock will select freerun. The external
timing output is disabled in tristate mode. The card then awaits configuration by
the Comms/Controller function.
• All SDH Expansion units will power up in on–card freerun mode. The ”Do Not
Use For Synchronisation” SSMB timing marker code is then transmitted. The
unit then awaits configuration by the Comms/Controller function.

6.11.9 Alarms

Note that SMA–1/4CP has Frequency Error alarms.

6.12 APPLICATION TO SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

SMA–1/4c and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) provide a single SETG function, and external

synchronisation inputs (T3) and outputs (T4) are supported. The SETG function
selects between line sources, tributary card sources, external timing input sources
and internal holdover.

The SETG function is protected. The master SETG function drives the external
timing output signals.

Marconi (Page 140) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

An ETS tributary timing bus is provided to supply tributary timing to the Core card
for synchronising system timing (T0). SDH tributary cards are also connected to
the non–ETS tributary timing bus to provide direct synchronisation of the external
timing outputs.

Each line timing source on the Core cards is passed to the protection Core card as
a 9.72MHz clock signal. This allows the SETG selector to accomodate MSP
protected lines as seperate synchronisation sources.

Synchronisation sources for SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) include STM–N line

sources, all tributary synchronisation sources supported on SMA Series 3,
External Timing inputs and holdover/freerun clock. The following features are
supported:

• Single SETG or Freerun modes.

• SSMB enable/disable.
• Revertive/non–revertive selection.
• SSM quality assignment.
• SSMB overwrite on STM–N inputs/outputs.
• External output squelch on quality threshold.
• Ext/Trib sources, System Clock and External Output priority tables.
• External Output type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 2MHz, 1.5MHz).
• External Input type configuration (2Mbit/s with/without SSM, 1.5Mbit/s, 2MHz,
1.5MHz).
• Synchronisation function protection (using duplicated core cards).

When using synchronisation protection the master Core always provides the
external output synchronisation source.

Marconi (Page 141) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

Core Card A Squelch

Note T3/T4 to support SSMB Control
Ancillary SETG Ancillary
Unit or System Unit or
T3 Function Timing
Sync T4 Sync
T3A LTU T0 LTU T4A
T1
External External
Timing Timing
Inputs 9.72 Inter–core Outputs
(T3) MHz Sync (T4)
Core Card B
T3B T4B
SETG
T1 Function
T4
T3
System
Timing Squelch
128kHz T0 Control
AUX Timing Buses (ETS and non–ETS)
Timing
Controller/
T0
A B Comms Card
AUX Slots Tributary Tributary
A A Card 1 A Card n A
System System System
Timing Timing Timing
B T0 B T0 B T0 B

Figure 6.11 SMA–1/4c and /uc Synchronisation

Note: The figure shows SMA–1/4c/uc synchronisation. For SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), the

figure would be the same, but with an increased number of tributary cards connected
to the timing buses.

6.12.1 Timing Options

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) support the Equipment Freerun and Single
SETG timing options.

6.12.2 Timing Sources

With regard to SDH Line recovered clock, up to 4 line sources are supported:

• Line East A (from Core card A)

• Line West A (from Core card A)
• Line East B (from Core card B, when fitted)
• Line West B (from Core card B, when fitted)

6.12.2.1 Nominated Line Source Quality Level

There is a new sync source failure criterion:

Marconi (Page 142) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

•
Frequency Error (line/trib)

A Frequency Error condition takes 10 seconds to detect. If any other sync failure
criteria occurs the Frequency Error condition clears. At start–up, and when all
other failure criteria raised against a sync source clear, the Frequency Error
condition remains clear for 10 seconds while the frequency is being measured.

6.12.3 Tributary Recovered Clock

Any one of the following tributary sources may be used to supply the ETS timing
bus (System Timing):

• 1.5/2M G.703 Tributary port

• 2M X.21 Tributary port (future release)
• 34/45M Tributary port
• 140M Tributary port
• STM–1 Tributary port
• Dual–port STM–1 Tributary port
• Quad STM–1 (SMA1/4c and SMA-1/4uc only)
• 34/45M ATA/ATC port
• STM–1 ATA/ATC port

Any one of the following tributary sources may be used to supply the non–ETS
timing bus (External Output Timing):

• STM–1 Tributary port

• Dual–port STM–1 Tributary port
• Quad STM–1 (SMA1/4c only)
• 34/45M ATA/ATC port
• STM–1 ATA/ATC port

All the above tributary sources have an additional sync source failure criterion of
“Frequency Error” as indicated in the previous section.

6.12.4 External Sources

Up to two external sources may be used to supply the ETS timing bus (System
Timing). The format for these inputs is common to both inputs and may be
selected from one of the following types:

• 2.048Mbit/s G.703 signal

• 2.048MHz signal conforming to G.703
• 2.048Mbit/s G.703, G.704 framed signal with SSM

Marconi (Page 143) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

• 2.048Mbit/s G.703, G.704 framed signal without SSM

• 1.544Mbit/s signal conforming to G.703
• 1.544MHz signal similar to G.703

6.12.5 Nominated External Source Quality Level

There is a new sync source failure criterion – Frequency Error – as for nominated
internal source.

6.12.6 Outputs Synchronised to a Timing Source

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) support two synchronisation ‘sinks’: one sink
drives the equipment or system clock (T0) and the other sink drives the external
timing output (T4). This is similar to Single SETG mode operation.

6.12.6.1 SDH Line Outputs

All line cards use the system clock and assume the source quality level of the
selected system clock source.

6.12.6.2 SDH Line SSMB Timing Marker Generation

The only condition where a line function autonomously sets the SSMB value is
during card power–up, until the Comms/Controller card has configured the
appropriate Tx SSMB.

6.12.6.3 Equipment Clock

The equipment clock is used to time all STM–N outputs. The equipment clock on
each Core card is used to time the line outputs on that card. The 38.88MHz
system traffic clock, distributed to all tributary cards, is used to time STM–N
tributary outputs.

6.12.6.4 External Timing Outputs

The two external timing outputs on the Core card are always configured identically.
If a protected Core card is fitted then the external timing outputs are protected with
only the master Core card driving the outputs.

6.12.6.5 Timing Buffers for 2Mbit/s Tributary Outputs

The 2Mbit/s timing buffers are also supported by the P12 ASIC on the Core card.

6.12.7 Internal Oscillator

SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) implement Holdover and Freerun functions.

The holdover function is only supported by the system clock timing sink on the
Core card. If protected Core cards are fitted the slave card normally locks to the
master Core card when in holdover mode. However, when a Core card protection
switch occurs both Core cards temporarily operate in autonomous holdover mode.

Marconi (Page 144) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

A mechanism exists to cause the System PLL to enter/exit holdover mode when
an out–of–range frequency source is selected.

6.12.8 Synchronisation Architecture

The selection of timing source is performed on the Core card and passed to all
other cards and the external timing outputs. Recovered Line clocks are fed to the
Core cards by intra–card and inter–card connections. Up to 3 tributary cards
(SMA–1/4c/uc) or 8 tributary cards (SMA–1/4(8)) interface to the Core cards to supply
recovered tributary timing via timing busses, TB1 and TB2. TB1 (also called the
ETS bus) is used to pass a single selected PDH/SDH tributary source to the Core
card for use as an equipment clock source. The P12 ASIC on the Core is able to
supply a clock onto TB1. The P12 supplies Core LTU traffic timing sources on the
SMA–1/4c and protection traffic timing sources on the SMA–1/4(4+4)(8). TB2 (also
called the non–ETS bus) is used to pass a single selected SDH tributary source to
the Core card for use as an external output clock source. The selected equipment
clock source is fed to all cards via traffic clocks.

The external timing input and output connections exist between the timing
interface LTUs and the Core card.

Firmware design incorporates A/B mappings such that when a core card is fitted in
both the A and B Core card slots the correct A/B designations will be reported to
the Comms/Controller card (i.e. Core card A will report ‘A’ ASIC ports to the
Comms/Controller card as ‘A’ interfaces; Core card B will report ‘A’ ASIC ports to
the Comms/Controller card as ‘B’ interfaces; and vice–versa).

6.12.8.1 Core Card

The Core card contains the switch, sync and line card functions as shown in
Figure 4.2. Two selectors are available for the equipment clock and external timing
output clock sinks and each associated PLL has a holdover function. A 9.72MHz
PLL is used to ‘pre–select’ the Ext/Trib source for the equipment clock and
external timing output sinks.

Marconi (Page 145) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

Control Bus to To/From Core B TB1 EXT EXT TB2

Controller/Comms EA WA WB EB (ETS Bus) IN 1 IN 2 (non–ETS Bus)

mC Transition
Detector
9.72MHz P12 ASIC
control Ext I/P PLL
control
control
Ext/Trib source
EXT
OUT 1
O/P
Control
Line 1 of 5 1 of 6
Function control Select Select control
West EXT
OUT 2
control
Line 38.88MHz PLL 1.5/2M PLL
Function (with holdover) (with holdover)
East control
38/77M
Clock x2
SCP ASIC
Core Card A
Master/Slave Equipment 77M Master/Slave
Synchronisation Timing A Clock/Data Synchronisation

Figure 6.12 Core Card and Synchronisation

6.12.8.2 Timing Inputs

Each Core card accepts four line inputs: two from the on–card line modules (e.g.
Line EA and Line WA) and two from the other Core card (e.g. Line EB and Line
WB). The on–card recovered line clocks are also passed to the other Core card.
Two external inputs (EXT IN 1 and EXT IN 2) and two tributary timing bus inputs
(TB1 and TB2) are also supported.

A “Line Sync Source Fail” alarm is raised when loss of clock occurs from either
on–card or off–card line modules. There are 4 alarms in total, one for each line
interface. A loss of the timing bus clocks raises a ”Trib Sync. Source Fail” alarm for
TB1 or a ”SASE Sync. Source Fail” alarm for TB2 if no transitions at 128kHz are
detected. A loss of external timing inputs raises an ”External Sync Source Fail”
alarm if a loss of signal condition is detected.

Frequency monitoring is performed at the inputs to the Core card and used to
generate “Frequency Error” alarms. The SCP ASIC provides counters that the
firmware reads to determine the accuracy of the sync sources.

Whenever a “Sync Source Fail” alarm is raised against a source the “Frequency
Error” alarm is cleared. When a “Sync Source Fail” alarm clears consecutive 10
second frequency measurements begin. When a 10 second count matures a
Frequency Error alarm is raised or cleared.

Marconi (Page 146) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

Frequency calculations occur independent to source selection. This means that

re–selection messages from the Comms/Controller card can be acted on
immediately as frequency measurement will already have been made in the
previous 10 seconds.

6.12.8.3 Equipment (38MHz) Clock Sink

The Core Card generates a 38.88MHz equipment clock (and 77.76MHz clock for
dual rate STM–1 tributary interfaces) which is used by the traffic interfaces to the
Core Card and by the Tributary Card and Line modules to derive STM–N output
timing.

The equipment clock enters holdover mode if loss of clock input is detected on the
selected input. The equipment clock also enters holdover mode if a Frequency
Error condition is detected on the selected input for a period of greater than 10
seconds. If a tributary or external source is selected via the 9.72MHz PLL then the
Core Card ensures that a loss of input causes the equipment clock to enter
holdover mode.

The microcontroller is also capable of pre–loading the nominal frequency of the

PLL to allow provision of equipment freerun mode.

Two of the unused Line PLLs in the Sync ASIC are used to monitor the System
Clock output’s frequency. When the system clock frequency exceeds the ‘on’
threshold (Table 4.3) the “System PLL Out–Of–Limits” alarm shall be raised and
the System PLL shall be forced into holdover by the Core Card firmware. When
the system clock frequency drops below the ‘off’ threshold (Table 6.2) for more
than 20s, the “System PLL Out–Of–Limits” alarm is cleared and the System PLL
exits holdover autonomously by the Core Card firmware. This mechanism is
independent to the frequency meaurement on sources. The holdover on/off
thresholds are given inTable 6.2.

Table 6.2: On/Off Thresholds for System PLL Out–of–Limits and System
Holdover
‘on’ threshold (enter holdover) ‘off’ threshold (exit holdover)
Frequency ±18.6 ppm for >8ms ±18.0 ppm for >20s

Synchronisation connections between core cards support a protection mechanism,

which allows one Core Card to fail and be replaced, while the synchronisation
function is maintained by the other. The slave Core Card locks its equipment clock
to the master such that the difference in output phases between cards is less than
10ns. If the slave card fails to detect a ‘companion’ equipment clock from the
master then the equipment clock enters holdover mode.

The core cards re–clock the data from/to the off–card switch to/from the on–card
TSHOPP function respectively.

6.12.8.4 External Timing Output

A PLL after the external output selector is included to generate a 1.544/2048kHz

clock and provide an output in the absence of source to this selector. The PLL
enters holdover mode if loss of transitions is detected at the card input. If no
transitions are detected for greater than 10 seconds the output is inhibited
autonomously by the on–card firmware to the off state. This autonomous inhibit is
removed as soon as transitions are again detected.

Marconi (Page 147) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

6.12.8.5 STM–N Bearer Timing

The line functions use the 38.88MHz equipment clock (as used by STM–1 tributary
cards) to generate STM–N transmit line timing using a rate multiplying PLL with a
wide jitter bandwidth.

Because the inter–card line traffic interfaces are re–timed by the on–card system
clock, payload errors will be generated when the core cards are un–synchronised,
while the outgoing VC–4 and SOH appear fault–free. To compensate for this
situation, the protection subsystem inserts MS–AIS (K2) and VC–4 payload AIS
for up to 50ms into the line interfaces on the Core Card which is becoming a slave.

6.12.8.6 STM–N Clock Recovery

The recovered STM–N clock is passed to the Sync function in the SCP ASIC at a
rate of 9.72MHz. A Core Card crossover connection ensures that both core cards
can detect all recovered line clocks. For any of the input signal failure criteria the
signal to the Sync function is disabled by the TSHOPP function within 10ms of the
causing event. This is the method used to signal clock failure between the
TSHOPP function and the Sync function in the SCP ASIC.

6.12.8.7 SDH Tributary Cards

Note that the Fast SSMB Quality Threshold mechanism and Line Sink Holdover
flag signalling may still be implemented for compatibility with Series 3 SMAs but
are ignored by the Sync function in the Series 4 SCP ASIC.

6.12.9 Configuration
6.12.9.1 Priority Table Options

In ”Normal” mode, two priority tables can be configured; one for equipment clock
sink and one for external output sink. These tables correspond to the two clock
sinks. Assigning a clock source to a priority table defines it as a nominated source.
The entries may be chosen from any of the sources listed below:

Equipment Clock sink priority table options:

• SDH line recovered clock – West A

• SDH line recovered clock – West B
• SDH line recovered clock – East A
• SDH line recovered clock – East B
• Ext/Trib clock

External Output sink priority table options:

• SDH line recovered clock – West A

• SDH line recovered clock – West B
• SDH line recovered clock – East A

Marconi (Page 148) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

• SDH line recovered clock – East B

• Timing bus 2 clock
• Equipment clock

Only configured cards may be selected as timing sources in the priority tables

Defaults: External Output Sink Priority Table:

• Equipment Clock = ”1”

•
All other sources = ”none”

Equipment Clock Sink Priority Table:

• All sources = ”none”

6.12.10 Synchronisation Configuration on Reset

The following default configuration occurs for each card on power–up of the shelf
or on insertion of an equipment card into a powered–up shelf:

• The Comms/Controller Card restores the configuration contained in NV memory

on the SMC. Until the configuration is restored or before the equipment is
declared operative the Comms/Controller Card takes no action and individual
card power up states will persist.During power up of the core card(s) the
microcontroller disables all clock sink outputs and the equipment clock will
select freerun. The external timing outputs are disabled in tristate mode. The
card then awaits configuration by the Comms/Controller Card.
• All SDH tributary cards will power up in on–card freerun mode. Timing bus
outputs are also disabled and the ”Do Not Use For Synchronisation” SSMB
timing marker code is transmitted. The card then awaits configuration by the
Comms/Controller Card.
• The PDH line and tributary cards power up with timing bus outputs disabled.
The card then awaits configuration by the Comms/Controller Card.

6.12.11 Alarms

Note that SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) have Frequency Error alarms.

Marconi (Page 149) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 6: SYNCHRONISATION

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 150) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

CHAPTER 7:
PROTECTION

! WARNING
In order to avoid traffic hits during maintenance periods when traffic cards (Core cards,
tributary cards) are inserted or removed from the equipment shelf, the operator must first
apply a Force Core Protection switch to the current worker card. After maintenance has been
carried out, the Core card protection can be returned to the required default state.

7.1 INTRODUCTION

The first part of this chapter describes different forms of protection that can be
incorporated in the SMA series covered by this manual. The second part of the
chapter illustrates various protection options for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc,
SMA–1/4(4+4), and SMA–1/4(8).

Protection is applied to overcome traffic vulnerability to equipment failure, e.g. card

or path failure. For example, Figure 7.1 shows the various areas where protection
may be applied to a SMA–n multiplexer.

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ËËË
Ë
1+1 protection

LINE WEST
Ë
Ë
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
Ë
CORE CARD

LINE EAST

ËË
Ë
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1:n
TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY
Tributary
CARD 1 CARD 2 CARD-n

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
protection
(1.5/2M only)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1+1 or 1:n
protection
1+1 or 1:n
protection
1+1 or 1:n
protection
1+1 or 1:n
protection
1+1 or 1:n
protection

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ CONTROLLER

ÉÉÉÉ
COMMS PSU A
CARD

ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
PSU B

ÉÉÉÉ
Shading denotes protection option available

Figure 7.1 SMA–n Protection options

Note: 1. Note that Line and Switch functions are contained within the Core Card.

Marconi (Page 151) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

Note: 2. 1:n Tributary protection (1.5/2M only) is applicable only to SMA–1/4c/uc (core trib
protects on SMA–1/4

Some Protection options are designed to protect against failure of equipment

external to the multiplexer (eg. TU protection) and hence are intended to provide
enhanced availability for complete end–to–end paths in a network. Other options
are designed for increasing the availability of signal paths within the SMA
equipment itself.

Some protection options are not applicable to all of the SMAs covered in this
manual, while other may involve restrictions for differences in operation.

Following is a summary of the types of protection available:–

a) 1+1 (MSP) STM–n Multiplex Section Protection.

b) 1+1 (MSP) 34M VCAM Protection.

c) Intra–card and Inter–card MSP Protection (Dual STM–1 Electrical, only).

d) Sub–network Connection (SNC) Protection.

e) Switch Plane Protection.

f) 1:N 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card Protection.

g) 1:N 34/45/140Mbit/s Tributary, 34Mbit/s Transmux, 34 Mbit/s VC–AM Card

Protection.

h) 1:1 SDH Extender Card Protection.

i) 1+1 PDH Tributary Port Protection.

j) PSU Protection.

In summary, SMA Series 4 protection arrangments are as follows:

• SMA–1/4CP does not support Core Card or Expansion Module protection.

• SMA–1/4CP does support MSP, SNCP and Port Protection.
• SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) support MSP, SNC all VC–n, Port and Card
Protection.

Traffic and Card protection for the Series 4 products is summarised in the following
table:

Table 7.1: Series 4 Protection

SMA–1/4CP SMA–1/4c and /uc SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

Marconi (Page 152) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

Traffic Protection MSP STM–1/STM–4 MSP STM–1/STM–4 MSP STM–1/STM–4

SNC SNC SNC
PDH Port PDH Port 1+1 PDH Port
Card Protection None Duplicated centralised Power LTU Duplicated centralised
PSUs provide trib card two way power supplier PSUs provide trib card
supplies. Comms/Con- circuits. supplies. Controller/
troller and Core Cards Comms and Core Cards
have dedicated PSUs. have dedicated PSUs.
1+1 Core Card Protec- 1+1 Core Card Protec- 1+1 Core Card Protec-
tion. tion. tion.
1:N Tributary Card 1:N Tributary Card 2M:1:N Tributary Card
Protection Protection Protection

Marconi (Page 153) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION (MSP)

7.2 1+1 STM–N MULTIPLEX SECTION PROTECTION (MSP)

Multiplexer Section Protection provides a means of protecting against failure of the

components of STM–N links including fibres, regenerators and the
electrical/optical transducers at the ends of a multiplexer section.

Whilst MSP is principally an ‘external’ protection mechanism, it also inherently

provides a method of protecting against an SMA ‘internal’ failure of a STM–n unit
and its associated backplane interfaces.

The 1+1 (MSP) STM–n Line Protection scheme provides protection for a complete
STM–n point to point link between equipments, including the individual STM–n
cards. It is also applicable to STM–n cards in Tributary slots in the same pairs as
PDH 1+1 protection. Implementation of this scheme for STM–n Line or Trib Cards
requires duplication in both East and West directions of transmission.

Note: EOW operation, however, will be lost.

TWO-WAY
TRANSMISSION
OUTGOING STM-N LINK STM-N OUTGOING
TRAFFIC LINE FUNCTION LINE FUNCTION TRAFFIC
`A' `A'

SWITCH SWITCH
FUNCTION FUNCTION
TWO-WAY
TRANSMISSION
STM-N LINK STM-N
LINE FUNCTION LINE FUNCTION
INCOMING `B' `B' INCOMING
TRAFFIC TRAFFIC

WEST SIDE OF SMA-n `A' EAST SIDE OF SMA-n `B'

(LINE FUNCTION INITIALLY NOMINATED WORKER) (LINE FUNCTION INITIALLY NOMINATED `WORKER)

= PROTECTION ZONE
Figure 7.2 1+1 STM–1 Line Protection

Figure 7.2 gives an example of 1+1 STM–n Line protection. At both ends of a point
to point section the STM–n Line Cards are duplicated, one of each pair designated
as the worker card and the other for protection.

The worker card at the ‘near end’ is connected by a dedicated line to the worker
card at the far end. Correspondingly the protection card is connected by a
separate dedicated line to the protection card at the far end. Thus full duplication
of Traffic paths is provided.

At each transmitting end, the Switch function routes outgoing traffic to the worker
and the protection cards simultaneously.

Marconi (Page 154) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

The receiving worker and protection pair pass the recovered line signals to their
associated Switch function, together with supervisory information carried by the
Section Overhead. The Switch function assesses, from the supervisory
information, which path is providing the best quality service and selects the
appropriate STM–n Line Card. Traffic is taken only from the selected card, a mix
from both cards is not possible.

7.2.1 Operation

The protection switching is normally automatic when a deterioration in the

nominated Worker path is detected, i.e. autonomous mode, however it can be
manually controlled or forced, change–over being initiated by operator intervention
from the Element Manager or Local Terminal (LCT). The MSP Protection State
priorities are shown in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2: MSP Protection State Priorities

When Results
Traffic The Indication Received is:– Priority in Traffic
On:– on:–
Protection Forced Switch from Protection To Worker 1 Worker
Protection Signal Fail on Protection (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel) 2 Worker
Worker Forced Switch on Worker To Protection * 3 Protection
Worker Signal Fail on Worker (Switch from Worker to Protection Channel) * 4 Protection
Protection Signal Degrade on Protection (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel) 5 Worker
Worker Signal Degrade on Worker (Switch from Worker to Protection Channel) * 6 Protection
Protection Manual Switch To Worker (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel) 7 Worker
Worker Manual Switch To Protection (Switch from Worker to Protection Channel) * 8 Protection
Protection Wait To Restore (Revertive mode only) * 9 Protection
Protection Do Not Revert (Non–Revertive mode only) * 10 Protection
Worker No Request on Protection (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel in Recursive 11 Protection
Mode only) or Worker or Protection (in Non–Revertive mode only)

Note: Only local indications apply in uni–directional mode, whilst both local and remote
indications apply in bidirectional mode. Remote indications are signalled via the K1 byte. Both
the local and remote indications have the same priority. However, should a simultaneous local
and remote indication occur of the same/equal priority, then the one that is received first will
become active.

Note: Only the Protection Channel may be specified for a No Request indication and only
the Worker Channel may be specified for Wait to Restore and Do Not Revert indications.

Note: With priorities marked thus * in Table 7.2, in addition to the the active indication, with
bidirectional mode, bits 1–4 of the received K2 byte and bits 5–8 of the transmitted K1 byte
must be the same for selection of the Protection Channel.

Note 1: When 1+1 MSP is to be deconfigured, the Worker Section should be checked
for normal operation before a ’Forced Switch’ is made back to the Worker
Section.

7.2.1.1 Revertive/Non–Revertive Modes

The protection scheme can be set for either revertive or non–revertive mode.

Marconi (Page 155) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

In revertive mode, operation will revert automatically to the worker path when
normal traffic quality is restored in that path. In non–revertive mode, there is no
such automatic reversion. Effectively, the original Worker and protection paths
have now swapped over. A reversion will only occur if the new ‘Worker’
(ex–protection) path deteriorates (refer to the appropriate SMA Operator Manual
for more information on modes).

7.2.2 Automatic Protection Switching (APS)

The 1+1 STM–1 Line Protection scheme incorporates provision for a protocol
(G.783) which allows communication between the transmitting and receiving ends
via bytes, designated K1 and K2, in the Section Overhead. The facility is referred
to as Automatic Protection Switching signalling (APS). The 1+1 K1, K2 protocol
mechanism being used for this product is compatible with 1:N, as described in
G.783.

The K1 and K2 bytes are also used when both ends of a section automatically
switch to the protection channel if the Worker channel fails, as in Dual Ended
operation (Bi–directional Worker). This signalling protocol (G.783) is contained in
the multiplexer section overhead.

Marconi (Page 156) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

SUB–NETWORK CONNECTION (SNC) PROTECTION

7.2.3 Introduction

The Ring Protection scheme protects against path failure between the insertion
point and extraction point of a VC–n (n=12,2,3,4) signal, i.e. covers
cross–connections.

The method uses both available routes around a ring configuration to protect
against failure of any one path. Protection is achieved without card duplication but
sending one signal by two routes inevitably reduces the traffic handling capacity of
the ring. Figure 7.3 illustrates the arrangement.

TRAFFIC

INSERTION POINT TRIB

SMA-N CARD

STM-N STM-N
LINE LINE
FUNCTION SWITCH FUNCTION
FUNCTION

STM-N SIGNAL STM-N SIGNAL

OTHER SMAS OTHER SMAS

AS APPLICABLE AS APPLICABLE

STM-N SIGNAL STM-N SIGNAL

SWITCH
STM-N FUNCTION STM-N
LINE LINE
FUNCTION FUNCTION

NOMINATED NOMINATED
`WORKING CHANNEL' `PROTECTION CHANNEL'
TRIB
CARD
EXTRACTION POINT
SMA-N

NOTE: Only one direction of transmission shown.

= PROTECTED ZONE TRAFFIC

Figure 7.3 SNC Protection

7.2.4 Method

The VC–n signal may originate as a plesiochronous input to a 2,34, 45,140Mbit/s

Tributary Card or it may be embedded within an STM–N signal input to an STM–N
Tributary Card. In either case, it passes to the Switch function as a VC–n
(n=12,2,3,4).

Marconi (Page 157) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

At the insertion end, the Switch function applies the VC–n (n=12,2,3,4) to both
East and West STM –1 Line Cards for transmission by both routes around the
ring. At the point at which the VC channel is dropped, the VCs (n=12,2,3,4) are
received simultaneously by the two STM–N Cards (East and West) and passed to
the Switch function. The Switch function will extract the VCs (n=12,2,3,4) from the
nominated ring direction (worker channel) and route it to the appropriate tributary
card.

The Switch function monitors the integrity of the received VC signal (from data in
the Path Overhead). If the Switch function detects a degraded signal, a VC
selector function will select the equivalent VC received via the opposite ring
direction (protection channel).

7.2.5 Operation

The protection switching can either operate autonomously, changing over

automatically when a deterioration in the nominated Worker path is detected, it can
be manually controlled or forced, change–over being initiated by operator
intervention from the Element Manager or Local Terminal (LCT). Operator control
can override demands from the autonomous mode.

7.2.5.1 Autonomous Mode

Autonomous mode demands for change–over arise from two conditions which
have the following priorities:

• Signal Fail (SF). This fault indication is the highest priority and is raised if any
of the following conditions are detected:
— Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) in the VC.
— Loss Of Pointer (LOP) in the VC.
— Excessive Bit Error Rate (EBER) of the VC.
— Signal Label Mismatch (Operator enabled/disabled on a per–path basis:
Default is enabled)
— Signal Label Un–equipped (Operator enabled/disabled on a per–path basis:
Default is enabled)
— Path Trace Error (Operator enabled/disabled on a per–path basis: Default is
enabled)
• Signal Degrade (SD). This fault indication is raised if an error rate threshold
set by the operator is exceeded. (Operator enabled/disabled on a per-path
basis: Default is enabled).

Operating autonomously the protection scheme will be set for either revertive or
non–revertive mode.

In revertive mode, operation will revert automatically, after a preset delay, to the
original path (i.e. the nominated Worker path) when normal traffic quality is
restored in that path. The preset delay is termed the Wait To Restore (WTR)
period and is operator selectable from 0 – 30 minutes.

Marconi (Page 158) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

In non–revertive mode, there is no automatic reversion. Effectively, the original

worker and protection paths have now swapped over. A reversion will only occur if
the new worker (ex–protection) path deteriorates.

7.2.5.2 Manual Mode

The VC path can be controlled by commands, entered via the Local Terminal
(LCT), that operate on the receive direction only of the protected path. There is
priority both in relation to each other and to the autonomous mode demands (see
Table 7.3). The operator commands are:

• Force Switch Traffic To Worker Channel. Causes traffic to switch to, or be

maintained on, the channel nominated as Worker channel. This command has
a higher priority than the autonomous mode SF or SD demands, therefore the
Worker channel will remain selected regardless of any traffic degradation.
• Force Switch Traffic To Protection Channel. Causes traffic to switch to, or
be maintained on, the channel nominated as protection channel. This command
has a higher priority than the autonomous mode SF or SD demands, therefore
the protection channel will remain selected regardless of any traffic
degradation.
• Manual Switch Traffic to Worker Channel. Causes traffic to switch to, or be
maintained on, the channel nominated as Worker channel unless a higher
priority demand is in effect (see Table 7.3). Note that autonomous mode SF
and SD demands have a higher priority than this operator command. [Note:
Locally detected conditions on the Worker channel have a higher priority than
the Manual switch command].
• Manual Switch Traffic To Protection Channel. Causes traffic to switch to, or
be maintained on, the channel nominated as protection channel unless a higher
priority demand is in effect (see Table 7.3). Note that autonomous mode SF
and SD demands have a higher priority than this operator command. [Note:
Locally detected conditions on the Worker channel have a higher priority than
the Manual switch command].

Table 7.3: VC Protection Demand State Priorities

Switch State Priority Traffic On
Forced Switch To Worker 1 Worker
Forced Switch To Protection 2 Protection
Signal Fail (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel) 3 Worker
Signal Fail (Switch from Worker to Protection Channel) 4 Protection
Signal Degrade (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel) 5 Worker
Signal Degrade (Switch from Worker to Protection Channel) 6 Protection
Manual Switch To Worker 7 Worker
Manual Switch To Protection 8 Protection
Wait To Restore (Revertive mode only) 9 Protection
Do Not Revert (Non–Revertive mode only) 10 Protection
Remote Switch To Worker (Bi–directional mode only) 11 Worker
Remote Switch To Protection (Bi–directional mode only) 12 Protection
No Request on Protection (Switch from Protection to Worker Channel in Re-
vertive Mode only) 13 Protection
or Worker or Protection (in Non–Revertive mode only)

Marconi (Page 159) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

7.3 CARD PROTECTION

7.4 PSU PROTECTION

Power Supply Unit Protection is achieved by utilising two PSUs supplying power to
the sub–rack simultaneously. The PSUs supply power to the backplane on a
power sharing basis.

In the case of the failure of any one PSU, the remaining PSU is capable of
supporting the whole sub–rack equipment population.

Note: When using the dual feed PSU variant 1HAK60550AFS, the two incoming feeds are
not commonly connected to both supplies, i.e. loss of a feed will cause the operational loss of a
PSU, however, one supply feed and PSU can still supply the whole of the rack card population.

7.5 SUMMARY OF PROTECTION STATE INITIATION

CONDITIONS

Table 7.4 summarises the conditions, whether manually or automatically initiated,

which will cause a change of Protection state.

Table 7.4: Summary of Protection State Initiation

Conditions
Type of Protection Initiation Condition
MSP, SNC and Port Signal Fail on Worker
Signal Fail on Protection
Signal Degrade on Worker
Signal Degrade on Protection
Forced Switch to Worker
Forced Switch to Protection
Manual Switch to Worker
Manual Switch to Protection
Wait to Restore
Do Not Revert
Remote Request to use Worker
*Remote Request to use Protection
*No Request – Traffic on Worker
No Request – Traffic on Protection
NOTE *not applicable to Port Protection
PDH Tributary Card Lockout of Protection
Forced Switch to Protection
Restoration Triggered
Traffic on Worker
Traffic on Protection

Note: SNCP operation at 2M, where traffic is on Worker and there are no fault conditions
present, produces an initial protection state of “Remote Request to use Worker – Traffic on
Worker”.

Marconi (Page 160) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

7.6 1:N TRIBUTARY CARD PROTECTION

7.6.1 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards

The 1.5/2 Mbit/s 1:N Tributary Card Protection scheme provides protection in the
event of the failure of a 1.5/2 Mbit/s Tributary Card only. It provides for the
automatic or manually initiated (via a command from the Element Manager or a
Local Terminal (LCT)) functional replacement of a faulty ‘Worker’ card by a live
spare card already in in the sub–rack. Protection can only be extended to one card
at any one time.

Note: Only a 32 port 1.5/2Mbit/s card 1HAT60707AAD should only be configured in the
Protection slot. The protection slot is not for use with any other rate protection arrangement.

The change–over is effected via a dedicated 2Mbit/s Protection bus on the

sub–rack backplane. The advantage of a dedicated 2Mbit/s Protection Bus is that
the limitation imposed by a specific physical arrangement of 2Mbit/s Tributary
cards, relative to the Protection card, has been removed.

• When required, other (non 2M) trib cards may be fitted in between the
protection card and the card(s) to be protected though this is not a
recommended practice.

On the failure of the worker card, an alternative route for the signal, to the
Protection Tributary card, is provided via the Protection Bus.

• When change–over is initiated, the Multiplex Controller Card then invokes

action that ensures traffic is selected from the Protection Tributary Card and the
protected card is cleared of traffic.
LTU Slot 10

LTU Slot 11

LTU Slot 12

LTU Slot 13

LTU Slot 14

LTU Slot 15

LTU Slot 16
LTU Slot 1

LTU Slot 2

LTU Slot 3

LTU Slot 4
LTU Slot 5

LTU Slot 6

LTU Slot 7

LTU Slot 8

LTU Slot 9
Chans 17 to 24

Chans 25 to 32

Chans 17 to 24

Chans 25 to 32

Chans 17 to 24

Chans 25 to 32

Chans 17 to 24

Chans 25 to 32

Chans 17 to 24

Chans 25 to 32
Chans 9 to 16

Chans 9 to 16

Chans 9 to 16

Chans 9 to 16

Chans 9 to 16
Chans 1 to 8

Chans 1 to 8

Chans 1 to 8

Chans 1 to 8

Chans 1 to 8

TRIB SLOT 1 TRIB SLOT 2 TRIB SLOT 3 TRIB SLOT 4 PROTN. SLOT

Figure 7.4 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card 1:N protection

Note: The 2Mbit/s Protection buses shown in Figure 7.4 are parallelled along the
backplane rather than in series. As a result the Protection bus will not be broken as a
consequence of LTU switching. The bus is tracked to the normal traffic ports on the 2Mbit/s
Protection card.

Note: Note that the Protection Tributary Card is not required for SMA–1/4(4+4) and
SMA–1/4(8). There is a separate slot on the SMA–1/4c/uc for the Protection Tributary Card.

Marconi (Page 161) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

7.7 34/45/140MBIT/S, 34M TRANSMUX, VC–AM, STM–1

TRIBUTARY CARDS
Note: All 140Mbit/s, STM–1 Electrical and Dual Electrical Tributary cards require LTUs for
1:N tributary protection.

Adjacent sets of 34, 45, 140Mbit/s and STM–1 (Electrical) cards may be
configured as in a 1:N group where the protection card is the furthest right hand
card of the continuous set. Adjacent pairs of cards may be configured as Worker
and Protection. Up to four pairs of tributary cards may use 1:1 card protection
within the configuration.

The 1:N 34/45/140Mbit/s Tributary, STM–1 Tributary, 34Mbit/s Transmux and

VC–AM Card Protection scheme enables the automatic functional replacement of
a faulty worker card by a live protection card (see Figure 7.5). The equipping rules
are as follows:–

a) It can only be applied to narrow–bandwidth slots.

b) It operates on per–card basis only, not per port.

c) The worker and protection card should be the same type and use the same type of
LTU. A Protection LTU must be fitted for 1:N Protection to work.

The LTU transmits the traffic coming from the Worker card and discards traffic
from the Protection card. In the receive direction the traffic is broadcast from the
LTU to both Worker and Protection tributary cards.

Marconi (Page 162) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

TRAFFIC

PROTECTION
LTU
LTU

LTU

LTU
LTUs
3 to N-2

M/HBit PROTECTION BUS

PROTECTION TRIBUT ARY CARD

TRIBS

TRIB CARD N-1

TRIB CARD N
3 to N-2
TRIB CARD 1

TRIB CARD 2

Note: This illustrates the scheme for 1:N protection of 34/45M, 140M and STM–1/4 tributary
cards. In this example, the Tributary Card at position N is faulty, therefore the Mux Controller has
initiated the switch–over of traffic via the Protection Tributary Card and Protection LTU.
Figure 7.5 High–order Tributary Card 1:N protection

7.8 1+1 PDH TRIBUTARY PORT PROTECTION

7.8.1 Introduction

The Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) Tributary Port Protection scheme

provides protection against both in–station interface failure and tributary circuit
failure. The scheme requires the use of two ports and duplicated cabling for each
protected signal. The arrangement is illustrated in Figure 7.6.

Duplicated signals, each via a dedicated cable, are each terminated at a different
tributary port. The terminating ports may be on either the same or different
Tributary Cards, but may not be normally routed via the protection tributary card
except during tributary card protection.

Marconi (Page 163) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

= PROTECTION ZONE COMMS/CONTROLLER

CARD

PORT SELECT

SWITCH ALARM
FUNCTION DATA
CONFIG

STM-N SELECTED
SWITCH FUNCTION
LINE TU LEVEL
SIGNAL STM-N LINE FUNCTION SIGNAL
(WEST) SWITCH FUNCTION
CONFIGURATION
CONTROL C
O
N
DUPLICATED T
QUALITY FLAGS TU LEVEL R
SIGNALS O
L
B
U
DUPLICATED SAME OR DIFFERENT S
INTERFACE TRIBUTARY
SIGNALS CARDS ALARM
DATA

Figure 7.6 Tributary Port Protection

Quality flags go to the switch card which assesses the quality of of each input on
the basis of received alarm status information and ensures that the card is
configured such that the best quality traffic is connected to Line.

7.8.2 Modes of Operation

Table 7.5 gives the number of protected PDH channels a version of SMA can
operate.

The protection mechanism operates automatically. The switching criteria are

detected by the tributary cards and the relevant SF/SD flags inserted into the
internal traffic overhead on the interface cards. The Switch unit provides the
switching function. The protection mechanism may also be operated manually via
the Local Terminal or the Element Manager. The protection is unidirectional and
both revertive and non–revertive.

Should the traffic be currently selected from the ‘Protection port’ and port
protection is removed, the protection mechanism automatically selects traffic from
the ‘Worker port’.

Table 7.5: SMA Protected PDH

Channels
PDH Channel SMA–1 SMA–4
1.5/2M 64 ports 128 ports
34/45M 6 ports 12 ports
140M Trib 2 ports 10 ports

Note: The above are maximum figures for single bit rates.

Marconi (Page 164) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

7.8.2.1 Wait To Restore and Do Not Revert

Either a ‘Wait To Restore’ (WTR) or ‘Do Not Revert’ state condition applies when a
Worker port recovers from a failure, according to how the system has been set up
by the Network Management Operator.

In revertive mode of operation, the Wait To Restore state automatically applies

when a worker port recovers from a failure. Change to the Wait To Restore state is
inhibited if a higher priority condition exists when the Worker port recovers.

When the WTR state occurs, a timer is set. The condition is de–activated upon
expiry of the timer period. The condition is de–activated if a higher priority
condition is received during the timer period. The timer is an option which can be
configured by the operator, selectable from 0 to 30 minutes in one minute steps
("5s). The WTR period can be configured both globally and on an individual port
basis for protected ports. The default value is 10 minutes.

Note: The operator is only be able to retrieve WTR values from the NE on an individual port
basis.

The Do Not Revert state occurs subject to the same conditions as WTR. However,
there is no timer associated. The state remains active until a higher level condition
is received, at which point it is reset by a re–configuration action into revertive
mode.

7.8.3 Protection Switching Criteria

7.8.3.1 Failure Detection

The two criteria are used to indicate the status of the two protected PDH ports are
the SF and SD flags. The interface cards generate these flags and the Switch unit
receives them and uses them to trigger the next stage of the protection switching
sequence.

A failure indication is raised if one or more of the following conditions is detected :–

a) Loss of Tributary input.

b) Loss of Frame Alignment.

c) Receipt of AIS.

d) Excessive Bit Error Ratio (EBER) – defined as a nominal bit error ratio greater
than 10–3. The condition can be Enable or Disable, the default being Enable.

e) Signal Degrade (SD) – this may be operator configured to the following:–

• Disabled (SD is never raised).

• Raised on BER (bit error ratio greater than a single preset threshold in the
range of 10–9 to 10–5).
• Raised on unacceptable short term error performance (USE).
Note: The default SD criteria is USE.

Marconi (Page 165) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

Failure conditions cause insertion of a Signal Fail (SF) flag into the internal frame
to the Switch unit for the appropriate PDH port.

The Signal Fail and Signal Degrade indications are passed to the Switch unit using
the internal traffic interface. The Switch unit monitors the SF and SD flags from the
receiving units by polling every 8ms. The states are returned to the protection
switching control mechanism.

7.8.3.2 Priority of Failure Conditions

The PDH port selected as the source of selected traffic is shown in Table 7.6.

Table 7.6: Priority of Failure Conditions

Priority Switch State Selected Channel
1 Forced Switch (Protn.) Worker
2 Forced Switch (Wch) Protection
3 Signal Fail (Protn) Worker
4 Signal Fail (Wch) Protection
5 Signal Degrade (Protn.) Worker
6 Signal Degrade (Wch) Protection
7 Manual Switch (Protn.) Worker
8 Manual Switch (Wch) Protection
9 ‘Wait To Restore’ Protection
10 ‘Do Not Revert’ Protection

7.8.4 Protection Switching Control

7.8.4.1 Protection Switching Operation

The interface cards process the traffic from duplicated ports completely
independently and pass the traffic from each input port, with its SD/SF flags to the
Switch unit. This unit determines from which port the traffic quality is higher and
selects traffic from that channel based on these flags – but taking into account the
priority of failure conditions as described in Paragraph 7.8.3.2.

On configuration the identity of duplicate input ports of protected ports is

down–loaded from the Mux Controller to the Switch unit, so that on receipt of a
SF/SD failure condition or a request to switch to either input of a particular port,
traffic may be selected from the appropriately numbered port.

At the outgoing traffic ports, the Switch unit duplicates the output signals to the
output ports corresponding to the duplicated protected input ports. Any decision
regarding the quality of the traffic at the output ports must be made by equipment
external to the SMA.

7.8.4.2 Operator commands for PDH Port Protection

Control of the Protection operation is determined by the configuration of the

different related parameters (see the appropriate Operator manual). These are
entered either via the Local Terminal or from the Element Manager and are
summarised below:–

Marconi (Page 166) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

a) ‘Worker Port’/‘Protection Port’ – for each port to be protected, the operator

enters the ‘Worker Port’ and the ‘Protection Port’ (these could be defined each by
a slot number and a port number). Worker and protection port designation cannot
be changed thereafter, only removed.

b) Operating mode – i.e. Revertive/Non–revertive mode of operation.

c) Wait To Restore’ period.

To control the protection mechanism, the operator can use the following
commands:–

a) Forced Switch To Worker – causes traffic to switch to, or be maintained on the

designated Worker port. The command has a higher priority than locally detected
failures on the Worker port and hence traffic will remain on the Worker port
regardless of any failure indications on this port.

b) Forced Switch To Protection – causes traffic to switch to, or be maintained on

the designated protection port. The command has a higher priority than locally
detected failures on the protection port and hence traffic will remain on the
protection port regardless of any failure indications on this port.

c) Manual Switch To Worker – causes traffic to switch to or be maintained on the

designated Worker port unless a higher priority switch state is in effect and also
has a lower priority than locally detected conditions on the protection port.

d) Manual Switch To Protection – causes traffic to switch to or be maintained on

the protection port unless a higher priority switch command is in effect.

e) Clear – clears any of the above commands and also any active WTR states.

7.9 ILLUSTRATION OF SERIES 4 PROTECTION OPTIONS

7.9.1 SMA–1/4c/uc 2M Tributary Card Protection

2Mbit/s traffic is available from the Core Cards and two tributary cards.

Figure 7.7 shows how 2Mbit/s traffic is provided and protected by the Core.
Hence, when Core Card protection is invoked, then the 32x2Mbit/s traffic is
protected. For SMA1/4c/uc, Core Trib B protects Core Trib A.

Marconi (Page 167) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

64

Core A Core B

Figure 7.7 2Mbit/s protected from the

Core

Figure 7.8 shows a 2Mbit/s solution, whereby 64x2Mbit/s is achieved from two
tributaries.Up to 32 of the 64 x 2Mbit/s ports can be protected by fitting the
protection 2M trib card.

If 2Mbit/s protection is not required then a front access tributary card can be fitted.
Hence tributary 1 is always either a 2M protection tributary or a Front Access
tributary. Tributary 2 is always a Front Access tributary card.

64

Protection
OR
Front Front 2M Trib 2M Trib
Access Access Worker Worker
Trib Trib
Figure 7.8 2Mbit/s solution, protected or non–protected

7.9.2 SMA–1/4c/uc Higher Order Tributary Card Protection

Figure 7.9 shows a higher order solution, whereby 1:1 card protection is achieved
from two higher order tributaries.

Marconi (Page 168) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

Tributaries 3 and 4 are fitted with two higher order tributaries.

Protection
OR
Front Front Non–2M Non–2M
Access Access Trib Trib
Trib Trib Worker Worker

Figure 7.9 Non 2M solution (34M/45M, 140M, STM–1, Cellspan, VCAM)

protected and non protected

7.9.3 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 1.5/2M Protection

1.5/2Mbit/s tributary protection for up to 4 tributary cards for SMA–1/4(4+4) is

illustrated in Figure 7.10. The protection ‘card’ for a 1:N scheme is located on the
core cards as a 32x1.5/2M tributary module. Protection for up to 8 tributary cards
for SMA–1/4(8) is achieved in a similar way.

Marconi (Page 169) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

T1 Traffic LTUs
(all rates)
or
1.5/2M LTU
for Core Trib Mode
Direct control lines

Core card
master/slave T P T P T P T P T = Trib Traffic
status P = Protection

Protection bus
64 wires

64 64 64 64

1.5/2M 1.5/2M
Trib Trib FPU FPU FPU FPU
only only only only
Core A Core B

1:1 1.5/2M from Core cards T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

(Core Trib Mode)
or
Core cards provide
1:N protection Figure 7.10 1.5/2M Protection for SMA–1/4(4+4)

7.9.4 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 1+1 Core Tributary Mode Protection

SMA–1/4 supports up to 128 (single row LTUs)or 256 (dual row LTUs) channels of
1:N protected 1.5/2M tributary traffic. These channels are provided by up to 4
(single row LTUs) or 8 (dual row LTUs) tributary cards in blocks of 32.

However, it is a feature of Series 4 that the SDH Core Card contains the 1.5/2M
protection tributary and so no seperate protection card is needed for the 1:N
scheme. As a consequence, the first 32 tributary channels (associated with the
first tributary slot) can be supported without the need to fit the 1.5/2M tributary
card. This is achieved by logically configuring Tributary slot 1 with a 1.5/2M card
and then forcing a protection switch. This is called ‘Core Trib Mode’ – see
Figure 7.11 A. The master Core card then drives the traffic LTUs associated with
Tributary slot 1 and is protected by the slave Core Card using the Core protection
scheme.

When more than 32 ports of protected traffic are required at least 2 tributary cards
must be fitted – See Figure 7.11 B.

Marconi (Page 170) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

LTU#1 switched LTUs switched to

to ‘protection’ ‘worker’ if no
faults exist

T = Trib Traffic
T P T P T P
P = Protection

Protection bus Protection bus

64 64

1.5/2M 1.5/2M 1.5/2M 1.5/2M

Trib Trib Trib Trib

Core A Core B Core A Core B

(master) (slave)
T1 Core Cards provide T1 T2
1:N protection
1:1 1.5/2M from Core cards
(Core Trib Mode) T1 configured T1& T2 configured
(no card in slot) (cards fitted in slots)

Figure 7.11 Fig A: Core Trib Mode Fig B: ‘Normal’ 1:N Protection

7.9.5 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – 34/45M, 34M Transmux, 140M, STM–1

and VCAM Protection

For SMA–1/4(8) up to 7 tributary cards can be protected by a single protection

card in a 1:N scheme. Multiple protection groups can also be supported. For
SMA–1/4(4+4), up to 3 tributary cards can be protected.

Marconi (Page 171) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

Protection LTU
T = Trib Traffic P = Protection for 1:N scheme

LTU
Direct
control
lines P P P P P P P

T T T T T T T T

VCAM 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 wire
and ATM 1:1 interfaces
protection 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
connections

Protection

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Figure 7.12 SMA–1/4(8) – 34/45M, 140M, STM–1 and VCAM Protection

Marconi (Page 172) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

7.9.6 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – ATM and ETA Tributary Card

Protection

T8 TrafficLTUs(all rates)
or LTUs T1
1:1 2M Core cards Traffic
LTUs
Direct control lines

Core card
master/slave T P T P
status

Protection bus 64
wires

64 wires 64 wires

2M 2M
Trib Trib

Core A Core B T4 T1
1:1 2M from Core cards
or T = Traffic
P = Protection
Core cards provide 1:N protection

Figure 7.13 SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) – ATM and ETA Tributary Card Protection

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 173) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 7: PROTECTION

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 174) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

CHAPTER 8:
COMMUNICATIONS

8.1 INTRODUCTION

CAUTION
Network Data Communications Configuration Parameters must not be
altered without the authorisation of the Network Design Authority. To do so can
result in loss of Network Data Communications and may only be resolved through
recourse to a site visit.

Communication channels are provided between:–

• The Element Manager (for use by an Operator) and the Gateway Multiplexer,
via an Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).
• The Gateway Multiplexer and the other SMA elements of the network, via the
Data Communication Channel (DCC) bytes in the STM frame structure.

MUX CONTROL MUX CONTROL

FUNCTION FUNCTION
4 TRANSPORT 4 TRANSPORT

3 NETWORK
NSAP 3 NETWORK

2 DATA LINK LAPD 2 DATA LINK

1 PHYSICAL DCCs 1 PHYSICAL

DCCs IN ETHERNET
COMMS STM FRAME COMMS
FUNCTION FUNCTION

NETWORK GATEWAY ELEMENT

ELEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT MANAGER

Figure 8.1 Communications In SDH Networks

8.2 PROTOCOL

The communications protocol between Network Elements (NE) and the Element
Manager is based on the ISO Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) seven–layer
model. However, only the first four layers of the OSI model are implemented for
the SMA series (see Figure 8.1). Each layer performs a specific function and
interfaces only with those layers directly adjacent to it. The layers implemented
are:–

• Physical Layer – provides the means to transmit bits of data across a

continuous communication path. This layer is concerned with the electrical,
optical and mechanical requirements of a communication link. The point to
point bearer of the communication link may be copper wire, coaxial cable,
optical fibre etc.

Marconi (Page 175) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

• Data Link Layer – provides framing for data transfer across a physical
connection. The data link layer detects and, where possible, recovers from
transmission errors. Where recovery is not possible, the network layer is
notified of the error. Various protocols identify the start and end of each frame.
• Network Layer – the responsibility of the network layer is to establish a reliable
communications stream between a pair of systems. It resolves routeing of data
between elements and controls congestion avoidance. To facilitate routeing,
each Network Element (NE) in an OSI network is defined by a unique ‘Network
Service Access Point’ (NSAP) address.
• Transport Layer – ensures error free end to end flow of data. It covers flow
control, buffering and multiplexing, and also manages call connection and
clear–down.

8.3 IMPLEMENTATION

8.3.1 Introduction

Management of the system requires communication between the Element

Manager and an SMA Gateway Multiplexer and all other SMA Network Elements
in the network. The communication link between the Element Manager and the
SMA Gateway Multiplexer is via an Ethernet LAN (IEEE 802.3).
Intercommunication between all other SMA elements in the network is via Data
Communication Channel (DCC) bytes in the STM frame, or via embedded LANs,
using the Ethernet protocol.

The communications network can support the following topological

characteristics:–

• Intersecting rings.
• Multiple Element Managers (EM).
• Multiple Gateway Network Elements (GNE) on an Ethernet.
• Multiple GNEs on a ring.
• Interworking between SMAs and SLA line systems.
• ‘Mesh’ networks.

Physically, the communications function for Network Element applications is

processed by the Multiplexer Controller Card and the Communications Card, with
the former dealing with Transport Layer (4) level communications to the Element
Manager and the latter controlling lower layer functions.

In the Gateway Multiplexer application a full–functionality Communications Card

provides ‘Q’ interface functionality for communications with the Element Manager
via an Ethernet LAN (see paragraph 8.3.2).

Communications configuration parameters can be displayed, set or altered via the

Local Terminal (LCT) and Element Manager, as given in full in the appropriate
Element Manager and LCT Operator Manuals, the following are the principal
parameter levels:–

• Transport Layer

Marconi (Page 176) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

• Gateway Interface
• Network Layer
• IS–IS/ES–IS Configuration
• Performance Counts (from the LCT only).
• Routeing Table Display
• CLNS Ping (from the LCT only).
• DCC Configuration
• LAPD Configuration
Note: When commissioning a new SMA into a network, the communications parameters
must be entered via a LCT at the element itself, subsequent changes can be made remotely
via the Element Manager or using LCT Single Ended Maintenance (SEM).

8.3.2 End Systems, Intermediate Systems and Gateways

The purpose of a network is to communicate data from ‘End System’ (ES) to ‘End
System’. ‘Intermediate Systems (IS)’ provide the route (or ‘service’) for the transfer
of that data. In a GPT system an IS element can contain ES fuctionality and
therefore can be the destination or source of information as well as providing a
routeing function. Key to the communications process is how ‘elements’ within a
network know:

a) What their own identity is, i.e. Network Service Access Point (NSAP) address.

b) How to connect to other entities (‘route’).

An Element Manager can be connected to several Gateway Multiplexers

simultaneously via the Ethernet. The Gateway Multiplexers and the Element
Manager communicate with each other via ES–IS Protocol, with multicast
addresses which are recognised by all Gateway Multiplexers.

ES IS IS IS ES
gateway gateway
EM–OS A B
Workstation
Regenerator

IS IS

Ethernet Link Router

SMA–N
Regenerator
STM–N Link

In the network example above, there are the two types of Network Element which process
Network Management data, these are:
End Systems (ES) – these will only process messages intended for themselves.
Intermediate Systems (IS) – these will process messages intended for themselves, but also
will pass on messages intended for other elements

Figure 8.2 Network Element Management Data Communications

Marconi (Page 177) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The All–IS address identifies the target group of entities, (Gateway

Multiplexer/Element Manager) to which the multicast relates. Likewise for the
All–ES address (refer to paragraph 8.4.6.1 for further details of addressing).

8.3.3 Ethernet Local Area Network

The implementation of management of an SMA network can be achieved

physically by an Ethernet cable link to the SMA gateway element.

The Ethernet LAN can support communication with non–GPT equipment. SMAs
are equipped with a AUI interface, which when used with an appropriate MAU can
connect to the Ethernet link using following types of Ethernet link cabling
standards:–

• ‘Thick’ Ethernet – using 10Base5 standard.

• ‘Thin’ Ethernet – using 10Base2 standard.
• Unshielded twisted pair (UTP) – using 10BaseT standard.
Note: Refer to Chapter 28, Chapter 29 or Chapter 30 for further details.

8.4 COMMUNICATIONS ROUTEING

8.4.1 Introduction

Communications routeing between elements in a network can be based on either

of the following:–

• The ISO ‘IS–IS’ protocol (ref. ISO 10589) which provides a dynamic solution to
routeing CLNP and is a ‘link state protocol’.
• ‘Interim Static Routeing Algorithm’ (ISRA) routeing (prior to R1.21.4), an interim
method which involves the generation of static routeing tables.
• Default mechanisms.

The routeing requirements shown in Table 8.1 are supported, where ‘Q’ is the
CCITT Interface used with the SMA series for Network Management via the
Element Manager and ‘DCC’ are the Data Communications Channels within the
STM–N frame.

Table 8.1: Communications Routeing Requirements

to/from to/from
Q DCCr
Q DCCm
Q Control Sub–system
DCCr DCCr
DCCr DCCm (not default routeing)
DCCr Control Sub–system
DCCm DCCm
DCCm Control Sub–system
(not default routeing)

Marconi (Page 178) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

Note: For routeing to the PacketSpan expansion module (ETX10), the comms function
handles a “tunneling” Data Domain messages (SNMP) procedure through an SDH OSI
DCN.The protocol conversion function used for ‘tunnelling’ consists of converting the SNMP
transport protocol from its ‘native’ UDP to OSI transport protocol.

8.4.2 Data Communications Channels

Management communication data can be routed from IS to IS via the Data

Communication Channel (DCC) bytes in the STM frame structure. ‘DCCr’ apply to
the Regenerator Section Overhead frame position and ‘DCCm’ to the Multiplex
Section Overhead frame position. When setting up GPT Multiplexer networks, a
choice must be made as to which DCC are used for communications within any
particular sub–network.

8.4.3 LAPD Protocol

The Link Access Procedure on the ‘D’–channel (LAPD) protocol is used for the
data link layer for communications. It requires that each STM port, whether line or
tributary, has to be set up as either in User mode or in Network mode.

Setting up during commissioning is via the LCT at the element, but subsequent
changes can be made remotely via the LCT using Single Ended Maintenance or
via the Element Manager.

Note: As long as both ends of of a link are different, i.e. one end has to be allocated ‘User’
and the other ‘Network, which element is which is arbitrary.

It is assumed that the East STM line position of an equipment is connected to the
West STM line position of the adjacent equipment and so on. The default values
are:–

• West (all)
Network
• East
User
• Tribs 1–7
User
• HB Tribs
User
Note: On addition of a card, the card adopts the slot specific default DCC and LAPD
configuration parameters . Any time one of the card working settings is taken off, the default
value for that card position should also be changed.

8.4.4 IS–IS Routeing

8.4.4.1 Introduction

Only IS–IS routeing is supported by SMA Series 4 products. Both the two
sub–domains, Level 1 and Level 2, are managed.

Marconi (Page 179) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The IS–IS routeing protocol implements routeing, by calculating optimum routes

based on dynamically collected information about the topology of the network, at
the initiation of the network. It also dynamically adapts to changes within the
network topology, recalculating routes when changes occur.

This method has replaced existing default routeing algorithms and Interim
Routeing algorithms (ISRA) from R1.21.4 onwards.

The IS–IS Protocol uses two new types of Protocol Data Units (PDU), ‘Hello’
PDUs (or ‘neighbour greeting’) and Link–State Packet (LSP) PDUs. These are the
fundamental packets of data all elements in a network make available to each
other. The PDUs contain the identity, location, status and condition of the links
between them.

When a network is initiated, IS elements begin by learning about elements to

which they share direct connectivity, i.e. in the same sub–network, via ‘Hellos’. IS
elements then construct a Link–State Packet, which contains a list of their
neighbours and the ‘cost’ to reach each neighbour (based on a system of ‘cost’
metrics), the IS elements then distribute the LSPs to all other IS elements. On
completion of the process, each IS will have received a complete map of the
network topology in the form of LSPs.

Each IS element uses these LSPs to compute routes to every destination in the
network. The route choice is the ‘least cost’ route.

Should the topology change, e.g. a new element is added, the IS–IS protocol
initiates a regeneration of the routeing table scheme and the relevant information
is made available via the network links to all the elements in the network, i.e. the
network is ‘flooded’ with the new information.

8.4.4.2 IS–IS Routeing Protocol Operation

Figure 8.3 shows how IS–IS routeing protocol would operate within a simple
network. The numbered elements in the hypothetical network consist of SMA IS
and Element Manager elements. The IS elements have multiple ports
communicating with other IS or ES.

Marconi (Page 180) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

Ethernet Link

STM–N Link
1

Port

Element n Network Element

Manager via Q i/f

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
a

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
b a b a

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
2 3 4

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ c c

a a

b c b c
5 6
rest of rest of
network network

Figure 8.3 IS–IS Routeing

Table 8.2: IS–IS Element Routeing Table

Element to which route is required Preferred Port by which data must communicate
1 a
3 b
4 b
5 c
6 c

When a network is initiated, the IS–IS Protocol creates routeing tables within each
IS element in the network. The tables describe which port of the element data
must be directed via, to reach any other element in the network (either IS or ES).
The example given in Table 8.2 applies to element 2 (shown shaded) in
Figure 8.3.

8.4.4.3 Metrics

Metric values are applicable to Gateway Interfaces, Reachable Address Prefixes

(RAP) and DCC interfaces. Each type of interface is assigned a default value for
the metric. This may be changed via an LCT or Element Manager.

Default values are as follows:–

• 10 – Ethernet.
• 15 – DCCm bytes.

Marconi (Page 181) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

• 20 – DCCr bytes.

8.4.4.4 Maximum Path Splits

If there are two or more equal cost routes between two elements, the protocol
allows for handling the routeing in the following ways, either:–

• A Maximum Path Split value of 1 (the default value) is defined during the
Network configuration, in which case routeing will be across one path only, all
other paths of equal cost being discarded, or:–
• A Maximum Path Split value of 2 is defined during the Network configuration, in
which case routeing will be toggled at ]15 minute intervals across two paths,
any further paths of equal cost being discarded.

8.4.4.5 External Domain Flag

The Gateway Interface and DCC interfaces possess a parameter called the
External Domain Flag. If set to true, this would have the effect of isolating that
element from operating IS–IS protocol, preventing IS–IS protocols being
exchanged over the link, whilst still allowing communication to take place between
the IS–IS Boundary Nodes, in effect creating a IS–IS block. A possible use for this
would be to withhold network information from a competitor.

The block is not essential but sometimes needed to enable IS–IS networks to be
constructed. The block circumvents a limitation with IS–IS that only allows two
RAPs to a single destination under complex situations. The block is introduced into
the IS–IS network by marking the communication interface as ‘external’.

8.4.4.6 ES–IS

The IS–IS protocol in itself provides for communications routeing between IS

elements, but requires complementing with a method of ES to IS communication.
The protocol implemented in GPT systems for this purpose is ISO 9542. This uses
its own IS and ES ‘Hellos’ to establish communication which uses ES ‘Hellos’. An
ES ‘Hello’ enables an ES to announce itself to IS elements (and other ES
elements) on the same sub–network. The two significant factors are ‘who is out
there?’ and ‘with whom is it possible to communicate?’

Where the ES is attached to an Ethernet LAN, the ES periodically composes an

ES ‘Hello’, inserting its NSAP address(es), SNPA and a holding time in the ES
‘Hello’ packet, and sends this packet to the 48 bit multicast Medium Access
Control address (MAC) whose value has been set to registered GPT multicast
addresses as defined in ISO 10589.

8.4.4.7 Two–Level Hierarchy

In an SDH network in general, SDH Element rings and groups of SDH Element
rings will form single IS–IS Areas. The groupings of the rings will depend on the
amount of inter–connection of the rings.

Marconi (Page 182) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

Level 2 Routers are Elements that exist at the boundaries of Areas and are the
interfaces between the Areas (See Figure 8.4). The non–boundary Elements are
generally Level 1 Routers except where to improve resilience, a Level 2 Router
may be used between boundary Elements within an Area where greater resilience
is needed in the network.

Level 2 Routers know where each of the other L2 IS elements exist in the network
(if they all form a contiguous L2 network. Level 2 Routers also have Level 1 Router
functionality. Level 2 Routers are only concerned with the Area Address part of the
NSAP. Level 1 Routers are only concerned with the System ID (see Figure 8.5).

A Level 1 IS only knows about ES and other Level 1 IS elements in its own area
and about the ‘nearest’ Level 2 IS which it can use to forward traffic out of its own
area. A Level 2 IS knows about other Level 2 IS elements in the network (if they all
form a contiguous L2 network), the location of Level 1 Areas and the ‘best’ exit
Level 2 IS to use for traffic destined for other routeing domains.

Area x Link
Main delivery ring
all in one area
Area

L2 L1 Level 1 Element
L2
L2 Level 2 Element

* *Note:
could be L1 or L2,
Area y L2 would be chosen to
improve resilience
L2
*
L2 *L1 or L2, see L1
L2 note
Area z
Two–level hierarchy
L1 of subtended rings
L2 L1 L1 L1 L1 all in one area

Figure 8.4 IS–IS Area Partitioning for Hierarchical Element Rings

8.4.5 Multiple Areas Working in IS–IS

A Level 1 IS can be configured to route messages to elements in more than one

area (ie it recognises Multiple Areas). In the case of the SMA product, up to eight
addresses can be held by any one element.

This is achieved, during commissioning, by entering the Manual Area Address for
the element, and assigning a Maximum Area Address of the same value (in the
range 1 to 8, the default = 3) as all the other elements within the domain, with
which that element should associate. These elements then form a unique Level 1
area, ie two IS–IS routers can only become ‘neighbours’ if they have at least one
area address in common.

Marconi (Page 183) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

On initiation of the network, if say, there were ten elements with the Maximum
Area Address value of 5, the association process requires that only five discrete
Manual Area Addresses are used. These become common to all ten elements,
any further discrete Manual Area Addresses will be dropped (with an associated
alarm). Only the numerically lowest addresses will be retained.

Introducing Multiple Area capability has the advantage of simplification of network

strategies by expanding a Level 1 area to enable a reduction in Level 2 traffic.

8.4.5.1 Partition Repair

Partition repair is a mechanism by which the protocol circumvents a fault which

has caused a Level 1 area to be split into parts. The facility uses Level 2 links to
act as virtual Level 1 links to repair the split.

8.4.6 Network Service Access Points (NSAPs)

8.4.6.1 NSAP Addresses for IS – IS Routeing

In ISO terminology, the network layer provides a service, and a user or ‘client’ of
the network layer ‘attaches’ to the network layer with a NSAP (Network Service
Access Points). The NSAP is the principle identifier for any Element within a
Network. Individual NSAP lengths can be variable, however there is a maximum of
20 octets.

IS–IS Addresses or NSAPs consist of two main parts, the Area Address which is
everything up to but not including the System ID (SID) and the System ID itself
(plus the NSEL with a value of 01), this is illustrated in the top half of Figure 8.5.

Level 1 Routeing is only concerned with the System ID part of the NSAP. IS–IS
Area or Level 2 Routeing takes place on the Area (or ‘address prefix’) part of the
NSAP only, which is treated as a single field.

Area System ID
See Note SEL
(Level 2) (Level 1)

IS–IS Address Format

(an Authority)

AFI IDI HO–DSP GPT Domain ID System ID SEL

GPT Interim Routeing Algorithm Address Format

Figure 8.5 NSAP Address Formats

Note: The shaded part of the Area field indicates that it is possible to extend the SID (as
defined by the ‘System ID Length’ parameter), this is useful in certain circumstances to simplify
network planning.

The ‘SEL’ octet is of historical interest and was introduced during the
implementation of the ISO specification. It was originally provided to allow
identification of the network layer itself. In all GPT implementations, this will have
the value of 01.

Marconi (Page 184) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The SEL is used to distinguish between multiple upper layer entities (layer–4’s).
The value 00 is used for layer 3 itself.

8.4.6.2 NSAP Addresses – ISRA routeing

ISRA Routeing (Rev 1.21.35 and earlier) uses the X.121, ISO–DCC and
ISO–6523 ICD address structures. A simplified version is given in Figure 8.5.

8.4.7 Upgrading

The upgrading of an element from a previous release of software to IS–IS routeing

(R1.21.4 onwards) can be achieved locally via an LCT, or remotely via the Element
Manager (or remotely, via an LCT operating Single Ended Maintenance, where the
equipment configuration allows).

It is possible to configure the NSAP and any static routeing data (refer to ‘MA’ and
‘RAP’, Paragraph 8.4.9), prior to the running of the upgrade software. This will
minimise the possibility of disturbance to communications within the network.

8.4.8 Interworking

It is possible that the IS–IS Routeing protocol will be operating within groups of, or
adjacent to, network elements not operating the same routeing protocol or in the
same area. Interworking strategy must be decided during network planning and is
beyond the scope of this book.

8.4.8.1 ISRA Routeing (Software Revisions prior to 1.21.4)

Note: This is the routeing method used prior to R1.21.4, the following information is given for
situations where interworking of this method and IS–IS areas is envisaged.

The ISRA routeing solution uses a combination of the Default ‘Turn Left’ algorithm,
and static routeing tables which are manually created.

With ISRA Routeing, some or all of the NEs in a network contain static routeing
data. In principle this method works in the same way as IS–IS routeing (see
Figure 8.3) but without the dynamic functionality of IS–IS routeing.

The routeing data is derived from static routeing tables, which are constructed
using the RTC tool for each NE in the network.

8.4.9 Manual Adjacency (MA) and Reachable Address

Prefixes (RAP)

Given that other protocol(s), on the initiation of the network, cannot automatically
contribute data to the dynamic creation of Routeing tables, data identifying these
elements must be entered manually at the boundary elements operating the IS–IS
protocol.

Marconi (Page 185) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The data may be constructed manually, or may have to be constructed using the
RTC tool. It may be entered either locally using the LCT or remotely via the
Element Manager. The data is then passed automatically around the Domain as if
it had been received in an IS–IS update message. Two data types are used
according to the level of element being addressed:

a) Reachable Address Prefix (RAP). provides a method of interworking between

an IS–IS domain and an ISRA domain, where the ISRA domain nodes have
different area addresses from the IS–IS domain and border node. A Reachable
Address Prefix is therefore a Level 2 static route.

Note: Should equal cost paths exist, and provided the maximum path splits value is set to 2,
then the protocol will toggle routeing between the paths at 15 minute intervals.

Note: When the RAP is configured onto the Q interface, then the SNPA field should be
configured with the host LAN card MAC address.

b) Manual Adjacency entries provide a form of a mapping between system ID and

Port (plus the SNPA for an Ethernet (Q) port) in Level 1 areas. A list of system IDs
may be associated with that port, e.g. if there is a chain of elements not running
IS–IS protocol beyond the particular element assigned a MA.

8.4.10 CLNS Ping

CLNS ‘Ping’ or Packet Internet Groper, is an echo message and its reply, used to
test if a network element can be reached from another element, when operating
within a Connectionless Network Protocol.

Using the LCT, a ‘Ping’ can be chosen to be single or multiple shot and a route
trace can be displayed, if required, on receipt of a successful reply.

Note: ‘Pings’ cannot be applied to, or through non–IS–IS equipment, e.g. VCTM. The
elements must also have version 1.21.4 software or later. Given the previous conditions,
Pings can work across different IS–IS areas.

Note: Where a Partition Repair has occurred, the path trace will not show the path by which
the protocol has implemented the repair.

8.5 COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS USING THE

AUXILIARY CARD

8.5.1 Introduction

The auxiliary card passes information around an SDH transmission ring. The card
provides access to spare capacity in the STM overhead and can be used for a
number of purposes, the most common of which is the management of access
multiplexers. The card provides V11 channels at either 9.6kbit/s or 64kbit/s,
depending on the card version used. The channels may be used for any purpose
which requires a data channel at these speeds. It is also possible to use the
64kbit/s channels at 9.6kbit/s giving more channels of one type.

Two versions of the card are available:

Marconi (Page 186) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

• Version ‘0’ – 1HAT60004*** provides access to asynchronous V11 data

channels up to 9.6kbit/s. These channels are passed transparently and, using
suitable external message routeing equipments (e.g. RTUs), can be used for
management of associated equipments. Two status LEDs indicate a card fault
(red) or that the card is in service (amber).
• Version 0.1 – 1HAT60647*** incorporates all the facilities offered by the earlier
version with the addition of a further six ports to provide access to synchronous
64kbit/s data channels. It is possible to use this card as a direct replacement
for Version 0 without any change to existing cabling.
Note: The suffix *** represents a three–letter coding which is specific to certain customers.
The differences relate to the backplane polarising scheme and the appearance of the facia
and do not affect the working of the equipment in any way.

Note: Both Version ‘0’ and Version ‘0.1’ are compatible with all variants of SMA from release
1,1 upwards.

The card is a ‘Double Extended’ Eurocard with a width of 20.32mm. It is designed

to fit in a modified Type 88 shelf. EMC protection is provided by a shield over the
front of the card.

8.5.2 Features

The main features of the cards are:

a) Access to Line East and Line West 9.6kbit/s asynchronous channels. Each
external port consists of a V11 transmit pair and a V11 receive pair. The receive
signal is sampled at 64kbit/s.

b) Access to four tributary position 9.6kbit/s asynchronous channels (both

versions). It is possible to switch the access capacity from Tributary to Line, thus
providing an additional line channel at the expense of two tributary channels
(Version 0.1 only).

c) Access to Line East and Line West 64kbit/s synchronous channels (Version 0.1
only). Each external port consists of V11 pairs as described in (a)) plus two further
pairs carrying transmit and receive 64kbit/s clocks. Both clocks are output from
the card.

d) Access to four tributary position 64kbit/s synchronous channels. It is possible to

switch the access capacity from tributary to line, thus providing an additional line
channel at the expense of two tributary channels (Version 0.1 only).

e) Inventory storage and retrieval (Version 0.1 only).

f) Card Out alarm (both versions) and fault reporting (Version 0.1 only).

g) Selectable card configuration data stored in EPROM.

Access to the asynchronous channels is achieved via D–Type connectors on the

Auxiliary LTU. Access to the synchronous channels on Version 0.1 is via the
front–of–card connectors on the Auxiliary Card itself.

Marconi (Page 187) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The pin–out details of the Auxiliary LTU and on–card D–Type connectors are given
in Chapter 23 and Chapter 24.

Security by means of East A/East B and West A/West B switching is possible via
two hardware control signals on the backplane from the Mux Controller.

8.5.2.1 Auxiliary Card Version ‘0’

Table 8.3 shows the connections of auxiliary channels to line and tributaries for
Auxiliary card version ‘0’ via Auxiliary LTUs. Up to two Aux LTUs may be fitted to
access the following routes:

Table 8.3: Aux Channel Access Routes (V0)

9.6kbit/s Access (Via LTU)
LTU 1 (AUX 1&2) Auxiliary Port to/from
Upper port 1 (Aux Ch 1) Trib 1 (If STM–1)
AUX 1
Upper port 2 (Aux Ch 2) Trib 2 (If STM–1)
Lower port 1 (Aux Ch 3) Trib 3 (If STM–1)
AUX 2
Lower port 2 (Aux Ch 4) Trib 4 (If STM–1)
LTU 2 (AUX 3&4) Auxiliary Port to/from
Upper port 1 (Aux Ch 5) Line East (SOH Ch 1)
AUX 3
Upper port 2 (Aux Ch 6) Line West (SOH Ch 1)
AUX 4 Not used in this application

Note: Whilst both upper and lower connections to LTU 1 (slot AUX 1&2) are used, only the
upper connections to LTU 2 (slot AUX 3&4) are used to access Aux Channels 5 and 6.

8.5.2.2 Auxiliary Card Version V0.1

Version 0.1 of the Auxiliary Card supports the connection of additional 64kbit/s
auxiliary channels to Line at the expense of channels to Tributaries. For instance,
the channels normally connected to Tributaries 3 and 4 can be connected to East
A and West A respectively, as shown in Figure 8.6, leaving tributaries 3 and 4
unoccupied. This is achieved by the setting of DIL switches on the card. A different
switch setting allows the channels connected to Tributaries 1 and 2 to be
connected to West A and East A respectively, as well. Similar switches provide the
same function for the asynchronous ports.

Table 8.4 shows the connections of auxiliary channels to line and tributaries for
Auxiliary card version ‘V0.1’ via Auxiliary LTUs or front of card connectors. Up to
two Aux LTUs may be fitted to access the following routes:

Table 8.4: Aux Channel Access Routes V0.1

9.6kbit/s Access (Via LTU)
LTU 1 Aux Port To / From
Upper port 1 (Aux Ch 1) Trib 1 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 3)
Upper port 2 (Aux Ch 2) Trib 2 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 3)
Lower port 1 (Aux Ch 3) Trib 3 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 2)
Lower port 2 (Aux Ch 4) Trib 4 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 2)
LTU 2 Aux Port To / From
Upper port 1 (Aux Ch 5) Line East (SOH Ch 1) only
Upper port 2 (Aux Ch 6) Line West (SOH Ch 1) only
64kbit/s Access (Via Card Front Connectors)

Marconi (Page 188) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8.4:(Cont)Aux Channel Access Routes V0.1

Aux Port Connector To / From
Connector 1 (Aux Ch 1) Line West (SOH Ch 1)
Connector 2 (Aux Ch 2) Trib 1 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 3)
Connector 3 (Aux Ch 3) Trib 4 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 2)
Connector 4 (Aux Ch 4) Line East (SOH Ch 1) only
Connector 5 (Aux Ch 5) Trib 2 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 3)
Connector 6 (Aux Ch 6) Trib 3 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 2)

DIL Switches
DIL Switches
Aux Ch 1 Trib 1 (SOH Ch 1) Trib 1 (SOH Ch 1)
Aux Ch 2
Line West (Ch3) Line West (SOH Ch 3)

Trib 2 (SOH Ch 1) Trib 4 (SOH Ch 1)

Aux Ch 2 Aux Ch 3
Line East (Ch3) Line West (SOH Ch 2)

Trib 3 (SOH Ch 1) Aux Ch 5 Trib 2 (SOH Ch 1)

Aux Ch 3
Line East (Ch2) Line East (SOH Ch 3)
Trib 3 (SOH Ch 1)
Aux Ch 6
Aux Ch 4 Trib 4 (SOH Ch 1) Line East (SOH Ch 2)
Line West (Ch2)
Aux Ch 5 Aux Ch 1 Line West (SOH Ch 1)
Line East (SOH Ch 1)
Aux Ch 4 Line East (SOH Ch 1)
Aux Ch 6 Line West (SOH Ch 1)

9.6kbit/s Access 64kbit/s Access

Figure 8.6 Auxiliary Card V0.1 DIL Switch Func-
tion

8.5.3 Auxiliary LTUs

One Auxiliary LTU 1HAM60786***, provides 2 off 9 pin ‘D type’ connectors for two
auxiliary channels. One to two LTUs can be fitted to provide connections as
follows:

8.5.4 By–pass

Overhead by–pass is provided for sites where the data is not used locally. For the
asynchronous channels this is achieved by wiring the ports together on the
Ancillary Unit.

On Version 0.1 synchronous ports, this method cannot be used, as the timing
requirements may not be met. Instead, six re–timing circuits are provided and
these are controlled by DIL switches. This enables each synchronous input to be
routed to receive data from its front–of–card connector or from any output
including its own. This provides any by–pass that may be required, as well as a
64kbit/s loopback option. The output for any port is inhibited when its input is not
routed from its own front connector.

When a synchronous by–pass is invoked the phase of the associated transmit and
receive clocks is compared and, if necessary, re–timed.

Marconi (Page 189) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.5 Clocks

There are two 38.88MHz clock inputs at 5V CMOS levels, one from each Switch
Card. One input is designated Clock A and the ASIC is normally configured to use
this input. A failure of this clock will be detected within 10 microseconds and the
card will be automatically switched to Clock B. In the unlikely event of both clocks
failing, the card will shut down.

8.5.6 A/B Line Security

Switching between East A/East B, or West A/West B, is achieved via two control
signals on the backplane which select from four configurations stored in EPROM.
These allow interworking with East A/West A, East A/West B, East B/ West A or
East B/ West B.

8.5.7 Alarm Indications

An alarm condition exists when the card is either reset or is not powered, possibly
due to a blown fuse. The reset circuit is invoked when the supply to the card falls
below 4.4V or whenever a fault is detected. Following a reset, a fault latch is
inhibited for a time sufficient for devices on the card to take up the initial input
conditions.

The red LED on the card, when lit by itself, indicates a fault condition. This may be
due to loss of switch clocks or that the card has not completed configuration after
a reset. Under normal conditions the card provides a ‘Card Present’ signal to the
Mux Controller. On Version 0.1 only, the ‘Card Present’ signal is removed if a card
fault condition is detected.

The amber LED, when lit by itself, indicates that configuration has been
successfully completed and the card is in service.

Both LEDs lit simultaneously indicates that an A to B or B to A change–over is in

progress on Line East or Line West.

8.5.8 Auxiliary Card Applications

An example of the use of an Auxiliary Card is the omnibus handling of client

telemetry, via RTUs, both around a ring and on STM tributaries.

Each external port consists of a V11 transmit pair and a V11 receive pair. The
receive signal is sampled at 64kbit/s.

At the head–end, access to the network controller is via an RTU. On a ring, an

RTU is provided to control the transmission of data between tributaries and
East/West, so switching of data within the Auxiliary Card is not required. Where
RTUs are down tributary lines, the Auxiliary Card on the ring provides V11
interfaces connected to the tributary OH–buses.

On the backplane, up to 8 overhead buses (depending on the shelf type) are

connected to the Auxiliary Card. For example, on SMA–1 these are East A and B,
West A and B, and tributaries 1, 2, 3 and 4. SMA–1c uses a subset of these. Each
bus comprises four wires, Rx data, Rx frame sync, Tx data and Tx frame sync.

Marconi (Page 190) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

This typical application is shown in Figure 8.7. Other arrangements of time–slots

versus V11 ports are possible within the restrictions shown in the figure.

WA EA
WB OH OH EB
ASIC SMA ASIC
T1 T3
T2 T4

AUXILIARY T1 T4 W E T3 T2 TYPICAL ROUTEINGS

CARD V11 ONLY
I/F

RTUs RTU RTU

CMUX
(for example) HHT/COMMS PORTS

Figure 8.7 Auxiliary Card: System Application

No provision is made for the RTU relay contact alarm. It is assumed that failure of
the RTU will be detected by the recognition of communication failure. In ring and
star topology this will be handled by other RTUs.

An example of a ring controlling C–Mux products using RTUs and Concentrators is

given in Figure 8.8. The Auxiliary Card provides access to the Line East and Line
West and to the four tributary positions. All message routeing control is performed
by the RTUs.

Marconi (Page 191) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

C–MUX RS422 RTU (9.6kbit/s)

MCU (64kbit/s) Local Alarms
C–MUX 9.6kbit/s Async or If the 64kbit/s synchronous data
64kbit/s Sync channels are connected directly
Aux Card to the C–MUX, then an MCC
must be provided at the C_MUX
64k Overhead
East West
C–MUX C–MUX
Local Alarms 64k Overhead
Trib Access
9.6kbit/s Async or East
64kbit/s Sync West Trib
1 RS422

RTU Trib
or Aux 2
MCU Card
Conc

RS422 64k Overhead East Trib

C–MUX 3
RS422 West East West Trib Local Alarms
C–MUX 4 Aux Card

9.6kbit/s Async or
64k Overhead 64kbit/s Sync
Aux Card

9.6kbit/s Async or Aux Channels to other Rings

64kbit/s Sync
Note: Access to 64 kbit/s
Concentrator Local Alarms synchronous data channels is only
available via version 0.1 of the Auxiliary
Card.
To Local Terminal
Figure 8.8 Control and Data Collection

If a data channel must be by-passed at a node in the ring, the input channel must
be configured to communicate with the output channel and vice versa. For
9.6kbit/s channels normally connected via the Auxiliary LTU, this is achieved by
wiring two ports together. For channels normally connected via the front panel of
Aux0.1 this is not allowed because of interface timing requirements. Instead, DIL
switches on the card must be configured to control the by-pass circuits. Further
DIL switches control the allocation of ports to lines.

Marconi (Page 192) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

To Data Concentrator

RTU Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

1
16

9.6kbit/s Ports AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3

Asynchronous West 3
Asynchronous West 2
Asynchronous West 1

Synchronous West 1
Synchronous West 2
Synchronous West 3

4 1 6 3 5 2
Port 7
Port 6

Port 5

Port 4

Port 9
64kbit/s Ports on RTU
Port 8

OH BY–PASS OH BY–PASS

Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 3 AUX 2 AUX 1

1 3 2 5 6 4
64kbit/s Ports on card

9.6kbit/s Ports for Primary Multiplexer Management Channels

Figure 8.9 Network Example

In the example shown in Figure 8.9, the Synchronous ports are being used as
extra 9.6kbit/s Asynchronous ports. (The word Synchronous is still used in this text
to separately identify them.) No Tributary lines are used and all Synchronous ports
are connected to East or West. All Asynchronous ports are connected to East or
West as well, except for node 2 where none are used at all. So for all nodes,
SW2–8 and SW3–8 are set to 10. The same setting is needed for SW2–7 and
SW3–7, except for node 2 where they are set to 11 (no Asynchronous ports).

Marconi (Page 193) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

The first by-pass block on node one in Figure 8.9 is linking East channel 2 to West
channel 2. Switches SW1 to SW3 segments 3 and 4 handle these. Setting
segment 3 to 100 causes East channel 2 to listen to West channel 2 and setting
segment 4 to 011 causes West channel 2 to listen to East channel 2 thus providing
a bidirectional link.

The head–end (shaded) node and node 2 have no OH by-pass requirements so

SW1 to SW3 segments 1 to 6 are all off on these nodes.

The configuration of which channels are switched to the East and West are
controlled by DIL switches on the card. There are three DIL switches, each divided
into 8 segments. Several combinations are available and the settings of the
auxiliary card is determined by the EPROM which uses the DIL switches on
power–up to set the channels.

An alternative example of the use of Version 0.1 of the card is shown in Figure 8.9.
Here an RTU is used at the head–end only. The DIL switch settings for this
configuration are shown in the following table.

Head–end (Shaded Node)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
SW3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Node 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
SW2 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
SW3 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

Note: West and East 64kbit/s channels 2 and 3 are passed straight through. To achieve
this, 1 listens to 2, 2 listens to 1, 3 listens to 4 and 4 listens to 3. West and East channel 1 is
accessed.

Node 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
SW3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Note: The Asynchronous ports are not used.

The connectors used for Figure 8.9 are shown as AUX 1–3 for the Ancillary Card
connectors and 1–6 for the card front connectors.

Marconi (Page 194) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

Node 3 will be the same as Node 1.

The DIL switch settings for Figure 8.9 are shown in Figure 8.10.

Head–end Node
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON (1)
SW1
OFF (0)

ON (1)
SW2
OFF (0)

ON (1)
SW3
OFF (0)

Nodes 1 and 3 Node 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON (1) ON (1)
SW1 SW1
OFF (0) OFF (0)

ON (1) ON (1)
SW2 SW2
OFF (0) OFF (0)

ON (1) ON (1)
SW3 SW3
OFF (0) OFF (0)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 8.10 Example of DIL Switch Settings for the Configuration of Figure 8.9

8.6 SETTING UP SUB–NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

At the commissioning stage, the elements in a sub–network must have a minimum

of an NSAP address and communications paths established and enabled. These
are configured by using a Local Terminal (LCT) at each element.

The sub–network example in Figure 8.11 known as SUB–NET ‘010RING1’, has an

NSAP type ‘37’, the Sub–network Domain ID is ‘0040’ and the System IDs for NEs
is ‘0000320004000 to 00003200040004’.

The main steps in SUB–NET ‘010RING1’ comms commissioning via a LCT, are as
follows:–

a) Set up the physical communications paths with LAPD configuration options, i.e.
decide which ports to use and whether the port mode to be used is, i.e. User or
Network. A User must connect to a Network or vice–versa. A User cannot
communicate with another User, or a Network with a Network.

Marconi (Page 195) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

b) Decide which DCC bytes must carry the communications data, i.e. DCCm or
DCCr.

c) Enter full NSAP addresses and decide the level of routeing, i.e. Level 1 or 2

d) Revise System diagram with all of the above.

Ethernet Link

STM–N Link
1
Port

Element n Network Element

Manager
via Q i/f

Line East A2 Line West A2

DCCm (User) DCCm (Network)
2 3
STM–4

HB trib slot A2 Line East A2

DCCm (Network) DCCm (User) STM–4
STM–4 Local Terminal
(LCT) used at each
HB trib slot B2 Line West A2 element to set up
DCCm (User) DCCm (Network) parameters

STM–4
4 5

Line West A2 Line East A2 via Mux Con-

troller RS232 i/f
DCCm (Network) DCCm (User)

NB trib slot 6
Full NSAPs for each element DCCm (Network)
STM–1
of SUB–NET ‘010RING1’:–
2 3723411234567890004000003200040001
HB trib slot B1
DCCm (User)
3 3723411234567890004000003200040101

4 3723411234567890004000003200040201
6

5 3723411234567890004000003200040301

6 3723411234567890004000003200040401

Figure 8.11 Setting up Communications for a simple Sub–network

Marconi (Page 196) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

8.7 COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS FOR SMA–1/4CP

8.7.1 COMMS CONTROLLER

On the SMA–1/4CP, communication functions physically reside on a

microprocessor, shared with Controller functions, in the Core unit.

Table 8.5: DCC Accessing Configuration for SMA–1/4CP

Port Type CC Slot Ref Backplane OHB S/W OHB ID
No.
Line West 01H 1 01H
Line East 03H 3 05H
Expansion n/a n/a n/a

8.7.1.1 Comms Controller Generic Features

The following generic features are provided :–

•
Simultaneous access to both DCCr and DCCm of all STM–n line ports
•
‘tunnelling’ Data Domain messages (SNMP) through an SDH OSI DCN in order
to manage PacketSpan expansion module (ETX10)

The maximum global number of NarrowBand products managed via a single SDH
equipment is 24.

8.7.1.2 Comms Controller Generic Interfaces

The Core unit has the following interfaces relevant to Comms functions:

•
A bi–directional overhead bus carrying the SOH bytes – in particular the DCCr
and DCCm. This extends up to 2 line ports on the SMA–1/4CP.

8.7.1.3 Line Card Functions

The SMA–1/4CP provides two STM–N lines (choosing each between STM–1
electrical, STM–1 optical or STM–4 optical) on each Core card. No VC–AM card is
equipped on the SMA–1/4CP.

8.7.1.4 Management of Communications

No physical message passing interface is present on the SMA–1/4CP. Both

Communication and Control function reside in the same microprocessor on the
Core card.

8.7.1.5 Comms Associations

Communications associations may be opened and closed in the following way:

Marconi (Page 197) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

•
The EM is responsible for opening EM–NE communication associations. Once
open, an association may be closed by the EM or by the NE. This is applicable
also to the communication between MV38B and SMA–1/4CP and between the
Ethernet Manager via Front–End Proxy for the SNMP and PacketSpan
expansion (ETX) through the SDH ADM.
•
An NE is capable of opening and closing associations with other NEs. This is a
feature required to support Single–Ended Maintenance. All NEs in a network
are reachable.

8.7.1.6 Protection of Communications

A check of “sanity” of each link is performed periodically and a table of active

connections is maintained in the Comms subsystem of SDH ADMs and in the
Element Manager.

8.7.1.7 Communications Subsystem Performance

The following Comms features are supported:

• Packet throughput of up to 90pkts/s

• Up to 250 Level–1 nodes supported in routeing tables
• Up to 100 Level–2 nodes supported in routeing tables

8.8 COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS OF THE

COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD

Communications functions of the Comms/Controller Card (used with

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)) deal with network management message
handling and message routeing to network element Multiplexer Controllers across
an SDH network.

Network Management includes remote LCT functionality available from versions

1.21.3 onwards.

The Comms/Controller Card has an AUI interface and when used with the AUI
LTU via a 15pin D type, a Q Interface is available. An external attachment unit is
required to convert the Q.B3 (AUI) into an Ethernet interface (10base2) for
connection to EMOS. Other adaptors may be purchased from suppliers for thick
Ethernet cable (10base5) or unshielded twisted pair (10baseT). For example,
1HGB60001AAF–EFA for 10base2 and 1HAQ60764AAC–EFA for 10baseT.

The Card routes messages, for its own Multiplexer Controller, across the internal
message passing busses. Messages for other network elements are routed over
the overhead access buses and are embedded into the line signal using the
STM–1 SOH DCC channels (CCITT G784 Qecc interfaces). Overhead buses
interface to the Comms card, each being able to carry a DCC channel
(DCCr[192kbit/s] and DCCm[576kbit/s]).

Marconi (Page 198) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

8.8.1 SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc and SMA1/4(4+4)(8)

8.8.1.1 COMMS CONTROLLER

On the SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), communication functions physically

reside on a dedicated microprocessor in the Comms/Controller card.

8.8.1.2 Comms Controller Generic Features

The following generic features are provided :–

•
Simultaneous access to both DCCr and DCCm of all STM–n ports.
•
Gateway functionality to the SDH network, providing a LAN interface
(Ethernet).
•
Interface with the MC subsystem through a Message Passing Interface.
•
Tunnelling Data Domain messages (SNMP) through an SDH OSI DCN in order
to manage PacketSpan cards.

The maximum global number of NarrowBand products managed via a single SDH
equipment is 24.

8.8.1.3 Comms Controller Generic Interfaces

The Comms/Controller card has the following interfaces relevant to Comms

functions:

•
A bi–directional overhead bus carrying the SOH bytes. In particular the DCCr
and DCCm. This extends up to 20 ports on SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), 10 ports on
SMA–1/4c/uc.
•
The interfaces to the MC.
•
A Q Interface to the EM. This is an Ethernet connection. Both SMA–1/4c/uc and
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) at the gateway may interface to the EM via a Q interface.
This is through an AUI.

8.8.1.4 Line Card Functions

SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) provide two STM–N lines (choosing each

between STM–1 electrical, STM–1 optical or STM–4 optical) on each core card.
The VC–AM card can be equipped.

Marconi (Page 199) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 8: COMMUNICATIONS

8.8.1.5 Management of Communications

The message passing interface is used for passing management and supervisory
messages as well as relaying layer 3 and layer 4 comms messages between the
MC subsystem and CC subsystem. A message set is used for passing these
messages.

8.8.1.6 Comms Associations

Communications associations may be opened and closed in the following way:

•
The EM is responsible for opening EM–NE communication associations. Once
open, an association may be closed by the EM or by the NE. This is applicable
also to the communication between MV38B and DCC AUX through the SDH
ADM.
•
An NE is capable of opening and closing associations with other NEs. This is a
feature required to support Single–Ended Maintenance. All NEs in a network
are reachable.

8.8.1.7 Protection of Communications

A check of “sanity” of each link is performed periodically and a table of active

connections is maintained in the Comms subsystem of Access SDH ADMs and in
the Element Manager.

8.8.1.8 Comms Subsystem Performance

The following Comms features are supported:

• Packet throughput of up to 135pkts/s.

• Up to 250 Level–1 nodes supported in routeing tables.
• Up to 100 Level–2 nodes supported in routeing tables.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 200) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

CHAPTER 9:
EVENTS

9.1 INTRODUCTION

Instances of changes are called ‘events’. Events fall into the following categories:–

• Alarm events – events detected by fault monitoring systems.

• Status events – these arise from re–configuration of a NE.
• Performance events – these arise when performance thresholds are
exceeded.

Event processing (handling) uses parameters that are operator configured via the
Local Terminal (LCT). Initially, an element will have default values, these can be
changed during commissioning to suit operating authority requirements.

Event handling involves the capture, verification, classification, logging, reporting

and indications of changes in the status of a Network Element (NE). This involves
the detection of changes in state of the configuration of a NE (connectivity, alarm
attributes, equipping levels. protection paths etc.) or a new state of the set of fault
monitors (changes) within a NE or the performance limits being exceeded.

The initial default values for events/alarm parameters can be altered via an LCT.
Various and a mixture of facilities may also be enabled and disabled via these
screens.

9.2 PROCESSING

The event processing scheme is illustrated in Figure 9.1. All events are processed
by the Mux Control function.

Marconi (Page 201) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

AUTONOMOUS EM
REPORT
STATUS GENERATION LCT
CHANGE
RECOGNITION
EVENT
LOGGING
EVENT
FILTERING

FAULT ALARM
RECOGNITION CONFIG REQUESTED EM
VALIDATION AND ALARM INFO
AND STATUS LCT
CORRELATION

SHELF/RACK
INDICATION

MUX CONTROL FUNCTION

Figure 9.1 SMA–N Event Processing Scheme

Events pass through a two stage logging procedure that:

• Assists in the alignment of a NE and Element Manager (EM) on restoration of a

link to an EM.
• Provides a user with an historical event search facility.

Autonomous generation of event reports is supported for alarm, status and

performance events, whilst card, shelf indicators and rack extensions are
supported for the indication of alarm events in the immediate proximity of the
sub–rack installation.

9.3 ALARM PARAMETERS

9.3.1 Alarm Events

Alarm events are derived from fault events that can be defined as the change of
state of the output of any individual fault monitor within an NE. Fault monitors
recognise and detect conditions that are indicative of a fault within or external to
the equipment. These fault events are validated and correlated in order to become
alarm events, which can then be filtered for event forwarding purposes.

Alarm events are used to alert an operator to a change occurring in the set of
monitor states for a given NE. This may be due to the occurrence or subsidence of
a given fault condition. Faults are then categorised into types by the detected
condition. Due to the modular construction of a NE a single fault condition can be
detected at multiple points within it. Each fault type therefore has a unique identity
that indicates its source.

Marconi (Page 202) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

9.3.2 Event Recognition And Validation

Event (fault condition) recognition follows the rules for persistency and hysteresis
as defined in ITU Recommendation G.709. All fault conditions that satisfy the
persistence criteria are then validated with respect to their inversion state. The
validation of fault events fall into four main categories, disable, persistence,
consequential suppression and inversion.

9.3.3 Fault Attributes

The previously mentioned events are configurable via the LCT and cover the
following (attribute) ranges:

• Event/Alarm Type; Comms, Quality of Service, Processing Error, Equipment

and Environmental alarms.
• Perceived Severity; Critical, Major, Minor, Warning, Indeterminate. Detection
Thresholds.
• Inhibit; True or False.
• Disable; True or False.
• Persistency; 0 sec off, 100ms, 300ms, 1, 3,10 and 30 seconds.
• Invert; True or False.
• Fault Actions; True or False.
• Local Indications; Customer specific ranges.

Inhibit

EMOS

LOCAL
INDICATORS
ZA(LE)
ALARM Invert Enable
ZA(A)

ZA(B)
disconnect

NE held
Alarm Log

Figure 9.2 Alarm Event Type Configuration Options

Figure 9.2 represents some of the choices that can be made when configuring the
Alarm Event Type via the LCT. Note that the Local Indicators would depend on the
type of alarm indication scheme used.

Marconi (Page 203) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

9.3.4 Persistency and Consequential Suppression

User configurable persistency is provided on a per monitored entity type basis.

The multiplexer is supplied with default values for these entities via the Mux
Control function on powering–up. These can then be altered to an individual
customer’s specific needs after commissioning is completed.

Information gained from the persistency function is used to determine the state of
additional fault types. These additional fault types relate to the intermittent state of
each monitored entity, being raised if one or more of the fault types associated
with that monitored entity is intermittent. When fault types are detected as
intermittent, then specific behaviour is required, that is to say:

• Repetitive raised or cleared alarm events are not generated for the intermittent
fault type, but are replaced by a a steady intermittent fault type for the duration
of the intermittent period.
• Consequential suppression uses these steady states, whilst less important fault
types are being maintained at their last known state for the duration of the
intermittent period.

Consequential suppression thus ensures that when multiple faults arise, that the
only alarm which is raised is that which applies directly to the fundamental fault
condition. The overall suppression scheme for the NE is defined in ITU
Recommendation G.783.

9.3.5 Inversion State

The ‘Inversion State’ is the nominated state of a fault signal that is interpreted as
‘no fault condition’. The nominated state can be either active or inactive, and is
operator configurable.

9.3.6 Alarm Inhibit/Filtering

The Alarm Inhibit/Filtering facility can be assigned to each individual alarm that
does not require recognition:

• To reduce the number of alarm messages throughout.

• To determine whether or not an alarm condition is reported to the EM and LCT.
• To determine whether or not the alarm condition appears in the alarm log.

9.3.6.1 Category

A ‘Category’ is a numeric value between 1 and 9 assigned to each alarm and

designating its category in terms of type, urgency, and destination (extension and
display) within the rack alarm scheme. Dependent upon the alarm scheme being
used, categories include ‘Disconnected’ (i.e. no indication on Shelf Display LEDs
and Rack Alarm Unit) and ‘Not Monitored’ (i.e. totally ignored). Categories are
operator configurable via the LCT.

Marconi (Page 204) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

9.4 REPORTING AND DISPLAY FACILITIES

9.4.1 Event Reporting

Event Reporting is the reporting of events to the LCT and EM. An operator at
either location can enable or disable the facility.

When the facility is enabled, all autonomous events are reported to the LCT and
the EM. At the LCT, an incoming alarm message is announced by a status line at
the bottom of the screen, together with an audible warning.

When the facility is disabled, no autonomous alarm events are reported by the
SMA–N, and consequently no alerting indication is shown at the LCT. In this case
an operator would have to search the Alarm/Event logs for any Alarm
conditions/events.

9.4.2 Current Event Logs

Current Event Logs, Alarm Event, Status Event, and Performance Event provide
an indication of the current details of event states on a cyclic basis. These logs
hold up to 100 events at any given time (apart from the Current Alarm Events Log
which holds up to 250 events). The log can be configured so that once the
capacity has been exhausted, the log accepts no more changes, or wraps and
loses the oldest changes. Alarms/Events are applied to the logs via a priority
inhibit/filtering process (para 9.3.6). An operator at either LCT or EM can display
and clear these Event logs.

9.4.3 Historical Event Logs

The Historical Event Logs. Alarm Event and Status Event provide an indication of
historical changes of event states on a cyclic basis. The logs hold up to 100 events
at any given time. The log can be configured so that once the capacity has been
exhausted, the log accepts no more changes, or wraps and loses the oldest
changes. Events/Alarms are applied to the logs via a priority inhibit/filtering
process (para 9.3.6). An operator at either LCT or EM can display and clear these
Event logs.

9.4.4 Active Source Alarms Display

An operator at a LCT can display all active alarms recognised by the SMA and
received at the LCT. The display is presented on a ‘per card’ basis.

All active alarms can be displayed, in response to an operator demand, as a list

which can be scrolled through to view. Each alarm source, type, state, date and
time of any transitions is shown. The operator can sort the alarm list by type or
date/time.

9.4.5 Display and Action all Local Alarms

An operator can display and action all Local Alarms recognised by the SMA and
received at the LCT. The display is presented on a ‘per card’ basis.

Marconi (Page 205) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

To action, an operator works down through menus to the specific alarm required,
then selects the appropriate action from the option fields.

9.5 PROCEDURES

Operating procedures associated with the display and selection of alarm reporting
facility options are covered in the LCT operator manual (supplied under separate
cover), together with the fault diagnosis details.

9.6 ALARM SCHEMES

9.6.1 TEP1E Alarm Scheme

The TEP1E alarm scheme recognises various types of alarms. Alarms are also
given a perceived severity rating, in the range 1 (highest) to 5 (lowest) which is
used to enable an operator to prioritise the fault finding process.

Default values for the Event Types, Perceived Severity and Local Indication
(Category) are assigned by software to each alarm at the commissioning or
configuration stage.

Subsequent to commissioning, the category and priority of any alarm can be

changed, independently, via the Local Terminal. There is also a facility to globally
inhibit the drive to the fault LED on all cards except the Comms/Controller Card
and PSU.

9.6.1.1 TEP1E Shelf Alarm Display LEDS

The Shelf Alarm Display LEDs are situated at the right–hand side to the middle of
the ancillary LTU area of the SMA1/4(4+4) and SMA1/4(8) sub–racks. The area
houses two LEDs one RED and the other GREEN, which indicate the overall alarm
status of the sub–rack. It also houses a pressbutton switch that provides a receive
attention facility. A15–way D–type connector is also fitted to the LTU, and when
required to do so, extends the alarm conditions to a Top–of–Rack Display (see
LTUs Page 299).

An SMA1/4(4+4) or SMA1/4(8) sub–rack interfaces to the rack alarm schemes via

a customer specific LTU. This unit provides an interface for the complete in–station
alarm scheme, as well as providing for electrical cross–connectivity between the
Mux Controller function of the Comms/Controller Card, Power and Alarm Interface
LTUs and the shelf PSUs. It also provides connectivity between the backplane and
the LCT LTU, which contains the SMA Backplane Inventory data in EEPROM,
together with some configuration data.

9.7 BW7R ALARM SCHEME

The BW7R alarm scheme recognises various types of alarms. Alarms are also
given a perceived severity rating, in the range 1 (highest) to 5 (lowest) which is
used to enable an operator to prioritise the fault finding process.

Marconi (Page 206) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

Default values for the the Event Types, Perceived Severity and Local Indication
(Category) are assigned by software to each alarm at the commissioning or
configuration stage. The default inversion state of all alarms is ‘Normal’.

The Bw7R alarm scheme recognises two main types of alarms:

• Fault Alarms. These indicate a malfunction or failure of one or more cards on

the SMA that can be rectified by local action.
• Disturbance Alarms.These indicate a degradation or failure of traffic
transmission detected by, but not necessarily attributable to this specific SMA.

Fault Alarms are divided into categories of Urgent and Non–Urgent and in each
case further categorised into alarms that activate the card LED and those that do
not. Disturbance Alarms are categorised as Urgent, Non–Urgent, and a third
category specific to an STM–1 or STM–4 Loss Of Signal condition and designated
LE.

These basic categories are incorporated into a nine level category scheme that
also includes the alarm disconnected state and one which has not been allocated
(category 8). For more information refer to the SMA Series 4 Maintenance
handbook.

These are default settings only. Subsequent to commissioning, the category and
priority of any alarm can be changed, independently, via the Local Terminal. There
is also a facility to globally inhibit the drive to the fault LED on all cards except the
Comms/Controller Card and PSU.

9.7.1 Bw7R Shelf Alarm Display LEDS

The Shelf Alarm Display LEDs are situated at the right–hand side of the ancillary
LCT LTU area of the SMA1/4 and SMA–1/4c/uc sub–racks. The unit houses three
LED that together indicate the overall alarm status of the sub–rack, in terms of
Bw7R ‘Fault Alarms’. It also houses a pressbutton switch that provides a receive
attention facility. A15–way D–type connector is also fitted to the LTU, and when
required to do so, extends the alarm conditions to a Top–of–Rack Display. The
front panel layout is shown on Page 297.

Only Fault alarms are displayed on the Shelf Alarm Display LTU. These alarms
may be cancelled by the push–button on the Display LTU. Disturbance alarm
extensions, i.e. Za(A), Za(B) and Za(LE) are not visually indicated within the SMA
and cannot be cancelled by the Shelf Alarm Display push–button.

9.7.2 Subrack Displays

Eight LED indicators are provided within the SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
subracks. These LED indicators are located as shown in Table 9.1. They indicate
the existence of alarms with specific local indication categories within the NE. For
more information refer to the SMA Series 4 Maintenance handbook.

Marconi (Page 207) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

Table 9.1: LED Location Details

Location Indica- Cat- Meaning
tor Co- egory
lour
Alarms LTU Red URG New faults exist requiring urgent attention
“ “ Red NURG New faults exist not requiring urgent attention
“ “ Yellow Old faults exist (since cancel button last operated)
Alarm Card Red INT Fault is in this equipment
Front Panel Red EXT Fault is in some other equipment
“ “ Yellow ABN Abnormal condition exists
“ “ Yellow IND Path maintenance signal being received
“ “ Red POWER One or more PSUs are faulty

9.7.3 Rack Alarm Interfaces

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) incorporate two separately controllable relay

contacts that provide Red and Yellow rack lamp control interfaces. These relay
contacts are accessible via the RM interface connector on the Alarms LTU and
they switch the positive leg of the service voltage (V Service Pos) which is made
available to the SMA on the same connector.

The relay contacts minimum rating are as following :–

— Vmax = 76V (100V pulse)

— Imax = 50mA

Each relay contact is separately protected by a zener diode with the following
rating:–

— Voltage = 100V + 15%

— Power = 1W

The Red lamp control extends a summary of alarms to the top of rack display
equipment, thus indicating the presence of new alarms within the NE to the
operator .

The Yellow lamp control extends a reminder to the top of rack display equipment,
thus indicating the presence of cancelled alarms within the NE to the operator.

9.7.4 SMA–1/4CP

As the SMA–1/4CP is not provided with a dedicated rack alarm interface, the
option is provided (operator configurable) to allow the user alarm outputs to be
assigned to implement a simple Local alarm scheme. When configured to this
mode the output states will be set based on the Alarm Extension Category of
active alarms.

Two modes of operation are supported:

Marconi (Page 208) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

• User controlled.
The user manages the relay output state (open/closed) from the management
system.
• Local alarm scheme.
The relay outputs are activated autonomously by the Base unit based on the
local alarm extension category of active alarms.

The mode is configurable from the management system.

The outputs are set as follows:

Table 9.2: SMA–1/4CP Alarms – Relay 1

Alarm State Relay 1
No Critical or Major severity alarms active Open
Critical or Major severity alarm active Closed

Table 9.3: SMA–1/4CP Alarms – Relay 2

Alarm State Relay 2
No Minor or Warning severity alarms active Open
Minor or Warning severity alarm active Closed

9.7.5 Station Alarm Interfaces

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) house separately controllable relay contacts,

which provide various station alarm control interfaces. These relay contacts are
accessible via the B interface connector on the User Alarm LTU (see Page 301),
and switch the positive leg of the service voltage (V Service Pos) which is made
available to the SMA on the RM connector on the Alarms LTU.

The SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) subrack has 32 relay contacts, and these
relay contacts have the following minimum rating:–

— Vmax = 76V (100V pulse)

— Imax = 50mA

Each relay contact is separately protected by a zener diode with the following
rating:–

— Voltage = 100V + 15%

— Power = 1W

Additionally, the SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) also support four user alarm
inputs via the B interface connector on the User Alarm LTU.

Note: It should be noted that a single fault type such as ‘Trib Input Loss of Signal’ is required to
activate a different B interface connector contact dependent upon the traffic rate assigned to the
port.

Marconi (Page 209) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 9: EVENTS

As the traffic rate can be determined from the type of card sourcing the alarm, the
local alarm scheme recognises the presence of an alarm, and dependent upon the
source card type, instructs the Italtel alarm card to activate the correct contacts.

9.8 FAULT DICTIONARY

A complete list of all SMA alarms, for the TEP1E and Bw7r alarm schemes, with
their corresponding Local Indication, Perceived Severity and Event Type can be
found in the appropriate Maintenance manual. Fault Finding procedures included
in the Maintenance manual provide instructions on how to rectify all tabulated
alarms, as they are reported at the LCT.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 210) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 10: PERFORMANCE

CHAPTER 10:
PERFORMANCE

10.1 INTRODUCTION

The SDH and PDH multiplexing structures as defined in CCITT recommendations,

provide a number of Overhead (OH) bytes which are used for non–intrusive
In–service monitoring of the error performance of the network. Within the SDH,
bytes are also reserved for the monitoring of Section (Repeater and Multiplex)
performance, and individual Path (Higher Order and Lower Order) performances.

10.1.1 Data Accumulation

System performance is continually monitored at each traffic card. The Mux

Controller polls each card at 1 second intervals, whilst gathering performance (and
alarm) data.

Performance data is processed and reports generated in accordance with CCITT

Recommendation G784. The use of this, and other features described in this
chapter, will be found in the associated Local Terminal (LCT) Operator Manual.

10.1.2 Performance Threshold Levels

The LCT operator can set configurable parameters (threshold levels) for the
various performance related entities. If these operator configured threshold levels
are exceeded (as the volume of errors increases over a 1 second period), Block
Errors which occur for a second become an ‘Errored Second’ (ES). Should the ES
parameter threshold be set and exceeded, then the Errored Seconds become
‘Severely Errored Seconds’ (SES). If the SES preset parameter threshold is then
exceeded, it will become Unavailable Seconds (UAS). For further details and the
meaning of the terminology used in this paragraph, see the Glossary which is
included at the front of this manual, together with the associated Local Terminal
(LCT) Operator manual.

10.1.3 2Mbit/s Traffic Monitoring

A dedicated 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU can be fitted to an SMA–1/4c/uc sub–rack in

Ancillary slot AUX 5/6. The function of this LTU is to enable the customer/engineer
to monitor the performance of 2Mbit/s traffic (ie error free condition) using external
monitoring equipment (see Page 307).

Note: For SMA–1/4c/uc, the 2Mbit/s Test Bus is fitted via a connection on the SMA–1/4c/uc
enhanced ancillary LTU.

Marconi (Page 211) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 10: PERFORMANCE

10.1.4 Synchronisation Threshold Levels

Synchronisation Event Report Thresholds are associated with the overall

equipments performance. They can either be globally set on a per system basis
(default values loaded from the Mux Controller) to specified values, or individually
set by an operator as required,via the LCT. A typical example would be a count
threshold of 50 set for a 15 minute maximum count of of 1x106 and a 24hr
maximum count of 100x106 reporting of TU3 Excessive Pointer Justification
Events (EPJE).

10.1.5 CSES Performance

Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Count (CSES) Performance Thresholds

are associated with the monitoring of the overall equipment performance. They
can either be globally set on a per system basis (default values loaded from the
Mux Controller) to specified values, or individually set by an operator as required.
All CSES reports (eg. RS B1 BIP CSES) can have their threshold levels set
between 1 and 9, with a default value of 5.

10.1.6 USE

Unacceptable Short–term Errors (USE) is a User configurable condition which may

be generated when the number of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
for a particular Error Performance Monitored Entity exceeds a preset threshold.
This condition can be used to instigate protection switching or for example to deem
a Sync source unacceptable.

Note: As these Error Performance Primitives do not necessarily lead to data errors, they are
not compiled into 15Min and 24Hr reports and used for Long–term Error Monitoring.

10.1.7 DEG Performance

Degrade (DEG) is also a user configurable condition which may be generated

when the number of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES) for a particular
Error Performance Monitored Entity exceeds a preset threshold. Unlike USE
however, the condition parameters are independent of SES.

Note: The DEG threshold range and defaults are based on the SES thresholds.
The range for SES is 1 to 50% of max. count; DEG uses 1 to 100% of max. count.
The DEG defaults are a half of SES default value used for USE. For more details on threshold
values refer to the appropriate Operator Handbook.

10.1.8 Performance Data Processing

The Mux Controller, having processed the counts from the individual traffic cards,
maintains aggregated counts for all monitored entities within the SMA over a
pre–defined period of time. There are two durations for the performance data
report period, 15 minutes and 24 hours. At the end of each subsequent period the
SMA is able to generate a performance data report containing all such counts.

The counts generated for the various monitored entities are:–

• Out–of–Frame seconds

Marconi (Page 212) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 10: PERFORMANCE

• Block errors (configurable thresholds)

• Errored seconds (configurable thresholds)
• Severely Errored seconds (configurable thresholds)
• Unavailable seconds
• Number of unavailable periods during the report period

The SMA is also capable of generating Exception Reports to indicate that the
operator configurable performance thresholds have been exceeded and the start
and finish of periods of unavailability. Exception reports can be sent at any time
and are intended to assist short term maintenance and to give immediate
indication of performance degradation.

The SMA maintains a Date and Time clock for the labelling of all of the data and
exception reports. The clock can be set via the Network Management Interface.

The operator may enable or disable either or both 15 minute and 24 hour reports.

Note: Enabling/disabling performance reports using the LCT affects reporting at the
Element Manager, not the LCT itself.

A limited number of ‘old’ data reports are stored by the SMA as records. These
reports, stored as ’Previous Records’, may be requested at any time, via the NMI.

10.2 TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

Tandem Connection Monitoring is a form of non–intrusive performance monitoring.

For further information see Chapter 17.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 213) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 10: PERFORMANCE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 214) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 11: OPERATOR CONTROL

CHAPTER 11:
OPERATOR CONTROL

11.1 INTRODUCTION

An element (see Figure 11.1) can be controlled and monitored by an operator

either from an Element Manager or a Local Terminal (LCT), but only one of these
can have access at any one point in time.

The Element Manager is a ‘workstation’ terminal, which communicates with all

elements in the the network via embedded communication channels. It provides
management facilities for the complete network.

The LCT is an IBM compatible PC that is connected locally, when required, to any
network element to provide control or monitoring functions.

11.2 OPERATOR CONTROL FROM AN ELEMENT MANAGER

An Element Manager is connected via designated ‘Gateway’ elements in the

network. Connection between an Element Manager and a Gateway element is via
an Ethernet Local Area Network A ‘full–functionality’ Communications Card within
the Gateway element provides the Q interface function. Communications between
a Gateway element and other network elements is via the Data Communication
Channels (DCCs) embedded in the STM frames.

The Element Manager is intended to operate from a network management control

centre. As well as the central control functions, it can perform most of the functions
applicable to the LCT. It is the subject of a dedicated Element Manager operator
manual.

11.3 OPERATOR CONTROL FROM AN LCT

An LCT can be connected, as required, to any element (including the Gateway

element). For the SMA–1/4(4+4)(8), the LCT RS232 communications cable is
plugged into a ‘D–type’ connector on the LCT Ancillary LTU. For the SMA–1/4CP
and SMA–1/4c/uc, the LCT is an RJ45. Control is exercised via the Mux Controller
function.
Note: Both male and female sockets are provided on a single LCT LTU.

Using Single Ended Maintenance (SEM) functionality, the LCT can access other
elements in the network from the element it is currently connected to.All necessary
application software is contained on the LCT and is mouse/menu driven. LCT
operation is the subject of a dedicated LCT operator manual.

Marconi (Page 215) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 11: OPERATOR CONTROL

11.4 SECURITY

11.4.1 Element Manager Operator Access

There are several levels of permission available to access the Element Manager
(Refer to the appropriate Element Manager operator manual).

11.4.2 Element Manager Operator Control of LCT Access

An Element Manager operator can set the LCT access conditions at any of the
elements in the network. These conditions are:

• LCT login enabled or disabled.

• LCT login enabled (as above), but read only permission granted.

11.4.3 LCT Operator Levels

LCTs can be used at three levels of operation. The level to which an individual
operator can work is determined by password access. The levels are:

• Administrator (high level) – all access.

• System Operator (intermediate level) – limited read/write access.
• Casual Operator (low level) – read only access
Note: Allocation of a level password must only be made to suitably qualified personnel for
the level concerned. Also, in the presence of Element Manager, the full operation of the LCT is
subject to the conditions described in Paragraph 11.4.2.

11.4.3.1 Administrator

An Administrator has full access to all LCT functions, but is the only level of LCT
operator who can do the following:

• Add, delete or change lower level LCT user passwords – up to 9 other users
can be created and the level of user specified (an LCT Administrator Operator
cannot change the Element Manager Operators password, but an Element
Manager Operator can change an LCT Administrators password). The
passwords are stored in the element memory.
• Request a list of LCT users.
• Decommission the element.

11.4.3.2 System Operator

A System Operator has access to all LCT functions, bar the Administrator specific
functions described in Paragraph 11.4.3.1.

11.4.3.3 Casual Operator

The Casual Operator is restricted to read only access, and also cannot perform
Software Download.

Marconi (Page 216) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 11: OPERATOR CONTROL

Note: If communication to the Element Manager fails, any Element Manager operator
initiated restrictions to LCT access are automatically lifted and an LCT operator will be able to
log in to that element. If an LCT is already logged into an element when the Element Manager
attempts to gain access, the Element Manager operator will have to force an LCT logout to
gain access.

Marconi (Page 217) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 11: OPERATOR CONTROL

ELEMENT
MANAGER

ETHERNET LINK
(`Q' I/F)

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
CABLE LINK
(`F' I/F) MUX COMMS

ÇÇÇÇ
CONTROLLER FUNCTION
FUNCTION
TRAFFIC HANDLING
LOCAL
TERMINAL WEST EAST
(PC)
GATEWAY SMA-N

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
EAST WEST

CABLE LINK MUX MUX CABLE LINK

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
(`F' I/F) CONT H H CONT (`F' I/F)
FUNCTION T A T A FUNCTION

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
R N R N
A D A D
F L F L
LOCAL F I F I LOCAL
I I TERMINAL
TERMINAL COMMS C N C N COMMS
(PC) G G FUNCTION (PC)
FUNCTION

WEST EAST

NETWORK NETWORK
ELEMENT ELEMENT
SMA-N SMA-N

ÇÇÇÇ
TRAFFIC HANDLING
EAST WEST

COMMS
ÇÇÇÇ MUX CABLE LINK

ÇÇÇÇ
CONT (`F' I/F)
FUNCTION
FUNCTION

NETWORK ELEMENT
SMA-N LOCAL
TERMINAL
(PC)
Note: In this figure, Mux Controller and Comms are illustrated as separate functions of the single Series
4 Comms/Controller Card.
An LCT is not dedicated to a particular SMA. It is connected to an SMA as required for a task (e.g.
commissioning, change of configuration, fault finding, etc.) and may be disconnected on completion,
without affecting the SMA . An LCT connected to an SMA can access other SMAs remotely, using the
Single Ended Maintenance Functionality (SEM)
Figure 11.1 Element Management

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 218) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 12: SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

CHAPTER 12:
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

12.1 FEATURES

12.1.1 Software Download

Software Download is a facility that allows new operating software to be

downloaded from a Local Terminal (LCT) or Element Manager to the
Controller/Communications Card and all of the equipment cards. The software is
downloaded to the SMCs located on the Controller/Communications card and is
then selected using the LCT or Element Manager. The software will download
without interruption to an already working element.

12.1.2 Backing–up the SMA Configuration

Backing Up the LCT Configuration is a facility that allows the functionality of

element configuration Synchronisation, Alarm, and Performance Parameter
Default Data, to be copied to a 3.5 inch disc via the LCT.

Once the Multiplexer has been commissioned and configured, then part or the
whole of its configuration can be saved to file (Backed up). The configuration
details can then be be restored to the network element at a later date (Restore). A
description of how to use this feature can be found in the LCT Operator Manual.

12.1.3 Restoring the SMA Configuration

Restoring the LCT Configuration is a facility that allows the functionality of SMA to
be configured by downloading previously backed–up Synchronisation, Alarm, and
Performance Parameter Default Data, from a 3.5 inch disc via the LCT.

Once the element has been decommissioned (Administration Operator), then the
previously copied to disk (backed up) configuration can be restored/downloaded at
recommissioning. This allows the existing configuration to be restored to the
element without the operator having to re–configure it. A description of how to use
this feature can be found in the LCT Operator Manual.

12.1.4 Software/Memory Management

Various facilities exist for controlling the operation of software upgrading,

downloading, and restoration of configuration data, without adversely affecting
traffic:

• Switch Banks.
• Switch MC and Comms Banks.
• Align Banks.
• Set Bank Status.
• Display Software Version.

Marconi (Page 219) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 12: SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

Full details can be found in the appropriate LCT Operator Manual.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 220) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 3: ADDITIONAL FEATURES

SECTION 3:
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHAPTER 13 . . . . . APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 223

CHAPTER 14 . . . . . ADD/DROP MULTIPLEXER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 225

CHAPTER 15 . . . . . VCAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 231

CHAPTER 16 . . . . . SINGLE FIBRE WORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 235

CHAPTER 17 . . . . . TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING . . . . . . . . Page 245

CHAPTER 18 . . . . . CELLSPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 249

CHAPTER 19 . . . . . PACKETSPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 257

CHAPTER 20 . . . . . AUXILIARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 259

CHAPTER 21 . . . . . EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 263

Marconi (Page 221) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 3: ADDITIONAL FEATURES

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 222) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 13: APPLICATIONS

CHAPTER 13:
APPLICATIONS

13.1 INTRODUCTION

As mentioned previously in this manual, the versions of the SMA range are
designed to be configured to provide the following Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
functional element applications:-

• Add-drop multiplexer.
• Terminal multiplexer.
• Fibre hub.
• Cross-connect.

In any configuration, the core-cards for any particular SMA version remain the
same (except when protection is added) but the traffic units and options will vary
according to the localised need. Additional Special cards required to access these
options are:

• VC-AM
(Virtual Container Access Module). Used in conjunction with a VC-TM,
comprises the VC-TS (Virtual Container Transport System) extending VC-12s
to Access networks.
• EOW (Engineers Order Wire). Where analogue 4-wire telephony is required.
• Auxiliary Card
Handling of customer telemetry data.

Applications using these additional cards will be described in subsequent chapters.

There are also two chapters on Single Fibre Working (SFW) and Tandem
Connection Monitoring (TCM).

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 223) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 13: APPLICATIONS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 224) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

CHAPTER 14:
ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

14.1 EXAMPLE APPLICATIONS

14.1.1 SMA–1(4+4) AND SMA–1(8)

The SMA-1/4(4+4) and SMA1/4 (8) are part of the Marconi family of synchronous
multiplexers using Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) or Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy (PDH).The main applications are in adding and dropping a combination
of 2Mbit/s, 34Mbit/s, 140Mbit/s or 155Mbit/s (STM-1) tributary signals within an
aggregate STM-1 (155Mbit/s) through traffic signal.

Options are available for equipping a variety of optical and electrical cards with
various card, port and path protection schemes. Full connectivity is provided,
including tributary to tributary switching for VC-4, VC-3, VC-2, and VC-12
granularity with access to 126 x 2Mbit/s.

When deployed in a ring or at the intermediate points in a chain the SMA utilises
its switching function to allow traffic to be cross-connected between any tributary
and line port and also between tributary to tributary or line to line port. Figure 14.1
illustrates the general internal configuration for SMA-1(4+4) and SMA–1(8)
add-drop multiplexers.

CORE
(SWITCH/LINE)

LINE WEST LINE EAST

TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY

CARD CARD CARD CARD

CONTROLLER
AUX/EOW COMMS PSU
CARD CARD

Figure 14.1 Add-Drop configuration (SMA-1)

Marconi (Page 225) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

14.1.2 SMA–4(4+4) and SMA–4(8)

Figure 14.2 is a generic illustration for the SMA–4(4+4) and SMA–4(8) multiplexer
configuration.

STM-4 CORE CARD STM-4

Unit Unit
(SWITCH)
LINE LINE
WEST EAST
1xSTM-4 1 xSTM-4

Trib cards
(up to 4 STM–1 or 140M) Up to 8 Trib cards
STM-1/4 or 140M TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY CARD(s)
CARD(s)

CONTROLLER
COMMS PSU
CARD

Figure 14.2 Add-Drop Multiplexer Configuration (SMA-4)

14.2 NETWORK APPLICATIONS

14.2.1 General

Add-drop multiplexers can be employed as follows (see Figure 14.3):-

• Form access and multiple ring networks.

• Form chains.

Marconi (Page 226) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

ACCESS RING MULTIPLE RING CONNECTION

Tributary access
STMĆN main ring
Fibre Hub

STMĆN STMĆN Element Manager

Tributary access Ext. sync. Tributary access

minor ring access

Gateway element
STMĆN STMĆN

Tributary access Tributary access

Tributary access Ringmaster Mux

STMĆN minor ring

CHAIN
Tributary access
STMĆN STMĆN STMĆN

Tributary access Tributary access Tributary access Tributary access

Figure 14.3 Examples of Add-Drop Multiplexer applications in STM-N networks

14.2.2 Gateway Element

Add-drop multiplexers can also function as gateway elements, i.e. provide access
to the network for the Element Manager (a gateway element can also be a ring
master multiplexer or terminal multiplexer).

14.2.3 Ring Master Multiplexer

If add-drop multiplexers are connected together in a ring network, the Ring Master
is the multiplexer that provides access to the ring for synchronisation signals and
the majority of the network traffic. Synchronisation is sourced either from an
external clock or from a tributary input.

Marconi (Page 227) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

14.2.4 Fibre Hub

The SMA can be configured as a hub node in star type configurations, including
points on a ring where traffic is routed to remote terminals directly from the optical
tributaries. Figure 14.4 illustrates a fibre hub in a typical network application.

ACCESS RING

Fibre Hub

Tributary access

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer

Tributary access

Tributaries Tributaries Tributaries Tributaries

Figure 14.4 Terminal Multiplexer and Fibre Hub applications

14.2.5 Terminal Multiplexer Configuration

The terminal multiplexer configuration is illustrated in Figure 14.4. In this

configuration the SMA sub-rack has only one line card fitted, this can be in either
the Line East or Line West position. Figure 14.4 illustrates terminal multiplexers in
a typical network application.

CORE CARD
LINE/
SWITCH
LINE WEST

TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY TRIBUTARY

CARD CARD CARD CARD

COMMS/
CONTROLLER PSU
CARD

Figure 14.5 Terminal Multiplexer configuration

The Terminal Multiplexer does not have traffic connected through from line port to
line port, i.e. in terminal multiplexer mode all incoming line port traffic is dropped off
to the tributary positions. A terminal multiplexer can function as a gateway
element.

Marconi (Page 228) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

Generally, the purpose of a terminal multiplexer is to multiplex incoming traffic into

a single aggregate line rate, however the internal switching capability also allows it
to perform timeslot interchange between the lower and higher order virtual
containers for grooming and/or consolidation of the incoming tributary traffic. The
switch function within the SMA allows a number of fully or partially loaded tributary
links to be combined and consolidated into the aggregate line rate.

14.2.6 Broadcast

Broadcasting facilitates point to multi-point transmission of information to a number

of destinations simultaneously. The advantage of using broadcast is the reduction
of required network bandwidth as given in the example in Figure 14.6. One
application of the broadcast feature is the delivery of television and video services.

2Mbit/s source 2Mbit/s source

Without broadcast feature With broadcast feature,

the required bandwidth is re-
duced by 66%

SMA SMA

SMA SMA SMA SMA

2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s

SMA SMA

2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s
Figure 14.6 Broadcast

14.2.7 Cross Connect

SMAs can be deployed as small cross-connects. A cross connect can be provided

by a single SMA or by interconnecting a number of SMAs as a cluster, e.g. four
STM-1 rings can be interconnected to provide routeing between rings without the
need for an external cross-connect (see Figure 14.7).

Marconi (Page 229) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 14: ADD–DROP MULTIPLEXER

STMĆ1 STMĆ1
Ring 1 Ring 2

Equivalent cross-connect function

STMĆ1 STMĆ1
Ring 3 Ring 4

Figure 14.7 Cross Connect Cluster

Marconi (Page 230) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 15: VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM)

CHAPTER 15:
VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM)

15.1 INTRODUCTION

The Virtual Container Access Module (VC-AM) is a single slide-in unit which
provides access to Virtual Container Transport System (VCTS) networks. The
module is a slide in unit which can be fitted into any of the tributary positions
(except the Protection slot) and is used in conjunction with a VC–TM card at the
Customer premises.

15.1.1 Configuration(VC–AM)

Figure 15.1 shows a basic configuration of VC-AMs installed in an SMA

equipment.

CORE CARD
(SWITCH/LINE)
LINE WEST LINE EAST

VCĆAM TRIB VCĆAM TRIB VCĆAM TRIB VCĆAM TRIB

CARD CARD CARD CARD

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
CONTROLLER
COMMS PSU
CARD

via Optical LTUs

VCTM VCTM VCTM VCTM

(see Figure 15.2) (see Figure 15.2) (see Figure 15.2) (see Figure 15.2)

Figure 15.1 VC-AMs Installed in an SMA Multiplexer

VCTS delivers VC-12s or 2Mbit/s streams from the core SDH network into the
access network via optical fibre spurs. The VC-TM terminates one 34Mbit/s bearer
presenting 14 x 2Mbit/s interfaces.

Figure 15.2 shows typical usages of VC Access Modules (VC-AM) within an STM
ring, communicating with the access network via VC Terminating Modules
(VC-TM).

Marconi (Page 231) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 15: VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM)

Each VC-AM provides up to four bi-directional 34Mbit/s sub STM-1 optical

interfaces via four VCTS optical LTUs, each capable of handling up to fourteen
VC-12 signals. Each card is therefore capable of delivering fifty six VC-12 signals.
Up to 2 VC-AM cards may be fitted (SMA1/4c), or 4 VC–AM cards (SMA1/4(4+4),
or 8 VC–AM cards (SMA1/4(8). Additionally, adjacent VC-AM cards can provide
1+N card protection.

STREET CABINET 64kbit/s

MANAGER
V
CMUX2 C
T
M 64kbit/s

SMA

34Mbit/s
O

OFFICES
V 34Mbit/s V
SMA SMA C C
A O n x 2MBIT/S
T
M M
34Mbit/s
O
O 34Mbit/s

V O
SMA C
A O
M 3 x 34Mbit/s
O

Figure 15.2 Typical VCTS Applications

15.1.2 Comms Protection (VC–AM)

Comms protection, (by connecting a VC–TM to separate SMAs in single fibre

mode), is only supported provided both SMAs are in the same IS–IS area.

Note: Multi–homing of SMAs in different IS–IS areas, effectively allowing the SMAs to share
a common IS–IS area, is not a recommended practice as it negates the benefits of segregating
the network into areas.

Marconi (Page 232) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 15: VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ IS–IS Area y

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Not recommended

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
O SMA
V
O

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
C
SMA O A SMA
O M
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
34Mbit/s

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ O
OFFICES

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
V O
SMA C O V
A 34Mbit/s C

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
M O n x 2MBIT/S
T
M

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
MANAGER

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ IS–IS Area x

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Recommended

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ IS–IS Area z

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
MANAGER

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
SMA 34Mbit/s
O

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
V O
C O OFFICES
SMA A

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
M O V
34Mbit/s C

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
T n x 2MBIT/S
M

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
V O
O
SMA C O

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
A
M

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ Figure 15.3 VC–TM Protection in IS–IS

Marconi (Page 233) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 15: VIRTUAL CONTAINER ACCESS MODULE (VC–AM)

15.2 I421 FUNCTIONALITY

VC–TM cards at Release 3, 2Mbit/s tributary cards, and the SMA1/4CP unit all
support I.421/2M NT functionality. This provides a method for the exchange
provider to remotely test their transmission network. A loopback facility is
incorporated together with the facility to report defects to the exchange end, by the
insertion of appropriate maintenance codes.

15.2.1 2M NT Mode

A facility is provided for the exchange end (System X), to remotely test their
transmission network (e.g. Primary Rate ISDN lines) connected directly to a
2Mbit/s port.

When an exchange initiates an I.421 test, a series of command code–words are

sent to the VC–TM causing it to apply or release a 2M NT loopback to the
exchange via that port thereby loping back test information to the exchange.

Note: 1. During the application of I.421/2M NT loopbacks any VC–TS configured loopbacks
will be removed.

Note: 2. Any attempt to configure VC–TS loopbacks with 2M NT mode enabled, will result in
an error message being displayed and the attempt will be rejected.

Note: 3. 2M tributaries also have an LT mode for I.421.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 234) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

CHAPTER 16:
SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.1 OVERVIEW

Single fibre operation on STM–N links offers a cost effective mechanism to double
the capacity available, without resorting to the installation of full WDM systems.
The only additional equipment required over a standard installation are passive
bi–directional couplers which act as filters to convert back to unidirectional
operation (i.e. from one bi–directional fibre to receive and transmit fibres).

SMA SMA

TX TX

RX RX
Coupler Coupler

Figure 16.1 Single Fibre Operation (Contra–Directional)

Previously, Single Fibre operation relied on both the Tx and Rx optical interfaces
being connected to a coupling device for transmission on a single fibre, both using
the same wavelength. This solution had inherent problems with loss associated
with the couplers and interference caused when the different wave–lengths cross
over. The single fibre working modes recommended here superseded this type of
working.

16.2 OPTIONS
There are two basic options offered for single fibre working with: one option is for
use on short to medium length optical spans where 1310/1550nm optical units are
required; the other option is for longer spans where 1554/1536nm optical units are
required. These two options give reliable and repeatable results over optical links.

Marconi (Page 235) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.2.1 Contra–Directional and Co–directional Configurations

Within the options available for single fibre multi–wavelength operation there are
two possible configurations: “contra–directional single fibre working” and
“co–directional single fibre working”. These refer to the direction of transmission
over the fibre and the number of systems which can be connected.

16.2.2 Contra–Directional Single Fibre Working for

1310/1550nm system

1310nm optics are usually chosen for short to medium distance links which are
typically less than 40km. It is possible at STM–1 to use very simple couplers to
allow single fibre working with both transmitters operating at 1310nm. These
couplers however introduce a loss, reducing the available optical budget. (The
optical link budget being the attenuation in dB/length of section).

SMA SMA

1310nm 1550nm
TX TX

RX RX
Coupler Coupler
1550nm 1310nm

Figure 16.2 1310/1550nm Single Fibre Operation (Contra–Directional)

This option is illustrated in Figure 16.2 above, showing the couplers and the
different optical transmit units. It should be noted that the optical link budget is set
by the range of the 1310nm units less any additional loss for the couplers and the
interference from the other wavelength.

16.2.3 Co–Directional Single Fibre Working

A co–directional system differs from the contra–directional system as the two

signals are transmitted down a fibre in the same direction. This is in effect a simple
two channel passive WDM system. As with the other single fibre working options
this can be extended to provide multiple channels over a single fibre.

Marconi (Page 236) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

SMA 1550nm SMA

TX RX

RX TX

SMA SMA

TX RX

RX TX

1310

Figure 16.3 1310/1550 Single Fibre Co–directional Operation

The co–directional system available for the SMA products is shown in the above
Figure. This feature will double the capacity of the fibre compared with a traditional
installation allowing the inter–connection of four SMA systems over two fibres
(previously four fibres would be required).

16.2.4 Single Fibre Working for Red/Blue System

At 1550nm the options for single fibre operation are slightly different in that any
variations of the transmit wavelengths must be in the “1550nm band” to maintain
the optical link budget. This is achieved by using specially selected lasers which
have their centre wavelengths in the “1550nm band”. The optical link budget
available with this option is similar to that for the standard systems, but with an
increased penalty to account for the two couplers and the wavelength interference.

These two channel WDM (Wave Division Multiplexing) systems are often termed
“Red/Blue” referring to that fact that the wavelengths are at distinct separable
points of the available spectrum.

16.2.5 Contra–Directional Single Fibre Woking

Contra–directional operation over a single fibre applies to the situation where two
systems are inter–connected by a single fibre which carries both directions of
transmission. The couplers installed at each end of the link provide a filtering
function allowing the signal from the remote end through and blocking any
reflection from the near end transmitter. The application being discussed here is a
simple two colour option, but this can be extended to allow multiple channels to be
carried bi–directionally over a single fibre link.

Marconi (Page 237) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

SMA SMA

1554nm Red 1536nm Blue

TX TX

RX RX
Coupler Coupler

1536nm Blue 1554nm Red

Figure 16.4 (Red/Blue) Single Fibre Contra–Directional operation

16.2.6 Co–Directional Single Fibre Working

A co–directional system differs from the contra–directional system as the two

signals are transmitted down a fibre in the same direction. This is in effect a simple
two channel passive WDM system. As with the other single fibre working options
this can be extended to provide multiple channels over a single fibre.

SMA 1536 Blue SMA

TX RX

RX TX

SMA SMA

TX RX

RX TX

1554nm Red

Figure 16.5 (Red/Blue) Single Fibre Co–directional Operation

The co–directional system available for the SMA products is shown in above
Figure. This feature will double the capacity of the fibre compared with a traditional
installation allowing the inter–connection of four SMA systems over two fibres
(previously four fibres would be required).

Note: The Red/Blue co–directional system has the advantage that the span of the network
can be increased by using optical amplifiers.

16.3 SINGLE FIBRE WORKING FILTER/COUPLERS

There are a number of options for the couplers used to provide the single fibre
working solution. This section gives a brief overview of each type of coupler
available and describes some of the options for mounting and installation.

Marconi (Page 238) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.3.1 1310/1550 nm Co/ Contra–Directional Filter/ Couplers

The same type of coupler/filter is used to implement 1310/1550nm Co/Contra

directional working These are integrated modules which provide the fibre coupling
function for the transmit and receive fibres, and also serve to filter out any
reflected signals from the near end transmitter. Hence a different coupler is
required at each end of the link. These couplers however are common for all the
SDH lines rates supported, i.e. STM–1 and STM–4. An example of this type of
coupler is given below .

1310nm
1HAW20045AAW
1.3
1.5 S/N GB008090
TRK

1550nm
Figure 16.6 WD1315U–GPT1 COUPLER

This device prevents 1310nm light from the 1310 port appearing on the 1550nm
port and vice–versa. However it allows light from both 1310/1550 ports to appear
an the trunk(TRK) port

16.3.2 “Red/Blue” Contra–Directional Filters and Couplers

These perform the same function as the 1310/1550nm modules, except that the
filtering function is tuned to the each end of the 1550nm spectrum. Again a
different coupler is required for each end of the link and the coupler are common to
the supported line rates of STM–1 and STM–4. An example of this type of coupler
is given below.

1554nm
1HAW20044AAU
RED
Rx
BLUE S/N GB007994
COM

1536nm
Figure 16.7 WD1515RB–GPT1 COUPLER

This device prevents 1554 light from the Red port appearing on the Blue port and
1536 light from appearing on the Red port. It is designed so that there is a minimal
loss on the transmission from the Common (COM) port to the Blue port for
signals with a wavelength of 1536nm.

Marconi (Page 239) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.3.3 Red/Blue Co–Directional Filters and Couplers

These integrated modules use similar technology to those previously described,

but one end of the link (nearest the transmitters) is a simple combiner and the
other end (nearest the receivers) splits the signal into the constituent red and blue
signals. An example of this type of coupler is given below.

1536nm
1HAW20044ABM
BLUE
Rx
RED S/N GB007991
COM

1554nm
Figure 16.8 WD1515RR–GPT1 COUPLER

This device prevents 1536 light from the Blue port appearing on the Red port and
1554 light from appearing on the Blue port. It is designed so that there is a
minimal loss on the transmission from the Common (COM) port to the Red port
for signals with a wavelength of 1554nm.

16.3.4 Fibre handling for Single Fibre Working

The couplers and filters are supplied in a pre–terminated format with a choice of
connector types. To provide a simple and cost effective mounting for the single
fibre working couplers a compact fibre tray can be provided which can be rack
mounted in either ETSI of 19” racks. This fibre tray can be fitted with bulkhead
mounting uniters to provide a simple optical distribution facility for small to medium
installations. Alternatively the couplers and filters can be installed in the existing
optical distribution frames at customer premises.

Marconi (Page 240) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

UNIT COVER

FIBRE HOUSING

FIBRE CLAMP

COUPLER A

C
A&B
C
A&B

COUPLER B

A B C A B C
COMM 1310Tx 1550 COMM 1310 1550Tx
(TRK)
COUPLER A COUPLER B

Figure 16.9 Fibre Tray with 1310/1550nm Working

16.4 AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN (ALS)

The working of ALS is different for single and dual fibre working.

Marconi (Page 241) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.4.1 DUAL FIBRE WORKING WITH ALS

SMA SMA
Fibre break

TX TX

A B
RX RX

Figure 16.10 ALS Dual Fibre Working

If there is a break in cable from A –> B the following sequence of events occurs:

• There is a LOSS OF SIGNAL(LOS) at B

• There is an automatic shutdown of the laser at B
• There is then a LOS at A and an alarm is raised
• There is a shutdown of the laser at A

The system then undertakes a test sequence every 60 seconds by generating a

short pulse to check for the re–integration of the cable. Otherwise the lasers
remain off.

16.4.2 Single Fibre Working with ALS

The Single Fibre connection can be configured either with or without Automatic
Laser Shutdown (ALS).

16.4.3 ALS Using LOS

A number of features are used to enable the management system to detect fibre
breaks. In the event of a fibre break a ‘STM–n LOS’ may be raised, as with dual
fibre working, however with single fibre operation it is possible for light to be
reflected back from the surface of the break in which case the STM–n card may
detect a valid STM–n signal and not operate ALS, and more importantly, not detect
the break.

Marconi (Page 242) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

SMA SMA

Fibre Break
TX TX

RX RX

Figure 16.11 ALS Single Fibre Working Reflection of Signal

16.4.4 ALS Using Receipt Of Transmitted Section Trace

To detect fibre breaks under these circumstances Section Trace (J0) and
Expected Section Trace strings are set up as in Figure 16.12 so that each
direction has a unique Section Trace string. These enable Transmitted Section
Trace Detection. All this is found on Section Config screen on the connection
screen for the selected interface. The alarm that is raised is an ‘Receipt of
Transmitted Section Trace’. This alarm indicates when a STM–n card is detecting
the same Section Trace as it is transmitting.

Transmitted Transmitted
JO = JOa JO = JOb
Fibre Break
TX TX

A B

RX RX

JO = JOb JO = JOa
Expected Expected
Figure 16.12 ALS Single Fibre Working with Section Trace

16.4.5 ALS Using J0 Mismatch

In some circumstances a fibre break may reflect the transmitted light in such a
way that it creates errors in the J0 such that the reflected J0tx does not equal
J0tx, but the signal is not low enough to ensure that there is a LOS. In this case
there will be no ALS

To handle this case, an ”J0 Mismatch” criteria for ALS has been added, which is
enabled by the same LCT and card link settings as for ”Receipt of Transmitted
Section Trace”.

Marconi (Page 243) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 16: SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

16.4.6 CONFIGURING ALS FOR SINGLE FIBRE WORKING

Single Fibre operation with Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is supported by all of
the STM–n optical line cards.

Single Fibre ALS operation is supported by dedicated hardware features designed

into each type of STM–n optical line card. These are controlled by setting up the
Section Trace values and configuring on–card links to enable the ALS hardware
circuitry. The next section describes how to set the Trace Section Strings

16.4.7 SETTING THE TRACE SECTION FOR ALS WITH SFW

The procedure for setting the trace section is common to STM–1 and STM–4.
Using the LCT (subject to the associated Operator Manual) the Section Trace
should be set as follows:

• Connections – Card – Section Config.

• The Transmitted and Expected Section Trace should both be set to Access
Point ID and strings entered for the actual Trace values.
Note: 1. The single fibre ALS mechanism relies on each ‘direction’ having a unique Section
Trace string.
2. If the section traces are not configured, the “Unconfigured Section Trace” alarm will
be raised.

For further information see the associated Operator Manual.

16.4.8 USING THE DUAL STM–1 OPTICAL CARD WITH SFW

Section traces must be configured if using SFW with the dual STM–1 optical card.

16.5 LINK SETTINGS

Link configuration Information for the following three scenarios can be found in the
Link and Switch Configuration chapter.

• Non–ALS Operation (ALS and Bi–directional operation disabled)

• Co–Directional ALS Enabled (ALS and Uni–Directional enabled)
• Contra–Directional ALS Enabled (Bi–Directional Enabled)

These three scenarios are implemented by varying the link settings for:

• ALS operation
• Bi–Directional operation
Note: Removing BIDIR only is not a valid mode of operation.

• Changing the Bi–Directional link setting only, when the ALS disable link is fitted,
is not a valid mode of operation.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 244) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 17: TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

CHAPTER 17:
TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

17.1 INTRODUCTION

Within a network, a VC Trail will often pass through a number of different

operators’ domains, each operator being responsible for the passage of the VC
through their equipment.

PDH Termination PDH Traffic

VC Termination TC Termination

Provider 1

TC Trail
SDH
Subnetwork

TC Termination
VC Trail
PDH Trail

TC Termination

Provider 2
SDH TC Trail
Subnetwork

VC Termination TC Termination

PDH Termination PDH Traffic

Figure 17.1 Example of Operator Domain Boundaries

Alarms and Performance Information carried in the VC Overhead is an indication

of the quality of the trail. As this information is referenced to the source of the TC
trail, the operator’s domain must include this source in order to obtain quality
information specific to that operators equipment.

Tandem Connection Monitoring creates another source of OH information by using

data inserted into previously unused bytes (N1/N2 for VC3/4 and VC2/12
respectively). The information is created where the VC enters the domain (the
TCM source) and terminated where the trail leaves the domain (the TCM sink). A
passive monitor is also available (TCM Monitor) which may be used to monitor the
TCM trail between source and sink.

Marconi (Page 245) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 17: TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

17.2 TRUE TCM

As illustrated in Figure 17.1, the TC trail extends between entry and exit points of
an SDH Sub–network. These entry and exit points determine sub–network
boundaries, pipeline (passed straight through) to sub–network boundary or VC/TC
termination point.

Note: The TC trail is always a sublayer within the associated VC trail which means that at
VC termination points, the associated TC is also terminated.

The physical TC termination is always at the STM–N cards however, from the
operators perspective, the logical TC trail should be adopted.

Mappings between physical and logical termination points (including any protection
switching which may have taken place), are carried out by the Comms/Controller
function. Figure 17.2 illustrates the relationship between logical and physical trails
and associated mappings.

Physical to Logical TC Termination Points

Physical to Logical TC Termination Points
mapped across from Termination Point
Mapping across from
Alarms and Performance Data
Termination Points Physical TC Logical TC

Switch Switch

STM–N Card STM–N Card

Non STM–N Card STM–N Card

Termination Points Termination Point

Boundary
Logical TC
Physical VC and
Physical TC Subnetwork
Physical TC Trail

Logical TC Trail
VC Trail

Termination Point Physical to Logical TC Termination Points Physical to Logical TC Termination Points
mapped across from mapped across from Termination Point
Logical TC Alarms and Performance Data Alarms and Performance Data
Logical TC

Switch Switch

STM–N Card STM–N Card STM–N Card STM–N Card

Boundary
Subnetwork Termination Point Termination Point
Physical TC Physical TC Boundary
Subnetwork
Physical TC Trail

Logical TC Trail

Figure 17.2 Relationship between Logical and Physical TC Trails

17.2.1 Pseudo TCM

Pseudo TCM provides a means of reporting SDH card/path alarms and

performance data for faults that exist up to the TCM boundary. This facility may
report possible faults that lie outside as well as within the TCM trail. It serves as a
guide, allowing further investigation towards the TCM source.

Marconi (Page 246) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 17: TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

Note: As the network bytes N1 and N2 in the POH cannot be accessed in this mode,
Tandem Connection Trail Trace will not be available.

17.2.2 TCM Equipping Rules

Tandem Connection Sub–Layer Performance Monitoring (Full TCM) is only

available providing ALL SDH cards installed in the SMA sub–racks are TCM
Variants and the correct version of software has been installed

Note: Non–TCM SDH cards are not supported in Series 4, but Tandem Connection
Non–Intrusive Performance Monitoring (Pseudo TCM) is available providing the correct
version of software has been installed.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 247) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 17: TANDEM CONNECTION MONITORING

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 248) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

CHAPTER 18:
CELLSPAN

18.1 GENERAL

CellSpan is a range of products within the Marconi SDH portfolio which provides a
cost–effective means for network operators to extend monitored ATM service
down to the customer premises. CellSpan products can be deployed in both retrofit
and new build applications and can be managed centrally by the Marconi network
management system, Element Manager, or by a local terminal.

Series 4 SMA units support the CellSpan –i SB25 product. The CellSpan–i
system comprises three main types of element:

• An ATA (ATM Traffic Adapter)

• An ATC (ATM Traffic Combiner)
• An ATX (ATM Traffic Extender – Extender II and SMA–1/4CP only)

18.1.1 Common Features

Both ATM User Network Interface (UNI) and ATM Network/Network Interface
(NNI) formats are supported on the external interfaces of the ATA, ATX and ATC.

The ATA and ATX provide an ATM connection to the end–user. The ATC provides
the ATM connection to the public ATM switch.

The ATA, ATX and ATC support connection admission control (CAC).

18.1.2 ATM Traffic Adapter Card (ATA)

The ATM Traffic Adapter card (ATA) is housed in tributary positions of the SMA
family of synchronous multiplexers. Up to four ATA cards can be fitted as tributary
cards into any host SMA subrack. They are fitted into vacant tributary slots and
their associated LTUs are fitted to the trib LTU slots. Each ATA card supports up to
three 34 Mbit/s or 45Mbit/s (DS3) electrical bearers or an electrical or optical 155
Mbit/s bearer. These allow ATM cells received to be transported over an
appropriate choice of SDH Virtual Container from the following list: VC–12, VC–3,
VC–4.

For example, ATM service provided to a customer on an STM–1 interface with

sustained cell rates of less then 49 Mbit/s can be carried through the network
within a VC–3, rather than the VC–4 required for ‘plain’ SDH transport.

The ATA in an SMA also offers true dual parenting. Additionally, for maximum
flexibility, the ATA can undertake ATM UNI/NNI address conversion thus
supporting both UNI and NNI formats but the VPI/VCI value must be unchanged.

Marconi (Page 249) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

The ATA also supports Usage Parameter Control (UPC), the formal name for
‘policing’ which is used to stop end–users violating the terms of their service
contract.

The ATA provides a peak–cell–rate–limited ATM cell flow towards the network,
provided on a per–Virtual–Path (VP) basis.

CLE
(Customer
Located
Equipment)
for dual parenting
SMA STM–1
or
TDM trib cards STM–4
PDH tribs
at various rates
(e.g. 2, 34, 45
or 155 Mbit/s)

155 Mbit/s ATM UNI

(can be sub loaded) LTU
or CellSpan cards
3 X 34 Mbit/s ATM UNI at various rates SDH VCs (VC–12, VC–3, VC–4).
(can be sub–loaded) Some VCs carrying TDM traffic, others carrying
or ATM traffic.
3 X 45 Mbit/s ATM UNI ATM cells mapped directly into VC–12, VC–3 or
(can be sub–loaded) VC–4.

Figure 18.1 ATA Location and Mapping Options

Figure 18.1 shows the SMA on the end–user premises providing both TDM and
ATM access from the same SDH platform.

Individual SDH VCs (VC–12, VC–3, VC–4) are assigned to carry ATM cells
between the ATA cards and an ATC card – termed ‘direct mapping’.

In addition to direct mapping, Cellspan–i products can provide even more

bandwidth saving by the use of Inverse Multiplexing (VCIMA) which offers up to 63
VC–12 links per group.

Even though a strict ‘ceiling’ is imposed on the bandwidth by the VC–n

container(s) used, end users are permitted to ‘burst’ at the 34Mbit/s, 45Mbit/s or
155Mbit/s line rate of their physical connection, i.e. ATM cells containing data can
be sent continuously up to a (contractually specified) maximum burst size. Buffers
within the ATA are used to store the excess cells for later transfer within the VC–n
(or n x VC–n) rate.

The ATA card can be configured to supply Constant Bit Rate (CBR), Variable Bit
Rate (VBR), and best effort ATM service categories, with Available Bit Rate (ABR)
support envisaged in future CellSpan releases. Multiple ATM streams (identified by
their VPI/VCI value) can be provided per physical interface. Each of these can be
assign its own service category, up to 4 different categories per interface. Each
traffic category can also be assigned a CAC (Connection Admission Control) and
ATM cell policing (UPC – Usage Parameter Control), to stop end–users violating
their service contract.

The end–user customer connections are to the appropriate ITU–T PDH, SDH and
ATM standards (G.703, G.804, I.432, G.707, G.708 and G.709), and the
appropriate ATM Forum specifications (UNI 3.1 and TM 4.0).

Marconi (Page 250) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

Each physical tributary of an ATA card can have multiple VPI/VCI terminations, up
to 4000 bidirectional connections per ATA overall. Up to 256 of these terminations
per card can be simultaneously monitored (statistics for cell loss, etc.) but there is
a limit of 256 per SMA.

The 34 Mbit/s ATA card can support up to 3 x 34M ports. The 45Mbit/s ATA card
can support up to 3 x 45M ports.

The cell monitoring features (OAM F4/F5 flows and loopback, and cell
performance counts) are as per ITU–T I.610.

Note: The ATA facilities described in paragraphs 7 to 19 above also apply to the ATC card
described below (unless otherwise indicated).

18.1.3 ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC)

The ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC) card is housed within the SMA and can be
co–located with the ATM switch. The ATC provides the interface from the SDH
access network to the ATM switch. In this role it can both:

• Combine ATM traffic from multiple ATAs (or ATXs), presented to it as multiple
SDH VCs carrying ATM cells, into a single VC–4 high speed STM–1 interface.
In CellSpan Release 2 it can combine ATM cells from any mixture of VC–12,
VC–3 (in permutations of SDH VCs allowed by SDH multiplexing), or terminate
a VC–4 from an ATA, the so–called ‘direct mapping’ options. It can terminate
traffic from up to 63 ATAs (or ATXs) (the limit is 63 VC–12s).
• Route ATM traffic from the switch to multiple ATA or ATC cards and/or ATX
units.

Additionally, for maximum flexibility, the ATC can undertake:

• ATM UNI/NNI address conversion thus supporting both UNI and NNI formats on
the interface to the ATM switch
• Virtual Path Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) address translation to
fully support multiple distant ATAs ATCs and ATXs.

18.1.3.1 ATA and ATC Interface Details

Table 18.1: ATA and ATC Interface Details

Card Name Interface Rate Number of Interfaces
ATA/ATC–34 E3/34 Mbit/s 3
ATA/ATC–155 STM–1/155 Mbit/s 1
ATA/ATC – 45 DS3/45–Mbit/s 3

18.1.3.2 ATA/ATC Differences

Compared with the ATA, the ATC can also route ATM cells to multiple destination
CellSpan elements, and can combine traffic from multiple physical customer
interfaces onto a single SDH VC or group of VCs. The following diagram illustrates
these differences:

Marconi (Page 251) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

n X physical ports n X SDH VCs or n X

inverse multiplex
group of SDH VCs
SMA
End–User ATM Traffic
Equipment Adapter
SMA ATM Cross
ATM Traffic
SMA Connect
End–User Combiner
ATM Traffic
Equipment Adapter

SDH Network

End–User
1 SMA
1 End–User
SMA Equipment
Equipment
2 ATM Traffic
Combiner
ATM Traffic
Combiner 2

1 SMA
1
End–User
End–User
SMA ATM Traffic
Combiner 2 Equipment
Equipment 2 ATM Traffic
Combiner

3 3

Figure 18.2 ATA/ATC Differentiation

The upper part of Figure 18.2 shows the ATA and ATC in a typical ATM access
deployment. This illustrates that the ATA maps one physical interface onto a single
SDH VC. If there are multiple interfaces, then they each map onto their own SDH
VC (or inverse multiplex group of SDH VCs). All traffic from a single ATA port is
routed to the same destination, which can be an ATC as shown, or another ATA
for point–to–point links across an SDH network. The ATC combines the ATM traffic
arriving from multiple ATAs for presentation as a single stream to the ATM switch.

The lower part of Figure 18.2 shows a point–to–multipoint ATM network built upon
SMA and CellSpan components without the use of an ATM switch.

18.1.4 ATM Traffic Extender (ATX)

The ATM Traffic Extender card (ATX) is a unit that can be plugged into the 4x2
Extender II CLE or into the SMA–1/4CP.

The ATX products are Customer Located Equipment which can provide transport
towards the network over the Extender II system. In this case, the Ext/ATX units
connect into an SMA through a tributary unit (VC–AM) which allows ‘hubbing’ of up
to four ATXs from one VC–AM card. The ATX units can also connect directly into
an SMA where they are plugged into the SMA–1/4CP.

SMA–1/4CP equipment supports the four CellSpan–i products:

1 x 34M port
1 x 45M port
1 x 155M port Electrical
1 x 155M port Optical
When hosted on SMA–1/4CP units the Extender II VC–TS delivery limitation of 14
x VC12’s does not apply. The full ATX unit bandwidth – mapped into the relevant
VC12, VC3, VC4 or VC12 VCIMA group of up to 63 VC12 links – is supported.

Note: More detailed information can be found in the appropriate equipment manual.

Marconi (Page 252) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

18.2 APPLICATIONS

Figure 18.3 below shows the ATA, ATX and ATC in a network application. Here a
user wishes to connect their site using ATM through the public access network, to
another site and also to monitor their traffic. Note that this scenario can be
extended to allow many sites to connect to this same remote site through the ATC
and the ATM cross–connect (or switch). Thus, users can efficiently inter–connect
any equipment (for example, IP routers) with a suitable ATM interface over such a
network.

Customer Site Access Core

(Customer Located
Equipment)
TDM

TDM
SMA STM–n
ATM delivery SDH ATM
34/45/155 Mbit/s ATA
SMA Switch
(second Network ATC
link option)
TDM
SMA–1/4CP
ATM STM–n
34/45/155 Mbit/s ATX delivery
Consolidating
(second traffic from multiple
link option)
ATAs/ATXs
SMA
ATA
Third Party
NTE/xDSL

ATA and ATX as NTE ATA for access efficiency ATC for consolidation
• Provision of ATM UNI, with • Efficient transport of traffic • Multiplexes traffic from ATAs
cell monitoring from third party NTEs and ATXs into common bearer
• Bandwidth–efficient use of • Also bandwidth–efficient • Saves on ATM Cross Connect
the SDH network delivery to xDSL ATM line card costs

• Mixed TDM and ATM transport SDH Network

over common STM–n bearer • Provides end to end path protection between ATA/ATX and ATC

Figure 18.3 Position of the CellSpan Units in an SDH Access Network

Because CellSpan products provide extra features to the SMA (ATA and ATC) or
SMA–1/4CP(ATX), the original SDH and PDH features of SMA and SMA–1/4CP
are still available. Therefore users can have a combination of ATM, SDH and PDH
features from one installation.

18.2.1 ATM NTE

The ATA and ATX also provide ATM Network Termination Equipment (NTE)
features. ATM NTE is used by some operators to monitor the quality of ATM
delivery on the customer premises, including the collection of ATM statistics
relevant to ATM service. Here, the NTE is Customer Located Equipment (CLE)
owned by operator, which connects to Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)
owned by the customer.

Marconi (Page 253) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

18.2.2 Consolidation of ATM Traffic

The ATA card can be used to ‘hub’ (or consolidate) ATM traffic from third party
NTEs. To achieve this, the ATA card can be located at appropriate nodes in the
access network where an SMA is present (See Figure 18.4).

The 155 Mbit/s ATA, with single mode optical interfaces, may be fitted such that it
can ‘drive’ a fibre link to a distant end–user site where the third party NTE is
located.

CLE Street/Local Access Core

(Customer Located
Equipment)
Exchange
TDM traffic delivered
in parallel
TDM TDM
SMA
ATM ATA SDH
SMA
Network ATC ATM
ATA SMA Switch
ATA
Third Party
NTE

ATAs in ‘hubbing’ role

Figure 18.4 Consolidation (‘Hubbing’) ATA Application

18.2.3 Point–to–multipoint and Trunk Applications

For a limited number of customers served by certain operators, the ATC could be
used without connecting to ATM switches as shown in Figure 18.5. This would, for
small mesh networks, be cheaper overall than a network using an ATM switch (or
switches) in the core.

SDH
1 Network 1 End–User
End–User SMA
SMA
Equipment 2 Equipment
2 ATC ATC

1 SMA
1
SMA End–User
End–User ATC 2 Equipment
Equipment 2 ATC
3
3

Figure 18.5 CellSpan – Point to Point Application

Marconi (Page 254) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

Figure 18.5 illustrates a point–to–multipoint ATM network built upon SMA and
CellSpan components without the use of an ATM switch. The numbers each
represent a different piece of equipment or type of service to be connected (for
example, the LAN on each site, video conferencing equipment, a specialised
finance or CAD network, or even ATM–equipped PBXs on each site).

This application uses the routeing features of the ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC) to
send ATM traffic to multiple destinations from the same source. It also uses the
feature that traffic of multiple service types (indicated by the numbers in circles)
can be presented to the ATC on multiple physical connections but transported to a
destination ATC on a single SDH VC (or group of SDH VCs).

The multiple service classes are supported on that SDH VC in separate ATM
streams. Although not true ATM switching, such a situation provides a valuable
managed service for those operators with an SMA infrastructure of managed,
customer ATM traffic.

Note: For a limited, point–to–point connection between two sites, an ATA could be
deployed at each site with an SDH VC linking the two ATAs across an SDH network. However,
as soon as one site requires ATM connection (from the same card) to more than one other site
then an ATM Traffic Combiner (ATC) is required – although up to four ATAs can be installed in
the same SMA for multiple point–to–point links, if required.

ATC to ATC is also be an option for those wishing to improve use of ‘thin’ ATM
trunk routes (switch to switch connections in the ‘backbone’ of an ATM network),
where they may not wish to allocate entire STM–1 paths through the SDH network
to ATM traffic.

18.2.4 ATM Traffic Adapter (ATA)

Customer Site Operator Network
Single mode
optical fibre Cells mapped into
ATM (UNI) Third Party SDH VCs
NTE 155 Mbit/s ATAs ATM
Cross
ATA SMA Connect
(Alternative NTE) SDH Network SMA ATC ATM Traffic
ATA
ATM (UNI) Third Party
ATM
NTE (UNI
or NNI)
(Alternative NTE)

PDH transmission
systems Cells mapped into
ATM (UNI) Third Party SDH VCs
NTE 34 Mbit/s ATA
SMA
(Alternative NTE) ATA SDH Network SMA ATC ATM Traffic

ATM (UNI) Third Party ATM

NTE (UNI
or NNI)
(Alternative NTE)

ATM (UNI) Third Party

NTE

(Alternative NTE)

Figure 18.6 ATA Gives Access Efficiency when Carrying ATM in the SDH Network

Unless used as an NTE, the ATM Traffic Adapter (ATA) card need not be located
on customer premises.

Marconi (Page 255) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 18: CELLSPAN

The ATM–into–SDH mapping features of the CellSpan concept can be used

elsewhere in the SDH network to reduce the bandwidth used to carry ATM traffic.
To achieve this, the ATM Traffic Adapter (ATA) card can be located at appropriate
nodes in the access network where an SMA is present.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 256) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 19: PACKETSPAN

CHAPTER 19:
PACKETSPAN

19.1 PACKETSPAN LINK PRODUCTS

PacketSpan Link products provide point to point (transparent) transport of packet

data across SDH–based networks.

PacketSpan Link products provide mapping of packets into SDH for transmission
over a wide area. Packets received over a 10BASE–T interface are mapped into n
x 2Mbit/s links, grouped together using Multi Link PPP (Point to Point Protocol) in
VC–12 payloads.

19.2 PACKETSPAN MANAGEMENT

The management of the SDH domain and Ethernet (Data) domain is separate.
The SDH domain is managed by the Element Manager network management
system – while the Ethernet domain on the card is managed from the PacketSpan
Data Element Management System.

19.3 APPLICATION TO SERIES 4

With regard to Series 4 SMA products, there are references elsewhere in this
manual to PacketSpan and to PacketSpan ETX, ETA and ERA options. Note that
PacketSpan ETX options apply to SMA–1/4CP. ETA and ERA options apply to
SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8). For further information on
PacketSpan see the relevant PacketSpan manual(s).

Marconi (Page 257) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 19: PACKETSPAN

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 258) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 20: AUXILIARY

CHAPTER 20:
AUXILIARY

20.1 SMA–1/4CP

20.1.1 Auxiliary

The SMA–1/4CP is equipped with one 64Kbit/s AUX (V11) interface per optical
Line, providing clock and data suitable for remote management of subtended
equipment (i.e. CMUX).

Aux port 1 is associated with Line West.

An internal switch is supported for Aux port 2, which selects between either AUX
access from Line East or Comms access for DCC AUX. The switch source
selection for AUX 2 is user configurable from LT/EMOS.

The switch selection is controlled by the Comms/Controller function.

The AUX byte configuration selection is not carried out via internal switches/links.
A user configurable option is provided, whereby the user is allowed to select a
single byte from the SOH to be presented onto the AUX port.

20.1.2 EOW

Dedicated EOW interface/access is not supported on SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c.

EOW operational information for SMA–1/4 is contained in the following chapter.

20.2 SMA–1/4C, SMA-1/4UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

20.2.1 General

SMA–1/4c/uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) are capable of supporting co–located CMUX

products. This is achieved by use of the AUX ports:

• On the SMA–1/4c/uc synchronous 64kbits/s recovered from the OH bus is made

available at the Ancillary LTUs.
• On the SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) the AUX card must be fitted.

Management of CMUX subtended from Extender products is via the AUX card and
VCAM cards in an SMA shelf.

20.2.2 Management of AUX on SMA1/4c/uc

Selection of AUX, EOW and DCC AUX channel routeing to the Ancillary
connectors is managed by the Comms/Controller card. See Figure 20.1.

Marconi (Page 259) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 20: AUXILIARY

20.2.3 AUX/EOW OH Byte Selection

Selection of the appropriate byte for routeing to the 64kbit/s Ancillary AUX/EOW
port is achieved in the AUX Access Module on the Core Card via a control bus
configuration message.

For EOW use, the following bytes can be configured to be sent to the AUX
connector on the ancillary: E1,E2,F1 (supported on EOW card).

For AUX use, the following bytes can be configured to be sent to the AUX
connector on the ancillary:

Table 20.1: SOH Byte Options

Row Column
9 8
9 9
8 8
8 9
7 8
7 9

20.2.4 AUX/EOW A/B Selection

The Ancillary AUX/EOW port can select between the A/B Core Cards either
manually or in response to MSP switching events.

Line Line Line Line

WEST A EAST A WEST B EAST B

Core Core
Card Card
A SCP ASIC SCP ASIC B

OH Buses OH Buses

AUX AUX
Access Access

Control\
DCC AUX Comms
Card

AUX 2 Control
Anciliary
LTU
DCC AUX Control

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 1 Control

Figure 20.1 AUX Switching on SMA–1/4c/uc Ancillary

Marconi (Page 260) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 20: AUXILIARY

20.2.5 DCC AUX Selection

The Ancillary AUX 2 port can further select between the AUX/EOW and DCC AUX
support. When DCC AUX support is selected management of Auxiliary Access
equipment can be supported via DCC routeing on the Comms/Controller card.

20.2.6 Management of AUX on SMA–1/4

The OH bytes defined above for AUX channels and EOW in relation to SMA–1/4c
are accessible via the two AUX slots. Selection of the OH bytes used is not
managed by the Comms/Controller Card but is configured via SMA cards.

The following configurations are supported using SMA cards:

• 1 x AUX Card and/or 1x EOW Card providing AUX and/or EOW access for Line
East and Line West and AUX Access for tribs 5–8.
• 2 x AUX cards providing AUX Access for Line East and Line West and tribs
1–8.
Note: The AUX Access function that is provided on the Core Cards is disabled when the
cards are fitted in the SMA–1/4 ADM.

20.2.7 AUX A/B Selection

The Line AUX ports, available on the AUX LTU, can select between the A/B Core
Cards either manually or in response to MSP switching events. See Figure 20.2.

Marconi (Page 261) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 20: AUXILIARY

Line Line Line Line

WEST A EAST A WEST B EAST B

Core Core
Card Card
A SCP ASIC SCP ASIC B

OH Buses OH Buses

AUX
Access

AUX East
AUX Card Control Control\
Comms
AUX West
AUX AUX Card
Access Access Control

DCC AUX

AUX West LTU AUX East LTU DCC AUX LTU

Figure 20.2 AUX Switching on the SMA–1/4 AUX Card

Note: Further information on EOW is provided in the EOW chapter.

Marconi (Page 262) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 21:
EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION FOR
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

21.1 INTRODUCTION

21.1.1 Functional Description

Dedicated EOW interface/access is not supported on SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c.

This chapter only applies to SMA1/4(4+4)(8).

Engineers Order Wire facilities are provided by an EOW card which fits in the
EOW card position of the sub–rack. The card may be used to provide 2W/4W
conversion, hook status detection and DC current feed for use with 2–wire
handsets. The handset is connected via a bantam jack on the front of the card.
The 4–wire port is connected via an Auxiliary LTU (AUX4). It is transformer
coupled with no DC and can be used for EOW network extension, or for an
external EOW equipment.

The card performs analogue to digital and digital to analogue conversion, with
A–law encoding and decoding. In addition, the card generates supervisory tones,
see Figure 21.2. DTMF decoding and a buzzer for incoming calls are provided.
The buzzer means the handset itself does not ring. It also allows incoming calls
even if the handset is not plugged in or has been left off–hook.

The card is fitted with an Inventory PROM (EEPROM) which carries information
about the card.

21.1.2 Card variants

The current card variants are:

Table 21.1: EOW Card Variants

Ringmaster Ring Slave
SMA–1/4 1HAT60576EAG 1HAT60576DAK

21.2 FEATURES

21.2.1 Status Indication

The card has three LEDs on its front edge to provide the following status
indications:–

• Red ON indicates an alarm in the unit.

Marconi (Page 263) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

• Green
ON when at least one EOW circuit on the network is in use.
FLASHES when the unit is ringing out.
• Yellow
ON for a user already engaged in a selective call who is making a call to a third
user (selective multiple call).
ON for a third user who is intruding in a selective call.
ON for an answering user who is talking in an omnibus call.
FLASHES when an omnibus call is unanswered, or the answering user is only
listening.

21.2.2 Push–button Switch States

Two momentary action switches are accessible from the front edge of the card,
they provide the following facilities:–

a) Access to the upper switch is through a hole in the front panel, so it can only be
depressed by a small screwdriver or similar tool. It initialises the EOW to a known
state in the case of card failure or after plugging the card in. Note that this will also
send a DTMF signal (code ‘B’) which will reset EOW cards elsewhere on the
network.

b) The lower switch has a number of functions as follows:

i) It allows any user to include himself in an established selective call by

continuously pressing the switch. When this occurs, intrusion tone is heard
on the handsets of all the users.

ii) It allows a user engaged in a selective conversation to call another user by

first momentarily pressing it.

iii) If an omnibus call is on–going then any user can be allowed to talk by
momentarily pressing the switch. To revert to a listening connection, the
switch must be pressed again.

21.2.3 Overhead Buses

The EOW card accesses a selected East and West line overhead bus and the
overhead bus of a selected STM–N tributary.

Note: A feature of the design is that the EOW facility is only available as follows:

Table 21.2: EOW Ring Slave/Ring Master

Ring Slave Ring Master
1HAT60576DAK 1HAT60576EAG
SMA1/4 SMA1/4
East A,West A, STM–1Trib 1 West A, STM–1Trib 1

21.2.4 Ring Master/Slave Control

The card provides an EOW for an SDH network with or without SLA elements.

Marconi (Page 264) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

To prevent re–generative addition of digitised EOW speech around a ring, the

EOW supports master/slave operation. All the EOW units are configured as slaves
in a ring, except one which is configured as a master.

When configured as a slave, the EOW card provides a speech bridge between its
handset, 4–wire port, STM–N Tributary 1 and both line East/West paths.

When configured as a master, the EOW card provides a speech bridge between
its handset, 4–wire port, STM–N Tributary 1 and a selected East or West path.

In addition, the EOW provides ring protection in case of fibre breakage. To provide
this feature, the master card periodically transmits particular codes on both East
and West transmit paths. The codes are passed on, unmodified, from East to
West and from West to East by the slaves. The master detects the codes on its
incoming East or West paths so it can determine ring integrity. If the codes are not
present on either East or West receive paths, then the master starts to operate like
a slave. This means that the EOW will function correctly with a fibre break. When
the fibre is repaired the master returns to its original mode.

The selection of ring master/slave operation is via a link on the card. The link is
directly below the buzzer and behind the red LED. Link the two pins nearest the
LED for Slave operation. Link the two pins furthest from the LED for Master
operation.

21.2.4.1 Networks without SLAs

Use card 1HAT60576DAK. Always fit the slave link, except for one element per
ring which is set to master.

21.2.4.2 Networks with SLAs

If there is an SLA in the ring always fit the slave link. For one element in the ring
card 1HAT60576EAG should be used instead of 1HAT60576DAK.

21.2.5 Telephone Number

The card telephone number is set by 8 DIP–switches to generate a two digit BCD
number between 10 and 99. (“ON” is zero, “OFF” is one, switch 8 is the Most
Significant Bit of the More Significant Digit). An invalid BCD code results in a
default number 10. [00 is reserved for omnibus calls. 01 is reserved. 02 to 09 are
unused.]

21.2.6 Default Configuration

The card powers up in the following state:–

• Switch Clock A/B Selection

Default B
• Optimux A/B setting
A
• G.703 #1
O/H byte F1 (West A)

Marconi (Page 265) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

• G.703 #2
O/H byte F1 (East A)
• EOW O/H byte
E1 (East A, West A and Trib 1)
• EOW Ring Master
Set by link
• EOW Telephone Number
Set by DIP–switches
• EOW Trib Selection
Tributary 1

The EOW card is ready to receive calls from power–on reset. To originate calls
after such a reset, either a DTMF code B must have been received from
elsewhere on the ring or the upper switch on the card must have been
momentarily pressed.

21.2.7 EOW Network Extension

The EOW is designed to include ring security when it resides on a ring. Multiple
rings can be linked to form a larger EOW network. The rings can be linked digitally,
via the overhead on an STM–N Tributary in position T1. T1 can also be used to
include EOW on a spur.

An analogue link can be provided by joining two 4–wire interfaces. This can form
an integrated EOW with an existing PDH or analogue network, see also paragraph
21.4.1.

It is possible to use the card for EOW without using the on–board features
described. See paragraph 21.4.1 for details.

21.2.8 64 kbit/s Co–directional Interfaces

The card provides two 64 kbit/s interfaces to G.703 which are transformer coupled
and meet the jitter requirements of G.823.

The selection of the SOH byte and the overhead bus on which to transmit/receive
is independent for each channel. Note that a feature of the design is that port 1 is
connected to West A and port 2 is connected to East A.

The access to each channel is via the Auxiliary LTU (Aux 5).

21.2.9 Handset Loop Disconnect/DTMF Switch

The Loop Disconnect/DTMF switch on the handset, marked FV/DC must be set to
FV for operation with the EOW card. The switch is located below the handset
earpiece.

21.2.10 Power–up Sequence

On Power–up the EOW Card checks to see which Switch Card Clocks are
present. In preference it chooses the Switch Card ’B’ Clock.

Marconi (Page 266) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

This choice is only made at Power–up. Hence if the Switch Card, whose Clock has
been chosen by the EOW card, subsequently fails, the EOW card does not
‘change–over’ to use the Clock of the other Switch Card.

If on EOW card Power–up Switch Card ’B’ is chosen and this Switch Card
subsequently fails the EOW card is unable to switch to Switch Card ’A’. To
overcome this problem, re–seat the EOW card. Switch ‘A’ will be selected as
Switch ‘B’ is not available.

21.3 2–WIRE EOW OPERATION

21.3.1 Using the EOW

Plug the telephone into the bantam jack plug on the front of the EOW card. The
recommended telephone is 1HFA20002AAJ.

The card uses DTMF codes A, B, C and D (generated by the card itself) to control
the call.

21.3.2 Audible and Visible Signals

The card incorporates a buzzer, which indicates incoming calls. The use of a
buzzer has the advantage that the handset need be neither on–hook nor plugged
in when a call arrives. There are two cadences as shown in Figure 21.1. (The
logic signal BUZZER occurs during the time the buzzer sounds, but it is not
cadenced.)

0.8s 2.4s

Selective
on
off

0.8s 0.8s 0.8s

Omnibus on
off

Figure 21.1 Selective and Omnibus Buzzer Cadences

Supervisory tones generated by the card are:–

‘Proceed to dial’, ‘Awaiting answer’, ‘EOW busy’ and ‘Intrusion’.
Call progress is shown by flashing green and yellow LEDs. The cadences of these
tones and LED flashing are shown in Figure 21.2.

Marconi (Page 267) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

Proceed to dial on
0.8s 2.4s
off
on
Awaiting answer
off

EOW busy
on
off

Intrusion
on
off

on
Flashing off
LED

Figure 21.2 Supervisory Tone Cadences

Procedure 1: Originating a Call

1. Replace the handset on–hook.

2. If the green LED is off, pick up the handset.

3. If the green LED comes on and you can hear proceed to dial tone, dial the
number of the required user. For an omnibus call, dial 00.

4. If the green LED remains off and intrusion tone is heard, this is the first call
following power up of the card. Press the upper button on the card
(through the hole in the front panel) and start again. Note that this will
reset all the EOW cards in the network.

5. If the green LED is on, the EOW is already in use. Pick up the handset.
The EOW busy tone will be heard.

6. To join in with this call, press and hold the lower button on the card. You
will be permitted to join the conversation and all users will also hear
intrusion tone. (If the lower button has no effect, the EOW is either in the
originating or awaiting answer phase of a call. In this case clear down and
try again later.)

7. If the green and yellow LEDs are both flashing, see 4.

21.3.3 Awaiting Answer

1. You have originated a call and you can hear awaiting answer tone.

2. THEN, if the call is answered, the awaiting answer tone stops. You can
now speak. (If an omnibus call is made, other users will not be heard
unless they wish you to. See 5 to 7 and the subsequent note.)

3. ELSE, if the call is not answered within 60 seconds, the call will be aborted
and the EOW busy tone will be heard. Clear down and try again later.

Marconi (Page 268) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

Procedure 2: Receiving a Selective Call

1. The buzzer on the EOW card sounds for a selective call.

2. The green LED flashes and the yellow LED is off.

3. You have 60 seconds to answer the call.

4. Lift the handset. The buzzer will stop sounding and the green LED will be
permanently lit. The call path is now established.

5. If the handset is already off–hook it should be replaced. The call may then
be answered as before.

Procedure 3: Receiving an Omnibus Call

21.3.3.1 Within 60 seconds of the call arriving

1. The buzzer on the EOW card sounds for an omnibus call and the green
and yellow LEDs both flash.

2. Lift the handset. The buzzer stops sounding and the green LED comes on
continuously. The yellow LED continues to flash. You can listen to the
caller and any other users who have established a speaking connection.

3. If the handset was off–hook already, then replace it on–hook. You can
then answer the call as above.

21.3.3.2 More than 60 seconds after the call arrived

4. The green and yellow LED’s are both flashing, but the buzzer on the EOW
card is silent. This means that an omnibus call was not answered at this
multiplexer within 60 seconds of it arriving, but it is still in progress. You
can still join the call as in 2.

21.3.3.3 How to speak

5. Answering an omnibus call as just described only allows you to listen to

the call. If you wish to speak, then momentarily press the lower button on
the card. The yellow LED comes on continuously. You may now speak as
well as listen.

6. When you no longer wish to speak, THEN, if you wish to continue

listening, momentarily press the lower button on the card. The yellow LED
starts flashing. You can no longer speak. You can toggle between this
state and the previous one by repeatedly pressing the lower button.

7. ELSE, to leave the call, clear down. The yellow LED starts flashing. (If
you change your mind, you can re–answer.)

Note: An omnibus call does not end until the originator clears down or the EOW
network is reset.

Marconi (Page 269) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

Procedure 4: Additional Calls

1. IF you have reached the conversation phase of a selective call, and you
wish to include a third user.

2. THEN momentarily press the lower button on the card. The yellow LED
will light, the speech connection is suspended and you will hear proceed to
dial tone. The number of the third user may now be dialled.

3. Speech connection is restored. Both users hear awaiting answer tone.

When the call is answered, awaiting answer tone stops and the yellow
LED goes off.

4. NOTE if after 60s the call is unanswered, it is aborted and the yellow LED
goes off.

5. IF you change your mind at any time while the yellow LED is on, you can
back out by momentarily pressing the lower button on the card again.

6. NOTE that additional users may only be called by either of the first two
parties in the call. If an additional user presses his button there is no
effect.

Procedure 5: Finishing a Call

1. To clear down, replace the handset on–hook.

2. IF you originated the call or you answered a selective call, clearing down
will clear the EOW network and the green LED will be extinguished.

3. IF you answered omnibus call , or you were an additional user in a

selective call, clearing down will not clear the EOW network and the green
LED will remain lit.

4. NOTE if another user is holding the network unintentionally, pressing the

upper button on any card will clear the network. (This could happen if a
user making an omnibus call fails to clear at the end of the call, or both
users in a selective call fail to clear.)

Procedure 6: Unused Codes

1. IF you dial your own number or a spare number, the awaiting answer tone
will not be heard. The 60 second ‘no answer’ timeout will run.

2. IF you dial * or # instead of 0–9, an originating call will be aborted and you
will receive EOW busy tone. A call to an additional user will be aborted
and you will be returned to the original connection.

Marconi (Page 270) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

21.4 4–WIRE FEATURES

21.4.1 EOW Network Extension

The 4–wire circuits can be used to connect a compatible EOW system. This
provides a means of linking different SDH rings, for example (though this can also
be achieved digitally via an STM–N link in Tributary 1 position). It can also provide
a link to a PDH or an analogue EOW network.

Connection is achieved via the Auxiliary LTU (AUX 4), refer to the appropriate
installation chapter for connector information.

Unless the same DTMF protocol is used, interworking between the systems is
impracticable; e.g. the built–in call control on the card uses DTMF digits A to D to
control set–ups.

21.4.2 Alternative EOW System

Provided that DTMF digits A to D are not used, an alternative analogue external
system can be connected to the 4–wire port. In this case, most of the EOW
features described in this chapter (for example 2–wire port, supervisory tones,
LEDs and telephone number control) will be unused.

Some features are still used, however. The upper push–button switch on the card
initialises the cards in the network and enables the 4–wire connections to the
speech bridge. The master/slave link must still be used to control performance on
an SDH ring. The card still provides conversion between analogue and E1 SOH
signals.

In some applications it is intended to use the Siemens Selective Call Inset,

S42023–A83–A1. This provides similar (but incompatible) features to the built–in
system. See its own operating manual for details. This external system ensures
compatibility and integration with an established Siemens EOW network.

A brief electrical specification for the 4–wire interface (inputs and outputs) is:–

• Impedance
600 ohm AC balanced
• Reference level
–4dBr  0.5dB @ 1024Hz

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 271) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 21: EOW OPERATIONAL INFORMATION

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 272) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 4: SPECIFIC SHELF CONFIGURATION DETAILS

SECTION 4:
SPECIFIC SHELF CONFIGURATION DETAILS

CHAPTER 22 . . . . . SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO

SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c/uc AND SMA–1/4 Page 275

Marconi (Page 273) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 4: SPECIFIC SHELF CONFIGURATION DETAILS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 274) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

CHAPTER 22:
SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4C AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)

22.1 SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO

SMA–1/4CP

This section desribes the product specific management functions for

SMA–1/4CP.

Note: SMA–1/4CP is capable of being upgraded to STM–4 (622mbit/s).

SMA–1/4CP forms a platform for the delivery of traditional PDH/SDH (e.g. 2Mbit/s,
34/45Mbit/s & STM–1 electrical and optical), and Broadband data interfaces (i.e.
ATM, Ethernet).

SMA–1/4CP supports three types of expansion modules, referred to as “Passive

2M expansion module”, “PDH/SDH expansion module” and “Broadband expansion
module”.

Passive 2M Expansion Modules are considered as ‘Dumb’ modules, which means

that these modules are controlled by the SMA–1/4CP Core (e.g. 8x2M expansion
module only).

PDH/SDH and Broadband Expansion Modules are considered as ‘intelligent’

modules, which means that these modules support their own microprocessor and
are managed as a separate entity (e.g. 16x2M, 34M/45M, STM–1, ATX etc).

The following versions of the SMA–1/4CP Core are supported:

Table 22.1: SMA–1/4CP Base Unit Details

Capacity Specification Connector
4 x 2M (E2) G.703 & X21 BNC unbalanced/RJ45 balanced/15 way D (X.21)
16 x 2M (E2) G.703 RJ45, balanced
16 x 2M (E2) G.703 1.0/2.3 unbalanced
Note: All the above base units are capable of supporting an expansion module.

STM–1 and STM–4 versions of the above SMA–1/4CP base units are supported.

The following Expansion Modules are supported:

Table 22.2: SMA–1/4CP Expansion Unit Details

TYPE Capacity Spec Connector Note
ATX– Note 1 1 x E3/DS3 IM BNC
ATX –Note 1 1 x STM–1 IM Optical(multimode) /
Electrical (BNC)
*Passive 2M/X21 8 x 2M/X21 G.703&X.21 G.703, Balanced: RJ45
G.703, Unbalanced: BNC Passive Module
X21, 15W D type
34/45M– Note 2 3 x 34/45 BNC unbalanced Active card

Marconi (Page 275) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

*ETX 2x10M 10baseT 2xRJ45 Active

Ethernet
STM–1 I1.1 Multimode
16x2M
Note: * not supported by the 16 x 2M Base unit.

Note 1: The PDH/SDH expansion Modules shall utilise the 38MHz interface into the
SCP ASIC.

Note 2: The ETX expansion module uses the eight X.21 interface for traffic transfer,
instead of the P–STM–1. The ETX card comprises of the Ethernet Domain only.

22.1.1 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION

The shelf type associated with the SMA–1/4CP is:

• SMA–1/4CP with Expansion

Figure 22.1 illustrates the SMA–1/4CP.

–16x2M
–8x2M + X.21
– 3x34M
– 3x45M
– 1 x STM–1
– ATX–34/45
AT
– ATX–155
– ETX –10M
Expansion Module Trib

Customer ADM– Core Trib1

CTRL COMMS SWITCH

LW STM–1 L1.1 LE STM–1 L1.1

STM–4
–4x2M + X.21
–16x2M
–34/45M
Figure 22.1 SMA–1/4CP Line Termination representation

22.1.2 Physical Card and Slot Allocation

The user can configure, unconfigure, and adopt the Core unit (tributary) and the
line modules. The CCF can auto–configure the Controller/Comms and Switch
cards.

Note: The Core Unit consists of the Line modules, Controller, Comms, Switch and 2M
tributary functions.

Marconi (Page 276) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

In addition, a Global Adopt function is supported. This option applies to the base
unit and the expansion module.

The SMA–1/4CP has the ability to support an Expansion Module, which the user
can configure, unconfigure or adopt. The modify option is only applicable to
specific Expansion Modules (eg STM–1), identified by M in the table below. The
SMA–1/4CP ADM consists of two slots as indicated in the table:

Table 22.3: SMA–1/4CP Physical Card and Slot

Allocation
Slots Description Allowable Card Types
1 Base unit 4x2M + X.21
16x2M

2 Expansion Module Passive 8x2M + X.21 (see Note)

16x2M
1x34M/45M ATX
1xSTM–1 electrical ATX
1xSTM–1 optical ATX
1xSTM–1 electrical (M) (see Note)
1xSTM–1 optical (M)
3x34M/45M
2x10M ETX (M) (see Note)
Note: Not supported on the 16x2M SMA–1/4CP base

22.1.3 Minimum Configuration

The SMA–1/4CP base unit is a single Core card which has a minimum
configuration of:

• Controller
• Comms
• Switch
• (i.e. no line module, tributary or expansion module).

These functions are always reported as configured by the Controller – the user
does not have to configure these functions from LT/EMOS.

22.1.4 DCC Access

The communications support is 4 DCC (2xDCCr and 2xDCCm) from Line East and
Line West only.

22.1.5 PROTECTION

The SMA–1/4CP does not support Core Card or Expansion Module protection.

Marconi (Page 277) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

SMA–1/4CP does support the following Traffic protection schemes:

• MSP
• SNCP
• Port

22.1.6 ADDRESSING SCHEMES

The controller function performs the following tasks:

• Identifies the system identity.

• Addresses the Core functions and Expansion Module on the control and
inventory buses.
• Determines expansion module and line module insertion and extraction

22.2 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES

SPECIFIC TO SMA–1/4C/UC, SMA–1/4(4+4) AND
SMA–1/4(8)

This section describes the product specific management functions for SMA–1/4c
and SMA–1/4. The three products are:–

Table 22.4: SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),

SMA–1/4(8)
Product Description Product code
Fullsize ADM Dual LTU ROW SMA–1/4 (8)
Midsize ADM Single LTU ROW SMA–1/4 (4+4)
Compact ADM (4 Tributaries) SMA–1/4c

These products are based on SMA Series 3. The main new features are:

• the Core Card which comprises of the Switch, two Line interfaces and core
2Mbit/s functionality (32 Channel) Tribs onto a single PCB.
• A combined Comms/Controller card physically combining the Controller and
Comms functions.
• A Dual STM–1 Trib using a 78M interface and Optical Modules.

There is software for the Core Card combining the functions of the Switch, Trib
and Lines. For the Controller/Comms there will be two processors so separate
software for the two functions is retained.

Marconi (Page 278) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

22.2.1 PHYSICAL SHELF CONFIGURATION

There are two versions of SMA–1/4, the SMA–1/4(8) which has two rows of LTUs
and the SMA–1/4(4+4) which has a single row of LTUs. The SMA–1/4(4+4) is the
same as the SMA–1/4(8) except that the top row of LTUs does not exist. This
means in the single row shelf Tributary positions 1 to 4 can only have Front
Plug–Up (FPU) Tributaries fitted.

Table 22.5: SMA–1/4(8) Shelf Configuration

LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU
SLOT
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116
LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU PWR
SLOT 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217
ANCILLARY
SLOT
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317

C
O E
T T T T C C T T T T M A O P P
R R R R O O R R R R M U W S S
I I I I R R I I I I S X U U
B B B B E E B B B B / A
C 1 U A B
1 2 3 4 A B 5 6 7 8 O X
N
T 2

TRIB
SLOT 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415

Table 22.6: SMA–1/4 (4+4) Shelf Configuration

LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU LTU PWR
SLOTS
201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217
ANCILLARY
SLOTS
301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317

C
O E
T T T T C C T T T T M A O P P
R R R R O O R R R R M U W S S
I I I I R R I I I I S X U U
B B B B E E B B B B / A
C 1 U A B
1 2 3 4 A B 5 6 7 8 O X
FPU FPU FPU FPU N
T 2

TRIB
SLOTS 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415

Marconi (Page 279) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

Trib positions Trib 1 to Trib 4 do not have LTU access so are limited to Front
plug–up (FPU) cards.

For the SMA–1/4(8) and SMA–1/4(4+4) shelves the ancillary LTUs are:–

Table 22.7: SMA–1/4(8) 22.2.1.1 SMA-1/4uc

and SMA–1/4(4+4) Ancillary LTUs
P L
Ancillary LTU Slot Use L L
WC
T T LTU 2M LTU 2M
R T
217 Power U U LTU
101 102 103 104 105

301 Sync C
302 Not used O
303 Not used M
304 Not used T T C C T T M
305 Not used R R O O R R S
306 Not used I I R R I I /
307 Not used B B E E B B A
308 2M Test U
309 LCT 1 2 A B 3 4 X
310 AUI /
311 MAT AUX FPU FPU A
312 AUX N
313 AUX C
314 AUX I
315 User I/O L
201 202 203 204 205 206 207
316/317 Local Alarm

SMA–1/4c

Table 22.8: SMA–1/4c Shelf Configuration

FIBRE MANAGEMENT AREA
L L L L
C T T T T
O T T T T U U U U CORE LTU
M C C R R R R P P
M O O I I I I S S 32 Channels
S R R B B B B U U
/ E E
C 1 2 3 4 A B 110a 111a 112a 113a 114a/115a
O A B
N FPU FPU
T
L L L L
T T T T A CORE
U U U U N ANCILLARY
C

110b 111b 112b 113b 114b 115b

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109

Marconi (Page 280) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

Trib positions ’Trib 1’ and ’Trib 2’ do not have LTU access so are limited to Front
plug–up (FPU) cards.

The SMA–1/4c ancillary LTUs are:–

Table 22.9: SMA–1/4c Ancillary LTUs

Ancillary LTU Use

114b Ancillary (additional functions)

115b Ancillary (Core functions)

22.2.2 PHYSICAL CARD/SLOT ALLOCATION

There is a hardware card keying mechanism to prevent insertion of cards in invalid

slots. For the SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) the permitted card equipping is
shown in Table 22.10. Permitted card equipping for SMA–1/4c/uc is shown in
Table 22.11.

Table 22.10: Permissible Card/Slot Allocations for SMA–1/4(4+4) and

SMA–1/4(8)
Slots Description Allowable Card Types
401 to 404 Trib Slots (1 – 4) Any SMA Trib permitted for the Dual LTU shelf.
SMA Tribs not requiring LTUs
(Front Plug Up) for the single row LTU shelf.
405 and 406 Core Cards CORE (Any variant)
407 to 410 Trib Slots (5–8) Any SMA Trib
411 Comms/Controller Slot Comms/Controller only
412 Auxiliary Card 1 Slot AUX 0/0.1
413 Auxiliary EOW Card 2 Slot AUX 0/0.1, EOW
414 and 415 PSU A and PSU B Slots SMA–16 PSU only

Table 22.11: Permissible Card/Slot Allocations for SMA–1/4c/uc

Slots (c) Slots (uc) Description (SMA1/4c)
Allowable Card Types (SMA1/4uc)
101 207 Comms/Controller Slot Comms/Controller only Comms/Controller only
102 and 103 203 and 204 Core CORE (Any variant) CORE (Any variant)
104 201 SMA Trib not requiring LTUs
Trib 1 SMA Trib LTUs/Front
(Front Plug Up) or a 2M Protection card
105 202 Trib 2 SMA Trib not requiring LTUs
SMA Trib LTUs/Front
(Front Plug Up)
106 and 107 205 and 206 Trib 3 and Trib 4 Any SMA Trib 2Mbit/s only
108 and 109 - PSU A and PSU B Slots SMA1/4c PSU only (1.0”) -

22.2.3 CARD TYPES

SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) and SMA–1/4c Tributaries are defined as:–

Table 22.12: SMA–1/4 Tributaries

Dual STM–1 Electrical Card with LTU access
Dual STM–1 Electrical Card with front access
Dual STM–1 Optical Card
Quad STM–1 Electrical Card
Quad STM–1 Optical Card

Marconi (Page 281) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

VCAM Card
SMA– VCTS SFW Optical LTU
SMA– VCTS Optical LTU
SMA– VCTS Electrical LTU (1.0/2.3)
Ruggedised FC/PC to ASC SFW Coupler
2Mbit/s Trib Balanced 32 Port with LTU access
1.5Mbit/s (G.703) Trib Balanced 32 Port with LTU access
2Mbit/s Trib Unbalanced 16 Port with LTU access
2Mbit/s Trib Balanced 16 Port with LTU access
1.5Mbit/s Trib Balanced 16 Port with LTU access
2Mbit/s Trib Unbalanced 32 Port with LTU access
140Mbit/s Trib 1 Port with LTU access
140Mbit/s Tributary Card (1.0/2.3) with front access
34Mbit/s Trib 3 Port with LTU access
45Mbit/s Trib 3 Port with LTU access
34M Transmux
CellSpan
PacketSpan

22.2.4 MINIMUM SUBRACK CONFIGURATION

The SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) and SMA–1/4c ADM’s have been designed to allow various
sub–equipping options. The minimum permitted logical card configuration is an
unduplicated system consisting of:

• Mux Comms/Controller
• Core Card with ’A’ switch module

22.2.5 DCC ACCESS

22.2.5.1 SMA–1/4 ADM

This supports a total of 40 DCC, 4 to each Core Card, providing DCCR and
DCCM to each LINE, and four DCC to each Tributary.

• LINE EAST A
• LINE WEST A
• LINE EAST B
• LINE WEST B
• 8xTRIBs

22.2.5.2 SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc Compact ADM

This supports a total of 24 DCC, 4 to each Core Card, providing DCCR and DCCM
to each LINE, and four DCC channels to each Tributary.

• LINE EAST A
• LINE WEST A
• LINE EAST B
• LINE WEST B
• 4xTRIBs

Marconi (Page 282) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

22.2.6 PROTECTION

SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) and SMA–1/4c/uc support the following protection features:

• MSP
• SNC all VC–n
• Port
• Card, including Core card
• 1:N

22.2.7 ADDRESSING SCHEMES

The Mux Controller function performs the following tasks:

• Identifies the system identity.

• Addresses a specific card / slot on the control and inventory buses.
• Determines card/optics module insertion/extraction from the shelf.

22.2.8 Backplane slot addressing

For the SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) and SMA–1/4c/uc products the LOGICAL slot addressing
as used by the Controller function for the system cards and Modules on the Core
Card is as shown in the table below:

Table 22.13: Backplane Slot Addressing

Card/Module Card Slot ID Card Types Slot Address Card Out Compact Use
00
Core A Line West 01 STM–1/4 01h 01h *
02
Core A Line East 03 STM–1/4 03h 03h *
04
Core B Line West 05 STM–1/4 11h 05h *
06
Core B Line East 07 STM–1/4 13h 07h *
08
09
Core A Trib 10 2M Trib 02h 0Ah *
Core B Trib 11 2M Trib 12h 0Bh *
LB Trib 1 12 Tribs 08h 0Ch *
LB Trib 2 13 Tribs 09h 0Dh *
LB Trib 3 14 Tribs 0Ah 0Eh *
LB Trib 4 15 Tribs 0Bh 0Fh *
LB Trib 5 16 Tribs 0Ch 10h
LB Trib 6 17 Tribs 0Dh 11h
LB Trib 7 18 Tribs 0Eh 12h

Marconi (Page 283) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 22: SHELF CONFIGURATION FEATURES SPECIFIC TO
SMA1/4CP

LB Trib 8 19 Tribs 0Fh 13h

20
Core Switch A 21 Core 04h 15h *
Core Switch B 22 Core 14h 16h *
Aux 1 23 Aux 1Ch 17h
Comms 24 Comms 19h 18h *
Aux 2 25 Alarm 1Ah 19h
26
27
PSU A 28 PSU 1Dh 1Ch *
PSU B 29 PSU 1Eh 1Dh *
31
Controller/ 32 Controller/ 1Bh 20h *
Comms Comms

33
SMC 1 34 Memory 22h *
SMC 2 35 Memory 23h *

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 284) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 5:INSTALLATION INFORMATION

SECTION 5:
INSTALLATION INFORMATION

CHAPTER 23 . . . . . LINE TERMINATION UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 287

CHAPTER 24 . . . . . SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 335

CHAPTER 25 . . . . . OPTICAL MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 369

CHAPTER 26 . . . . . LINK AND SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 381

CHAPTER 27 . . . . . POWER SUPPLY UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 257

CHAPTER 28 . . . . . SMA–1/4CP SUB–RACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 411

CHAPTER 29 . . . . . SMA–1/4C SUB–RACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 433

CHAPTER 30 . . . . . SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) SUB–RACKS

CHAPTER 31 . . . . . SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 461

Marconi (Page 285) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 5:INSTALLATION INFORMATION

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 286) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

CHAPTER 23:
LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.1 POPULATION OPTIONS

Table 23.1 lists the available LTU assemblies which may be fitted in SMA–1/4c,
SMA–1/4 (4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) sub–racks, dependent on configuration
requirements. Details of the complementary ‘slide–in’ card units can be found in
the chapter on Slide–In Card Units.

Note: Some SMA–1/4c LTUs in Table 23.1 are listed more than once for the sake of clarity
as to function.

Table 23.1: LTU Options

Identity/Variants Description
POWER LTUs:–
1HAM60778ABH Triple Feed Power LTU SMA–1/4 (4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60779ABK Dual Feed Power LTU (Italtel) SMA–1/4 (4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM61038ABW Core Ancillary LTU (Power LTU) SMA–1/4c and /uc
CORE LTU:–
1HAM61080AAN Core LTU (Balanced 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTU) SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM61040AAC Core LTU (Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTU) SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM60783AAU LCT LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
ANCILLARY LTUs:–
1HAM61038ABW Core Ancillary LTU SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM61039ABY Enhanced Ancillary LTU SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM60780AAN Rack Alarm LTU Int (BW7R) SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60781AAQ Rack Alarm LTU UK (TEP–1E) SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60782AAS User Alarm LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60789AAH COMMS AUI LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60786AAB Auxiliary LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60888AAM 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60784AAW Balanced External Sync LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60785AAY Unbalanced External Sync LTU (1.0/2.3 connectors) SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
TRAFFIC LTUs:–
1HAM61080AAN Balanced 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTU (Core LTU) SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM61040AAC Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTU (Core LTU) SMA–1/4c and /uc
1HAM60792AAH Balanced 1.5Mbit/s LTU (G703) (16 or 32 ports) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4) and
SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60833AAA Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU(1.0/2.3 connectors)(16 or 32 ports) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1HAM60833ABS Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU (1.0/2.3 connectors) with non–iso- SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
lated earth (16 or 32 ports) SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1HAM60834AAC Balanced 2Mbit/s LTU (16 or 32 ports) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1HAM60796AAR Unbalanced 34Mbit/s LTU (1.0/2.3 connectors) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1HAM60797AAT Unbalanced 45Mbit/s LTU (1.0/2.3 connectors) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1HAM60798ABN Unbalanced 140/155 Mbit/s LTU (1.0/2.3 connectors) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
Superseded by 1HAM60661BCK

Marconi (Page 287) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.1:(Cont)LTU Options

Identity/Variants Description
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60839AAN 140/155Mbit/s Link LTU
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60865ACK 155Mbit/s Electrical LTU
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60840AAJ VC–AM Optical LTU (FC/PC)
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60840ABB VC–AM Optical LTU (DIN)
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60892AEJ VC–AM/Extender II SFW Optical LTU (FC/PC) SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
Use with 1HAT60917AAG
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60892ACY VC–AM/Extender II SFW Optical LTU (Angled SC) SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
Use with 1HAT60917AAG
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60892ABG VC–AM/Extender II SFW Optical LTU (DIN) SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
Use with 1HAT60917AAG
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1HAM60854AAH VC–AM Electrical LTU SMA–1/4(8)and SMA-1/4uc
Use with 1HAT60917AAG
DUST CAPS
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1CXB20133ABC LCT LTU 9–Way Socket D–type Dust Cap
SMA–1/4(8)and SMA-1/4uc
1CXB20133AFW LCT LTU 15–Way Plug D–type Dust Cap SMA–1/4c and /uc
1CXB20133AAK LCT LTU 15–Way Plug D–type Dust Cap SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
EMC COVER LTU’s
SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4),
1MBA61366*** EMC Cover (1.0” ancillary/traffic dummy) LTU
SMA–1/4(8) and SMA-1/4uc
1MBA61381*** EMC Cover (2.2” ancillary dummy) LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1MBA61724*** EMC Cover (3.2” traffic dummy) LTU SMA–1/4c and /uc
EMC Cover (use with 1.5/2Mbit/s trib 1HAT60736AAW and
1MBA61395*** SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
140Mbit/s trib 1HAT60624BFE with LTU access)
EMC Cover (use with 140Mbit/s trib card with front access
1MBA61396*** SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60624BFE)
1MBA61366*** EMC Cover (34/45Mbits) LTU SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

23.2 POWER LINE TERMINATION UNITS (LTUS)

CAUTION
The power LTU must be fitted before connecting primary (battery)
supplies to the equipment; these supplies must be disconnected before removal of
power LTUs.

Primary dc power input is connected via a power Line Termination Unit (LTU)
which is located to the right hand side of the sub–rack and above the card cage.
Refer to the chapter on Power Supply Units for further power supply related topics.

23.2.1 Triple Feed Power LTU – (1HAM60778ABH)

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

The standard Triple–feed Power LTU is illustrated in Figure 23.1. Green LEDs
indicate the presence of the Primary (or Battery) d.c. supply.

Marconi (Page 288) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Note: Series 4 sub–racks only require two power supplies. The third input on the triple feed
power LTU is therefore not required and should not be connected.

Facia

Primary Supply Feed 1 LED

Primary Supply Feed 2 LED Male Pins

Primary Supply Feed 3 LED

A1
‘D’–type con- screen
A2
nector -
A3 supply feed 1
+
A4
-
A5 supply feed 2
+
A6
-
A7 supply feed 3
+
A8
Unused
Internal links LK1
& 2 provide option
to tie +ve to earth

Figure 23.1 Triple Feed Power LTU Connections

23.2.1.1 Interface
• Connector:
1 x 8–way (plug) filtered (1nF) Power ”D” type 8W8 (25–way shell)
• Indicators:
3 x Green LEDs, one for each input
• Location:
Front mounted on Power LTU
• Use:
Rack DC supply inputs
• Electrical spec:
prETS 300 132 and BTR 2511

23.2.2 Dual Feed Power LTU (Italtel) 1HAM60779ABK

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

The Dual–feed Power LTU for SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) is illustrated in

Figure 23.2. Green LEDs indicate the presence of the Primary (or Battery) dc
supply.

Marconi (Page 289) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Note: This LTU will protect against loss of one of the supply feeds when only one PSU is
fitted; however, when two PSUs are fitted, if either PSU input goes short circuit, both supply
feed fuses will blow (or circuit breakers open).

Primary Supply Feed 1 LED

Primary Supply Feed 2 LED
BATT 1
BATT 2 Connector Pin–outs
BATT
1
(–)

A3 –ve supply feed (male)

(+ )

BATT A2 ground (female)

2
(–)

A1 +ve supply feed (male)

(+ )

Internal links LK1 & 2

provide the option to tie
+ve to earth

Figure 23.2 Dual–feed Power LTU (Italtel)

23.2.2.1 Interface
• Connector:
2 x 3–way (2 x plug 1x socket) filtered (1nF) Power ”D” type 3W3A (15–way
shell with Polarised centre pin)
• Indicators:
2 x Green LEDs, one for each input
• Location:
Front mounted on Power LTU
• Use:
Rack DC supply inputs
• Electrical spec:
prETS 300 132 and BTR 2511

23.3 LOCAL TERMINAL (LCT) LTU (1HAM60783 AAU)

SMA–1/4(4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8)

Two, 9–way D Type connectors, provide the RS232, full duplex, asynchronous,
serial interface between the Local Terminal (LCT) PC and the Mux Control function
(also referred to as the ‘F’ Interface). Figure 23.3 lists connector pin allocations
(male and female).

Marconi (Page 290) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

LCT 1
LCT 2
Figure 23.3 Local Terminal
LTU

23.3.1 Interface
• Connector:
2 x 9–way ‘D’ type with a male connector M3 screwlocks and a female
connector 4–40 UNC screwlocks.
• Location:
Front mounted on LOCAL TERMINAL LTU
• Use:
Local Operator PC management interface
• Electrical spec:
EIA RS 232
• Protocol:
Full–Duplex Asynchronous serial comms.

The default parameters for the PC port are as follows:–

• 9600 Baud
• 8 Data Bits
• No Parity
• 1 Stop Bit
• Xon/Xoff

Marconi (Page 291) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.2: LCT LTU Connector Pinout

Local Terminal (LTC) Connector 1 (Female) Local Terminal (LTC) Connector 2 (Male)
No. Designation No. Designation
1 Not Used 1 CD (Carrier Detect) *1
2 RX DATA (Receive Data) 2 RX DATA (Receive Data)
3 TX DATA (Transmit Data) 3 TX DATA (Transmit Data)
4 Not Used 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) *1
5 SIGNAL GROUND (Ground) 5 SIGNAL GROUND (Ground)
6 Not Used 6 DSR (Data Set Ready) *1
7 RTS (Request To Send) 7 RTS (Request To Send) *2
8 CTS (Clear To Send) 8 CTS (Clear To Send) *2
9 Not Used 9 Not Used
Note *1 CD, DTR and DSR are connected on board
Note *2 CTS and RTS are connected on board

23.4 ANCILLARY LTUS

Ancillary LTUs provide ports for external interfaces such as external

synchronisation, alarms, and LCT.

23.4.1 Core Ancillary LTU for SMA–1/4C/UC 1HAM61038ABW

The SMA–1/4c Ancillary LTU area is located in the bottom right of the SMA–1/4c
LTU area. The Core Ancillary LTU provides access to User I/O, external sync,
local terminal (LCT) power input, auxiliary and EOW. A digram of the Core
Ancillary LTU is shown below with pinout information in the two tables below.

USER
2 I/O 1 Female

LCT SYNC
OUT1

AUX1 AUX2

PWR PWR
B A Male

Figure 23.4 SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU

Marconi (Page 292) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.3: SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (Except

PWR)
No User I/O1 User I/O2 Sync Out1 LCT AUX 2 AUX 1
1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used AUXTXCLKA2 AUXTXCLKA1
2 User I/P 1 User I/P 5 Not Used LB1 (DSR) AUXTXCLKB2 AUXTXCLKB1
3 User I/P 2 User I/P 6 Not Used GND AUXRXCLKA2 AUXRXCLKA1
4 User I/P 3 User OP 1A Not Used LCT Output D AUXRXCLKB2 AUXRXCLKB1
5 User I/P 4 User OP 2A SYNCOUTPUT 75 LB1 (DTR) AUXTXDATB2 AUXTXDATB1
6 GND GND SCREEN LCT Input D AUXTXDATA2 AUXTXDATA1
7 GND GND SYNC OUTPUT RTS (LB2) AUXRXDATB2 AUXRXDATB1
120+
8 GND User OP 1B SYNC OUTPUT CTS (LB2) AUXRXDATA2 AUXRXDATA1
120–
9 GND User OP 2B

Table 23.4: SMA–1/4c Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (PWR)

No PWR A PWR B No PWR A PWR B
1 0V 0V 9 0V 0V
2 PosPW PosPW 10 PosPW PosPW
3 PosPW PosPW 11 PosPW PosPW
4 NegPW NegPW 12 NegPW NegPW
5 NegPW NegPW 13 NegPW NegPW
6 Not Used Not Used 14 Not Used Not Used
7 BLO BLO 15 MIF MIF
8 DDF ADF

23.4.1.1 Interface
• Connectors:
2 x 9–way ‘D’ type(UserI/O), 4 x 8An RJ45, 2 x 15–way D type (Pwr).
• Location:
Front mounted on Ancillary LTU area.
• Use:
Core Ancillary LTU interface (with simple alarm scheme only)

23.4.2 Core Ancillary LTU with Bw7R Alarm Scheme for

SMA–1/4C/UC

A variant of the core ancillary LTU for SMA–1/4c is available which supports the
Bw7R alarm scheme. A diagram of this variant is shown in Figure 23.5.

Marconi (Page 293) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Male

Male Male

Figure 23.5 SMA–1/4c/uc Core Ancillary LTU supporting Bw7R alarm scheme
Table 23.5: SMA–1/4c/uc Core Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts (Except
PWR)
No Sync Out1 LCT AUX 2 AUX 1
1 Not Used Not Used AUXTXCLKA2 AUXTXCLKA1
2 Not Used LB1 (DSR) AUXTXCLKB2 AUXTXCLKB1
3 Not Used GND AUXRXCLKA2 AUXRXCLKA1
4 Not Used LCT Output D AUXRXCLKB2 AUXRXCLKB1
5 SYNCOUTPUT 75 LB1 (DTR) AUXTXDATB2 AUXTXDATB1
6 SCREEN LCT Input D AUXTXDATA2 AUXTXDATA1
7 SYNC OUTPUT 120+ RTS (LB2) AUXRXDATB2 AUXRXDATB1
8 SYNC OUTPUT 120– CTS (LB2) AUXRXDATA2 AUXRXDATA1
9

Table 23.6: Bw7R Alarm Connector Pinout

No Designation Pin No Designation
1 +S 9 –S
2 +S 10 –S
3 +S 11 –S
4 a OUT 12 b OUT
5 el OUT 13 Not Used
6 Not Used 14 Zb OUT
7 Za OUT 15 Zle OUT

Marconi (Page 294) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.6:(Cont)Bw7R Alarm Connector Pinout

No Designation Pin No Designation
8 GND
FE1 GND FE2 GND

Note: Bw7R external Alarm supply + & –S, min applied d.c. voltage =10.5V, max =57V. Max
d.c. current =21mA.

Table 23.7: SMA–1/4c/uc Connector Pinouts (PWR)

No PWR A PWR B
1 (A1) +ve +ve
2 (A2) GND GND
3 (A3) –ve –ve

23.4.2.1 Interface
• Connectors:
2 x 3–way D–type power connectors must be used in order to support the
Bw7R alarm scheme.
1 x 15–way filtered (INF) D–type, 4 x 8Pin RJ45.
• Location:
Front mounted on Ancillary LTU area (same position as ordinary core ancillary
LTU).
• Use:
Core Ancillary LTU interface (supporting Bw7R alarm scheme)

23.4.2.2 Front Panel LEDs

• Red LED (a)
Lit when a_IN Alarm is present or Mux Controller Card has failed.

Inhibited by Mux Card removal.

Lit whenever two PSUs fail when operating in an SMA–4 system.

• Amber LED (b)

Lit whenever b_IN is present.

Inhibited whenever two PSUs fail when operating in an SMA–4 system.

• Amber LED (el)

Lit when el_IN Alarm is present or for Mux Controller Card removal.

Inhibited whenever two PSUs fail when operating in an SMA–4 system.

23.4.2.3 Alarm Cancel Button (RA)

• SMA–4 Subrack
Disabled if two or more PSUs are in an inoperative state.

• SMA–1 Subrack
Disabled if PSU1 and PSU2 are in an inoperative state.

Marconi (Page 295) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.3 Enhanced Ancillary LTU for SMA–1/4c/uc 1HAM61039ABY

The enhanced Ancillary LTU provides access to Sync In, Sync Out, 2M Test and
AUI functions. A diagram of the enhanced ancillary LTU is below with the pinout
details in the table underneath.

AUI Female

SYNC
IN 1

SYNC
IN 2

SYNC
OUT2

2M
TEST

Figure 23.6 SMA–1/4c Enhanced Ancillary LTU

Table 23.8: SMA–1/4c/uc Enhanced Ancillary LTU Connector Pinouts
No AUI Sync In 1 Sync In 2 Sync Out 2 2M Test Out
1 0V Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
2 CP+ Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
3 TX+ Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
4 0V Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
5 RX+ SYNC INPUT SYNC INPUT SYNC OUTPUT TX Test (Out-
75 75 75 put)
6 0V SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN
7 Not Used SYNC INPUT SYNC INPUT SYNC OUTPUT TX Test b (Out-
120+ 120+ 120+ put)
8 0V SYNC INPUT SYNC INPUT SYNC OUTPUT TX Test a (Out-
120– 120– 120– put)
9 CP–
10 TX–
11 0V
12 RX–
13 P12V AUI
14 0V
15 Not Used

23.4.3.1 Interface
• Connector:
15–way ‘D’ type (AUI), 4 x 8Pin RJ45.

Marconi (Page 296) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

• Location:
Front mounted on Ancillary LTU area.
• Use:
Enhanced Ancillary LTU interface.
• Electrical spec:
• Protocol:

23.4.4 Bw7R Alarm LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

1HAM60780AAN

A B EL

RA

Figure 23.7 Bw7R Alarm LTU

23.4.4.1 Interface
• Connector:
1x5–way filtered (1nF) ”D” type Plug M3 screwlocks
• Location:
Front mounted on ALARM LTU
• Use:
Rack interface to Light Signalling Equipment (LZE) and remote Supervision
Console
• Electrical spec:
As Marconi System Spec 1ADA 60847AAS–BTA
• Protocol:
As Marconi System Interface Spec 1ADA 60847ACC–BSA

23.4.4.2 Front Panel LEDs

• Red LED (a)
Lit when a_IN Alarm is present or Mux Controller card has failed.

Inhibited by by Mux Card removal.

Lit whenever PSU fails when operating in an SMA1/4c or SMA1/4 system.

Marconi (Page 297) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

• Amber LED (b)

Lit whenever b_IN is present.

• Amber LED (el)

Lit when el_IN Alarm is present or for Mux Controller Card removal.

23.4.4.3 Alarm Cancel Button (RA)

• SMA–4 Subrack
Disabled if two or more PSUs are in an inoperative state.
• SMA–1 Sub–rack
Disabled if PSU1 and PSU2 are in an inoperative state.

Table 23.9: BW7R Alarm Connector Pinout

Pin No. Designation Pin No. Designation
1 +S 9 –S
2 +S 10 –S
3 +S 11 –S
4 a OUT 12 b OUT
5 el OUT 13 Not Used
6 Not Used 14 Zb OUT
7 Za OUT 15 Zle OUT
8 GND
FE1 GND FE2 GND
Note: Bw7R external Alarm supply + & –S, min applied d.c. voltage =10.5V, max =57V.
Max d.c. current =21mA.

Note: The cabling from this LTU to the BW7R rack alarm is not normally the responsibility of
Marconi and no cable assemblies are specified, however some SMA– subracks with BW7R
alarm schemes have been used with BT type 55 rack alarm, in this case, cable assembly
1HAU60858AAA with modification 1QDE60617AAJ–EUA may be ordered (connection to
rack alarm bus ribbon is via 1CXB20685AAX).

Marconi (Page 298) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.5 TEP1E Alarm LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

1HAM60781AAQ

RA

Figure 23.8 TEP1E Alarm

LTU

23.4.5.1 Interface
• Connector:
1 x 15–way filtered (1nF) ”D” type Plug 4–40 UNC screwlocks
• Location:
Front mounted on ALARM LTU
• Use:
Access to TEP1E local rack alarm scheme
• Electrical spec:
As GPT System Spec 1ADA 60847AAS–BTA
• Protocol:
As GPT System Interface Spec 1ADA 60847ACC–BSA

23.4.5.2 Front Panel LEDs

• Red LED
Lit when an alarm indication is sent to the Alarm LTU
from the Mux Controller or a Present Alarm is raised by the Alarm LTU.
• Green LED
Lit when Receive Attention is received from the Mux Controller, also lit under
certain alarm conditions, e.g. Mux Card removal, two PSUs removed.

When the Receive Attention button is depressed a 0V signal is sent to the Mux
Controller Card. This signal is also sent to front panel connector CONN1 if links
LK1 or LK2 are in their default positions.

Marconi (Page 299) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.6 TEP1E Alarms Connector

The LTU extends alarm conditions to a Top of Rack Alarm Indicator, interfacing
with a standard BT type, female, 10 way header via short length of ribbon cable
with a male, 10 way header connector on one end and a 15 way D Type connector
on the other.

Table 23.10: TEP1E Alarm Cabling Connector Pin

Allocations
Pin Number at Pin Number for
Function
Ancillary Unit 10–way Header
CONN1 1 –12V 1
CONN1 2 Prompt 3
CONN1 3 Deferred 5
CONN1 4 In–Station 7
CONN1 5 Receiving Attention +ve 9
CONN1 9 Unused 2
CONN1 10 Rx Att. Ind. 4
CONN1 11 Lamp Test 6
CONN1 12 Fault Clear 8
CONN1 13 Receiving Attention –ve 10
CONN1 14 and 15 Unused
FE1 GROUND
FE2 GROUND
Note: TEP1E external alarm supply = –12V " 0.2V. Maximum d.c. current = 60mA.

Note: The cabling from this LTU to a TEP1E rack alarm can be achieved by ordering cable
assembly 1HAU61136AAQ (connection to rack alarm bus ribbon is via 1CXB20685AAX),
however where Network Elements are managed using EMOS rack alarms may not be
required.

Marconi (Page 300) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.7 User Alarms LTU – SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

1HAM60782AAS

Provides access to the Mux Control function for up to six differential external alarm
inputs. These User Alarm Extension inputs may be utilised for various user defined
purposes. The interfaces are classed as ‘SELV’ circuits. A nominal 12 volt
isolated d.c. output is provided as an optional means of activating the alarms.

Note: The User Alarms LTU should be inserted into a shelf before powering up.(If it is
inserted into a live shelf it will cause the Comms/Controller Card to reset.)

Table 23.11: User Alarm Connector Pinout

Pin Designation Pin Designation
1 Alarm 1+ 9 Alarm 1–
2 Alarm 2+ 10 Alarm 2–

LMS
3 Alarm 3+ 11 Alarm 3–

USER AL
4 Alarm 4+ 12 Alarm 4–
5 Alarm 5+ 13 Alarm 5–
6 Alarm 6+ 14 Alarm 6–
7 Not Used 15 12V DC Negative Node
8 12V DC Positive Node Alarm
FE1 GROUND FE2 GROUND

Figure 23.9 User Alarm

LTU

23.4.7.1 User Alarm Interface

• Connector:
1x 15–way ”D” type Plug M3 screwlocks
• Location:
Front mounted on USER ALARM LTU 1HAM60782AAS
• Use:
Expansion port for external alarm inputs, providing application specific
equipment interfaces
• Electrical spec:
As Marconi System Spec 1ADA 60847AAS–BTA
• Protocol:
As Marconi System Interface Spec 1ADA 60847ACC–BSA (Dry or powered
loop)
Note: An example of the use of this connector is given in Figure 23.10.

Note: These alarms may be inverted using the Local Terminal (LCT).

Marconi (Page 301) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

1 Input 1+ 1 Input 1+

Switch Switch
8 output + 8 output +
+ve
External
10V–57V
supply
–ve

9 Input 1– 9 Input 1–

15 output – 15 output –

Using Internal Supply Using External Supply

Figure 23.10 User Alarm Examples

Note: The Alarm inputs are designed to meet ETS 300 386–1 and are applicable to an
outdoor signal where primary protection is already provided for by the user. Should any other
type of cable (ie. not recommended) be used, then they must conform to the following
electrical specification:

• Maximum On resistance (to ground) = 20 W

• Minimum Off resistance (to ground) = 10 KW
• Maximum output current = 45mA
• Output voltage = 10V to 40V over complete range of output currents.

23.4.8 Q/B3Access Unit Interface (Comms AUI) LTU

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60789 AAH

Provides the interface for cable extension to an external LAN Medium Adaptation
Unit (MAU), e.g. a micro–transceiver unit (typically 1HGB60001AAF–EFA, which
fits directly on the D–type connector). This is required to convert the Q.B3 port
(AUI) into an Ethernet interface for connection to the Element Manager.
Table 23.12 lists connector pin allocations.

With the Comms card fitted, a switch–over will occur automatically under fault
conditions to provide protection for the AUI port, under control of the controller
card.

Marconi (Page 302) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Figure 23.11 AUI

LTU

23.4.8.1 Interface
• Connector: 1 x 15–way ”D” type Socket with slide lock

• Location:
Front mounted on AUI LTU
• Use:
Adaption Unit Interface (AUI) to Ethernet LAN EMOS adaptor
• Electrical spec:
AUI to IEEE 802.3 standard
• Protocol:
OSI 7–layers conforming to ITU–TSS G773 (Q.811 /Q.812)’B3’ stack
• EMOS Adaptor:
Adaption Unit (MAU) into Ethernet LAN (10base2,10base5,10baseT)
1HGB6001AAF.
• Ext connection:
Via MAU where required (15way ”D” type to BNC co–axial).

Table 23.12: AUI Port Connector Pinout

Pin No. Designation Pin No. Designation
1 Optional Ground (SW1) 9 Collision Presence –ve
2 Collision Presence +ve 10 Transmit Data –ve
3 Transmit Data +ve 11 Ground

Marconi (Page 303) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.12:(Cont)AUI Port Connector Pinout

4 Ground 12 Receive Data –ve
5 Receive Data +ve 13 +12V DC Output
6 Ground 14 Ground
7 No Connection 15 No Connection
8 Ground

Note: Ground Coupling Internal switch SW1 selects optional coupling to ground for Pin1.
Default setting is pin 1 connected to ground.

23.4.9 Auxiliary LTU (Low Bit Rate) 1HAM60786AAB

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

One Auxiliary LTU provides 2 off 9 pin D Type connectors for two auxiliary
channels, one to three LTUs can be fitted.
N+ 1

RX1+ 1
6 TX2–
RX1– 2
7 TX2+
TX1+ 3
8 RX2–
TX1– 4
9 RX2+
N

Ground 5

Figure 23.12 Generic Auxiliary LTU

23.4.9.1 Interface
• Connector:
2 x 9–way ‘D’ type filtered with male connector M3 screwlocks
• Ext Connection:
KOP (1MBB60711AAR)
• Location:
Front mounted on AUXILIARY LTU.
• Use:
External Interface to the Auxiliary/EOW Card, 2off Auxiliary channels per LTU,
(use with 1HAT60004ADD or 1HAT60647ABA)
• Electrical spec:
5V CMOS V11 at 9.9Kbit/s.

Marconi (Page 304) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.13: Aux LTU Connector Pinouts

Aux Interface 1 (N) Aux Interface 2 (N+1)
Designation
Pin Number Connects to Pin Number Connects to
Conn1 1 Aux1_1 Conn2 1 Aux2 1 RX1+
Conn1 2 Aux1_2 Conn2 2 Aux2 2 RX1–
Conn1 3 Aux1_3 Conn2 3 Aux2 3 TX1+
Conn1 4 Aux1_4 Conn2 4 Aux2 4 TX1–
Conn1 5 Aux1_5 Conn2 5 Aux2 5 GROUND
Conn1 6 Aux1_6 Conn2 6 Aux2 6 TX2–
Conn1 7 Aux1_7 Conn2 7 Aux2 7 TX2+
Conn1 8 Aux1_8 Conn2 8 Aux2 8 RX2–
Conn1 9 Aux1_9 Conn2 9 Aux2 9 RX2+
Conn1 FE1 Ground Conn2 FE1 Ground GROUND
Conn1 FE2 Ground Conn2 FE2 Ground GROUND

23.4.10 9.6kbit/s Access (V0 and V0.1)

9.6kbit/s access to the following routes are available via the AUX LTU connector:
Figure 23.12 and the following tables show the ports available per ‘D’–type and the
active pin connections. The tables also show how Channels 1 to 3 of the spare
bytes in the STM–1 stream, used for can be allocated.

Note: If the Aux data is not to be used locally, the bypass is performed by externally wiring
the appropriate ports together via the connectors.

23.4.10.1 Auxiliary Card ‘0’

Table 23.14: 9.6 kbit/s LTU Access (V0 Card Fitted)
Connector OH–BUS Port Number Pin Designation
Connects data to/from Trib 1 (if STM–1) 1 Aux 1 Pins 1-4
LTU 1 (AUX 1)
Connects data to/from Trib 2 (if STM–1) 2 Aux 1 Pins 6-9
Connects data to/from Trib 3 (if STM–1) 1 Aux 2 Pins 1-4
LTU 1 (AUX 2)
Connects data to/from Trib 4 (if STM–1) 2 Aux 2 Pins 6-9
Connects data to/from Line East (Ch 1) 1 Aux 3 Pins 1-4
LTU 2 (AUX 3)
Connects data to/from Line West (Ch 1) 2 Aux 3 Pins 6-9
LTU 2 (AUX 4) Not used in this application

Marconi (Page 305) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.10.2 Auxiliary Card V0.1

Table 23.15: 9.6 kbit/s LTU Access (V0.1 Card Fitted)
Connector OH–Bus Port Number Pin Designation
Trib 1 or switchable to Line West (Ch 3) 1 Aux 1 Pins 1-4
LTU 1(AUX 1)
Trib 2 or switchable to Line East (Ch 3) 2 Aux 1 Pins 6-9
Trib 3 or switchable to Line East (Chl 2) 1 Aux 2 Pins 1-4
LTU 1 (AUX 2)
Trib 4 or switchable to Line West (Ch 2) 2 Aux 2 Pins 6-9
East Channel (Ch1) only 1 Aux 3 Pins 1-4
LTU 2 (AUX 3)
West Channel (Ch1) only 2 Aux 3 Pins 6-9
LTU 2 (AUX 4) Not used in this application

Note: For Version 0 cards, AUX 1 and AUX 2 always provide the tributary option.
Note: A screened cable must be used for connection to the unfiltered port of Aux 3.

23.4.11 64kbit/s Access (V0.1 Only)

64kbit/s access is available at the Auxiliary Card connectors front connectors. For
details refer to the chapter on Slide–In Card Units.

23.4.12 Aux 1 and Aux 3 connections for EOW Card Application

When an EOW Card is fitted 9–way D type connectors provide the requisite
interfaces. The active pins of these connectors are shown in the following tables:

Table 23.16: Aux LTU Connector Pinouts For EOW

Pin Port Designation Port Designation Pin Port Designation Port Designation
No. AUX 1 AUX 3 No. AUX 1 AUX 3
Pin 1 YEXTRA DTXA1 Pin 7 Reserved DTXB2
Pin 2 YEXTTA DRXA1 Pin 8 Reserved DRXB2
Pin 3 YEXTRB DTXB1 Pin 9 Reserved Reserved
Pin 4 YEXTTB DRXB1 FE 1 Ground Ground
Pin 5 Reserved DTXA2 FE 2 Ground Ground
Pin 6 Reserved DRXA2

Note: A screened cable must be used for connection to the unfiltered port of Aux 3.

Note: Aux 4–7 connectors are not used with this product release.

Marconi (Page 306) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.13 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU – 1HAM60888AAM

SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

The Test Bus LTU is fitted in AUX slot 5&6 and provides a balanced or unbalanced
HDB3 test bus output to allow for monitoring of any receiver traffic output.

TEST BUS

UNBAL

TX Test a 1
6 Screen
TX Test b 2
7 RX Test a
Screen 3
8 RX Test b
Spare 4
BAL

9 Spare
Signal Ground 5

Figure 23.13 2Mbit/s Test LTU

23.4.13.1 Interface
• Connector:
1 off 9–way ‘D’ type filtered with male connector M3 screwlocks and
1 off x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on 2 Mbit/s Test Bus LTU.
• Use:
In–station traffic monitoring.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms Un–Balanced to ITU–TSS G703,
120ohms Balanced to ITU–TSS G703.
• Protocol:
HDB3.

Table 23.17: Test Bus LTU Connector Pinout

Pin No. Designation Description
1 TX Test a Not Used
2 TX Test b Not Used
3 Screen Anc. LTU Ground
4 Spare
5 Signal Ground Anc. LTU Ground
6 Screen Anc. LTU Ground
7 RX Test a Trib Card Output I/F
8 RX Test b Test Bus
9 Spare

Marconi (Page 307) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISATION CONNECTIONS

SMA–1/4(4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8)

Synchronisation connections are made via the Sync LTUs (see Figure 23.14 and
Figure 23.15).

External Sync Inputs: These enable an external synchronisation source to be

fed to the Link/Switch cards to be used for line or equipment timing selection. The
input will accept a Signal with one of the following formats:

• 2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 Signal to G.703 (unbalanced). The Signal must be carrying
an all–ones Signal.
• 2.048MHz Signal conforming to G.703 section 10.

Sync Outputs: The Switch cards or Auxiliary card 1 select a clock source to
supply the Ancillary interface and synchronise external equipment to the SMA–1
System clock. The two outputs are driven from the same clock source. The Mux
Controller will inform the cards whether the bus is driven from the Switch cards or
Auxiliary card 1, so that only one output will be enabled at any one time. Enabling
of the Switch card outputs will correspond to which switch–plane is in use at any
time.

• Maximum On resistance (to ground) = 20 W

• Minimum Off resistance (to ground) = 10 KW

23.4.14 Types of Cable Used for External Synchronisation

Connections

Cable Coaxial 3002 miniature flexible 75W (Double Screened) for use with 2Mbit/s
unbalanced connections and 2MHz Synchronisation Interfaces. GPT code
1WAE2002 AAE.

Marconi (Page 308) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.4.15 Synchronisation LTUs (1HAM60785 AAY/1HAM60784

AAW)

BAL SYNC

EXT CLOCKS I/O 1

UNBAL SYNC
EXT CLOCKS

IN 1 Connections:
Connections: 2 off 9 way, male, unfiltered
DIN Type 1.0/2.3 bulkhead D Type connectors,

EXT CLOCKS I/O 2

OUT 1 M3 screwlocks.
connectors.

IN 2

OUT 2

Figure 23.14 Un–Balanced Sync LTU Figure 23.15 Balanced Sync LTU

Table 23.18: External Sync (Balanced) Pinout

External Timing 1 External Timing 2
Conn 1 Function Conn 2 Function
1 Ground 1 Ground
2 Out 1+ve 2 Out 2+ve
3 Ground 3 Ground
4 In 1+ve 4 In 2+ve
5 Not Used 5 Not Used
6 Out 1 –ve 6 Out 2–ve
7 Ground 7 Ground
8 In 1–ve 8 In 2–ve
9 Not Used 9 Not Used
FE 1 Ground FE 1 Ground
FE 2 Ground FE 2 Ground

23.5 TRAFFIC INTERFACE AREA LTU COMPLEMENT

The LTU complement will depend on the tributary card complement of card–cage
slots which in turn is dependent on the configuration of the particular SMA.

Marconi (Page 309) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.1 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit LTUs (Core LTU) – SMA–1/4c

• The SMA–1/4c Core LTU area is located in the top right of the LTU Area of the
SMA–1/4c shelf. A dedicated Core LTU is required to access the 32x2M traffic
capability supported by the core configuration. Note that there are 2 variants of
the Core LTU, an unbalanced 2M traffic unit and a balanced 2M traffic unit.

23.5.1.1 Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU (1HAM61080AAN)

Each Balanced 2Mbit/s LTU provides thirty–two 120W balanced input port
connections and thirty–two 120W balanced output port connections. Two diagrams
are shown below with the pinout details underneath.

Figure 23.16 Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU (SMA–1/4c)

Marconi (Page 310) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

1 2 3 4

Ch1
Ch2

Ch3
Ch4

Ch5
0v

Ch6
Ch7

Ch8
Ch9

Ch10
0v

Ch11
Ch12

Ch13
Ch14

Ch15
Ch16
0v

Rx Tx Rx Tx

Figure 23.17 Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU

(SMA–1/4c)

Marconi (Page 311) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.19: Balanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU Pinout

Channel Rx Tx
Connector Pins Connector Pins
1 1 1,2 2 1,2
2 1 20,21 2 20,21
3 1 3,4 2 3,4
4 1 22,23 2 22,23
5 1 5,6 2 5,6
6 1 7,8 2 7,8
7 1 26,27 2 26,27
8 1 9,10 2 9,10
9 1 28,29 2 28,29
10 1 11,12 2 11,12
11 1 13,14 2 13,14
12 1 32,33 2 32,33
13 1 16,15 2 16,15
14 1 34,35 2 34,35
15 1 17,18 2 17,18
16 1 35,37 2 35,37
17 3 1,2 4 1,2
18 3 20,21 4 20,21
19 3 3,4 4 3,4
20 3 22,23 4 22,23
21 3 5,6 4 5,6
22 3 7,8 4 7,8
23 3 26,27 4 26,27
24 3 9,10 4 9,10
25 3 28,29 4 28,29
26 3 11,12 4 11,12
27 3 13,14 4 13,14
28 3 32,33 4 32,33
29 3 16,15 4 16,15
30 3 34,35 4 34,35
31 3 17,18 4 17,18
32 3 35,37 4 35,37

The following pins on all four

connectors are connected to 0v
19
24
25
30
31

23.5.1.2 Interface
• Connector:
4 x 37–way connectors.
• Location:
Front mounted in Core LTU area.
• Use:
Interface with Core Card.

Marconi (Page 312) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

• Electrical spec:
120ohms balanced to ITU–TSS G703.
• Protocol:
HDB3.

23.5.1.3 Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU (1HAM61040AAC)

Each Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU provides thirty–two 75W unbalanced input port
connections and thirty–two 75W unbalanced output port connections. A diagram is
shown below with the pinout details underneath.

Marconi (Page 313) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

32x2M (Din 1.0/2.3)

Tx 1 2 3 Tx 17 18 19

Rx 1 2 3 Rx 17 18 19

Tx 4 5 6 Tx 20 21 22

Rx 4 5 6 Rx 20 21 22

Tx 7 8 Tx 23 24
32 x 2M CORE LTU UNBAL

Rx 7 8 Rx 23 24

Tx 9 10 Tx 25 26

Rx 9 10 Rx 25 26

Tx 11 12 13 Tx 27 28 29

Rx 11 12 13 Rx 27 28 29

Tx 14 15 16 Tx 30 31 32

Rx 14 15 16 Rx 30 31 32

Area for backplane connector

(reverse side of panel)

Figure 23.18 SMA1/4c – 32 x 2M Unbalanced LTU

Table 23.20: Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU Pinout

Channel Rx Tx
Connector Pin Connector Pin
1 1 33 1 1
2 2 34 2 2

Marconi (Page 314) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Channel Table 23.20:(Cont)Unbalanced 2Mbit/s Core LTU Pinout

Connector Pin Connector Pin
3 3 35 3 3
4 4 36 4 4
5 5 37 5 5
6 6 38 6 6
7 7 39 7 7
8 8 40 8 8
9 9 41 9 9
10 10 42 10 10
11 11 43 11 11
12 12 44 12 12
13 13 45 13 13
14 14 46 14 14
15 15 47 15 15
16 16 48 16 16
17 17 49 17 17
18 18 50 18 18
19 19 51 19 19
20 20 52 20 20
21 21 53 21 21
22 22 54 22 22
23 23 55 23 23
24 24 56 24 24
25 25 57 25 25
26 26 58 26 26
27 27 59 27 27
28 28 60 28 28
29 29 61 29 29
30 30 62 30 30
31 31 63 31 31
32 32 64 32 32

23.5.1.4 Interface
• Connector:
1.0/2.3 DIN connectors.
• Location:
Front mounted in Core LTU area.
• Use:
Interface with Core Card.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms unbalanced to ITU–TSS G703.
• Protocol:
HDB3.
Note: The backplane connections are the same for both the balanced and unbalanced
units.

Marconi (Page 315) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.2 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary LTUs

SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

Note that, as well as the 1.5/2 Mbit/s Tributary Card with thirty two input/output
ports, there is also a reduced capacity 1.5/2 Mbit/s Tributary Card which can
handle up to sixteen 1.544Mbit/s or 2.048Mbit/s traffic signals. The associated LTU
complement provides an external connection for each port, the number of LTUs
required depends on whether balanced or unbalanced connections are required.

Note: When inserting or removing 2Mbit/s LTUs from the SMA shelf, traffic errors may be
generated. To avoid this, the state of any 1:n 2Mbit/s Tributary Card protection
should first be set to ‘Lockout of Protection’.

23.5.2.1 Balanced 1.5M LTU (1HAM60792AAH)

(Used with 1HAT60707AAD or 1HAT60736AAW)

Each Balanced 1.5Mbit/s LTU provides eight 120W balanced input port
connections and eight 120W balanced output port connections. The connections
are provided by two, sixteen–way D Type connectors, one for inputs and one for
outputs.

Note: Two LTUs are required for a sixteen port 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary card and four for the
thirty two port card.

Table 23.21: 1.5Mbit/s Balanced Traffic LTU Pinout

PL1 (Output) PL2 (Input)

Channel Pins Channel Pins

5M BAL

CH 1 1–2 CH 1 1–2
1.5

OUT

CH 2 9–10 CH 2 9–10

CH 3 3–4 CH 3 3–4

CH 4 11–12 CH 4 11–12
IN
N

CH 5 5–6 CH 5 5–6

CH 6 13–14 CH 6 13–14

CH 7 7–8 CH 7 7–8

CH 8 15–16 CH 8 15–16
Figure 23.19 1.5Mbit/s Balanced LTU

Marconi (Page 316) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.2.2 Interface
• Connector:
2 x 16–way Un–Filtered ”D” type plug.
• Location:
Front mounted on 1.5 Mbit/s Balanced LTU.
• Use:
In–station electrical tributary interfaces.
• Electrical spec:
120ohms balanced to ITU–TSS G703.
• Protocol:
AMI or B8ZS.

23.5.2.3 Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU (1HAM60833AAA)

(Used with 1HAT60707AAD or 1HAT60736AAW)

Each Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTUs provides eight unbalanced 75W input ports and
eight unbalanced 75W output ports Two LTUs are required for a sixteen port
1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary card and four for the thirty two port card.

Note: LTU ports, on a multiple configuration, are sequential by card from left to right (see
Figure 23.20).

OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN

1 1 1 1 1
ULTU2

ULTU2

ULTU2

ULTU2

ULTU2

2 2 2 2 2
OUT IN 3 OUT IN 3 OUT IN 3 OUT IN 3 OUT IN 3

Trib Trib Trib Trib

4 In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out
OUT IN Ports Ports Ports
5 Ports
1 to 4 5 to 8 9 to 12 13 to 16

6
OUT IN
7 OUT IN 7 OUT IN 7 OUT IN 7 OUT IN 7

8 8 8 8 8

a)Individual LTU Connections b) Multiple LTU Connections

Figure 23.20 Un–Balanced 2Mbit/s LTU

Marconi (Page 317) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.2.4 Interface
• Connector:
16 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on 2 Mbit/s Un–Balanced LTU.
• Use:
In–station electrical tributary interfaces.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms Un–Balanced to ITU–TSS G703
• Protocol:
HDB3.

23.5.2.4.1 Unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU with non–isolated earth

1HAM60833ABS

Note that there is also a version of the unbalanced 2Mbit/s LTU with a
non–isolated earth.

23.5.2.5 Balanced 2M LTU (1HAM60834AAC)

(Used with 1HAT60707AAD or 1HAT60736AAW)

Each Balanced 2Mbit/s LTU provides eight 120W balanced input port connections
and eight 120W balanced output port connections. The connections are provided
by two, sixteen–way D Type connectors, one for inputs and one for outputs.

Note: Two LTUs are required for a sixteen port 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary card and four for the
thirty two port card.

Marconi (Page 318) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.22: 2Mbit/s Balanced Traffic LTU Pinout

PL1 (Output) PL2 (Input)

Channel Pins Channel Pins

CH 1 1–2 CH 1 1–2

AL
CH 2 9–10 CH 2 9–10

2M BA
CH 3 3–4 CH 3 3–4

OUT
T
CH 4 11–12 CH 4 11–12

CH 5 5–6 CH 5 5–6

CH 6 13–14 CH 6 13–14

CH 7 7–8 CH 7 7–8

IN
N
CH 8 15–16 CH 8 15–16

Figure 23.21 2Mbit/s Balanced LTU

23.5.2.6 Interface
• Connector:
2 x 16–way Un–Filtered ”D” type plug.
• Location:
Front mounted on 2 Mbit/s Balanced LTU.
• Use:
In–station electrical tributary interfaces.
• Electrical spec:
120ohms balanced to ITU–TSS G703, prETS 300 166.
• Protocol:
HDB3.

23.5.3 34Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4)

and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60796AAR
(Used with 34Mbit/s Trib 1HAT60622BAN)

Each associated LTU provides one 75–ohm unbalanced input port connector, one
75–ohm unbalanced output port connector and an output monitor point. Three
units are required for a fully functional 34Mbit/s Tributary Card. The fourth LTU
position must be fitted with an EMC cover.

Marconi (Page 319) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

LTU 34
TRAFFIC
OUT

IN

MONITOR

Figure 23.22 34Mbit/s Tributary

Unbalanced LTU

23.5.3.1 Interface
• Connector:
3 off Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial bulkhead connectors.
• Location:
Front mounted on 34 Mbit/s Un–Balanced LTU.
• Use: (Traffic)
In–station electrical tributary interfaces and output signal monitoring.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms Un–Balanced to ITU–TSS G703.
• Protocol:
HDB3

Marconi (Page 320) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.4 45Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)

and SMA–1/4(8) 1HAM60797AAT
(Used with 1HAT60623BAQ)

Each associated LTU provides one 75–ohm unbalanced input port connector, one
75–ohm unbalanced output port connector and an output monitor point. Three
units are required for a fully functional 45Mbit/sTributary Card. The fourth LTU
position must be fitted with an EMC cover

Line Build–out

This LTU incorporates a line build out. If the cable on the output port is less than
225ft (WE728), 163ft (2003) or 91ft (3002), the link should be fitted between PL1/1
and PL1/3 (default setting, see Figure 23.23). If the cable is more than 225ft
(WE728) 163ft (2003) or 91ft (3002), the link should be between PL1/2 and PL1/4
(parked).

Note: Note the minimum and maximum cable lengths to be used for the output port, 32ft and
328ft (2003) and 39ft and 377ft (ST214).

3 Link 1
LTU 45

4 2

TRAFFIC
IN

Input port

OUT
PL1
Output port

MONITOR

Monitor port

Backplane
Connector

Figure 23.23 45Mbit/s Un–Balanced LTU

23.5.4.1 Interface
• Connector:
3 off Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial bulkhead connectors.
• Location:
Front mounted on 45 Mbit/s Un–Balanced LTU.

Marconi (Page 321) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

• Use:
In–station electrical tributary interfaces and output signal monitoring.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms Un–Balanced to ITU–TSS G.703.
• Protocol:
B3ZS.

23.5.5 140/155Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU

SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAM60798ABN
(Used with 1HAT60624BFE, 1HAT60803ABT or Dual STM–1
Electrical Cards)

Each LTU provides one 75W unbalanced input port connector, one 75–ohm
unbalanced output port connector and an output monitor socket. One LTU, fitted in
the fourth LTU position, is required for each fully functional 140/155Mbit/s Tributary
Card.

Note: A Link LTU fitted in position (slot 1 for Channel 1 or slot 3 for Channel 2) must be used
in conjunction with each 140/155Mbit/s LTU (see Figure 23.24).

Marconi (Page 322) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ

LTU 140/155

LTU 140/155
140/155 LINK

140/155 LINK
ÍÍÍÍ I/P
ÍÍÍÍÍ I/P

ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
O/P O/P

ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ Mon
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ Mon

ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍ Channel 2
ÍÍÍÍÍ
Channel 1

Figure 23.24 140Mbit/s/STM–1 LTU

and Link LTU Connections

23.5.5.1 Interface
• Connector:
3 off Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial bulkhead connectors.
• Location:
Front mounted on 140/155Mbit/s un–balanced LTU.
• Use:
In–station electrical tributary interfaces and output signal monitoring.
• Electrical spec:
75ohms Un–Balanced to ITU–TSS G.703.
• Protocol:
CMI

Marconi (Page 323) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.5.6 Link LTU – SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

1HAM60839AAN

A Link LTU (1HAM60839AAN) must be used in conjunction with the 140/155Mbit/s

Trib LTU and is fitted in the first position. The other two LTU positions must be
fitted with EMC covers.

Note: A LINK LTU must also be used if STM–1 Electrical Mux access is required.

23.5.7 155Mbit/s Electrical LTU – 1HAM60865ACK

SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)

Info required as per previous section.

23.6 VC–AM LTU – SMA–1/4C/UC, SMA–1/4(4+4) AND

SMA–1/4(8)

Each VC–AM occupies a standard Tributary Card slot in an SMA– sub–rack. A

maximum of four VC–AM LTUs (Optical, Electrical or a mixture of both) can be
fitted for each fully functional VC–AM Card. These must be fitted in the section of
the sub–rack interface area allocated to the tributary slot occupied by the specific
VC–AM Card.

An Auxiliary/CMUX2 Management interface provides synchronous 64Kbit/s data

and Tx/Rx clocks. These interfaces are supported by a single V11, X24 interface
using an RJ45 socket connector.

Note that there are also Single Fibre Working variants of the VC–AM optical LTU’s.
These are included later in this chapter.

23.6.1 Optical LTU (1HAM60840AAJ/AAB)

(Used with VC–AM 1HAT60917AAG)

There are two versions of the Optical LTU, one with FC/PC connectors
(1HAM60840AAJ) and the other with DIN connectors (1HAM60840AAB) for the
34.368Mbit/s optical interfaces. The optical interface characteristics are:–

• Wavelength = 1310nm
• Min. Output Power = –8dB
• Min. Receive Power = –33dB
• Max. Optical Loss = 25dB

Otherwise the units are identical and are secured to the frame by captive screws
at the top and bottom.

CAUTION
The VC–AM LTUs must not be removed from the sub–rack or disconnected
without firstly taking into consideration the Optical Safety rules and Safe Working

Marconi (Page 324) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Practices outlined in the Safety Notices in the preliminary pages of this manual, and
relevant Replacement details in the associated Local Terminal (LCT) Operator Manual.

Connections
• SK1 & SK2 either FC/PC or DIN Optical Sockets (see Figure 23.25).
SK 3 is an RJ45 9–way (female) socket (see Table 23.23).

23.6.1.1 MSP

When MSP is required using a VC–AM Card, the second LTU slot will provide
protection for the first slot and the fourth slot provides protection for the third.

VCTS OPT LTU

VCTS OPT LTU

VCTS OPT LTU

VCTS OPT LTU

VCTS OPT LTU

VCTS
C-MUX 2

Data A I/P
Data A O/P
I/P I/P I/P I/P I/P

O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P

(a) INDIVIDUAL LTU CONNECTIONS (b) MULTIPLE LTU CONNECTION ARRANGEMENT

Figure 23.25 34Mbit/s VC–AM LTU Traffic Connections

23.6.1.2 Optical LTU Interface

23.6.1.2.1 Auxiliary Alarm

• Connector:
1 x 7 Pin RJ45 Connector.
• Location:
Front mounted on LTU.
• Use:
To extend Aux Alarm data to an R.T.U.
• Protocol:
V11 X24 Interface.

23.6.1.2.2 Traffic
• Connector:
2 x FC/PC or 2 x DIN.

Marconi (Page 325) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

• Location:
Front mounted on LTU.
• Use:
34.368Mbit/s Sub STM–1 optical access.
• Protocol:
ITU–TSS G832.

23.6.2 Single Fibre Working Optical LTU

(1HAM60892AEJ/ABG/ACY)

There are three versions of the VC–AM SFW Optical LTU, one with FC/PC
connectors (1HAM60892AEJ), one with DIN connectors (1HAM60892ABG), and
one with SC connectors (1HAM60892ACY).

CAUTION
The VC–AM LTUs must not be removed from the sub–rack or disconnected
without firstly taking into consideration the Optical Safety rules and Safe Working
Practices outlined in the Safety Notices in the preliminary pages of this manual, and
relevant Replacement details in the associated Local Terminal (LCT) Operator Manual.

23.6.3 VC–AM LTU Auxiliary Interface

An Auxiliary/ CMUX2 Management interface provides synchronous 64Kbit/s data

and Tx/Rx clocks. These interfaces are supported by a single V11, X24 interface
using an RJ45 socket connector. These connections are designated as following :

Table 23.23: SK3 9–Way RJ45 Type Connections

Number Signal Designation 12345678
SK3–1 AUXRXCLKA
SK3–2 AUXRXCLKB
SK3–3 AUXTXCLKA
SK3–4 AUXTXCLKB
SK3–5 AUXRXDATB
SK3–6 AUXRXDATA
SK3–7 AUXTXDATB RJ45 Connector
(As viewed from front)
SK3–8 AUXTXDATA
SK3–SCREEN GROUND
NOTE The RJ45 connector pinout is as per ONP standard with mechanical specification
BS EN 28877.
Note: The naming convention on the V11/X24 interface is such that ”RX” is an output from
the RJ45 and ”TX” is an input.

Marconi (Page 326) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.6.4 Electrical LTU (1HAM60854AAH)

(Used with VC–AM 1HAT60917AAG)

23.6.4.1 Electrical
LTU Interface

DATA I/P
VCTS ELECT LTU
Traffic

• Connector: 3 x 1.0/2.3

MON O/P
• Location: Front mounted on LTU

TA O/p
DATA
• Use: 34.368Mbit/s Sub STM–1
access.

AUXILIARY
• Protocol: HDB3

Figure 23.26 VC–AM Electrical

LTU

23.7 LTU LINK/SWITCH SETTINGS

23.7.1 Power LTUs

Triple Feed LTU
1HAM60778ABH

Dual Feed LTU

1HAM60779ABK

The following link settings are common to both Power LTUs listed above:

Marconi (Page 327) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Link Default position Use

LK1 Isolated (open) Positive supplies Isolated/Grounded
LK2 Isolated (open) Positive supplies Isolated/Grounded
NOTE User links – Both links used together if selected

23.7.2 Local Terminal LTU 1HAM60783AAU

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

23.7.3 Alarm LTU

23.7.3.1 (BW7R) 1HAM60780AAN and TEP1E Alarm LTU
(1HAM60781AAQ)
• There are no user links on the above LTUs.

Table 23.24: TEP1E & BW7R Alarm LTU Factory Link settings
Switch Default position Use
SW1 Released Alarm/Cancel Push Button switch
Disabled if PSU1 and PSU2 inoperative (SMA1/4 Subrack)
Link Default Function in Default Position
LK1 (1–2) 1–2 Factory test use (1HAM60781AAQ) only
LK3 (1–2) 1–2 Factory test use (1HAM60781AAQ) only
LK4 (1–2) 1–2 Factory test use (1HAM60781AAQ) only

23.7.4 User Alarm LTU 1HAM60782AAS

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

23.7.5 AUI LTU 1HAM60789AAH

• There are no user links on the above LTU.
Switch Default position Use
SW1a DOWN = Open circuit Option to ground pin 1 (UP = GND)

23.7.6 Auxiliary LTU 1HAM60786AAB

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

23.7.7 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU LTU

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

23.7.8 Sync Balanced LTU (1HAM60784AAW)

• There are no user links on the above LTU.

Marconi (Page 328) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Table 23.25: Termination Impedance

Switch Default position Use
Option to provide 75 Ohm Input Impedance for EXT1
SW1–a UP
(DOWN = High Impedance)
Option to provide 75 Ohm Input Impedance foe
SW1–b UP
EXT2 (DOWN = High Impedance)
NOTE SW1 and SW2 are mounted on the LTU circuit board and are set during commissioning

23.7.9 Sync Unbalanced LTU (1HAM60785AAY)

• There are no user links on the above LTU.

Table 23.26: Termination Impedance

Switch Default position Use
Option to provide High Impedance for EXT1 (DOWN
SW1–a UP
= 75 Ohm Input Impedance)
Option to provide High Impedance for EXT2 (DOWN
SW1–b UP
= 75 Ohm Input Impedance)
Option to ground EXT1 Input cable screen
SW2–a UP = GND
(DOWN = AC coupling)
Option to ground EXT2 Input cable screen
SW2–b UP = GND
(DOWN = AC coupling)
Option to provide AC/DC Output coupling for EXT1
SW3–a UP = DC coupling
(DOWN = AC coupling)
Option to provide AC/DC Output coupling for EXT2
SW3–b UP = DC coupling
(DOWN = AC coupling)
NOTE SW1, SW2 and SW3 are mounted on the LTU circuit board and are set during commissioning

23.7.10 1.5 Mbit/s Balanced LTU (G703) – 1HAM 60623 AAW

The above 1.5M balanced G.703 LTU has one switch (SW1) and no links.

• Default position of SW1 is UP to give a LOW Tx output. For up to 3dB of cable

loss, SW1 should be in the UP position.
Note: In the non default positions there will be a high Tx output and the Rx cable screen will
be short circuited to earth.

23.7.11 1.5 Mbit/s Balanced LTU (G703) – 1HAM 60793AAK

• There are no user links on the above LTU.

The above 1.5M balanced G703 LTU has two switches (SW1 and SW2) and no
links.

Switch Default position Use

SW1 UP (Tx output earthed) Tx cable screen will be short circuited to earth or isolated
SW2 DOWN (Isolated Rx input) Rx cable screen will be isolated from earth or isolated

23.7.12 2Mbit/s Balanced LTU (D Type) – 1HAM 60834AAC

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

Marconi (Page 329) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.7.13 2Mbit/s Un–balanced LTU (D Type) – 1HAM 60833AAA

• There are no user links on the above LTU.
• The following switches are set during commissioning:
Switch Default position Use (default or DOWN = ON for DC coupling)
SW1–a UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 1 cable screen
SW1–b UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 2 cable screen
SW2–a UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 3 cable screen
SW2–b UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 4 cable screen
SW3–a UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 5 cable screen
SW3–b UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 6 cable screen
SW4–a UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 7 cable screen
SW4–b UP = AC coupling Option for AC/DC coupling of input 8 cable screen

23.7.14 34Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – 1HAM 60796AAR

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.

23.7.15 45Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU – 1HAM 60797AAT

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTU.
• Line Build Out
LBO effective = Upper

LBO inactive = Lower

23.7.15.1 1HAM 60798AAV and 1HAM 60839AAN

• There are no user links or switches on the above LTUs.

23.8 POWER CONSUMPTION FIGURES

Table 23.27: LTU Power Consumption

Ancillary LTUs
1HAM60783AAU LCT LTU 0.25W
PWR/LCT LTU (SMA–1/4c)
Enhanced Ancillary Interface Unit (SMA–1/4c)
Bw7R LTU (SMA–1/4c)
1HAM60780AAN Rack Alarm LTU (BW7R) 2.6W
1HAM60781AAQ Rack Alarm LTU (TEP–1E) 2.6W
1HAM60782AAS User Alarm LTU 0.9W
1HAM60789AAH COMMS AUI LTU 1.5W
1HAM60786AAB Auxiliary LTU (Low rate 9.6kbit/s) 0.9W
1HAM60883AAM 2Mbit/s Test Bus LTU (1.0/2.03 connectors) 0.6W
1HAM60784AAW External Sync LTU – Balanced 0.4W
1HAM60784AAY External Sync LTU – Un–Balanced 0.9W

Marconi (Page 330) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

23.9 RECOMMENDED CABLING

Note: See also cabling information at the end of the chapter on Slide–In Card Units.

Cable (A)
• Copper Braid Screened cable. 3way CY Type (1.5mm2)–2 off per LTU 16A,
Raydex/CDT & Farnell Components stock No. .235–210.

Use
• Power Wiring to Subrack for all Dual Feed Power LTUs.

Cable (B)
• Copper Braid Screened cable. 7way CY Type (1.5mm2)–1 off per LTU
16A, Raydex/CDT & Farnell Components stock No. .235–258

Cable (C) Power – SMA–1/4c

• Copper Braid Screened Cable, 4 core.
Leoni V45482–D87–G6 (1300999–0014/AN0001 )

Use
• Power Wiring to Subrack for Dual Feed Power LTUs (SMA–1/4c)

Cable (D) Power – SMA–1/4CP

Use
• Power Wiring for SMA–1/4CP

Cable (E)
• 75 Ohm Double Screened coax
GPT Code: 1WAE20028AAX
EBICC BRAND–REX cable ref. HFE 2290 Cable1 or Siemens Cable
V45466–D13–C15

Use
• Int. – Unbalanced connections to all Tributary and Sync signals, however the
attenuation characteristics must be checked before use.
(Max distance: 2M=33m, 34M=170m, 45M=150m, 140M=85m, STM–1=80m)
Note: Typical cable may support 5–10% extra length but is not guarenteed.

Cable (F)
• 75 Ohm Double Screened coax to CW1383A
GPT Code: 1WAE20002AAE
BT 3002 Cable

Use
• BT – Unbalanced connections to Tributary and Sync signals up to 2Mbit/s
(Short lengths may be acceptable above 2Mbit/s however the attenuation
characteristics must be checked before use and no EMC compliance above
2Mbit/s is offered by GPT).

Marconi (Page 331) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Cable (G)
• 75 Ohm Double Screened coax (low loss 7/0.2)GPT Code: 1WAE00005AAW
BT 2003 Cable.

Use
• BT – Unbalanced connections to Tributary/Line signals above 2Mbit/s.

Cable (H)
• 75 Ohm Double Screened coax (low loss 7/0.2)
ST212 Cable.

Use
• Italtel – Unbalanced connections to Tributary and Sync signals up to 2Mbit/s.

Cable (I)
• 75 Ohm Double Screened coax (low loss)
ST214 Cable.

Use
• Italtel – Unbalanced connections to Tributary and Sync signals above 2Mbit/s.

Cable (J)
• Screened Pair Cable (8 pair)
GPT Code 1WAD20116AAX

Use
• 120 Ohm balanced connections to Tributary signals.

Cable (K)
• Screened Pair Cable (4 pair)
GPT Code 1WAD20062AAJ
Beldon 9806 cable. 28AWG Beldfoil and Braid
(7/0.127mm diameter tinned Cu).

Use
• 100 – 120 Ohm balanced connections for Tributary, Sync, Auxiliary and
Network Management signals.

Cable (L)
• Screened Multicore Cable.
DEF.Stan.61–12 Parts 4 & 5–10 conductors.
(7/0.2mm Black PVC insulated, 6.3 to 6.9 overall diameter.

Use
• Auxiliary, short length balanced signals.

Marconi (Page 332) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

Cable (M)
• Ribbon Cable (10 way)
GPT Code 1WAC20002ADH
28AWG (7/0.127) Strand Conductors 0.05 Centres.

Use
• Connection to Rack Alarm.

Cable (N)
• LCT Cable Assembly
Belden 9502 or equivalent, 8 way

Use
• Local Terminal Interface for SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 333) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 23: LINE TERMINATION UNITS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 334) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

CHAPTER 24:
SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.1 INTRODUCTION

SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) subracks are populated with slide–in

cards. This chapter provides equipping rules and information relevant to individual
card installation.

24.1.1 Management Data Communications

Optional cards able to access the overhead data buses, Engineering Order Wire
(EOW) and Auxiliary cards, can be used to provide engineering equipment
management data communications.

24.2 CARD COMPATIBILITY

Some Series 4 cards are interchangeable with existing cards. Table 24.1 and the
following paragraphs detail the card types and give general points to be aware of
when replacing existing cards with Series 4 cards.

Note: Refer to the appropriate LCT Operators Manual when replacing a card, upgrading or
changing the existing firmware may also be required.

24.2.1 Hardware Codes

Table 24.1 lists Series 4 product core units and associated cards and their
variants. The table also includes core units for SMA–1/4CP.

In Series 4, STM–1 and STM–4 optical interface can be achieved using optical
modules. For information on these see the chapter on Optical Modules. See also
the chapter on Single Fibre Working.

Note: Optical Modules can be be used with all Series 4 products including SMA–1/4CP.

Table 24.1: Slide–in Card Units

CODE TITLE COMMENTS
CORE UNITS:–
1HAN60510AAF Base Unit (Balanced 16x2) SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60511AAH Base Unit (Unbalanced 16x2) SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60509AAK Base Unit (X.21 4x2) SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60514AAP 34M Expansion Module SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60515AAR 45M Expansion Module SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60517AAV STM–1 Optical Expansion Mod- SMA–1/4CP
ule
1HAN50512ABC 16x2 Expansion Module (Bal) SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60513ABE 16x2 Expansion Module (Unbal) SMA–1/4CP
1HAN60512AAK 32x2 Expansion Module (Bal) SMA–1/4CP

Marconi (Page 335) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Table 24.1:(Cont)Slide–in Card Units

CODE TITLE COMMENTS
1HAN60513AAM 32x2 Expansion Module (Unbal) SMA–1/4CP
1HAG60566AAX Extender II Expansion Module SMA–1/4CP (Use with 4x2 base unit only)
(X.21 8x2)
1HAG60595AAR Subrack Core SMA–1/4c
1HAK60729AAS Tributary Power Unit SMA–1/4c
1HAG60596AAT Subrack Core SMA–1/4(4+4)
1HAG60594AAP Subrack Core SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60877AAR Core ADM Card (STM1/4) SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60876AAP Comms/Controller Card SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAK60669AAW PSU (Note: 32x2M ports are SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
provided by core configuration.
PSU required when trib card
fitted)
TRIB CARDS:–
1HAT60707AAD 2MBIT/S Trib (32 port) SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60736AAW 2MBIT/S Trib (16 port) SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60622BAN 34MBIT/S Trib SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60979AAC 34MBIT/S Transmux SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60623BAQ 45MBIT/S Trib SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60624BFE 140MBIT/S Trib SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
TRIB/LINE CARDS:–
1HAT60803ABT STM–1 Electrical TCM LTU/Front Access
1HAT60918AAJ Dual STM–1 Electrical SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60878AAT Dual STM–1 Optical TCM Flexible unit to which optical modules are
applied.
1HAT60914AAA Quad STM–1 Electrical TCM SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc
1HAT60913AAX Quad STM–1 Optical TCM SMA–1/4c/uc (1310NM I1.1/S1.1–FC/PC/SC)
1HAT60922AAL Quad STM–1 Optical TCM SMA–1/4c/uc (1310NM L1.1–FC/PC/SC)
1HAT60923AAN Quad STM–1 Optical TCM SMA–1/4c/uc (1550NM L1.2–FC/PC/SC)
1HAT60917AAG VCAM Card SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60791ABU/AFP/ADE STM–1 Optical TCM TCM 1310NM L1.1 FC/PC/SC/DIN
1HAT60791ACM/AGG/AEW STM–1 Optical TCM TCM 1310NM L1.2 FC/PC/SC/DIN
AUX & EOW CARDS:–
1HAT60004ADD Auxiliary Card “0” SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60647ABA Auxiliary Card “0.1” SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60576DAK EOW Card SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HAT60576EAG EOW Fixed Ring Master SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
1HFA20002AAJ EOW Handset
Accessories
1HAW20014AET Rug. Universal Coupler FC/PC to ASC SFW
1HAW20044ABM/ADW/AFG Tx Rug. Contra–dir Coupler FC/PC/SC/DIN for SFW 1536nm (1554nm
Rx)
1HAW20044AAU/ACE/AEP Tx Rug. Contra–dir Coupler FC/PC/SC/DIN for SFW 1554nm (1536nm
Rx)
1HAW20048AAD/ACN/AEX Tx Rug. Co–dir Coupler FC/PC/SC/DIN for SFW 1536/1554nm
1HAW20048ABV/ADF/AFQ Rx Rug. Co–dir Coupler FC/PC/SC/DIN for SFW 1536/1554nm
1HAM60938AAS Universal Couplers in Fibre Tray FC/PC for SFW 1310/1550nm

Marconi (Page 336) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

GENERAL FEATURES OF CARD INSTALLATION

CAUTION
The Optical Safety rules and Safe Working Practices outlined in the Safety
Notices in the preliminary pages of this manual, and relevant card replacement details in
the LCT Operator Manual must be read and understood before Optical Multiplexer or
Optical Interface Cards are removed from the sub–rack or disconnected.

24.2.2 Card Complement

The card complement of a sub–rack will depend on the application of the particular
SMA– in the network Certain types of card protection schemes may involve
duplication of cards (refer to the chapter on Protection and Link and Switch
Configuration for details).

In all Card configuration tables, slots for duplicated cards are designated ‘A’ and
‘B’, where slot ‘A’ normally houses the ‘worker’ card and slot ‘B’ the ‘protection’
card.

If the equipment configuration results in any card slot being unoccupied, a suitably
sized blank plate must be fitted to that slot in order for complete EMC screening to
exist.

24.2.3 Installing the Cards into the Correct Slots

The sequence in which cards are installed is not important. It should be noted
however, that some cards have fibre and coaxial connections made at their front
panels, therefore it may be more convenient to install these cards last.

Card slots are identified by the numbering scheme 1–N (counting from left to
right), when viewing the shelf from the front. Subsequent expansion is possible,
e.g. a Terminal Multiplexer can be expanded to provide the Add–Drop function.
Which card types can populate what slots are illustrated in the Card configuration
tables at the beginning of each Installation chapter.

Note: A mechanical card keying mechanism prevents cards from being fitted in the wrong
slots, which could otherwise result in damage to the cards.

Note: To maintain EMC integrity, all un–populated card (and LTU) slot positions should be
fitted with dummy blanking plates. A range of plates are available to suit the different slot
widths, these are detailed in the previous chapters of this section.

Note: All cards go through an automatic self test routine after they are powered–up. Also
note that the power supply unit has a safety feature, whereby it cannot be inserted into the slot
or taken out again, without the input switch on the front being set to OFF.

24.2.4 Front Panel Connections

The following cards have active front panel connectors carrying traffic:–

• All fibre–optic Line and Tributary cards (fibre–optic terminations).

• 140Mbit/s and STM–1 Electrical cards (co–axial terminations).

Marconi (Page 337) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.2.5 Power Consumption Figures

Cards that interface with LTUs, are given power consumption figures which include
a full complement of their associated LTUs. Power values given represent extra
power drawn from input supplies and not card dissipation.

Table 24.2: Typical Power Consumption

Card Type Power Con-
sumption
SMA–1/4CP 4x2 without optics 20 W
SMA–1/4CP 16x2 Balanced without optics 19 W
SMA–1/4CP 16x2 Unbalanced without optics 19 W
SMA–1/4CP Expansion 3x34Mbit/s 11 W
SMA–1/4CP Expansion 3x45Mbit/s 11 W
SMA–1/4CP Expansion STM1 Optical MM 7W
ATX 34M Expansion Unit 21 W
ATX 45M Expansion Unit 21 W
ATX 155M Electrical Expansion Unit 21 W
ATX 155M Optical Expansion Unit 21 W
ETX–10 Expansion Unit 8W
SDH Extender II Expansion Unit 8x2M X.21 8W
1.5Mbit/s Tributary Card with G703 LTUs (32 port) 11.33 W
1.5Mbit/s Tributary Card with G703 LTUs (16 port) 9.67 W
2Mbit/s Tributary Card with Bal. or Unbal. LTUs (32 port) 15.7 W
2Mbit/s Tributary Card with Bal. or Unbal. LTUs (16 port) 12 W
1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card for Protection (32 port) 10 W
34Mbit/s Tributary Card with LTUs 12 W
34Mbit/s Transmux with LTU 11 W
45Mbit/s Tributary Card with LTUs 12 W
140Mbit/s Tributary Card with LTUs 15.5 W
140Mbit/s Tributary Card no LTUs (ie: front access) 13.3 W
VCTS VCAM no LTUs, include LTU power as below for EXTENDER I&II 12.8 W
VC–AM Optical LTU (2off normal[2.5W] & 2off in protection[4.9W]) for EXTENDER I 14.9 W
VCTS VC–AM Electrical LTU (2off normal[2.5W] & 2off in protection[2.25W]) for EXTENDER 1 10.5 W
VCTS VC–AM SFW Optical LTU (each) for EXTENDER I&II 1.9 W
STM–1 Optical Card TCM 7.7 W
Dual STM–1 Optical Card TCM 12.22W
STM–1 Electrical Card with LTU 11 W
STM–1 Electrical Card no LTU (ie: front access) 8.8 W
Dual STM–1 Electrical Card with LTUs 15.9 W
Dual STM–1 Electrical Card no LTUs (ie: front access) 11.5 W
CellSpan–i ATA & ATC 34 ATM Traffic Cards with LTUs 25 W
CellSpan–i ATA & ATC 34 ATM Traffic Cards – protection trib 22 W
CellSpan–i ATA & ATC 45 ATM Traffic Cards with LTUs 25 W
CellSpan–i ATA & ATC 45 ATM Traffic Cards – protection trib 22 W
PacketSpan ETA–10 Card 15 W
PacketSpan ERA Unit 22 W
PacketSpan ERC 34/45 Trib Card with LTU 23 W
PacketSpan ERC 155 Unit 22 W
Comms/Controller Card (including SMC) 10 W
Core Card without optics 20 W

Marconi (Page 338) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Table 24.2:(Cont)Typical Power Consumption

Card Type Power Con-
sumption
STM 1 Dual Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 5W
STM 4 Dual Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 5W
Auxiliary Card 1.5 W
Auxiliary V0.1 Card 4.0 W
EOW Card & Fixed Ringmaster EOW Card 5.0 W
PSU (each) 10 W
AUI LTU 1.5 W
LCT LTU fitted standard in Core 0.25 W
Sync Balanced LTU 0.4 W
Sync Unbalanced LTU 0.9 W
User Alarms LTU 0.9 W
Rack Alarms LTU (BW7R/TEP–1E) 2.6 W
2M Testbus LTU 0.7 W
SMA–1/4c Basic Ancillary LTU 1.35 W
SMA–1/4c Enhanced LTU 0.75 W
NOTE: Inclusion of the AUI Adaptor Unit (MAU) will typically increase dissipation by 6 W the actual value
will depend on the type of MAU fitted.

24.2.6 Typical Power Calculations

Individual rack power consumption figures will vary considerably for different rack
populations. To obtain an approximate power consumption figure for a rack, add
up the individual card consumptions and add 8W for the rack itself.

24.2.7 Unit and Card Weights

Table 24.3: Unit and Card Weights

Card Type Weight (kg)
SMA–1/4CP 4x2 without optics 2.0
SMA–1/4CP 16x2 Balanced without optics 1.9
SMA–1/4CP 16x2 Unbalanced without optics 1.9
SMA–1/4CP Expansion 3x34Mbit/s 1.5
SMA–1/4CP Expansion 3x45Mbit/s 1.5
SMA–1/4CP Expansion STM1 Optical MM 1.22
ATX 34M Expansion Unit 1.75
ATX 45M Expansion Unit 1.75
ATX 155M Electrical Expansion Unit 1.75
ATX 155M Optical Expansion Unit 1.75
ETX–10 Expansion Unit 1.5
SDH Extender II Expansion Unit 8x2M X.21 1.89
Expansion Interconnect Unit 0.35
1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card (32 port) 0.4
34Mbit/s Tributary Card 0.4
34Mbit/s Transmux 0.42
45Mbit/s Tributary Card 0.4
140Mbit/s Tributary Card 0.4
VCTS VCAM Card (EXTENDER I&II) 0.44
STM–1 Optical Card TCM 0.46

Marconi (Page 339) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Table 24.3:(Cont)Unit and Card Weights

Card Type Weight (kg)
Dual STM–1 Optical Card (without optics fitted) 0.38
Quad STM–1 Optical Card 0.52
STM–1 Electrical Card 0.4
Dual STM–1 Electrical Card 0.38
Quad STM–1 Electrical Card 0.37
CellSpan i ATA and ATC 155 ATM Traffic Cards 0.52
CellSpan i ATC 34 ATM Traffic Cards 0.52
CellSpan i ATC 45 ATM Traffic Cards 0.52
PacketSpan ETA–10 Card 0.43
PacketSpan ERA Unit 0.94
PacketSpan ERC 34/45 Trib Card with LTU 1.0
PacketSpan ERC 155 Unit 0.96
Comms/Controller Card 0.46
System Memory Card 0.04
Core Card without optics 0.63
STM 1 Dual Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 0.12
STM 4 Dual Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 0.12
STM 1 Single Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 0.12
STM 4 Single Fibre Working optical module for SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4c, SMA-1/4uc, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) 0.12
Auxiliary Card 0.3
Auxiliary V0.1 Card 0.4
EOW Card & Fixed Ringmaster EOW Card 0.5
SMA–1/4 PSU 2.1
SMA–1/4c Tributary Power Unit 1.62
Power LTU (1HAM60778ABH) 0.2
Power LTU (1HAM60779ABK) 0.25
1.5Mbit/s Balanced LTU 0.17
2Mbit/s Balanced LTU 0.16
2Mbit/s Unbalanced LTU 0.19
34M/45M/Transmux LTU 0.12
VCTS VCAM Optical LTU for Extender I 0.2
VCTS VCAM Electrical LTU for Extender I 0.15
VCTS VCAM SFW Optical LTU for Extender I and II 0.2
140/155Mbit/s LTU 0.14
140/155Mbit/s Link LTU 0.1
CellSpan Optical and Electrical LTUs 0.15
CellSpan Protection LTU 0.13
Sync Balanced LTU 0.1
Sync Unbalanced LTU 0.09
LCT LTU 0.1
User Alarms LTU 0.09
Rack Alarms LTU (BW7R/TEP–1E) 0.03
AUI LTU 0.1
AUX LTU 0.08
2M Testbus LTU 0.1
SMA–1/4c 2M Unbalanced 0.46
SMA–1/4c 2M Balanced 0.46
SMA–1/4c Basic Ancillary 0.2
SMA–1/4c Enhanced LTU 0.19

Marconi (Page 340) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Table 24.3:(Cont)Unit and Card Weights

Card Type Weight (kg)
Mains and Battery Box without batteries 5.4
Mains and Battery Box with batteries 16.0

24.3 CARD LABEL POSITIONS

The card labelling scheme is illustrated below.

CARD TOP

SERIAL NUMBER IDENTITY Doc Control ENU DATE

CARD FRONT

* Lower position is used when card identity changes when software program is added

IDENTITY * Doc Control ENU

CARD BOTTOM

Note: The Top Identity refers to the MIC part of the unit and the Bottom Identity to the Top
Level Code for the unit.

24.4 POWER SUPPLY UNITS

The power arrangements are different for the SMA–1/4CP, the SMA–1/4c/uc, and the
SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) products. Full information on PSU’s is contained
in the chapter on Power Supply Units.

With regard to SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8), 32 x 2Mbit/s ports are provided by

the core configuration – a PSU is required when tributary cards are fitted. This
PSU variant is 1HAK60669AAW. The following PSU variants may also be used:

• SMA–1 (4+4)/SMA–1(8) 1HAK60550AEA (Single Input unit)

1HAK60550AFS (Dual input unit) or

1HAK60550 AGK (Italtel option).

Note: The Italtel unit does not alarm if its second supply source is removed.

• SMA–4(4+4)/SMA–4(8)
1HAK60550BAC (Dual input) or

1HAK60550BCM (Italtel option).

Note: This unit does not alarm if its second supply input is removed.

Marconi (Page 341) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

With regard to SMA–1/4c/uc, 32 x 2Mbit/s ports are provided by the core

configuration – a PSU is required when tributary cards are fitted. This PSU variant
is 1HAK60729AAS.

CAUTION

A Power Supply Unit (PSU) can only be inserted (or withdrawn) when its On/Off
switch is in the Off position.

The primary dc source can be batteries or an external PSU. Commissioning the

PSU cards is achieved via the Local Terminal (refer to the appropriate Local
Terminal (LCT) User manual).

A PSU has two front–panel LEDs to indicate the operational condition of the unit,
and dc output test points (see Figure 24.1). There is an on/off switch located at the
bottom of the front panel.

LEDs

AMBER LED RED LED

When lit indicates When lit indicates either:
Unit switched on a) Unit switched off (but
and functioning the input power feed is
correctly +12.4V Test Point
present)
b) Fault condition
0V Test Points +5.5V Test Point

-5.7V Test Point

Figure 24.1 PSU Front Panel LED Indications and Monitor Point

24.4.1 PSU Low Voltage Inhibit Circuit

The PSU includes a Low Voltage Inhibit circuit which, when enabled, switches off
the outputs if the input feed falls below a predetermined threshold voltage. If,
subsequently, the input voltage rises above the threshold, the outputs will be
switched on again, but after a one second delay (after which the alarm LED will
also extinguish). The purpose of the delay is to allow time for the sub–rack card
watch–dog circuits to reset correctly.

The Low Input Voltage Inhibit function is enabled or disabled by means of a slide
switch. The switch is identified as SW1 or SW2 and its location on the PCB is
determined by the variant and/or ENU level.

• Switch SW2 (which appears on current PSU variants) is readily accessible at

the bottom edge of the PCB (see Figure 24.3).
Note: The inhibit is enabled when the switch slider is moved towards the front of the unit.

• Switch SW1 (which appears on some previous PSU variants) is accessible

through a cut–out in the side panel (see Figure 24.2) and may be operated by
using a small screwdriver blade.
Note: The inhibit is enabled when the switch slider is moved towards the back of the unit.

Marconi (Page 342) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Note: The default condition for all variants is for the inhibit to be enabled.

Top Of Card

Back (enable)

Front (disable)
SW1

ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË Heatsink Front Plate

SW1

Electrolytic Capacitors

Figure 24.2 Power Supply Unit View Showing Location of Switch SW1
Top Of Card

Back (disable)

Front (enable)

ËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËËË
SW2
SW2
Heatsink Front Plate

Figure 24.3 Power Supply Unit View Showing Location of Switch SW2

Table 24.4: Summary of Switch Operation

Switch Switch Position Inhibit Switch Status Operation
Front disabled
Initiates a delay to allow
SW1 time for the sub–rack
Back enabled card watch–dog circuits
to reset correctly.

24.4.2 Supply Current

Given the wide tolerance of the possible primary supply voltage which can be
chosen (36V dc min, 75V dc max), the total supply current for any rack will depend
on the input voltage; e.g. a rack with 370W total consumption, supplied with 60V
requires 6.17A (approx), but supplied with 48V requires 7.18A.

24.4.3 Protection

Refer to the chapter on Protection for details of supply protection.

Marconi (Page 343) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.5 SYSTEM POWER–UP

CAUTION

The following restrictions, regarding switching the Power Supply Units on or off,
should be observed during system power–up:

• A PSU must not be switched off (whether or not one of a group) when the
Comms/Controller Card amber LED is still flashing (i.e. during the period it is
performing a write sequence). Such an action is likely to result in corruption of
the Controller EEPROM data.
• When more than one Power Supply Unit is fitted, they should not be switched
between the On/Off states in rapid succession as such action can cause a
‘Laser Trip’ condition on the Optical Cards.
• The power–up sequence MUST be followed. Failure to use the correct
sequence may result in the Local Terminal (LCT) failing to communicate with
the Comms/Controller card. Should this occur, a re–commissioning sequence,
as detailed in the LCT Operators manual should be undertaken. This will cause
all previous connections to be lost.

Powering up an SMA

To power–up the SMA correctly, take the following steps:

1. Check that the primary supplies are present, this is indicated by the Green
LEDs on the Power LTU.

Note: With the exception of the single feed LTU (now obsolescent), in this case an indication
of the presence of primary supplies is the Red LED being lit on the PSU(s).

2. Switch PSU A on.

3. Check that the Amber power LED is lit and the Red LED extinguishes. If
not, switch the unit off immediately and remove it from the shelf.
Do not leave a Power Supply Unit in the shelf if the Red LED remains lit
after switching on.

4. If the LED indications for PSU A are good, switch PSU B on (if fitted) and
repeat the LED checking procedure for PSU B as in 3.

Note: Where there is more than one PSU specified in the rack configuration, ensure that all
the PSUs are powered–up within ten minutes of each other; i.e., whenever possible, do not
leave a single PSU powering the whole rack for any longer than is required to correctly follow
this powering–up procedure.

Note: Immediately after power–up the sub–rack cards will undergo an initialisation period
controlled by the Comms/Controller card. During this period, it is normal for a number of the
card LEDs to flash on and off. This process stops when the Comms/ Controller card has
completed its initialisation cycle.

Marconi (Page 344) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.6 CORE CARD (1HAT60877AAR) AND

COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD (1HAT60876AAP)

For information on the Core Card and Comms/Controller Cards for the
shelf–based products, see the following chapters and sections: 3.3, NO TAG,
24.9.6, 29.9, and 30.9.

The Core Card, which is illustrated in Figure 24.7, has a similar frontal appearance
to the Dual STM–1 Optical Card. For information concerning how to fit optical
modules to the Core Card and Dual STM–1 Card, see the chapter on Optical
Modules in conjunction with Chapter 29 (SMA–1/4c) and Chapter 30
(SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)).

24.7 OPTICAL TRAFFIC CARDS

24.7.1 Optical Card Variants

The launch powers for all Marconi Communications optical card ports satisfy ITU
G.957. Variants to cards can be identified as follows:

• I = Intra Office
• L = Long haul
• S = Short haul
• V = Very long haul (primarily for use with an external Optical Amplifier)
• +/JE = Increased optical budget.

Following the prefix letter are digits which identify the STM level

• 1 = STM1
• 4 = STM–4

Following the prefix letter/numbers is a second number which determines the

wavelength

• .1 = 1310nm
• .2/3 = 1550nm

The designation + or JE as the suffix denotes a variant with better than G957
optical budget.

Note: Cards shown with the same reference number, are switchable between variants by
means of an on–board links.

24.7.2 Optical Safety

CAUTION
The Optical Safety rules and Safe Working Practices outlined in the Safety
Notices in the preliminary pages of this manual, and relevant card replacement details in

Marconi (Page 345) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

the LCT Operator Manual must be read and understood before Optical Multiplexer or
Optical Interface Cards are removed from the sub–rack or disconnected.

A test override switch on the front of the units enables optical measurements to be
taken when ALS is operative. This switch has a 12 seconds persistency check
built in as a safeguard, and must be enabled (held on) continuously for 12 seconds
to activate the laser. At the end of this time limit the laser will be enabled for
approximately 90 seconds. A shorter 2 second test can also be performed.

24.7.3 External Connections

Fibre–optic cable connections to Optical Cards are via connectors bracket

mounted on the front of the card (Figure 24.4). On–card fibres, running from the
connectors into the card, are protected by a guard. or cable guides

CAUTION
Optical power levels when using an Optical Amplifier are such that dirt on
the end of a connector can be permanently burnt onto the end face.

24.7.4 LEDs
• RED
(Card Fault) Illuminated when card fault is detected or on failure of +5V or –5V
card power feeds.
• AMBER
(Resource Available) Indicates that the unit is an available resource that has
been logically added to the system.
This LED flashes when a software download is in progress.
• AMBER
(Laser Test) Illuminated when the laser is in it’s test mode.

24.7.5 Push Buttons

There is one push button accessible through the unit front plate assembly used to
force the laser on after an Automatic Laser Shutdown has occurred.

• Press and Hold for 12 seconds Initiates a 90 second laser test.

• Press and Release Initiates a 2 second laser test.

Marconi (Page 346) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

EXTERNAL
FIBRE-OPTIC
CABLE

Front facia

OUTPUT

STM–1 or STM–4
OPTICAL CARD

Guard

INPUT

Guard

Figure 24.4 External fibre–optic connectors (FC/PC)

Note: See Figure 24.7 for details of optical connector layout on the Core Card and Dual
STM–1 Card.

24.8 AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN (ALS)

24.8.1 Introduction

An Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) system is a safety feature designed to

prevent exposure to optical radiation in the event of a fibre break or disconnection.

24.8.2 ALS Disabled

With this option enabled, the laser is permanently on and is only disabled when an
inward loopback is applied.

Note: TCM variants are permanently disabled regardless of loopback application.

24.8.3 ALS Enabled

In this configuration the laser is disabled in the event of a failure of the received
input signal (this is detected by a loss of receive frame alignment). Following a
receiver input failure, the laser restart procedure is carried out (see para 24.8.6).

Marconi (Page 347) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.8.4 ALS Enabled, Auto Laser Restart Disabled

This is an additional safety feature included for the operation of Transmit optical
cards, when used in conjunction with Optical Booster Amplifiers. In this instance,
the laser restart signal is suppressed, ensuring that the laser can only be turned on
manually by using one of the front panel switches.

In this state, the laser is activated for 0.5s after the card is fitted into the shelf. If
no signal is received the laser will shut down and any restart signals will be
suppressed.

24.8.5 STM–1 (TCM)

• ALS Disable (LK15) 3–4 fitted, (LK19) 1–2 not fitted
When this link is fitted the laser is permanently ‘ON’ under microprocessor
control.
• The ALS overide will only function provided (LK19) 1–2 is not fitted.
• Three Second AIS Extention (LK15) 3–4 not fitted:
A three second extension of the receive AIS following a potential recovery
prevents excess AIS alarms being generated during restart. If this link is fited
the three second AIS extention is disabled.
• Bi–Directional ALS Enable (LK14) No links fitted:
The laser is disabled in the event of a ‘Section Trace Mismatch’ alarm. Fitting
LK14 disables the bi–directional shutdown facility.
• Disabled Automatic Laser Restart (LK18) 3–4 fitted:
In this configuration the the auto laser restart signal is suppressed. If no signal
is received the laser will shut down and can only be restarted manually using
one of the front panel switches.

24.8.6 Laser Restart

If the shutdown system has operated, then the laser is automatically enabled for
2.5 0.2s every 1 to 5 minutes (programmable) to test for optical loop continuity.

The 1 to 5 minute delay may be overridden by operating the switch SW4 on the
card front panel to manually test for loop continuity. If continuity has been
established then the then the alarm is cleared and normal operation resumed.

If continuity has not been re–established, the alarm remains active and the laser is
again disabled for 1 to 5 minutes or until (SW4) is operated).

24.8.7 Disabling ALS on Core Card (for SMA1/4(4+4)(8),

SMA1/4c and SMA1/4uc)

ALS is enabled as standard on all Series 4 equipment. However, in some

circumstances there may be a requirement to disable ALS. Figure 24.5 shows how
to disable ALS on the Core Card.

Marconi (Page 348) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Figure 24.5 Procedure for Disabling ALS on Series 4 Core Card

Jumper Block PL5

1. Locate jumper block PL5.

2. Locate 2 pins on right hand side labelled 1.
3. Fit jumper over 2 pins labelled 1.

24.8.8 Disabling ALS on SMA–1/4CP

ALS is enabled as standard on the SMA–1/4CP. However, in some circumstances

there may be a requirement to disable ALS. Figure 24.5 shows how to disable ALS
on the SMA–1/4CP.

Marconi (Page 349) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Figure 24.6 Procedure for Disabling ALS on SMA–1/4CP and use of other pins

Pin 1 Pin 7
ALS disable – fit link to Pins 1,2 Pin 2 Pin 8

Enable bi–directional Line East – fit link to Pins 5,6

Enable bi–directional Line West – fit link to Pins 7,8

Location of 8 Pins just inside centre of unit

Earth
Stud

PWR2 SYNC AUX2 USER I/O2

LSR TEST
W E Pwr1
Pwr2 Cust Core interface area
2s 2s
Pwr
90s 90s
Alarm Test
PWR1 LCT AUX1 USER I/O1
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Line West Line East

Optical Module Area

24.9 TRAFFIC CARD INSTALLATION

The following paragraphs give supporting installation details for traffic cards. Use
the information given here in conjunction with Table 24.1.

If protection is not being used, a card complement consisting of a mixture of

1.5/2/34/45/140Mbit/s Tributary Cards and STM–1 Tributary Cards is permissible
in all Tributary card slots.

24.9.1 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards

To simplify equipping should a future protection scheme be envisaged, equipping

should preferably be in a sequence starting from the lowest slot number working
up, i.e. slot 106, then 107 and so on (SMA1/4c), or slot 401, then 402 and so on
(SMA1/4(4+4)(8)).

Marconi (Page 350) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

The 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards will now support thirty two, bi–directional traffic
ports. In addition, a reduced capacity card is supported capable of handling up to
sixteen bi–directional traffic ports.

24.9.2 1:N Protection (1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Cards)

For 1:N protection the Protection Tributary Card should be fitted (if appropriate)
according to the product variant (in fact this will only be required for SMA1/4c/uc,
fitted in slot 104. Traffic card protection is not relevant to SMA1/4CP. On
SMA1/4(4+4)(8) 32x2M protection is provided by the Core Card – see the chapter
on Protection for further information).

Note: 1:N protection can be utilised for either 1.5 or 2Mbit/s tributaries. Mixed protection is
not allowed. Check to ensure that cards being protected are of the same type, otherwise an
error message will be generated.

24.9.3 34/45/140Mbit/s, Transmux,VC–AM, and STM–1

Tributary Cards

To simplify equipping should a future protection scheme be envisaged, equipping

should preferably be in a sequence starting from the highest slot number working
down.

• SMA–1/4c:
four Tributary Cards can be fitted in slots
104 to 107 (104 and 105 are front plug up only).
• SMA–1/4(4+4):
eight Tributary Cards of any type can be fitted in slots 401 to 404 and 407 to
410 (401 to 404 are front plug up only).
• SMA–1/4(8):
eight Tributary Cards of any type can be fitted in slots 401 to 404 and 407 to
410.

STM–1 Cards may be either Optical or Electrical. Functionality of the cards is

identical, except for the external interfacing (see Figure 24.4, Figure 24.9 and
Figure 24.10), and may be mixed in the same sub–rack, according to network
requirements.

24.9.4 1:N Tributary Card protection (Not VC–AM)

The Tributary Protection Card does not have a designated slot (as with the 1.5/2M
protection scheme), but has to be in the slot immediately adjacent to, and to the
right of the tributary card group. Where space allows, it is possible to protect more
than one tributary group where each group may be of different configuration
provided the cards within the group are of the same type.

Marconi (Page 351) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.9.5 1:1 Tributary Card protection

1:1 protection is a particular form of 1:N protection where N=1. Any two adjacent
cards can provide 1:1 card protection with the card on the left configured as
Worker and the card on the right as Protection. Traffic LTUs must also be fitted for
each Trib card position including LTUs for each protection card.

24.9.6 Optical Cards

24.9.6.1 STM–1 Optical 1HAT60692***

The STM–1 Optical card consists of a single unit providing Interleaving,

Disinterleaving and Frame alignment of the STM–1 data stream. Two options are
available 1310nm and 1550nm, both Long Haul with a choice of Seiko FC/PC, SC
or DIN connectors. For details of the STM–1 Optical Card external connections,
refer to paragraph 24.7.3 and paragraph 24.7.4.

STM–1 Optical cards are fitted in the Tributary slots. 1+1 MSP protection is
supported across adjacent cards.

24.9.6.2 Dual STM–1 Optical Cards (TCM)

Series 4 Dual STM–1 Optical cards are for use with SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4)
and SMA–1/4(8).

The cards require the use of optical modules (a maximum of two) to form all front
end Rx Tx optical interfaces. These optical modules are field replaceable but not
in–service. Note that Series 4 Dual STM–1 Optical Cards support both Dual and
Single Fibre Working depending on which optical modules are fitted. See section
24.9.6.2.1 and the chapter on Optical Modules for further information.

There are two backplane traffic interfaces on the Dual STM–1 Optical cards –
38Mbit/s and 78Mbit/s. When used with SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) and
SMA–1/4(8), only the 78Mbit/s interface is used, and is automatically configured
by the hardware by means of a dedicated backplane pin.

Note: The Series 4 Dual STM–1 Optical cards can be used with Series 3 equipment but at
38Mbit/s interface only.

The Dual STM–1 Optical Interface card variants may be used as tributary
interfaces. The cards support two optical interfaces and are only available with
TCM.

1+1 MSP (Intra–card) protection is supported across adjacent streams within the
same card. 1+1 MSP (Inter–card) is supported across adjacent cards. 1:N
protection requires LTUs to be fitted.

Marconi (Page 352) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

LASER LASER
RESTART RESTART

RED ALARM RED ALARM

AMBER LASER TEST WEST AMBER LASER TEST WEST

OUTPUT OUTPUT

PORT 2 PORT 2

INPUT INPUT

AMBER IN TFC AMBER IN TFC

AMBER LASER TEST EAST AMBER LASER TEST EAST

OUTPUT OUTPUT

PORT 1 PORT 1

INPUT INPUT

Figure 24.7 Dual STM–1 Optical Card Core Card

Figure 24.7 shows a Dual STM–1 Optical Card with two optical modules fitted.
Figure 24.7 also shows the Core Card with two optical modules fitted. Note that
the frontal appearance of the two cards is similar except that the Core Card is
slightly wider (1.4” compared to 1”).

One or two optical modules can be fitted to each of these cards. If only one optical
module is to be fitted, it must be fitted in the lower port position. If two
modules are to be fitted, one should be fitted in the lower port position first. See
the chapter on optical modules for further information.

24.9.6.2.1 Dual STM–1 Optical Modules

The Dual STM–1 optical modules provide the following functionality:

• Transmit source and receive optical termination for a single 155Mbit/s (STM–1)
traffic stream.
• Provide ability for automatic laser shutdown and laser parameter monitoring.
• Ability to implement diagnostic loopback functions.

Marconi (Page 353) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

• Provide alarm and performance processing functions.

See the chapter on Optical Modules for further information.

Note: The optical modules can also provide the functionality to transmit source and receive
optical termination for a single 622Mbit/s (STM–4) SDH traffic stream.

24.9.6.3 Quad STM–1 Optical Cards – SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc only

1HAT60913AAX/1HAT60922AAL/1HAT60923AAN

Quad STM–1 optical interface card variants may be used as tributary interfaces in
conjunction with SMA–1/4c. Quad cards support four optical interfaces and are
only available as TCM options. Quad cards do not support single fibre working.

The Quad STM–1 card consists of a single card providing frame alignment and
interleaving/disinterleaving of STM–1 data streams. When fitted, the card supports
1+1 MSP (Intra and Inter–card). For each MSP protection type (Intra and Inter),
protection is fully flexible (ie any stream can be protected to any other stream).

Eight mating connector tails are required per unit – four for transmit and four for
receive. Four optical options are available – 1310nm Intra Office I–1, Short Haul
S–1.1, Long Haul L–1.1, and 1550nm Long Haul L–1.2. Monitor ports are not
available on Quad cards.

Marconi (Page 354) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Push Button Switches

RED ALARM
AMBER IN TFC

CH 1 INPUT/OUTPUT

CH 2 INPUT/OUTPUT

CH 3 INPUT/OUTPUT

CH 4 INPUT/OUTPUT

Push Button Switches

LASER TEST
AMBER

Figure 24.8 Quad STM–1 Optical Card (SMA–1/4c)

24.9.7 Electrical Cards

24.9.7.1 STM–1 Electrical Card

The STM–1 Electrical card performs the same functions as the Optical card except
that the optical line functions have been replaced ITU–TSS G703, 155Mbit/s
electrical line interface.

Connections to the STM–1 Electrical Card are direct to co–axial connectors on the
front of the card. The card (see Figure 24.9) also has a coaxial monitor point
socket.

24.9.7.2 Dual STM–1 Electrical Card (1HAT60918AAJ)

Unlike the Dual Optical cards, the electrical interfaces are not supported on
modules but are built directly into the main card. Note that the backplane traffic
interfaces of the dual card can run at 78Mbit/s or 38Mbit/s.

Marconi (Page 355) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

• If a dual STM–1 electrical card is fitted into an SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) or

SMA–1/4(8) shelf, the hardware reads the 78Mbit/s backplane pin and
configures the interface to run at 78Mbit/s.
• If a dual STM–1 electrical card is fitted into a Series 3 SMA, the hardware will
not be able to read the 78Mbit/s pin and will configure the interface to run at
38Mbit/s
• If a Series 3 electrical card is fitted into an SMA–1/4c/uc, SMA–1/4(4+4) or
SMA–1/4(8) shelf, an invalid interface alarm will be generated.

The Dual STM–1 Electrical card provides the same functions as the single STM–1
Electrical card but supports two interfaces via four type 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors.
Monitor points are also provided (see Figure 24.10).

1+1 MSP (Intra–card) protection is supported across adjacent streams within the
same card. 1+1 MSP (Inter–card) is supported across adjacent cards. 1:N
protection requires LTUs to be fitted.

. The Dual STM–1 ports, Port 1 and Port 2, are labelled CH1 and CH2 on the card.

DATA
I/P
ALM Note: The DCCRs and DDCMs
associated with this port may also be
IN TFC
refered to as LOWER on the Local
Terminal configuration menu.

SOCKETS FOR
EXTERNAL
TRAFFIC CABLES DATA
O/P
DATA I/P
MONITORING
POINT
MON
DATA DATA O/P
OUT CH 1
Note: All connectors shown are co-axial
Note: The DCCRs and DDCMs
MON associated with this port may be
DATA O/P refered to as UPPER on the Local
Terminal configuration menu.

Figure 24.9 Electrical STM–1 and

140Mbit/s Tributary
Card
DATA I/P

DATA O/P
CH2

MON
DATA O/P

Figure 24.10 Dual STM–1 Electrical Trib Card

Marconi (Page 356) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.9.8 Quad STM–1 TCM Electrical Card (1HAT60914AAA) –

SMA1/4c and SMA1/4 uc only

The Quad STM–1 TCM electrical interface card provides the same basic
functionality, protection and equipping rules as the conventional STM–1 electrical
interface card, but supports four interfaces in addition to physically supporting
Tandem Connection Sub–Layer Performance Monitoring (full TCM). Eight mating
1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors are required per unit (four transmit and four receive).

The Quad STM–1 card consists of a single card providing frame alignment and
interleaving/disinterleaving of STM–1 data streams. When fitted, the card supports
1+1 MSP (Intra and Inter–card). For each MSP protection type (Intra and Inter),
protection is fully flexible (ie any stream can be protected to any other stream).

ALM

IN TFC

DATA I/P
CH 1

DATA O/P

DATA I/P
CH2

DATA O/P

DATA I/P
CH 3

DATA O/P

DATA I/P CH 4

DATA O/P

Figure 24.11 Quad STM–1 Electrical Card

(SMA–1/4c/uc)

24.9.9 140Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60624BFE)

140Mbit/s Interface cards may be used in Tributary slots.

Marconi (Page 357) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

This card will handle one 139.264Mbit/s traffic signal via two type 1.0/2.3 coaxial
connectors or via a 140Mbit/s LTU. Two monitor points are also available on the
front of the unit (see Figure 24.9).

24.9.10 45Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60623BAQ)

The 45Mbit/s Tributary Card provides the processing circuitry to map and multiplex
primary rate traffic signals into the synchronous STM–1 frame structure. One
Tributary Card can handle up to three 44.736 Mbit/s traffic signals.

• Note that the Series 4 card can be used with Series 3 equipment but not vice
versa.

24.9.11 34Mbit/s Tributary Card (1HAT60622BAN)

The 34Mbit/s Tributary Card provides the processing circuitry to map and multiplex
primary rate traffic signals into the synchronous STM–1 frame structure. In this
case one Tributary Card handles up to three 34.368 Mbit/s traffic signals.

• Note that the Series 4 card can be used with Series 3 equipment but not vice
versa.

24.9.12 34Mbit/s Transmux Card (1HAT60979AAC)

The 34Mbit/s Transmux Card provides termination of a single structured 34Mbit/s

PDH line signal. At the PDH side the card will perform a 2Mbit/s to 34Mbit/s PDH
multiplex/demultiplex function. At the SDH side the card will take the 16
demultiplexed 2Mbit/s traffic signals and perform the same SDH mapping and
multiplexing function as the 2Mbit/s card.

The Transmux Card provides a single 34M signal interface in conjunction with a
single port LTU. The 34M, G.751 framed signal is de–multiplexed into its
constituent 16 x 2M PDH payloads. These are then processed as 16 separate 2M
channels with equivalent functionality to that of the 2M Tributary Card.

• Note that the Series 4 card can be used with Series 3 equipment but not vice
versa.

Marconi (Page 358) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

RED LED
ALARM
IN TFC
AMBER LED

Figure 24.12 34/45Mbit/s Tributary

34Mbit/s Transmux

24.9.13 VC–AM Card (1HAT60917AAG)

The VC–AM card is managed by the Comms/Controller function and is used in

conjunction with a V–TERM card located at a customer premises. Up to eight
VC–AM cards may be fitted in the tributary slots.

Each VC–AM provides up to four bi–directional 34Mbit/s sub STM–1 optical

interfaces via up to four optical LTUs. Both eight and fourteen channel cards are
available thus delivering a maximum of fifty six VC–12 signals (ie: 4 x 14 = 56
VC–12s).

• Note that the Series 4 card can be used with Series 3 equipment but not vice
versa.

Marconi (Page 359) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

RED LED
ALARM
IN TFC
AMBER LED

VCAM
LOC
CRAFT
TERM

VC–AM

Figure 24.13 VC–AM

Card

Cross–connections are made by the SMA Core Card, which treats the VC–AM as
an STM–N card providing 32 channels for VC–12 connectivity only.The channels
associated with the STM–1 from the SMA Core Card to VCTS lines are mapped
as shown in Table 24.5.

Marconi (Page 360) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

Table 24.5: Channel / VCTS Line Association

Channel No. TUG3/TUG2/TUG12 Nos VC–AM Line

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1 to 8
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
9 to 14 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1/1/1 to 1/3/2
1/3/3 to 1/5/2
34M VCTS Line 1 (Channels 1–8)
34M VCTS Line 1 (Channels 9–14)
15 1/5/3 Not Available for Cross–connection

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
16 to 23
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 1/6/1 to 2/1/2 34M VCTS Line 2 (Channels 1–8)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
24 to 29 2/1/3 to 2/3/2 34M VCTS Line 2 (Channels 9–14)
30 2/3/3 Not Available for Cross–connection

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
31 to 38 2/4/1 to 2/6/2 34M VCTS Line 3 (Channels 1–8)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
39 to 44 2/6/3 to 3/1/2 34M VCTS Line 3 (Channels 9–14)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
45 3/1/3 Not Available for Cross–connection

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
46 to 53 3/2/1 to 3/4/2 34M VCTS Line 4 (Channels 1–8)
54 to 59 3/4/3 to 3/6/2 34M VCTS Line 4 (Channels 9–14)
60 to 63 3/6/3 to 3/7/3 Not Available for Cross–connection
NOTE Shaded areas above are applicable only to 14 Channel VC–TS cards.

24.9.13.1 VC–AM Protection

1:N VC–AM card protection is available on all Series 4 SMAs (with the exception
of the Protection slot)

24.9.13.2 VC–AM Firmware

The VC–AM Firmware is held on the VC–AM card and not on the SMC. Should a
VC–AM card require configuring into a working subrack, the relevant software has
to be downloaded into the VC–AM card using the local terminal or EMOS before
traffic can be connected. A description of how to use this feature can be found in
the LCT Operator Manual.

24.10 OVERHEAD BUS ACCESS CARD

24.10.1 Auxiliary Card

The Auxiliary Cards allow omnibus handling of client telemetry, via RTUs (Remote
Terminal Units used for controlling equipment such as C–MUX primary
multiplexers) or MCUs (Management Communications Units), both around a ring
and on STM–n tributaries. This is achieved by providing conversion between
discrete V11 I/O ports (from the client’s equipment) and Section Overhead bytes.

One card can be fitted per Subrack in either auxiliary slot together with the
Auxiliary LTU/s. LTU slots are provided for AUX1 to AUX7, however only AUX1 to
AUX 3 are used.

Marconi (Page 361) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.10.2 Version ‘0’ (1HAT60004ADD)

24.10.2.1 9.6kbit/s Access

Using Auxiliary LTUs, 9.6kbit/s access is provided via six V11 ports (see Page 305
for pinout details). Each port consists of an input balanced pair and an output
balanced pair. No control signals or clocks are provided. Two ports and a ground
go to each Auxiliary LTU connector.

Note: If local access to the asynchronous ports is not required at a particular SMA on a ring,
the ports can be hard–wired together on the AUX LTU, to pass the data on to the next SMA.

24.10.3 Version ‘0.1’ (1HAT60647ABA)

24.10.3.1 9.6kbit/s Access

Using Auxiliary LTUs, 9.6kbit/s access is provided via six V11 ports, as described
for Version ‘0’.

24.10.3.2 64kbit/s Access

Synchronous 64kbit/s access is also provided via six micro D–type connectors
(KOP 1MBB60769AAK), on the front of the card (see Figure 24.14).These ports
have balanced pairs for the transmit and receive clocks as well as for the input and
output signals. There is only one port available on each connector to carry
synchronous data. Variations are controlled by DIL switches on the card.

Note: If local access to the asynchronous ports is not required at a particular SMA on a ring,
the ports can be hard–wired together on the AUX LTU, to pass the data on to the next SMA. For
the synchronous ports, DIL switches have to be set according to the by-passes required.
These can be set separately for each port.

Table 24.6: 64kbit/s Access Connectors

Aux Port Connector To / From
Connector 1 (Aux Ch 1) Line West (SOH Ch 1)
Connector 2 (Aux Ch 2) Trib 1 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 3)
Connector 3 (Aux Ch 3) Trib 4 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line West (SOH Ch 2)
Connector 4 (Aux Ch 4) Line East (SOH Ch 1) only
Connector 5 (Aux Ch 5) Trib 2 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 3)
Connector 6 (Aux Ch 6) Trib 3 (SOH Ch 1) If STM–1, switchable to Line East (SOH Ch 2)

Marconi (Page 362) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

PL1–6 Pinouts West

PL1(AUX Ch 1)

RXD+ 1 Trib 1 or West 3

6 RXC– PL2(AUX Ch 2)
RXD– 2 Trib 4 or West 2
7 TXC+ PL3(AUX Ch 3)
TXD+ 3
8 TXC– East
PL4(AUX Ch 4)
TXD– 4
9 O/C Trib 2 or East 3
PL5(AUX Ch 5)
RXC+ 5
Trib 3 or East 2
PL6(AUX Ch 6)
CARD FACIA

Figure 24.14 On–card Connectors for 64kbit/s Access

24.10.4 Engineering Order Wire (EOW) Card

The Engineers Order Wire Cards can be fitted in the Auxiliary slots Aux1 or Aux2
to provides access to the E1 byte within the section overhead bytes.

24.10.5 EOW Ring Slave

• 1HAT60576DAK
This card provides EOW on Line East A, West A and STM–1 Trib 1 only.
(SMA–1/4(4+4), SMA–1/4(8)).

It is possible to use access to the E1 byte without using the on board EOW
features. This is done via an analogue 4–wire port (AUX 1 on Aux LTU). In this
case external EOW equipment is used. This must not use DTMF signals A, B, C
or D. The card also provides two 64kbit/s V11 interfaces for customer use (AUX 3
on Aux LTU), these provide access to the SOH F1 byte on Line East A and West
A.

Note: This card can be configured by an on board link, for use as a RING MASTER in a Ring
that does not contain an SLA (Siemens Line Equipment).

24.10.6 EOW Fixed Ringmaster

• 1HAT60576EAG
SMA–1/4(4+4), SMA–1/4(8).

Whilst similar to the EOW Ring Slave, Analogue Transmission is to the Line West
only. Where a ring includes SLAs, one of these cards is instead of the previous
card set to MASTER (using a link), ring security will be lost.

24.10.7 LEDs
• Internal (INT) LED:
Indicates the presence of a faulty slide–in unit within the SMA.
• External (EXT) LED:
Indicates that external defects are being detected on customer or comms
traffic.

Marconi (Page 363) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

• Abnormal (ABN) LED:

Indicates that an off–normal condition exists within the SMA.
• Indicative (IND) LED:
When lit this LED indicates the receipt of a path maintenance signal such as
AIS or RDI.

24.11 TEST BUS/MONITOR POINTS

24.11.1 PSU
• Connector:
ITT–Cannon (block type) 6–pin
• Location:
Mounted through the front plate of the PSU’s
• Use:
Monitor points for the PSU derived supplies
• Electrical spec:
Short circuit limit protected to 5mA max.
• Protocol:
0v/+5v, 0v/–5v, 0v/+12v DC

24.11.2 34/45/140MBit/s
• Connector:
1 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on appropriate 34/45/140Mbit/s/STM–1 Un–Balanced LTUs.
Also mounted on front of 140Mbit/s/STM–1 Tributary cards.
• Use:
Output signal monitor point.
• Electrical spec:
Attenuated representation of the signal at the Tributary traffic port
• Protocol:
HDB3 – 34Mbit/s
B3ZS – 45Mbit/s
CMI – 140Mbit/s

24.11.3 Conventional STM–1 Optical

• Connector:
2 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on the STM–1 Optical card
• Use:
Output signal and clock monitor points.
• Electrical spec:
Electrical representation of the signal at the traffic port

Marconi (Page 364) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

• Protocol:
ECL Logic Levels, ITU–T G707, G957–8 .

24.11.4 Dual STM–1 Optical

• No monitor point are available on the front plate of this card

24.11.5 Conventional STM–1 Electrical

• Connector:
1 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on the STM–1 Electrical card
Also mounted on associated 140/155Mbit/s unbalanced LTU module.
• Use:
Output signal monitor point.
• Electrical spec:
Attenuated representation of the signal at the traffic port
• Protocol:
CMI, ITU–T G707

24.11.6 Dual STM–1 Electrical

• Connector:
2 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial.
• Location:
Front mounted on the Dual STM–1 Electrical card.
Also mounted on associated 140Mbit/s unbalanced LTU module
• Use:
Output signal monitor points.
• Electrical spec:
Attenuated representation of the signal at the traffic port
• Protocol:
CMI, ITU–T G707

24.11.7 2MBIT/S Testbus LTU

• Connector:
1 x Siemens 1.0/2.3 co–axial and
1 x 9way D Type plug.
• Location:
Front mounted on 2Mbit/s Testbus LTU
• Use:
To monitor 2Mbit/s traffic between the Tributary card and traffic LTU
• Electrical spec:
75 ohms un–balanced to ITU–T G703 and120 ohms
balanced to ITU–T G703, ETS300 166.
• Protocol:
HDB3

Marconi (Page 365) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

24.12 RECOMMENDED CABLING

CABLE:
POWER–1
CODE: 1WAD 20122 AAE
TYPE: Copper Braid Screened Cable, 3way CY Type (1.5mm2),
2off per PLTU
USE: Power Wiring to Subrack for all Dual Feed PLTUs
Note: A minimum length of 2 metres should be used with an earth connection, via the
green/yellow wire, at both ends of the cable. Cable screen tails have cream sleeving to
distinguish them from equipment earthing.

KOP: 1MBB60853AAN

CABLE:
POWER–2
CODE: 1WAD 20122 ABW
TYPE: Copper Braid Screened Cable, 7way CY Type (1.5mm2)
1off per PLTU
USE: Power Wiring to Subrack for Triple Feed PLTUs
Note: A minimum length of 2 metres should be used with an earth connection, via the
green/yellow wire, at both ends of the cable. Cable screen tails have cream sleeving to
distinguish them from equipment earthing.

KOP: 1MBB60832AAF

CABLE:
Power – SMA–1/4c
CODE: Leoni V45482–D87–G6 (1300999–0014/AN00013171)
TYPE: Copper Braid Screened Cable, 4 core
USE: Power Wiring to Subrack for Dual Feed PLTUs (SMA–1/4c)
KOP: 1MBB61247AAN

CABLE:
Power – SMA–1/4CP
USE: Power Wiring for SMA–1/4CP
KOP: 1MBB61111AAX

CABLE:
HFE 2290 Cable 1 or Siemens Cable V45466–D13–C15 or
V23614–A102–A76
CODE: 1WAE 20028 AAX
TYPE: 75 Ohm Double Screened co–ax
USE :Unbalanced connections to all Tributary and Sync ports, however the
attenuation characteristics must be checked before use.
Note: Max dist. 2M – 330m, 34M – 170m, 45M – 150m, 140M – 85m, STM–1 – 80m (Typical
cable may support 5–10% extra length but is not guaranteed)

Marconi (Page 366) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

KOP: 1MBB60891AAU/ABM/ACE, 1MBB61107AAV, 1MBB60892AAW

CABLE:
BT 3002 Cable
CODE: 1WAE 20002 AAE
TYPE: 75 Ohm Double Screened co–ax to CW1383A
USE :Unbalanced connections to Tributary and Sync ports
Note: Signals up to 2Mbit/s, short lengths may be acceptable above 2Mbit/s however the
attenuation characteristics must be checked before use and no EMC compliance above
2Mbits is offered by Marconi Communications (for BT)

KOP: 1MBB60913AAJ/BAF/ABB/BBX, 1MBB61107ABN/BBK, 1MBB61120AAL

CABLE:
BT 2003 Cable
CODE: 1WAE 00005 AAW
TYPE: 75 Ohm Double Screened co–ax (low loss)
USE :Unbalanced connections to Line and Tributary ports
Note: Signals above 2Mbit/s (for BT)

KOP: 1MBB60912AAG/BAD

CABLE:
ST212 Cable
CODE: 1WAE 20031 AAX
TYPE: 75 Ohm Double Screened co–ax
USE :Unbalanced connections to Tributary and Sync ports
Note: Signals up to 2Mbit/s (for Italtel)

KOP: 1MBB60861AAY, 1MBB60850AAG, 1MBB60982AAN

CABLE:
ST214 Cable
CODE: 1WAE 20030 AAV
TYPE: 75 Ohm Double Screened co–ax (low loss)
USE :Unbalanced connections to Tributary/Line ports
Note: Signals above 2Mbit/s (for Italtel)

KOP: 1MBB6060851AAJ, 1MBB60852AAL

CABLE:
HFE 2292 Cable
CODE: 1WAD 20116 AAX
TYPE: Screened Pair Cable (8 pair)
USE: Connections to balanced Tributary ports
Note: 120 Ohm balanced signals up to 2Mbit/s

Marconi (Page 367) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 24: SLIDE–IN CARD UNITS

KOP: 1MBB60895AAD, 1MBB60894AAB

CABLE:
Belden 9806 cable
CODE: 1WAD 20062 AAJ
TYPE: Screened Pair Cable (4 pair)
USE :Connections to balanced Tributary, Sync, Auxiliary, Alarm and
Network Management ports
Note: 100–120 Ohm balanced signals up to 2Mbit/s

KOP: 1MBB60769AAK, 1MBB60982AAN, 1MBB60893AAY/ABR,

1MBB61082AAA

CABLE:
Ribbon (10 way)
CODE: 1WAC 20002 ADH
TYPE: Ribbon Cable 28 AWG
USE: Connection to Rack Alarm
KOP: 1MBB60894AAB/ABT

CABLE:
LCT Cable Assembly
CODE: 1HAU61913AAF
TYPE: Belden 9502 or equivalent, 8 way
USE: Local Terminal Interface for SMA–1/4CP and SMA–1/4c

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 368) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

CHAPTER 25:
OPTICAL MODULES

25.1 HARDWARE CODES

CAUTION
The Optical Safety rules and Safe Working Practices outlined in the Safety
Notices in the preliminary pages of this manual, and relevant card replacement details in
the LCT Operator Manual must be read and understood before Optical Modules are
removed from equipment or disconnected.

The complete range of variants of the optical modules is given in the tables below.
The optical modules in section 25.1.3 are for use with the Core card or Dual
STM–1 Card (by plugging on to them) in association with SMA1/4c and SMA1/4.

The optical modules in section 25.1.1are for use with SMA1/4CP by fitting on to
the 4x2 or 16x2 versions of SMA1/4CP.

The optical module provides one optical interface for the SMA1/4c/uc and SMA1/4
Core ADM cards. Up to two cards can be plugged on to each Core ADM card. The
optical interface operates at 155Mb/s (STM–1) or 622Mb/s (STM–4).

The optical module provides one optical interface for SMA1/4CP. Up to two cards
can be fitted on to each SMA1/4CP. The optical interface operates at 155Mb/s
(STM–1) or 622Mb/s (STM–4).

25.1.1 SMA1/4CP

The following optical module mounting kit of parts applies to the SMA1/4CP tables
below: 1MBB61185AAN

Table 25.1: STM–1 Dual Fibre Working Optical

Modules for SMA–1/4CP
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SA66AA 01 FC/PC STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874BBY
SA66AA 01 SC STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874BCR
SA66AB 01 DIN STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874BDJ
SA66AC 01 FC/PC STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874BBY
SA66AC 01 SC STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874BCR
SA66AD 01 DIN STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874BDJ
SA66AE 01 FC/PC STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874BBY
SA66AE 01 SC STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874BCR
SA66AF 01 DIN STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874BDJ

Marconi (Page 369) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

Table 25.2: STM–1 Single Fibre Working

Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SA66AG 01 FC/PC STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874BBY
SA66AG 01 SC STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874BCR
SA66AG 01 DIN STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874BDJ
SA66AJ 01 FC/PC STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874BBY
SA66AJ 01 SC STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874BCR
SA66AJ 01 DIN STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874BDJ

Table 25.3: STM–4 Dual Fibre Working Optical

Modules for SMA–1/4CP
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SA67AA 01 FC/PC STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908BBH
SA67AA 01 SC STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908BCA
SA67AB 01 DIN STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908BDS
SA67AC 01 FC/PC STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908BBH
SA67AC 01 SC STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908BCA
SA67AD 01 DIN STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908BDS
SA67AG 01 FC/PC STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908BBH
SA67AG 01 SC STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908BCA
SA67AH 01 DIN STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908BDS

Table 25.4: STM–4 Single Fibre Working

Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4CP
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SA67AL 01 FC/PC STM–4 1536NM L4.2 1HAT60908BBH
SA67AL 01 SC STM–4 1536NM L4.2 1HAT60908BCA
SA67AL 01 DIN STM–4 1536NM L4.2 1HAT60908BDS
SA67AN 01 FC/PC STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908BBH
SA67AN 01 SC STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908BCA
SA67AN 01 DIN STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908BDS

The following points should be noted with regard to SMA1/4CP:

• One or two modules can be fitted to each 4x2 or 16x2 base unit – using the
optical module mounting kit of parts, 1MBB61185AAN.
• If only one module is fitted, then the blank optical module kit of parts needs to
be used. The hardware code for this is 1MBB61186AAQ.
• If only one module is fitted, the optical module can be fitted in either the Line
West (left hand side) position, or the Line East (right hand side) position.
• The non–integrated SFW modules in Table 25.2 and Table 25.4 offer the same
basic functionality as the conventional DFW modules in addition to supporting
co–directional and contra–directional single fibre working(SFW). When
co–directional or contra–directional SFW (1310nm/1550nm) is required then
the appropriate conventional DFW and/or SFW variant should be selected and
should be fitted with the appropriate ruggedised coupler (see list of
couplers contained in Table 1 in the chapter on Slide–In Card Units).

Marconi (Page 370) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.1.2 SMA–1/4CP FITTING PROCEDURE

! WARNING
The operator should be aware that when optical module units are fitted and installed an optical
signal may be generated despite the modules being in an unconfigured state.

The procedure for fitting optical modules on to the SMA–1/4CP is illustrated in

Figure 25.1.

[S4]
[S3]

[S1]
[S2]

S1. FIT MODULE BY FIRMLY PRESSING METAL FRONT PANEL

INTO GROOVE IN ENCLOSURE. ENSURE MULTI–PIN CONNECTOR
IS CORRECTLY ENGAGED.
S2. FIT AND TIGHTEN 3 SCREWS.
S3. FIT COVER AND FIRMLY PRESS FRONT EDGE GROOVE
TO ENGAGE ONTO METAL FRONT PANEL OF MODULE.
S4. FIT AND TIGHTEN 5 SCREWS.

Figure 25.1 SMA–1/4CP Optical Module Fitting Procedure

Marconi (Page 371) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.1.3 SMA1/4c, SMA1/4uc, SMA1/4(4+4) and SMA1/4(8)

Table 25.5: STM–1 Dual Fibre Working Optical
Modules for SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SP66AA 01 FC/PC STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874ABC
SP66AA 01 SC STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874ACU
SP66AB 01 DIN STM–1 1300NM S1.1 1HAT60874ADM
SP66AC 01 FC/PC STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874ABC
SP66AC 01 SC STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874ACU
SP66AD 01 DIN STM–1 1300NM L1.1 1HAT60874ADM
SP66AE 01 FC/PC STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874ABC
SP66AE 01 SC STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874ACU
SP66AF 01 DIN STM–1 1550NM L1.2 1HAT60874ADM

Table 25.6: STM–1 Single Fibre Working

Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c, /uc and
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SP66AG 01 FC/PC STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874ABC
SP66AG 01 SC STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874ACU
SP66AG 01 DIN STM–1 1536NM L1.2 1HAT60874ADM
SP66AJ 01 FC/PC STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874ABC
SP66AJ 01 SC STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874ACU
SP66AJ 01 DIN STM–1 1554NM L1.2 1HAT60874ADM

Table 25.7: STM–4 Dual Fibre Working Optical

Modules for SMA–1/4c, /uc and SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SP67AA 01 FC/PC STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908ABL
SP67AA 01 SC STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908ACD
SP67AB 01 DIN STM–4 1300NM S4.1 1HAT60908ADV
SP67AC 01 FC/PC STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908ABL
SP67AC 01 SC STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908ACD
SP67AD 01 DIN STM–4 1300NM L4.1 1HAT60908ADV
SP67AG 01 FC/PC STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908ABL
SP67AG 01 SC STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908ACD
SP67AH 01 DIN STM–4 1550NM L4.2 1HAT60908ADV

Table 25.8: STM–4 Single Fibre Working

Non–Integrated Optical Modules for SMA–1/4c, /uc and
SMA–1/4(4+4)(8)
SE Code Rev Description Hardware Code
SP67AL 01 FC/PC STM–4 1536NM L4.2 1HAT60908ABL
SP67AL 01 SC STM–4 1536NML4.2 1HAT60908ACD
SP67AL 01 DIN STM–4 1536NM L4.2 1HAT60874ADV
SP67AN 01 FC/PC STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908ABL
SP67AN 01 SC STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908ACD
SP67AN 01 DIN STM–4 1554NM L4.2 1HAT60908ADV

Marconi (Page 372) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

The following points should be noted with regard to SMA1/4c/uc, SMA1/4(4+4) and
SMA1/4(8):

• One or two modules can be fitted to each ADM Core Card unit or Dual STM–1
Card – using the appropriate interconnector from the mounting kit of parts,
1MBB61222AAW.
• If only one module is fitted, then the blank optical module kit of parts needs to
be used. The hardware code for this is 1MBB61222ABP.
• If only one optical module is to be used on a unit, it must be fitted in the Line
East (lower) position. If two modules are to be used on a unit, then one must be
fitted in the Line East (lower) position first.
• The non–integrated SFW modules in Table 25.6 and Table 25.8 offer the same
basic functionality as the conventional DFW modules in addition to supporting
co–directional and contra–directional single fibre working(SFW). When
co–directional or contra–directional SFW (1310nm/1550nm) is required then
the appropriate conventional DFW and/or SFW variant should be selected and
should be fitted with the appropriate ruggedised coupler (see list of
couplers contained in Table 1 in the chapter on Slide–In Card Units).

Marconi (Page 373) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.1.4 PROCEDURE FOR FITTING OPTICAL MODULES TO

CORE CARD AND DUAL STM–1 OPTICAL CARD

! WARNING
The operator should be aware that when optical module units are fitted and installed an optical
signal may be generated despite the modules being in an unconfigured state.

Figure 25.2 Procedure for Fitting Optical Modules

to Core Card and Dual STM–1 Optical Card
Screws

Optical Modules

Interconnectors

Blanking Card
1. Fit interconnector(s) to motherboard.
2. Offer up optical module(s) ensuring interconnector pegs are aligned with fixing holes in
module.
3. Secure firmly into place
4. Fix with screws supplied.
5. If only one module is fitted, it must be fitted in the Line East (lower) position.
6. If only one module is fitted, fit blanking plate in Line West (upper) position.
Note: The interconnector for fitting modules to the Core Card is 22mm.
The interconnector for fitting modules to the Dual STM–1 Card is
12mm. Both interconnectors are included in KOP 1MBB61222AAW.

Marconi (Page 374) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A general block diagram for the optical module is given in the diagram below.

The optical module provides the following functionality based on ITU and ETSI
generic functional requirements:

• Transmit source and receive optical termination for a single 155Mb/s (STM–1)
SDH traffic stream.
• Transmit source and receive optical termination for a single 622Mb/s (STM–4)
SDH traffic stream.
• Provide ability for Automatic laser shutdown and laser parameter monitoring.
• Ability to implement Diagnostic Loopback functions.
• Provide Alarm and performance processing functions.

Transimpedance
Limiting
Pin Diode Amplifier
Amplifier
(TIA)

Loopbacks
+5V to +12V DC/
DC Power

Connector
Supply
Data
RX Power LevelLogarithmic Clock
Amplifier FP
Laser Diode Current MUX
PIC SPI Interface OOF
Monitor Diode Curent ADC
Data
DEMUX Clock

Diffirential Laser Output High

Amplifiers Laser Output Low
Bias Out Of Limits

Laser Set–Up
EEPROM I2C BUS
POTS
ALS
Laser
Laser Driver

Figure 25.3 Optical Module Block Dia-

gram

25.3 STM–1 OPTICAL INTERFACE

The optical Transmit and Receive interfaces conform with or exceed the ITU
requirements for STM–1 SDH interfaces. The interfaces are accessed via
bulkhead optical connectors mounted on the front panel of the module.

The variant of the Optical Module determines the specification of the optical
interface. Refer to Table 1 for variant codes.

Marconi (Page 375) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.4 STM–1 TRANSMIT WAVELENGTH

Three types of lasers will be used on the variants of the optical modules. The
operating wavelengths of these is given in the table below:

Table 25.9: Operating Wavelengths

Variant Type Operating Wavelength (nm)
S1.1 1293–1334/1274–1356 MLM
L1.1 1300–1325/1296–1330 MLM, 1280–1335 SLM
L1.2 1480–1580 SLM

25.5 STM–4 OPTICAL INTERFACE

The Optical Transmit and Receive Interfaces conform with or exceed the ITU
requirements for STM–4 SDH interfaces. The interfaces are accessed via
bulkhead optical connectors mounted on the front panel of the unit.

The particular variant of the optical daughter card determines the specification of
the optical interface. Refer to Table 1 above for variant codes.

25.6 STM–4 TRANSMIT WAVELENGTH

Three types of lasers are used on the variants of the optical modules. The
operating wavelength of these is given in the table below:

Table 25.10: Operating Wavelengths

Variant Type Operating Wavelength (nm)
S4.1 1293–1334/1274–1356 MLM
L4.1 1300–1325/1296–1330 MLM, 1280–1335 SLM
L4.2 1480–1580 SLM

25.7 OPTICAL CONNECTORS

The optical connectors are situated on the front of the module. A number of
different types are supported. See Table 1 for details.

The transmit and receive optical interfaces correspond to reference points ”S” and
”R” as defined in ITU–T G.957. The optical receiver has a multimode fibre ”pigtail”
to minimise connector loss.

25.8 STM–N OPTICAL INPUT

The optical module’s STM–n optical input is via a connector mounted on the front
of the card. The connector types are defined by the variant codes in Table 1.

Marconi (Page 376) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.9 OPTICAL TRANSMIT INTERFACE

This function performs electrical to optical conversion. The optical control circuitry
also monitors for laser failure conditions. The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
signal Is used to enable the laser restart mechanism.

25.9.1 General Description

The transmit interface generates optical data,from electrical data. The interface
can operate over either a dual fibre line or a bi–directional single fibre line.

The transmitter generates ”Optical Output Low” (”Laser Degrade”), ”Optical Output
High/Shutdown” and “Bias Out of Limits” alarms to indicate the condition of the
Laser output.

25.9.2 Laser Alarms

A number of alarm outputs report the current state of the optical transmitter. The
power alarms are triggered when the current through the rear facet and therefore
the laser output exceeds certain limits.

25.10 LOOPBACKS

25.10.1 Inward Mux Loopback

It is possible to loop back the transmitted STM–n signal, before electrical to optical
conversion, into the STM–n receive circuitry. During this loop back the laser will
be turned off because detection of unsafe operation is not possible.

25.10.2 Outward Line Loopback

It is possible to loop back the received STM–4 signal, after optical to electrical
conversion, to the outgoing STM–n signal (to the line). The received data will still
be passed to the downstream circuitry for processing.

25.11 DATA PATHS

On the receive side the STM–n optical signal is converted to an electrical form by
a PIN diode. This is then amplified via an amplifier and passed to an S3037 ASIC.
This chip demultiplexes down the serial data to an 8–bit data stream at
77.76Mbit/s for STM–4 or 19.44Mbit/s for STM–1. This is then passed on to the
SCP ASIC that performs the majority of the traffic processing before broadcasting
the data.

In the transmit direction the SCP ASIC passes 8–bit data, after processing, to the
S3037. The 8–bit data is multiplexed up to the line rate. This then passes to a
laser driver that performs laser bias and modulation control.

Marconi (Page 377) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.12 POWER SUPPLIES

25.12.1 Input Voltages

The main power will originate from the SMA1/4CP, SMA1/4c/uc or SMA1/4 ADM main
card power supplies shown below:

• 5.1 volts
• 3.3 volts

25.13 RELIABILITY

25.13.1 Service Life

The service life of the equipment is greater than 15 years.

25.13.2 Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

Experience of the actual real life failure rate, as opposed to the theoretical
calculated figure, for past designs has led to an MTBF figure of 51 years.

25.14 OPTICAL SAFETY

The optical modules meet class 1 requirements. Refer to the Safety Notices
section in the preliminary pages of this manual.

A laser warning label is mounted on the front facia of the unit.

In addition to the Automatic Laser Shutdown system, a Marconi proprietary control

method is employed to ensure that the laser shuts down when fibre breaks occur
in a single fibre bi–directional data system.

25.15 HOT SURFACES

Under normal operating conditions the surfaces of the board can become hot.
Therefore, care must be exercised when handling the board.

25.16 ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE

Care must be exercised and correct anti–static handling procedures observed

when the module is removed from a card to avoid damage to sensitive devices on
the module.

A static damage warning label is mounted on the front facia of the module.

Marconi (Page 378) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

25.17 EQUIPMENT PRACTICE

The components are mounted on both sides of 220mm deep x 233mm high PCB.

The module is designed to fit on to an SMA1/4CP, SMA1/4c/uc and SMA1/4 ADM

card. The maximum height of components is less than 15mm. The module is fitted
with 1.27mm pitch type connectors to interface to the main ADM cards.

The module is fitted with a front panel, which in conjunction with the equipment
shelf and adjacent cards provides an electromagnetic screen. On this front–panel
is a label that identifies the unit variant and front panel features.

The optical Interface is accessed via front panel connectors, mounted vertically. A
removable cover allows access to the rear of the optical connectors to allow
cleaning access for the optical interfaces.

25.18 MODULE WEIGHT

The approximate weight of a fully assembled optical module is 500g.

Marconi (Page 379) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 25: OPTICAL MODULES

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 380) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 26:
LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

26.1 TRAFFIC CARD LINK/SWITCH SETTINGS

The following paragraphs give the link settings options for line and trib traffic cards
for Conventional, TCM and Single Fibre Working variants.

Note: Owing to the high concentration of components on circuit boards, the printing of
component identity on the boards may be omitted.
In all cases however, pin 1 should be identified by an adjacent white spot.

26.2 CORE CARD (1HAT60877AAR)

ALS is enabled as standard on the Core Card. If there is a requirement to disable

ALS, the procedure for configuring links (on jumper block PL5) to achieve this is
laid out and illustrated in section 24.8.7. Core Card link settings (for jumper block
PL5) are summarised in Table 26.1.

Table 26.1: Core Card Link Settings (Jumper Block PL5)

Link Setting Function
Pins 1,2 Not Fitted ALS enabled
Pins 1,2 Fitted ALS disabled
Pins 5,6 Not Fitted Bi–directional Line East disabled
Pins 5,6 Fitted Bi–directional Line East enabled
Pins 7,8 Not Fitted Bi–directional Line West disabled
Pins 7,8 Fitted Bi–directional Line West enabled

The only other links which may need to be configured on the Core Card are on
Jumper Block PL3 (NB Not Jumper Block PL5). These link settings are shown in
Table 26.2.

Table 26.2: Core Card Link Settings (Jumper Block PL3)

Link Setting Function
Pins 1,2 Not Fitted 2Mbit/s Card
Pins 1,2 Fitted 1.5Mbit/s Card

26.3 SMA–1/4CP

The locattion and purpose of link settings for the SMA–1/4CP are laid out and
illustrated in section 24.8.8. These link settings are summarised in Table 26.3.

Marconi (Page 381) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Table 26.3: SMA–1/4CP Link Settings

Link Setting Function
Pins 1,2 Not Fitted ALS enabled
Pins 1,2 Fitted ALS disabled
Pins 5,6 Not Fitted Bi–directional Line East disabled
Pins 5,6 Fitted Bi–directional Line East enabled
Pins 7,8 Not Fitted Bi–directional Line West disabled
Pins 7,8 Fitted Bi–directional Line West enabled

26.4 CONVENTIONAL CARDS

26.4.1 1.5/2Mbit/s (16x2) Tributary Card – 1HAT60736 AAW

Table 26.4: 16 x 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary Card Link Settings

User Links
Link Default Setting Function
LK3 (1–4) Not fitted
2Mbit/s card working
LK4 (1–4) 1–2 and 3–4 (using LK6 and LK7 (see note))
or
LK3 (1–4) 1–2 and 3–4 (using LK6 and LK7(see note))
1.5Mbit/s card working
LK4 (1–4) Not fitted
Factory Link/Pins
Link Default Setting Function
LK1 (1–2) Not fitted Watchdog (1–2 disabled)
LK2 (1–2) Not fitted Test Prog. (1–2 enabled)
LK5 (1–2) Not fitted Debug link
NOTE: Links 6 and 7 are used for “parking”

26.4.2 1.5/2Mbit/s (32x2) Tributary Card – 1HAT60707 AAD

Table 26.5: 32 x 1.5/2Mbit/s Tributary card link settings

User Links
Link Default Setting Function
LK3 (1–4) Not fitted
2Mbit/s card working
LK4 (1–4) 1–2 and 3–4 (using LK6 and LK7(see note))
or
LK3 (1–4) 1–2 and 3–4 (using LK6 and LK7(see note))
1.5Mbit/s card working
LK4 (1–4) Not fitted
Factory Link/Pins
Link Default Setting Function
LK1 (1–2) Not fitted Watchdog (1–2 disabled)
LK2 (1–2) Not fitted Test Prog. (1–2 enabled)
LK5 (1–2) Not fitted Debug link
NOTE Links 6 and 7 are used for “parking”

Marconi (Page 382) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

26.4.3 34Mbit/s Transmux Card – 1HAT60979AAC

• There are no user link settings on the above card.

Table 26.6: 34Mbit/s Transmux card link settings

Link/Pins Position Use of Factory Test Links
LK1 (1–2) Not fitted (enabled) Disable Watchdog
LK2 (1–3) Not fitted (disabled) Enable test monitor program (1–2), 2–3 (park)
LK3 (1–2) Not fitted (enabled) Inventory write protection enable
PL1 and PL2 Not fitted Factory test access only

26.4.4 34/45Mbit/s Tributary Cards – 1HAT60622BAN/

1HAT60623BAQ
• There are no user link settings on the above card.

Table 26.7: 34M/45bit/s Tributary card link settings

Link/Pins Default Position Use of Factory Test Links
FTP (A1–A2) Not fitted Flash (First time program)
TEST A3–A4 Not fitted Production test link
B1–B2 (If fitted) Not fitted µC Watchdog disable
Tags 1 to 7 Not fitted Single pin tags for factory use only

26.4.5 140Mbit/s Tributary Cards – (1HAT60624BFE)

Table 26.8: 140Mbit/s Tributary card link settings

User Links
Link between: Default Setting Function
LK2 (A1–A2) Fitted Front Plate/LTU controlled automatically
LK2 (A2–A3) Not fitted CMI interface = Front Plate (forced)
LK2 (A2–A4) Not fitted CMI interface = LTU (forced)
Loopback (A5–A6) Not fitted Local Loopback
FERF Enable (A11–A12) Not fitted FERF enabled for o/p fail
Factory Test Links
Link between: Default Setting Function
LK1 (A13–A14) Fitted (enabled) Watchdog
FTP (A15–A16) Not fitted Flash (First Time Program)
TEST (A16–A17) Not fitted Factory test access only
Note: Maximum cable span is 120m (2003) or 75m (3002) for a 140Mbit/s Tributary card.

Marconi (Page 383) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

26.4.6 VC–AM Card – 1HAT60917AAG

Note: The above Link card has no User Links and all Factory Links are left open circuit.

Table 26.9: VC–AM Card Link Settings

Link/Pins Default Settings Use of factory test links
LK1 Not fitted Boot source select
H1(1–2) Not fitted Factory test only
H1(3–4 Not fitted Factory test only
H1(5–6) Not fitted Factory test only
H1(7–8) Not fitted Factory test only
H1(9–10) Not fitted Factory test only
H2(1–2) Not fitted Factory test only
H2(3–4 Not fitted Factory test only
H2(5–6) Not fitted Factory test only
H2(7–8) Not fitted Factory test only
H2(9–10) Not fitted Factory test only – Flash download
H2(11–12) Not fitted Factory test only – Watchdog disable
DB1 Not fitted Factory test only
DB2 Not fitted Factory test only
TAG43,44 Not fitted Factory test only – 43(0V), 44(+5V)
Other Tps Not fitted Factory test only

26.5 POWER SUPPLY UNITS

26.5.1 Power Supply 1HAK60550 BAC/BCM

Table 26.10: Power Supply Unit/s Link Settings

Switch Default Position Use
Low input voltage inhibit enabled (factory set) or
SW1A Switch to back of unit Switch to front of unit (low input voltage inhibit disabled)

26.5.2 Power Supply 1HAK60669 AAW

Table 26.11: Power Supply Unit/s Link Settings

Switch Default Position Use
Low input voltage inhibit enabled (factory set) or
SW2 Switch to back of unit Switch to front of unit (low input voltage inhibit disabled)

26.5.3 EOW Card DIL Switches and Links

Switch settings are determined by the individual card telephone number (see
Figure 26.1, also Section 2: Chapter 4 for a description of EOW configuration and
operation).

The link pins associated with setting up master or slave operation, are a set of
three pins located above the DIP switch, ignore any other links, as these are
factory set.

Marconi (Page 384) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

on

LSB MSB

off

set switches for required 2 digit BCD code

representing card telephone number
(Example illustrates number 45.)
Card edge
connectors

ËËË
ËËË

a b c
link pins a and b for Slave operation or b and c for Master operation.

Figure 26.1 EOW Card Switches and Links

26.5.4 Auxiliary Card (V ‘0’) 9.6kbit/s 1HAT60004 AAD

26.5.4.1 Link Settings

Table 26.12: 9.6kbit/s Auxiliary Card (Version 0.0) Link Settings
Link Default Setting FunctionPosition
LK1 (1–3) 2–3 Loopback (1–2 enabled)
LK2 (1–3) 2–3 Clock status data (1–2 DTMX)
LK3 (1–3) 2–3 Clock changeover (1–2 DTMX)
LK4 (1–3) 2–3 Factory use (1–2 DTMX)
LK5 (1–3) 2–3 Factory use (1–2 unused)

26.5.5 Auxiliary Card (V 0.1) 64kbit/s 1HAT60647 ABA

26.5.5.1 DIL Switch Settings

Async and sync channels are configured separately. It is possible to have any
combination of configurations. Default configurations will be loaded if DIL switches
SW2–7, SW3–7, SW2–8 and SW3–8 are off. The following table shows the three
configurations.

Marconi (Page 385) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Table 26.13: Auxiliary Card (Version 0.1) Channel Configurations

Config 1 (Default) Config 2 Config 3
Line East 1 1 and 2 1, 2 and 3
Line West 1 1 and 2 1, 2 and 3
Tributary 1 1 1 –
Tributary 2 1 1 –
Tributary 3 1 – –
Tributary 4 1 – –

At power up the card is configured by loading data from the on–card EPROM. This
configuration is selected by setting three DIL switches on the card according to the
following table. For each switch, segments 1 to 6 are concerned with routeing the
OH–ASIC inputs, while segments 7 and 8 configure the unit for sync/async
operation and loopback.

Note: Similarly numbered segments (from segment 1 to segment 6) of each switch combine
to give octal values of 0 to 7.

26.5.5.2 DIL Switch Functions

Table 26.14 lists all the available switch options for SW1, SW2 and SW3.
Figure 26.2 shows one particular example of the switch settings.

Table 26.14: DIL Switch Functions

Switch – Segment Bit Function
SW1–1 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 2. All On – Invalid.
SW2–1 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 2 and re–connects the
SW3–1 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by-pass con-
nection.
SW1–2 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 5. All On – Invalid.
SW2–2 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 5 and re–connects the
SW3–2 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by-pass con-
nection.
SW1–3 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 6. All On – Invalid.
SW2–3 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 6 and re–connects the
SW3–3 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by-pass con-
nection.
SW1–4 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 3. All On – Invalid.
SW2–4 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 3 and re–connects the
SW3–4 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by–pass con-
nection.
SW1–5 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 4. All On – Invalid.
SW2–5 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 4 and re–connects the
SW3–5 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by–pass con-
nection.
SW1–6 MSB All Off – 64kbit/s to connector 1. All On – Invalid.
SW2–6 Octal value 1 to 6 – Inhibits connector 1 and re–connects the
SW3–6 LSB input internally to provide a one–way 64kbit/s OH by–pass con-
nection.
The invalid code simulates a valid code and must not be used.
SW1–7 Off – Normal.

Marconi (Page 386) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Table 26.14:(Cont)DIL Switch Functions

Switch – Segment Bit Function
SW1–8 Off – Normal. On – OH bus loopback.
NOTE: Loopback is for out–of–service testing only. It
MUST NOT BE USED on a live system.
SW2–7 MSB Both On (Binary 11) – No asynchronous configuration.
SW3–7 LSB 00 – Asynchronous channel configuration 1.
01 – Asynchronous channel configuration 2.
10 – Asynchronous channel configuration 3.
See NO TAG for details.
SW2–8 MSB Both On (Binary 11) – No synchronous configuration.
SW3–8 LSB 00 – Synchronous channel configuration 1.
01 – Synchronous channel configuration 2.
10 – Synchronous channel configuration 3.
See NO TAG for details.
The default setting for all the switches is Off.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON (1)
SW1
OFF (0)

Figure 26.2 Example of DIL Switch Settings

In Figure 26.2 the switches are set to give the following configuration:

a) In column 7 all switches are Off, which is the normal asynchronous channel
configuration 1 (one OH byte per OH bus).

b) In column 8 switch SW3 is On, giving the second synchronous channel

configuration (two OH bytes each for Line East and Line West and one each for
tribs 1 and 2).

c) Columns 5 and 6 are set to 110 and 101 respectively to pass the first Line OH byte
directly between East and West.

d) Columns 1 and 4 are set to 100 and 001 respectively to pass the second Line OH
byte directly to trib 1 and vice versa.

e) Only the trib 2 and second Line East OH bytes, set to 000 in columns 2 and 3
respectively, appear on the front panel connectors.

Note: Since SW1–7 and SW1–8 are both Off, the loopback is not selected.

An OH by–pass should normally be bidirectional. This is provided by a pair of

by–pass settings, see following table.

Marconi (Page 387) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Value By–pass Source

1 West channel 3 or Trib 1
2 East channel 3 or Trib 2
3 East channel 2 or Trib 3
4 West channel 2 or Trib 4
5 East channel 1
6 West channel 1

26.6 ENGINEERS ORDER WIRE (EOW)

Further details of EOW card link settings can be found in paragraph 26.5.3 and in
the chapter on EOW.

26.7 TCM TRAFFIC CARDS

26.7.1 STM–1 Optical Mux Card (TCM) – (1HAT60791***)

Table 26.15: STM–1 (TCM) Optical Card Link Settings

Link Default Function
Setting
LK11 1–2 Clock: data phase at front panel monitor points.
1–2: clock falling edge in middle of data.
3–4: clock rising edge in middle of data.
LK14 (1–2) Disable single fibre bi–directional operation when ASL
enabled and link fitted.
LK14 (3–4) Enable LOF term in dLOS equation if fitted.
LK15 (3–4) 3–4 Disable ALS if fitted.
LK18 (1–2) Force ALS state machine into ALS if fitted.
LK18 (3–4) Disable automatic restart attempts, if fitted.
LK19 (1–2) Prevent the micro from disabling ALS, if fitted.
LK19 (3–4) Disable micro controller restarts, if fitted.
LK20 (1–2) As fitted Tie down EPLD’s CVAR2 input, if fitted.
LK20 (3–4) As fitted Tie down EPLD’s CVAR1 input, if fitted.
LK1, 2, 6, 7, Not Fitted These links are for factory test only.
10, 15 (1–2),
23

26.7.2 STM–1 Electrical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60803ABT)

Table 26.16: STM–1 (TCM) Electrical Card Link Settings

Link Default Setting Function
LK2 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) EPLD tri–state
LK2(3–4) Not fitted (enabled) Watchdog timer
LK4 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) Channel 1 line loopback
LK4 (3–4) Not fitted None
LK5 (1–2) Fitted (3–4 not fitted) Data select (front panel access)

Marconi (Page 388) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Table 26.16:(Cont)STM–1 (TCM) Electrical Card Link Settings

Link Default Setting Function
LK5 (3–4) Fitted (1–2 not fitted) Data select (LTU access)
LK15(1–2) Not fitted (disabled) First time programming
LK15 (3–4) Not fitted None

26.7.3 STM–1 Dual Electrical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60918AAJ)

Table 26.17: STM–1 (TCM) Dual Electrical Card Link

Settings
Link Default Setting Function
LK2 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) EPLD tri–state
LK2(3–4) Not fitted (enabled) Watchdog timer
LK4 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) Channel 1 line loopback
LK4 (3–4) Not fitted (disabled) Channel 2 line loopback
LK5 (1–2) Fitted (3–4 not fitted) Data select channel 1 (front panel access)
LK5 (3–4) Fitted (1–2 not fitted) Data select channel 1 (LTU access)
LK6 (1–2) Fitted (3–4 not fitted) Data select channel 2 (front panel access)
LK6 (3–4) Fitted (1–2 not fitted) Data select channel 2 (LTU access)
LK15 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) First time programming
LK15 (3–4) Not fitted None

26.7.4 STM–1 Dual Optical Card (TCM) – (1HAT60878***)

Table 26.18: STM–1 (TCM) Dual Optical Card Link Settings

Link Default Setting Function
LK1 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) First time programming
LK3 (1–2) Fitted (disabled) Bi–directional operation (channel 2)
LK3 (3–4) Not fitted (disabled) Enable LOF term in LOS (channel 2)
LK4 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) Laser disable (channel 2)
LK4 (3–4) Fitted (enabled) Automatic laser restart (channel 2)
LK5 (1–2) Fitted (enabled) Disable micro ALS control (channel 2)
LK5 (3–4) Fitted (disabled) Micro controlled restart disable (channel 2)
LK11 (1–2) Fitted Card variant (L1.2 (1550nm) AEM,AFE,AGN)
LK11 (1–2) Not fitted Card variant (L1.1 (1300nm) ABK, ACC, ADU)
LK14 (1–2) Fitted (disabled) Bi–directional operation (channel 1)
LK14 (3–4) Not fitted (disabled) Enable LOF term in LOS (channel 1)
LK15 (1–2) Fitted (disabled) and LK19(1–2) fitted ALS override (channel 2)
LK15 (3–4) Fitted (disabled) and LK5 (1–2) fitted ALS override (channel 1)
LK18 (1–2) Not fitted (disabled) Laser disable (channel 1)
LK18 (3–4) Fitted (enabled) Automatic laser restart (channel 1)
LK19 (1–2) Fitted (enabled) Disable micro ALS control (channel 1)
LK19 (3–4) Fitted (disabled) Micro controlled restart disable (channel 1)

Marconi (Page 389) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

26.7.5 Optical Module (1HAT60874AAK)

Table 26.19: Optical Module Link Functions

Link Function
LK1 (1,3) Laser power monitor (PWR_MON) set–up point
LK1 (2,4) Laser power monitor (PWR_MON) monitor point
LK1 (5,4) Laser driver average optical power monitor point
LK1 (6,4) Laser driver modulation current monitor point
LK1 (5,4) Laser driver bias current monitor point
LK1 (8...10) E2POTI2C Bus

26.8 SMA–1/4C ENHANCED ANCILLARY LTU

(1HAM61039ABY)

Table 26.20: SMA1/4c Enhanced Ancillary LTU Switch

Settings
Switch Default Position Use
1–4 2–3
S100 Closed 2M TEST Output Unbalanced to
Ground
S200 and S400 Open Input not grounded (CLOSED=Input
to Ground)
Closed Input resistance 75ohm
(OPEN=Input High Impedance)
S201 and S401 Open 75ohm signal not connected to out-
put (CLOSED=75ohm signal con-
nected to output)
Closed 120ohm signal connected to output
(OPEN=120ohm signal not con-
nected to output)
S202 and S402 – Not connected
Closed Input resistance 120ohm
(OPEN=Input High Impedance)
S500 Open SYNC out 75ohm with potential
(~1.5V)
Closed SYNC out unbalanced to Ground
S600 – X11/1 not connected
Closed X11/1 at 0V

26.9 SFW VARIANT LINK SETTINGS

Note: These link settings concern the card variants for SFW and have nothing to do with
ALS.

26.9.1 STM–1 Variant Link Settings

Table 26.21: SFW Default Link Settings (STM–1)

Link L1.1 (SFW) L1.2 (RED) L1.2 (BLUE)

Marconi (Page 390) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Variant Connector Variant Connector Variant Connector

APY FC/PC AHU FC/PC ALW FC/PC
ARJ DIN AJM DIN AMP DIN
AQR SC AKE SC ANG SC
LK2 (1–2) 1–2 No Fit No Fit
LK3 (1–2) No Fit 1–2 1–2

26.9.2 STM–4 Variant Link Settings

Table 26.22: SFW Default Link Settings (STM–4)

Link L4.2 (RED) L4.2(BLUE) L4.2 (SFW) L4.2+(RED) L4.2+(BLUE)
ASK FC/PC AVM FC/PC BEX FC/PC AYP FC/PC BBV FC/PC
AUU DIN AXW DIN BFQ DIN BAD DIN BDF DIN
ATC SC AWE SC BGH SC AZQ SC BCN SC
LK 3 3–4 3–4 3–4 No Fit No Fit
(3–4)
LK3 5–6 5–6 5–6 5–6 5–6
(5–6)
LK No Fit No Fit 7–8 No Fit No Fit
3(7–8)

26.10 SFW VARIANT LINK SETTINGS

26.10.1 STM–1 ALS

Table 26.23: Link Settings to Enable/Disable ALS for STM–1

ALS Disabled Uni–Direct ALS Enabled Bi–Direct ALS Enabled
ALS Link Link 13 Fitted(1–2) Link 13 Not Fitted Link 13 Not Fitted
BIDIR Link Link 14 Fitted(1–2) Link 14 Fitted(1–2) Link 14 Not Fitted

26.10.2 STM–4 ALS

Table 26.24: Link Settings to Enable/Disable ALS for STM–4

ALS Disabled Uni–Direct ALS Enabled Bi–Direct ALS Enabled
ALS Link Link 6 Fitted(2–4) Link 6 Not Fitted Link 6 Not Fitted
BIDIR Link Link 6 Fitted(1–3) Link 6 Fitted(1–3) Link 6 Not Fitted

26.10.3 34MBit/s and 45MBit/s Expansion Units

There are two links on each of these units, both associated with the
microcontroller.

Link FLASH_FTP is normally open but when closed enables the FLASH monitor
program within the boot PROM. This allows the FLASH memory device to be
programmed via control bus ‘B’ at 19.2Kbaud/s.

Marconi (Page 391) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 26: LINK AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION

Link TEST is included so that any test routines contained within the unit firmware
(not the boot Prom) may be initiated at power–up. The “TEST” link is normally
open.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 392) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

CHAPTER 27:
POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

27.1 SMA–1/4CP

27.1.1 General Information

The SDH SMA–1/4CP product variants are powered from –48V Nominal.

For applications where battery back–up is not required, an external mains 45W
PSU is supported, capable of powering any of the base unit variants with or
without an Expansion unit. See Figure 27.1.

Note: This is based on a maximum base unit power consumption of 21W and a maximum
expansion module power consumption of 21W (leaving 3W margin).

Battery Back–Up Not Supported

45W
PSU
Mains Brick

Base unit + Expansion Module

Figure 27.1 SMA–1/4CP Powered from External Mains Brick

For applications where battery back–up is required, two options are required
depending on the unit configuration:

• A low cost battery back–up solution for 4x2M SMA–1/4CP with or without the
8x2M expansion module is required. This is achieved by providing an external
‘Battery box’ to support the batteries and their monitoring circuitry.
• The battery box is used in conjunction with the mains external brick, whereby
both power feeds are utilised on the SMA–1/4CP. See Figure 27.2.

Marconi (Page 393) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Note: The battery box solution may also be used for the 16x2M base unit
with/without Passive 2M expansion module or the 8x2M + 34M base unit only and
shall support a standby time similar to the 4x2M with the Passive2M expansion
module (approximately 3hrs minimum).

The mains brick and the battery box are upgraded by a ‘Power Module’ for
applications where battery back–up is required when higher power expansion
modules (i.e. ATX, 16x2M) are supported or when a minimum standby time of 5hrs
is required for all configurations. The Power Module incorporates the PSU, the
batteries and the battery monitoring circuitry. See Figure 27.3.

Cust. ADM Battery box

45W
Mains Brick

Figure 27.2 Battery Box Utilised with Mains Brick to Support Battery Back–up

Marconi (Page 394) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Battery Back–Up Supported Via a Power Module

for SMA–1/4CP + Expansion Module

Customer Batt
ADM
+ Batt
Expansion
Module
Batt

Monitoring
Batt
Batt

xW 75WPSU
Power Module

Figure 27.3 Power Module to Support Battery Back–Up with ATX/16x2M Expansion Module

27.1.2 PSU

As seen in Figure 27.1 and Figure 27.2, two types of mains PSU are required
depending on the unit configuration:

1. An External in–line ‘45’W mains power brick is used to power the

SMA–1/4CP in the following configurations:

• 4x2M base with/without Passive 2M/ETX/34M (with battery back–up)

• 4x2M base with/without ATX/16x2M/STM–1 (no battery back–up)
• 16x2M base with/without Passive 2M/34M (with battery back–up)
• 16x2M base with/without ATX/16x2M/STM–1 (no battery back–up)
• 8x2M + 1x34M base only (with battery back–up)
• 8x2M + 1x34M base with/without Passive 2M/ETX/ATX/16x2M/STM–1 (no
battery back–up)
Note: As long as the total consumption (base + expansion module) is less than 29W, then
they can be battery backed with the 45W mains brick.

Where applicable, this PSU is also capable of recharging the batteries (within the
battery box) to 80% full charge within 12hrs.

2. The PSU utilised within the Power Module is an open frame 75W PSU capable
of powering both the SMA–1/4CP and any of the expansion modules, and able to
recharge the batteries to 80% full charge level within 12 hours.

A Mains input fail detection is provided on the PSU. On detection of a mains fail, a
‘Mains input fail’ alarm is reported to the SMA–1/4CP microprocessor via a
dedicated pin on the power connector. See Figure 27.4.

Marconi (Page 395) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Power feed #1 LED DC input

fail detect

PWR +

disconnect
DC/DC
PWR –
relay
BATT –
relay control

battery low
mains fail

Power feed #2 LED DC input

uP
fail detect

PWR +

PWR – disconnect
relay
BATT –
relay control

battery low
mains fail
Figure 27.4 SMA–1/4CP Power Interface

27.1.3 Signal Descriptions

PWR+ (Input/Output): Positive side of DC supply, normally connected to 0V. Also

used as positive connection to battery backup.N.B. This signal is common to both
power connectors.

PWR– (Input): Negative side of DC supply, normally connected to –48V. A DC

input fail alarm will be raised and the LED next to the relavent power connector will
be turned off if a DC supply falls below 40V. In the event of either of the DC inputs
failing, a single ‘DC input fail’ alarm will be reported to the microprocessor.

BATT– (Input/Output): Negative connection to the battery backup.

Relay Control (Input): In order to avoid energy hazards the negative power pins
(PWR– and BATT–) will be disconnected when not in use (i.e. no power
connected). The “Relay control” pin is used to signal that a power connector is in
use and that the relavent disconnect relay can be closed. To close the disconnect
relay, “PWR+” must be connected to “Relay control” and a DC supply connected to
the power pins (PWR+ and PWR–). Hence a connection between “PWR+” and
“Relay control” should be provided in the power connector so that the relay closes
when the power is connected.

Mains fail (Input): This alarm signals that the mains input to the external PSU has
failed. An active “Mains Fail” alarm on power feed#1 ‘OR’ on power feed#2 will
cause the alarm to be reported.

Marconi (Page 396) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Battery Low (Input): This alarm signals that the battery voltage is low and warns
the user, approximately 30min (minimum) prior to the battery disconnect relay
disconnecting the supply. An active ‘battery low’ alarm on power feed#1 ‘OR’ on
power feed#2 will cause the battery low alarm to be reported.

Note: The ‘Mains Fail’ and ‘Battery low’ signal active state shall be connected to
‘PWR+’. The idle state of the inputs is disconnected.

27.1.4 Battery

Optional battery back–up is provided to allow the equipment to function in the

event of a mains failure. The batteries provide enough energy to power the fully
equipped unit for a minimum of 5hours. This is achieved when operating under
nominal operating temperature (25_C).

Following a mains failure and discharge of batteries, the batteries are recharged to
80% full charge level within 12 hours and fully charged within 15hours.

27.1.4.1 Battery Box

Four 2.3Ah batteries are supported within the battery box. There are no LEDs on
this box. The SMA–1/4CP is connected to the battery box via a D type on the
battery box front panel.

The batteries are charged from the external mains brick via the power connector
supported on the SMA–1/4CP.

The batteries are field replaceable, however, there is no side access into the box.
The batteries will be replaced by removing the top cover.

Note: When the battery box is wall mounted, the unit will have to be dismounted
from the wall before the batteries can be replaced. This is because the screws for
the enclosure are at the rear of the unit.

Marconi (Page 397) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Mains
PSU (45W)
+PWR
–PWR
‘mains i/p fail’
Relay control SMA1/4CP Core
‘ batt. low’
Battery box and battery
monitoring circuitry –Batt.

+PWR
–PWR
Battery battery ‘mains i/p fail’
(4 x2.3Ah) disconnect Relay Control
‘ batt. low’
batt. low
detect
–Batt

charging
circuit

Figure 27.5 Battery Box Connection to SMA–1/4CP

27.1.5 Power Module

Four 7Ah batteries are supported within the Power Module. They are capable of
providing a minimum of 5hrs standby time for all unit configurations.

The open frame mains PSU is supported within the box and hence the batteries
are charged internally from the PSU. The dedicated ‘battery charging’ pins used by
the battery box to charge the batteries are not utilised when the Power Module is
connected up.

The batteries are in–service field replaceable, hence it should be possible to

remove the batteries in all mounting orientations.

In order to allow the upgrade process to be achieved rapidly, a battery test facility
is included within the Power Module. This consists of a push button/switch and a
green LED. When the button is pushed, the Green LED illuminates only if the
batteries are fully charged.

Marconi (Page 398) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Power Module
Mains
PSU (75W) + PWR
– PWR
mains
i/p fail ‘mains i/p fail’
Relay Control
SMA1/4CP Core
‘batt. low’

charging –Batt
battery
circuit disconnect

+ PWR
– PWR
batt. low
detect ‘mains i/p fail’
Battery Relay Control
(4 x 7Ah)
‘batt. low’
–Batt

Batt. test
facility

Figure 27.6 Power Module Connection to SMA–1/4CP

27.1.6 Dual power feeds

Dual Power feeds are supported on all SMA–1/4CP base units via two distinct
connectors.

An advantage of supporting dual feeds is that it not only provides the option to
ensure in–service upgrade of the mains brick to the Power Module without
affecting traffic, but it also provides the option for supporting protected supplies,
increasing the mains brick capacity by load sharing and in the case of battery
back–up for SMA–1/4CP only applications, in–service upgrade to the Battery Box.

27.1.7 Installation requirement

In the event of a suitable second power source not being available, then before the
upgrade from battery box to power module is carried out, the installers must
ensure that the batteries within the Power Module are fully charged. This can be
achieved rapidly with minimum effort by utilising the battery test button provided on
the Power Module which shall cause the green LED to illuminate if the batteries
are fully charged.

During the upgrade from battery box to power module, the battery box must first
be replaced with the Power Module which should be running off its batteries. The
mains brick must then be removed and the Power Module mains connection must
be connected up. This causes the output from the Power Module to revert back to
the PSU.

The Power feed connector is a 9 way D type FEMALE, which supports ‘mains
input fail’ and ‘battery low’ alarms reporting to the SMA–1/4CP.

Marconi (Page 399) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Note: A ‘Power Shutdown’ facility is not supported.

27.1.8 BATTERY BACK UP TIME

Power consumption:

1. Base unit

• 4x2M

=21W
• 16x2M

=20W
• 8x2M + 1x34M
=27.6W

2. Expansion Module

• 34M ATX
=TBD
• STM–1 ATX
=TBD
• 34M

=7W
• 8x2M passive
=8W
• 10M ETX
=9W
• STM–1

=10W
• 16x2M

=12W

3. Mains Brick = 45W (capable of 51W)

• => Requires 15.4W to charge batteries, thus leaving 29.6W total power for the
base unit and the Expansion Module (leaving 35.6W if run at 51W).

Table 27.1: Indicative Battery Back–Up Times for Battery Back–Up Solution +
Mains Brick
Configuration Power Back–up time Back–up time (51W)
Consumption (45W)
4x2M base unit only 20.7W 4hrs 4hrs
4x2M base + Passive 2M 28.7W 3hrs 3hrs
4x2M base + 34M exp.mod 27.7W 3hrs 3hrs
4x2M base + ETX 29.7 2.8hrs 2.8hrs

Marconi (Page 400) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

4x2M base + STM–1 exp.mod 30.7 2.5hrs– 2.7hrs

4x2M base + 16x2M exp. Mod 32.7 2hrs– 2.5hrs
16x2M base only* 20W 4hrs 4hrs
Note: * the 16x2M base unit configurations that shall be battery backed–up shall be similar
to the 4x2M base unit configurations.

Power Module PSU=75W

• => Requires 43.5W to charge batteries, thus allowing a total power of 31.5W for
the base unit and the Expansion Module.

Table 27.2: Indicative Battery Back–up Times for Power Module Solution
with Internal Mains PSU (75W)
Configuration Back–up Time
4x2M base unit only 14hrs
4x2M base + Passive 2M/ ETX 10.3hrs
4x2M base + 34M exp. mod 10.7hrs
4x2M base + 16x2M exp. mod –
16x2M base only* 14hrs
Note: * the 16x2M base unit configurations that shall be battery backed–up shall be similar
to the 4x2M base unit configurations.

27.2 SMA–1/4C and /UC

The SMA–1/4c/uc is powered from –48V Nominal. When used in a customer’s

premises a battery backup solution may be required and this is provided by an
external unit.

27.2.1 Station 48V

Within a station environment the SMA–1/4c/uc will normally be connected to the

protected station supplies.

Marconi (Page 401) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Station Supply (–48V)

A B

SMA1/4c and /uc

Figure 27.7 SMA–1/4c/uc with Station Supplying –48V

27.2.2 Mains Supply

In customer premises the SMA–1/4c/uc may be powered from an external mains

supply which provides a regulated output at –48V nominal. Both single and
duplicated mains PSUs can be supported. See Figure 27.8 and Figure 27.9.

External PSU
Mains Supply
–48V including mains and
PSU monitoring

SMA1/4c and /uc

Figure 27.8 SMA–1/4c/uc with Single External Mains PSU

When dual supplies are used there are two sets of mains and PSU monitoring
alarms from the A and B power interfaces on the SMA–1/4c/uc.

Marconi (Page 402) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

External PSU 1
Mains Supply
External PSU 2
–48V including mains
and PSU monitoring

A B

SMA1/4c and /uc

Figure 27.9 SMA–1/4c/uc with Dual External Mains PSU

27.2.3 PSU Alarms

A Mains input fail detection is provided on the PSU. On detection of a mains fail, a
‘Mains input fail’ alarm is reported to the SMA–1/4c via a dedicated pin on the
power connector.

External PSU 1
Mains
PSU + DC/Batt
– DC/Batt
mains Earth
i/p fail
‘dc–dc convertor fail’
A
‘mains i/p fail’
‘batt. low’

External PSU 2 (optional)

SMA1/4c
Mains + DC/Batt
PSU
– DC/Batt
mains Earth
i/p fail ‘dc–dc convertor fail’
‘mains i/p fail’
B
‘batt. low’

Figure 27.10 External PSU for SMA–1/4c

Marconi (Page 403) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

27.2.4 Battery Backup Solutions

The mains PSUs can be upgraded by a ‘Power Module’ for applications where
battery back–up is required. The Power Module incorporates the PSU, the
batteries and the battery monitoring circuitry. SMA–1/4c supports two sets of
mains, battery and PSU monitoring alarms from the A and B power interfaces, but
in this configuration only one is used.

PowerPSU Battery
External
Module
Mains –48V including mains,
Supply battery and PSU
monitoring

A B

SMA1/4c and /uc

Figure 27.11 SMA–1/4c/uc with External Mains PSU and Battery Backup

27.2.5 Power Module with Battery Backup

A rack mounting Power Module is used to provide a mains/battery power solution

for customer premises. The PSU is capable of powering a fully loaded shelf and is
able to recharge the batteries to 80% full charge level within 12 hours.

Marconi (Page 404) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

Power Module
Mains+_
PSU + DC/Batt
– DC/Batt
mains Earth
i/p fail ‘dc–dc convertor fail’
A
‘mains i/p fail’
‘batt. low’

charging battery
circuit disconnect
SMA1/4c
+ DC/Batt
– DC/Batt
batt. low
+ detect
Earth
Battery ‘dc–dc convertor fail’
‘mains i/p fail’
B
(4 x 7Ah)_
‘batt. low’

Batt. test
facility

Figure 27.12 Mains Power Module with Battery Backup for SMA–1/4c

27.2.6 PSU Alarms

A Mains input fail detection is provided on the PSU. On detection of a mains fail, a
‘Mains input fail’ alarm is reported to the SMA–1/4c/uc via a dedicated pin on the
power connector.

An AC–DC Convertor Failure is detected on the PSU and signalled to the

SMA–1/4c/uc via the power interface. This allows the operator to distinguish between
a mains failure and PSU failure.

Battery low – The Battery low detection is supported to provide adequate warning
(approximately 30 minutes) before the battery disconnect circuitry kicks in. A
‘Battery Low’ alarm is reported to the SMA via dedicated pins on the Power
connector.

27.2.7 Battery Requirement

Optional battery back–up is provided to allow the SMA–1/4c/uc to function in the

event of a mains failure. The batteries provide enough energy to power the shelf
for a minimum of 5 hours. This is achieved when operating under nominal
operating temperatures (25_C).

Following a mains failure and discharge of batteries, the batteries are recharged to
80% full charge level within 12 hours and are fully charged within 15 hours.

Marconi (Page 405) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

The battery design allows for the batteries to be easily replaced via an in–service
upgrade that can be carried out without disruption to traffic. It also allows the
upgrade to be achieved rapidly by personnel with minimal training and ensures it
does not introduce any safety hazards, or risk of damage to the equipment.

Battery Disconnect – When the battery voltage drops to a level such that further
discharge would damage the batteries , the battery disconnect circuitry
disconnects the battery output to the SMA.

27.2.8 Battery/Mains Monitoring

The SMA–1/4c/uc can have 4 fault conditions associated with each power interface.

27.2.9 DC Input Fail Alarm

This alarm determines if a –48V DC supply has failed. Seperate ‘DC Input Fail’
alarms are reported for power feed A and power feed B. A green LED on the
Ancillary LTU that contains the power connectors is lit when no alarm condition is
present.

Note: This alarm is not supported by SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc.

27.2.10 Battery Low Alarm

This alarm signals that the battery voltage is low and warns the user,
approximately 30 minutes prior to the battery disconnect relay disconnecting the
supply. Seperate ‘Battery Low’ alarms are reported for power feed A and power
feed B.

Note: This alarm is not supported by SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc.

27.2.11 Mains Input Fail Alarm

This alarm signals that the PSU input has failed. Seperate ‘Mains Input Fail’
alarms are reported for power feed A and power feed B.

Note: This alarm is not supported by SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc.

27.2.12 Power Connector

There are two power connectors supported by the Ancillary LTU. Each connector
supports: +Pwr, –Pwr, Earth and 3 alarm input signals. The alarm signal active
state exists when the inputs are connected to +Pwr. The alarm in–active (off) state
is when the inputs are disconnected.

Marconi (Page 406) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

LED DC input
Power feedA fail detect
EARTH
PWR +

PWR –
DC/DC

dc–dc convertor fail

battery low
mains fail

uP

Power feedB LED DC input

fail detect
EARTH
PWR +

PWR –

dc–dc convertor fail

battery low
mains fail

Figure 27.13 Battery/Mains Monitoring on SMA–1/4c

27.2.13 Shelf Loading

There are two standard configurations for the SMA–1/4c and the mains PSU and
Battery solutions are designed accordingly. The Full Shelf configuration provides
up to 4 tributary slots, duplicated Core cards and shelf DC/DC units. The Protected
CPE configuration provides a Customer’s Premises Equipment (CPE) solution with
protected Core traffic.

27.2.14 Maximum Loading – Full Shelf

Maximum configuration is:

• 2x Core cards
• 4x Tributary card
• 2x Ancillary LTUs
• 8x Tributary Traffic LTUs
• 1x Core Traffic LTU
• 1x Comms/Controller card

The maximum loading of the shelf in this configuration is 150W.

27.2.15 Maximum Loading – Protected CPE

Maximum configuration is:

• 2x Core cards

Marconi (Page 407) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

• 1x Ancillary LTUs (PSU, LCT, Sync Out, AUX, User I/O)

• 1x Core Traffic LTU
• 1x Comms/Controller card

The maximum loading of the shelf in this configuration is 50W.

27.2.16 Dual Power Feeds

Dual Power feeds are supported on the SMA–1/4c. Alarm inputs are reported via
the power connector.

The SMA–1/4CP PSU solutions are not be used to power the SMA–1/4c.

27.3 SMA–1/4

The SMA–1/4 is powered from –48V Nominal.

27.3.1 Station 48V

Within a station environment the SMA–1/4 will normally be connected to the

protected station supplies.

Station Supply (–48V)

A B

SMA1/4

Figure 27.14 SMA–1/4 with Station Supplying –48V

27.3.2 PSU Alarms

Monitoring of the –48V DC supply is performed by the Comms/Controller card. A

green LED on the Power LTUs is lit when no alarm condition is present.

Marconi (Page 408) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

27.3.3 Power Connector

There are two power connectors supported by the Power LTU. Each connector
supports: +Pwr, –Pwr and Earth input signals.

27.3.4 Shelf Loading

The maximum load of the SMA–1/4(4+4) shelf is 300W.

The maximum load of the SMA–1/4(8) shelf is 300W.

Marconi (Page 409) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 27: POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 410) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

CHAPTER 28:
INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.1 SMA–1/4CP BASE UNITS

SMA–1/4CP is designed for use in customer premises and can be wall, desk or
rack mounted. It consists of a Base Unit, which supports the multiplexer
functionality and delivers a range of traffic interfaces, and an optional Expansion
Module, which provides additional traffic interfaces. X21 and 2Mbit/s interfaces are
supported as standard, with other interfaces supported via the Expansion Module
options.

The range of SMA–1/4 base units is contained in Table 28.1.

Table 28.1: SMA–1/4CP Base Units

Hardware Code Name Comments
1HAN60509AAK 4 x 2 (X.21) Base Unit
1HAN60510AAF Balanced 16x2 Base Unit
1HAN60511AAH Unbalanced 16x2 Base Unit
1MBB61176AAA Mounting Kit For use with all base unit variants

28.2 SMA–1/4CP INSTALLATION KIT

There are various items of kit required to install an SMA–1/4CP unit. These items
are contained in Table 28.2. Note that there are separate items of kit depending on
whether the SMA–1/4CP is to be wall or rack mounted.

Table 28.2: SMA–1/4CP Installation Kit

Hardware Code Name Comments
1MBB61297AAP Fibre Management Tray Kit of Parts Includes cover
1MBB61105ABJ Wall Mounting Kit
1MBB61101AAH Mains In–Line Unit Mounting KOP
1HAM60957AAV Mains In–Line Unit
1HAU61926AAC/ABU/ACM/ADE Mains In–Line Unit Mains Leads UK/Europe/Australia/US options
1HAG60601AAC Mains and Battery Unit
1HAU61927ABW Mains/Battery Unit Power Connector
1MBB61048AAC Mains/Battery Unit Mounting KOP
1HAU61844AAW/ABP/ACG/ADY Mains/Battery Unit Mains Leads UK/Europe/Australia/US options
1MBB61085AAG Battery Pack
1MBB61088ABF Rack Mounting Kit
1HAM61048AAU Fan Module See Section 28.10.11

Marconi (Page 411) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.3 SMA–1/4CP POWER SUPPLY

Details of the SMA–1/4CP power supply arrangements and installation

requirements are contained in the chapter on Power Supply Units. The installation
requirements should be studied carefully before setting up the power supply.

28.4 SMA–1/4CP EXPANSION MODULES

Expansion Modules may be equipped during product installation, or as a later

upgrade to provide additional services. Upgrade is easily accomplished by simply
clipping on the Expansion Module, as illustrated in Figure 28.1 and Figure 28.2,
and this does not affect traffic.

Expansion Unit

Base Unit Expanded Solution

Figure 28.1 SMA–1/4CP Expansion

‘Front View’
CUST
ALARM
TEST

Expansion Module
CUST
POWER
TEST

SMA1/4CP Base Unit

ALARM

Figure 28.2 Front View of SMA–1/4CP

with Expansion Module

Marconi (Page 412) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Expansion modules are similar in style to the base ADM unit. The two units are
slotted together to create the new configuration. Power and optical line interface
and management functions are supported from the base unit, making the upgrade
process straightforward.

A range of expansion modules are supported by SMA–1/4CP including those

detailed in the following table:

Note: The expansion module can be added or replaced with the core unit in service.

Table 28.3: SMA–1/4CP Expansion Modules

Hardware Code Name Comments
1HAN60514AAP 34Mbit/s Expansion Module
1HAN60515AAR 45Mbit/s Expansion Module
1HAN60516AAT STM–1 Electrical Expansion Module
1HAN60517AAV STM–1 Optical Expansion Module
1HAG60566AAX Extender II 8x2 x.21 Expansion Module For use with 4x2 Base Unit only
1HAM60943AAW Expansion Interconnect Unit
1HAU61934ACX Cable Assembly (Earth)
1MBB61041AAM Expansion KOP Note that the Expansion KOP
contains two plastic covers –
the larger cover is used with
SMA1/4CP and expansion mod-
ule (the smaller cover is used
where the base unit is smaller
eg Extender II).
Cellspan Three variants available
Packetspan

Some of the SMA–1/4CP Expansion Modules listed in Table 28.3 are illustrated
below.

Earth
Stud 220mm

Port 5 Port 7 Port 9 Port 11

UNBAL. UNBAL.
OUT BAL. IN X.21 OUT
UNBAL.
BAL. IN X.21 X.21 OUT
UNBAL.
BAL. IN X.21 OUT BAL. IN

53mm
Port 6 Port 8 Port 10 Port 12

(incl. 2mm feet)

438mm
UNBAL.
OUT BAL. IN

Figure 28.3 8 x 2M Expansion Module

Marconi (Page 413) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

220mm

53mm

16x2M balanced (RJ45)

16x2M unbalanced (Din 1.0/2.3)

Figure 28.4 16 x 2M Expansion Module

28.5 SMA–1/4CP CORE INTERFACE AREA

The SMA–1/4CP core interface area is shown in Figure 28.5. Note that there are
LTU interfaces for Pwr1, Pwr2, User I/O1, User I/O2, Aux1 and Aux2, LCT and
Sync. Connector variants illustrated in Figure 28.6.

Marconi (Page 414) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

SMA1/4CP Rear View

Fan Module Area

Earth
Stud
220mm

PWR2 SYNC AUX2 USER I/O2

W E Pwr2 Core interface area

73mm Pwr1 Cust
Pwr
Laser Test Alm PWR1 LCT AUX1 Test
USER I/O1
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Line West Line East

Optical Module Area

438mm

Figure 28.5 Rear View of 4 x 2

SMA–1/4CP.

The Core interface area is capable of supporting different connector variants.

Various layout options are detailed below:

Marconi (Page 415) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

50.8mm
4 x2M G.703 + X.21

50.8mm 16 x2M G.703 (RJ45)

50.8mm 16 x2M G.703 (Din 1.0/2.3)

Figure 28.6 Core LTU variants for the SMA–1/4CP

A diagram of the 16 x 2M unbalanced base unit is shown below. Note that the
balanced base unit is identical in operation except for the 2M ports (on the right) –
on the balanced unit the connector type is 120 ohm twisted pair, whilst on the
unbalanced unit the connector type is 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 DIN.

Figure 28.7 16 x 2M Unbalanced Base

Unit (1HAN60511AAH)

28.6 SMA–1/4CP OPTICAL MODULES

! WARNING

For safety reasons, the power supply for the SMA–1/4CP must be switched
off before optical module(s) are installed or changed.

Marconi (Page 416) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Optical modules are installed by sliding on to the bottom of the SMA–1/4CP base
unit. The area for installation is indicated in the “Optical Module Area” in Figure
Figure 28.5. An optical module mounting kit of parts, 1MBB61185AAN, is required.

Note that for Single Fibre Working (SFW), the optical module should be fitted in
the Line West (left hand side) position. Note also that, if only one optical module is
to be fitted, then a blank optical module kit of parts, 1MBB61186AAQ, is required.

Full details on optical modules are contained in the chapter on Optical Modules.

28.7 SMA–1/4CP EXPANSION CONSIDERATIONS

When mounting an expansion module on an SMA–1/4CP unit, consideration must

be given to the following

a) The maximum permissible power dissipation in the equipment rack.

b) The maximum rise in temperature under which the upper SMA will operate.

c) The ETS Climatic limits. (This equipment has been tested as compliant with ETS
300 019–2 Class 3.1)

Note: The combined power dissipation of all equipment in a rack should be checked
against Marconi and customer installation rules.

28.8 BASE UNIT DETAILS

28.8.1 Construction

The SMA–1/4CP is housed in a similar plastic enclosure as that used for the
Extender II equipment, with approximate dimensions of 438mm x 220mm x 73mm

Note: The 73mm height measurement includes 2mm feet on the bottom of the base unit.

28.8.2 Mechanical Details

Dimensions Height: 73mm
Width: 438mm
Depth: 220mm

28.9 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE

! WARNING

For safety reasons, the power supply for the SMA–1/4CP must be switched
off before optical module(s) are installed or changed.

Marconi (Page 417) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

For reasons associated with safety and access it is recommended that the
following restrictions on the sequence of installation operations are observed:

• Fit optical module(s) (if not already fitted).

• Locate the SMA–1/4CP in its desired position ie wall, rack or desk mounted.
• Complete power supply arrangements as appropriate.
• Make the Power and other Core Interface connections.

28.10 FITTING THE BASE UNIT

To install the base unit in a rack, use the mounting kit, 1MBB61176AAA in
conjunction with the rack mounting kit, 1MBB61088ABF. The base unit should be
positioned and aligned with the rack locating pegs.

To install the base unit by wall mounting it, use the mounting kit, 1MBB61176AAA
in conjunction with the wall mounting kit, 1MBB61105ABJ. The base unit should
be positioned and aligned correctly.

28.10.1 Safety

Additional Safety notices published in this chapter are specific to SMA1/4CP. All
other Warnings and Cautions laid out in the Preface to this section, Safe Working
Practices, must be read and adhered to before and during any maintenance task.
In addition, any local, legal requirements must be complied with.

28.10.2 Protective Earthing

WARNING
If this equipment is bolted to to an earthed rack assembly, Protective
Earthing is provided via the rack metalwork to which it is bolted. The performance of
this Earth must be tested to ensure a continuity of not greater than 0.1 Ohm at 20 Amps
once installed.
WARNING
Where this equipment is powered up when not bolted to a rack
assembly, a separate Protective Earth MUST be connected between the SMA1/4CP
chassis and a suitable Earth bonding point. The performance of this Earth must be
tested to ensure a continuity of not greater than 0.1 Ohm at 20 Amps once installed.

28.10.3 General Considerations

The SMA1/4CP is housed in a plastic enclosure, with dimensions suitable for

deployment in a 19” ETSI rack:

• Width – 438mm
• Depth – 220mm
• Height – 73mm (allow 124mm for base unit plus expansion module)

Marconi (Page 418) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

The internal surfaces of the SMA1/4CP enclosure are coated with a metallic spray
to meet EMC requirements.

An Electrostatic Protection (ESP) Bonding point is provided on the front plate of

the base units only. An earth stud is provided on all SMA1/4CP Core and
Expansion modules.

The product is primarily designed to be used in either horizontal or vertical

orientations, as a standalone unit or wall mounted. There is also the option for
mounting horizontally within an equipment cabinet. The unit is aesthetically styled
so as to make it possible for the unit to be installed in an office environment.

28.10.4 Temperature Control

When the SMA1/4CP is mounted with other equipment, e.g. in a rack, sufficient
space should be provided between the equipment to ensure that the ambient
temperature experienced by the SMA1/4CP does not exceed the limits in ETS 300
019–2–3 Class 3.1E i.e. 45 degrees C. When mounting the SMA1/4CP
horizontally in a rack, it is recommended that a minimum vertical spacing of
66.7mm (1.5U) is provided between the SMA1/4CP and other high powered
equipment, and that it is mounted BELOW this equipment.

Note: It should be noted that improved environmental performance can be achieved by

mounting the SMA1/4CP vertically with the ventilation holes uppermost.

WARNING
If the unit is installed in an office environment, steps must be taken to avoid
accidental spillage of any form of liquid onto the SMA1/4CP, as slots present on the unit for
air ventilation will allow liquid to enter.
WARNING
The SMA1/4CP and any expansion modules must NOT be mounted on top or
beneath any battery backup box.

28.10.5 Wall Mounting Installation

CAUTION
It is recommended that precautions are taken to ensure that the wall on
which it is to be mounted is sufficiently robust to bear the weight of the unit.
WARNING
The Battery Backup box (see chapter on PSUs) must not be moved with
batteries fitted.
WARNING
All Battery Backup boxes must be wall mounted separately to the
SMA1/4CP.

Two wall mounting options are available for the SMA1/4CP and/or Battery Backup
Boxes in the customer premises.

• The first option consists of a simple plain installation direct to the wall where a
paper template is used to locate screw positions. The SMA1/4CP is hooked
directly onto these screws.

Marconi (Page 419) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

• The second option is for the fitting of a fibre management tray to the wall, the
SMA1/4CP can then be hooked directly onto this tray.

In addition to the two options listed above, an SMA1/4CP wall mounting plate is
supplied which can be screwed to weaker walls. This will help to distribute the
weight of the SMA1/4CP and further expansion units more evenly. The fibre
management tray can also be fitted to the wall mounting plate.

The final procedure in this section describes the installation of a typical Expansion
Module onto the SMA1/4CP.

28.10.6 Direct Wall Mounting

The lower sides of the SMA1/4CP or battery backup boxes contain key holes
enabling the units to be wall mounted. A paper template is provided and this is to
be used to mark off the hole positions for drilling into a suitable wall. (See
Figure 28.8)

Marconi (Page 420) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Masonry Plug for No. 8 Woodscrew

3

Wall Mounting Template

1
M4 Washer No. 8 Woodscrew
M4 WASHER

Figure 28.8 Mounting the SMA1/4CP directly to a wall

28.10.7 Fibre Management Tray Mounting

The fibre management tray can be fixed to the wall directly. The SMA1/4CP is then
mounted on interface screws which have been fitted to the fibre management
tray.(See Figure 28.9 and Procedure 7 )

Marconi (Page 421) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Fibre Management Tray

Interlink Screws

Optical Fibre Cover

STEP 2
SMA1/4CP Enclosure

STEP 1 Fixing Screw

Washer
Access Cover
Figure 28.9 Mounting Arrangement on Fibre Management Tray

Procedure 7: Fibre Management Tray Mounting Sequence

5. Locate SMA1/4CP enclosure onto interface screws and slide to lock

6. Fit washer and fixing screw then tighten fixing screw.

7. Clip access cover onto enclosure.

8. Connect Optical Fibre (s)

9. Fit optical Fibre cover and tighten screw.

zzzzz END OF PROCEDURE zzzzz

28.10.8 Wall Mounting Plate

For the mounting of the SMA1/4CP or Battery Backup Boxes onto weaker walls, a
wall mounting plate is provided. This is designed to help spread the applied load of
the SMA1/4CP and additional equipment. The SMA1/4CP will hang on interface
screws fitted in the the plate. The fibre management tray can also be hung on
interface screws in the plate and therefore the SMA1/4CP will hang on interface
screws fitted in the fibre management tray. (See Figure 28.10)

Marconi (Page 422) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Interface Screws

Masonry Plugs

Wall Fixing Screws

Interface Screws
Figure 28.10 SMA1/4CP Wall Mounting Plate

28.10.9 SMA1/4CP MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS

Figure 28.11 shows the mounting arrangements for the SMA1/4CP Core Card with
any Expansion Module. It also shows the fitting of one of two suitable backplane
(expansion assembly) connectors for either combination of Core Card and Expansion
Module.

Marconi (Page 423) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Expansion Assembly
(Backplane)
Double Access Cover

Single Access Cover

Expansion Module

Interlink Screw
SMA1/4CP Enclosure

Figure 28.11 Mounting Arrangements

Procedure 8: Expansion Module Fitting Sequence

1. Fit interface screws to Core SMA1/4CP enclosure and tighten.

2. Locate upgrade expansion module enclosure onto interface screws and

slide to lock.

3. Fit interface screws to Core SMA1/4CP enclosure and tighten.

4. Remove single cover.

5. Fit expansion assembly (backplane) and tighten screws.

6. Clip double access cover onto enclosures.

zzzzz END OF PROCEDURE zzzzz

28.10.10 SMA1/4CP Rack Mounting

Figure 28.12 shows the SMA1/4CP rack mounting kit of parts, which allows the
SMA1/4CP and any associated expansion units to be mounted in a 19 inch rack
assembly.

Marconi (Page 424) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
TO MOUNT ENCLOSURE FIT SCREW SHS1 INTO HOLE R1 HOOK
WITH PORTS FIT SCREW SHS2 INTO HOLE R2 HOOK
SMA1/4CP Rack Mounting FACING TO REAR HOOK ENCLOSURE ONTO SCREWS

ÎÎ
Î Î
SCR2 FIT SCR1 & WAS1 INTO HOLE R1 FIX
TO MOUNT ENCLOSURE FIT SCREW SHS1 INTO HOLE F1 HOOK
WITH PORTS FIT SCREW SHS2 INTO HOLE F2 HOOK
FACING TO FRONT HOOK ENCLOSURE ONTO SCREWS

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î Î Î
FIT SCR1 & WAS1 INTO HOLE F1 FIX
F1 FIX
TO MOUNT FIBRE TRAY FIT FIBRE TRAY ONTO BRACKET
FTF1 WITH PORTS FIT SCREW SCR2 INTO HOLE FTR1
FACING TO REAR FIT SCREW SCR3 INTO HOLE FTR2

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î Î Î
FIT SCREW SCR4 INTO HOLE FTR3
FIT SCREW SCR5 INTO HOLE FTR4
SHS1 TO MOUNT FIBRE TRAY FIT FIBRE TRAY ONTO BRACKET
WITH PORTS FIT SCREW SCR2 INTO HOLE FTF1
FTR3

Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
FACING TO FRONT FIT SCREW SCR3 INTO HOLE FTF2
FIT SCREW SCR4 INTO HOLE FTF3
FIT SCREW SCR5 INTO HOLE FTF4
FTF2
ALL SCREWS REQUIRE NUTS TO BE FITTED ON UNDERSIDE OF BRACKET

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î Î
SCR1

F2 HOOK

Î Î Î
WAS1
SCR5
SCR3

R1 HOOK

Î Î Î Î
FTR4
SHS2

ÎÎÎ ÎÎ Î
FTF3
F1 HOOK

ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î ÎÎÎ
R2 HOOK

Î
ÎÎ
Î
FTR2
SCR4

Î
Î Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
FTF4

ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
R1 FIX
FTR1

ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
THESE ITEMS ARE REQUIRED TO CONVERT
MOUNTING KIT FOR ETSI RACK ONLY.
(NOT REQUIRED FOR 19” RACK).

ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
(LEFT END AND RIGHT END).

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 28.12 SMA1/4CP Rack Mounting Kit of Parts.

Procedure 9: Installing Expansion Modules

This procedure describes the installation of an expansion module onto an

SMA1/4CP which is already in service.

1. Remove the cover on the rear of the SMA1/4CP main unit (if fitted) which
will expose a row of connectors. (The backplane will plug onto these
connectors).

2. Fit the two ”SMA1/4CP interlink screws” into the front face of the
SMA1/4CP base unit. (The expansion module will hang off these)

3. Place the expansion module against the SMA1/4CP so that the two
screws enter the locating keyholes on the module. Pull down the module
to lock it into position.

Note: It is easier to slide the expansion module on if it is lifted by approximately 1mm above
the SMA1/4CP case.

4. Connect the earth cable to the earth stud.

5. Offer the backplane up squarely to the expansion module and SMA1/4CP,

and push it on. Note that some force will be required to do this.

6. Fit the four backplane retaining screws in rotation. ie tighten each screw a
little at a time. Do NOT over tighten.

Marconi (Page 425) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

7. Clip the double width cover over the backplane.

8. Discard the old backplane cover.

9. On the opposite side to the backplane, fit connectors to ports as required

using appropriate connectors.

28.10.11 SMA–1/4CP Fan Module (1HAM61048AAU)

The SMA–1/4CP fan module (including installation procedure) is shown in

Figure 28.13. A fan module must be fitted if the unit is to be mounted horizontally,
in either a rack or on a desktop. A fan module does not need to be fitted if the unit
is to be wall–mounted according to the procedures given in this chapter.

’A’

[S1]
FAN MODULE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

TO REMOVE MODULE, INSERT A SUITABLE TOOL (COIN) INTO SLOT ’A’,

APPLY SLIGHT SIDEWAYS PRESSURE AND LEVER MODULE FREE.
REMOVE CONNECTOR ON FLYING LEAD FROM SOCKET.

[S2]

FAN MODULE ASSEMBLY FITTING

S1. FIT CONNECTOR ON FLYING LEAD INTO SOCKET ON ENCLOSURE.

S2. LOCATE TONGUE INTO SLOT, THEN ROTATE MODULE AND CLICK HOME.

Figure 28.13 SMA–1/4CP Fan Module

zzzzz END OF PROCEDURE zzzzz

28.11 COMMS/CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

The Comms/Controller functions for the SMA–1/4CP are contained within the base
ADM unit. This is in contrast with SMA–1/4c, SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8)
where these functions are contained on a separate card. The functions operate,
however, in the same way in all Series 4 equipment.

The Comms/Controller functions include System Memory. The Comms/Controller

functions receive commands and status requests from one of three sources:

• From a Local Terminal connected via the ‘F’ interface

Marconi (Page 426) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

• From messages carried in the embedded DCC control channels of an STM1

line signal via the overhead access buses (Qecc I/F) (passed to the Mux
Controller function via the Comms function).
• From an Element Manager via the ‘Q’ interface and the message passing
interfaces which reside between the Mux Controller function and Comms
function.

28.12 SWITCHING FUNCTIONS

Switching functions and switching protection are provided within the SMA–1/4CP
base ADM unit. This includes all switch core processing, tributary interface
conversion, synchronisation and microprocessor dc to dc conversion.

Routeing functions are also provided on the base ADM unit. The base unit also
provides the multiplexer timing generator, timing synchronisation source selection
and timing distribution for both the internal traffic interfaces and the outgoing
STM–N Line signals.

28.13 SMA–1/4CP SOFTWARE

SMA–1/4CP base units are programmed with the latest software as indicated in
Table 28.4. A Software Upgrade Information document is supplied with each
Series 4 release. Table 28.4 also shows LCT software. Note that LCT software is
common to all Series 4 products.

Table 28.4: SMA–1/4CP Software

Code Release Name Comments
1HGC60865AAU 02 R1.1.2 SMA–1/4CP Software
1HGC60916AAC R1.1.3 SMA–1/4CP Software
1HGC60923DAB R1.1.2 LCT Software
1HGC60921DAW R1.1.3 LCT Software
1QDE61748AAJ Software Upgrade Information For all Series 4 products

28.13.1 System Backup Software

System Backup Software (ordered specific to release and alarm requirements) is

available on CD–ROM, containing the System Memory Software for downloading
from the Local Terminal or EMOS (VC–AM software is included).

28.13.2 Local Terminal Software

The Local Terminal Software is executed from the hard–disc on the PC to provide
the Local Terminal functions for the SMA. The software is supplied on CD–ROM
and should be ordered specific to requirements.

Marconi (Page 427) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.14 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS

28.14.1 Ethernet Network Specifications

The following table gives the 10Base5, 2 and T network specifications.

Table 28.5: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications

Item/parameter 10Base5 (thick) 10Base2 (thin) 10BaseT
Data rate 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband
Segment length max 500m 185m 100m
Network span max 2500m 925m –
Nodes per segment max 100 30 –
Node spacing 2.5m 0.5min –
Capacitance per node 4pF max 8pF max –
0.4I dia, 50W, double 0.2I dia, 50W, single 24 AWG telephone wire,
Cable
shielded, rugged shielded, flexible twisted pair (x2)
Connectors Beesting or N series BNC RJ45

Marconi (Page 428) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.14.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’

‘Thick’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable, tapped by ‘Beesting’ junctions or ‘N’ series
interconnectors, mounted on 10Base5 Transceivers at each ‘drop’ point. The drop
cables connect directly into the AUI port of the SMA or Element Manager.

ËËË
ËËË ËËË
‘Beesting’ junction (2.5m
min cable spacing be-

ËËË ËËË
ËËË ËËË
tween units, in multiples of
2.5m)

ËËË
ËËË Optical Fibre
Connection to
SMA–N
Transceiver unit

SMA1/4CP ‘Drop’ Cables

(50m max)

SMA–1/4CP

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Element

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Element Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
(End System)

Figure 28.14 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 429) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.14.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet

‘Thin’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable interconnected by BNC ‘T’ junctions, on

10Base2 Micro–transceivers which are connected directly to the element AUI port.

Optical Fibre SMA–N ‘Thin’ Coax

Connection to Segment
(min 0.5m)
SMA1/4CP

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
SMA–1/4CP
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Element

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Element Manager
(End System)

Figure 28.15 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 430) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

28.14.4 10BaseT Ethernet

10BaseT Ethernet – All NEs on Ethernet Link connected in star configuration via
Network Hub using UTP cables terminated with RJ45 connectors

Network Hub
Optical Fibre
Connection to SMA–N
SMA1/4CP
SMA–1/4CP

Element
Manager ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Micro–transceiver
terminated by a RJ45
connector at rear of unit

Figure 28.16 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 431) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 28:INSTALLATION: SMA–1/4CP

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 432) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

CHAPTER 29:
INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and SMA1/4UC SUB–RACKS

WARNING
Do not equip the sub–rack with cards before fitting it into the rack. The
weight of a sub–rack fully equipped with cards will exceed 10 kg.

29.1 INTRODUCTION

29.1.1 Equipment Complement

The sub–rack, with a selection of cards, is installed using the procedure outlined in
this chapter. In this context, ‘installing’ means equipping the assembly with cards,
making all necessary external connections, and generally readying the equipment
for commissioning.

29.2 EQUIPMENT RACK

The SMA subrack was designed to be fitted into a ETSI or 19” rack. Other racks
may be used but consideration must be given to the provision of mounting
brackets, co–axial/fibre optic cable access and adequate ventilation air flow.

The rack chosen must allow for the SMA to have rack front covers fitted in normal
operation to provide ESD protection and assist air flow through the rack for natural
convection cooling.

29.2.1 Multiple Subrack Mounting

It is possible to mount more than one SMA–1/4c/uc subrack in one framework (up to
two shelves can be fitted in one rack), however consideration must be given to the
following:

a) The maximum permissible power dissipation in the equipment rack.

b) The maximum rise in temperature under which the upper SMA will operate.

c) The ETS Climatic limits. (This equipment has been tested as compliant with ETS
300 019–2 Class 3.1)

Note: The combined power dissipation of all equipment in a rack should be checked
against Marconi and customer installation rules.

Marconi (Page 433) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.3 SUB–RACK DETAILS

29.3.1 Variations

Variations to the basic Series 4 subrack version for SMA–1/4c/uc (1HAG60595AAR)

are achieved using a combination of optional Cards and LTUs.

29.3.2 Construction

The subrack is a card cage mechanical design meeting the ETSI standard ETS
300 119 Part–4 and screened for EMC according to ETSI requirements ETS 300
119 Part2/4.

29.3.2.1 Mechanical Details

Dimensions Max Height: 311mm (side plate maximum height)
Width: 444mm nominal (including rear cover)
Depth: 280mm nominal
Weight (Without Cards) 5kg (approx)

WARNING
The subrack should only be lifted by hand with all cards removed.

29.3.2.2 Slide–in Cards

Card Type DIN 41494 Extended Eurocard
Height: 233mm
Depth: 220mm
Edge Connector Metral (2mm pitch)

29.4 EXTERNAL SUB–RACK CONNECTIONS

29.4.1 Slide–In Cards

Details on the range of slide–In card units which can be fitted are listed in the
chapter on Slide–In Card Units.

29.4.2 Ancillary LTUs

All external sub–rack connections, except those made to the cards themselves,
are made via a series of Line Termination Units (LTUs) These are contained on
the right hand side of the subrack. Details of the LTUs which may be fitted in the
SMA–1/4c subrack can be found in the chapter on LTUs.

29.4.3 Power LTUs

Dual Feed with either:

• 2 off ‘D’–type 3W3 connectors, one for each input.

• 2 off ‘D’–type 3W3A connectors, one for each input.

Marconi (Page 434) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

• 1 off type 273B 4 way ‘Trident’ connector for both inputs.

29.5 SUB–RACK BASIC ASSEMBLY

The sub–rack is supplied as a metal framework and Backplane assembly

(see Figure 29.1) consisting of:

• Card–cage – with slots for plug–in cards.

• Fibre management area – mounted above the card cage.
• Tributary LTU area – with slots for plug–in Traffic LTUs (left hand side of LTU
Area marked in Figure 1).
• Core LTU Area – this is located on the top right of the LTU Area marked in
Figure 1. A dedicated Core LTU is required to access the 32x2M traffic
capability supported by the core configuration. Note that there are 2 variants of
the Core LTU, an unbalanced 2M traffic unit and a balanced 2M traffic unit. See
the chapter on LTUs for further details.
• Ancillary LTU area – this is located on the bottom right of the LTU Area
marked in Figure 1. The basic ancillary LTU 1 provides access to User I/O,
external sync, local terminal (LCT) power input, auxiliary and EOW. The
enhanced ancillary LTU 2 provides access to Sync In, Sync Out, 2M Test and
AUI functions. See the chapter on LTUs for further details of the basic and
enhanced ancillary LTUs for the SMA–1/4c.

29.5.1 Card–Cage Area

The card–cage can house up to 9 plug–in cards. Card slots are identified by
numbers shown in Figure 29.1, counting from the left, when facing the front of the
sub–rack. Each slot is dedicated to a particular function and, with the exception of
‘Tributary’ slots, to a particular type of card. A mechanical keying arrangement
prevents the insertion of invalid card types (slot numbers are used for identification
purposes in commissioning, monitoring, and control procedures).

Card front plates are an integral part of the EMC screening. If the equipment
configuration dictates any slot is not populated then an appropriate sized dummy
cover must be fitted. A range of such covers are available and are included in the
parts coding system.

29.5.2 Fibre Management Area

Fitted above the card–cages are fibre guides and retaining clips for mounting the
optical fibre cable guides. These guides are included in the rack mounting KOP.
Additional guides can be ordered.

29.6 SYSTEM MEMORY

System Memory is no longer located within the sub–rack frame on SMCs. It now
resides on the Controller function of the Comms/Controller Card.

Marconi (Page 435) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.6.1 SMA–1/4c Subrack (1HAG60557AAK)

Fibre Management

Fibre Management

– Trib3
– Trib3

– Trib3

– Trib3

CORE LTU
LTU 1

LTU 2

LTU 4
LTU 3
COMMS / CONTROLLER CARD

CORE ADM UNIT B

CORE ADM UNIT A

TRIBUTARY 1 FPU

TRIBUTARY 2 FPU

POWER SUPPLY B
POWER SUPPLY A
TRIBUTARY 3

TRIBUTARY 4
110a 111a 112a 113a 114a/115a

ANCILLARY CARD 2

ANCILLARY CARD 1
– Trib4

– Trib4

– Trib4
– Trib4
LTU 1

LTU 2

LTU 4
LTU 3
Optical Fibre
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110b 111b 112b 113b 114b
Management 115b

Figure 29.1 SMA–1/4c Sub–Rack Layout

29.7 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE

For reasons associated with safety and access it is recommended that the
following restrictions on the sequence of installation operations are observed:

• Fit the sub–rack into the main rack (or wherever it is to be located) before
equipping the sub–rack with cards. The weight of a sub–rack fully equipped
with cards will exceed 10kg.
• Fit the Power/LCT LTU before connecting external power. The battery supplies
must be disconnected before removal of this LTU.
Note: PSUs do not require external connection. It should be noted however, that the PSUs
have a mechanical interlock device which ensures that the unit cannot be inserted (or
withdrawn) unless the On/Off switch is in the Off position.

• Make the Power, Traffic interface and Ancillary area connections before
equipping the sub–rack with cards.

29.7.1 Fitting the Sub–Rack

A subrack mounting Kit of parts for the SMA–1/4c is available depending on the
type of equipment rack used. 1MBB60887AAS is the preferred option for ETSI
racks and 1MBB60888AAU for 19 inch racks

The sub–rack should be positioned and aligned with the rack locating pegs on the
rack and fixed to it by M6 screws. All of the cards and cables are supplied
separately, and should be fitted/connected as explained in this chapter.

Marconi (Page 436) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

Note: Before installing any cards into the shelf, connect the external power supply leads.
The external cables should then be connected.

29.7.2 Ancillary Connections

All external sub–rack connections, except those made to the cards themselves,
are made via a series of separate Ancillary Line Termination Units (LTUs).See the
beginning of this section above, and the chapter on LTUs for further details.

Note: When populating a subrack for the first time, it is advisable to ensure that all units are
fully inserted before tightening any of the knurled securing screws.

29.7.3 Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The fuses for each of the –48V supply feeds to the equipment sub–rack should be
rated at 10A (anti–surge). Alternatively a circuit breaker with a rating of 10A is
available, the GPT code is 1CFB20019AAW or a Siemens circuit breaker with a
rating of 8A may be used if appropriate , the Siemens code is V42278–Z52–A10.

Note: A 20A fuse rating is recommended for a dual feed LTU when the rack is fully loaded
using appropriate connecting cables.

Marconi (Page 437) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.8 CARD CONFIGURATION

Table 29.1: SMA–1/4c Subrack Configuration

Slot Slot Card
Position Name Options
COMMS/CONTROLLER
101 SLOT Comms/Controller Card

102 CORE CARD SLOT A Core ADM Card (any variant)

103 CORE CARD SLOT B Core ADM Card (any variant)
TRIB 1 Any appropriate Series 4 tributary card not requiring LTUs
104 (Trib Position 1) (ie Front Plug Up tributary)
TRIB 2 Any appropriate Series 4 tributary card not requiring LTUs
105 (Trib Position 2) (ie Front Plug Up tributary)
TRIB3
106 (Trib Position 3) Any appropriate Series 4 tributary card.

TRIB4
107 (Trib Position 4) Any appropriate Series 4 tributary card.

PSU A
108 (Power A ) PSU

PSU B
109 (Power B) PSU

LTU
110a/b (Tributary) Any appropriate tributary LTU.

LTU
111a/b (Tributary) Any appropriate tributary LTU.

LTU
112a/b (Tributary) Any appropriate tributary LTU.

LTU
113a/b (Tributary) Any appropriate tributary LTU.

Core LTU 2Mbit/s Traffic Unit (32 x 2M traffic capability).

114a/115a CORE LTU Fit either Balanced or Unbalanced Unit.
The enhanced (optional) ancillary LTU provides access to Sync In, Sync Out,
114b ANCILLARY LTU 2M Test and AUI functions.
The Core ancillary LTU provides access to User I/O, external sync, local
115b CORE ANCILLARY LTU
terminal (LCT) power input, auxiliary and EOW.
115b Bw7R ANCILLARY LTU The Bw7R LTU provides access to LCT, Sync Out, Aux 1 and Aux2

Note: 1. See the chapter on Slide–In Card Units for further information on cards.

2. See the chapter on Optical Modules for further information on optical modules
which can be fitted to Core Cards and Dual STM–1 Cards.

3.See the chapter on LTUs for further information on SMA–1/4c LTUs.

29.9 PSU, COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD, CORE CARD

SWITCHING AND ROUTEING FUNCTIONS

29.9.1 Power Supply Units

The core configuration provides for 32x2M traffic capability (accessed via the Core
LTU 2Mbit/s traffic unit). A Power Supply Unit (PSU) is required when a tributary
card is fitted. The PSU for the SMA–1/4c is 1HAK60729AAS. This PSU should be
fitted in slots 108 or 109 depending on the degree of protection required. If PSU
protection is required, two PSU’s should be fitted.

Marconi (Page 438) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.9.1.1 Power LTU

The power LTU for the SMA–1/4c is provided on the Core Ancillary LTU
1HAM61038ABW. Power connectors are not required.

29.9.2 Comms/Controller Card (1HAT60876AAP)

One Comms/Controller Card is required per SMA shelf. The card also carries the
System Memory (previously held on SMCs (System Memory Cards). The
microprocessor based controller card carries out the core control functions within
the SMA–1/4c equipment. It also carries out the communications functions
previously carried out by separate communications cards. The card receives
commands and status requests from one of three sources:

• From a Local Terminal connected via the ‘F’ interface

• From messages carried in the embedded DCC control channels of an STM1
line signal via the overhead access buses (Qecc I/F).
• From an Element Manager via the ‘Q’ interface and the message passing
interfaces which reside between the Controller and Comms functions on the
Card.

CAUTION
The Comms/Controller Card must not be removed from the sub–rack
when its amber LED is flashing (i.e. when it is performing a write sequence), this
can cause EEPROM corruption.

There are no external connections. If the sub–rack power supply is on at the time
the card is inserted, the Comms/Controller Card will go into a start–up process
which may take up to ten minutes. For the duration of this process the amber LED
on the card will be flashing then lit steady when completed.

A Comms/Controller card may be removed and the original card immediately

replaced with no additional action other than resetting of the time clock. All
communications will be lost on removal of the card, re–fitting the card will restore
the communications. Should a replacement card be fitted then the procedure
detailed in the Card Replacement section of the Maintenance Manual should be
followed.

29.9.3 Core Card Switching and Routeing Functions

Switching functions and switching protection are provided on the Core Card and
not on separate switch cards. This includes all switch core processing, tributary
interface conversion, synchronisation and microprocessor dc to dc conversion.

Routeing functions (eg between Line cards and tributary cards) are also provided
on the Core Card. The Core Card also provides the multiplexer timing generator,
timing synchronisation source selection and timing distribution for both the internal
traffic interfaces and the outgoing STM–N Line signals.

Marconi (Page 439) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

! ALERT/CAUTION

The Core Card must not be removed from the subrack when its amber LED is
flashing. Following the insertion of a protection core card, the worker card must not
be removed while the amber LEDs on either the Controller Card or the Protection
Core Card are flashing.

! ALERT/CAUTION

Following an insertion of a Cord Card with Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)

enabled, it will take >90sec for the laser to switch on and be capable of carrying
traffic. Therefore, due care should be taken when extracting either the Core
Worker or Core Protection Card.The laser start time period can be shortened by
pressing the Laser Restart button on the front panel – refer to section 24.7.5.

29.10 SMA–1/4C and SMA-1/4UC SOFTWARE

29.10.1 SMA–1/4c and SMA-1/4uc Software

Details of SMA–1/4c/uc software are given in Table 29.2. A Software Upgrade

Information document is supplied with each Series 4 release. Table 29.2 also
shows LCT software. Note that LCT software is common to all Series 4 products.

Table 29.2: SMA–1/4c Software

Code Release Name Comments
1HGC60866AAW R1.1.2 SMA–1/4c/uc Software
1HGC60932AAY R1.1.2r2 SMA–1/4c/uc Software
1HGC60917AAE R1.1.3 SMA–1/4c/uc Software
1HGC60868AAB R1.1.2 SMA–1/4c/uc Software Bw7R
1HGC60934AAD R1.1.2r2 SMA–1/4c/uc Software Bw7R
1HGC60920AAE R1.1.3 SMA–1/4c/uc Software Bw7R
1HGC60923DAB R1.1.2 LCT Software
1HGC60921DAW R1.1.3 LCT Software
1QDE61748AAJ Software Upgrade Information For all Series 4 products

29.10.2 System Memory KOP

Software for all cards (excepting VC–AM) is held on a System Memory Card
(SMC), which is programmed in the factory and is supplied as the System Memory
KOP within the Core. The code for the SMA–1/4c/uc SMC is 1HBA60716AAW. For
VC–AM, the software is held on the VC–AM card and not on the System Memory
card.

Application Firmware is downloaded to Traffic cards from the System Memory

Card when the subrack is commissioned,. A Software Upgrade Information
document is supplied with each release which covers all the Series 4 SMAs.

Marconi (Page 440) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.10.3 System Backup Software

System Backup Software (ordered specific to release and alarm requirements) is

available on CD–ROM, containing the System Memory Software for downloading
from the Local Terminal or EMOS (VC–AM software is included).

29.10.4 Local Terminal Software

The Local Terminal Software is executed from the hard–disc on the PC to provide
the Local Terminal functions for the SMA. The software is supplied on CD–ROM
and should be ordered specific to requirements.

29.11 EMC COVERS

To maintain EMC screening integrity, a range of dummy covers, in sizes to fit

specific card–cage slots, and a Traffic LTU Dummy for use in the traffic interface
area, are available. Details are given in the following table:

Table 29.3: EMC Panels

Position to Fit Size Plain With Grey/Silver
Grey Facia
Card EMC Covers
Slot 101: Comms/Controller Card
Slots 104 to 109: Tributary and 1MBA61103
24.7mm.(1.0”) 1MBA61103AAA
PSU Cards ABS/ACK

Slots 102 and 103: Core Cards 55.2mm.(1.4”) 1MBA61104AAC 1MBA61104

ABU/ACM
Traffic LTU EMC Covers
Slots 110a/b to 113a/b: Tributary 24.7mm.(1.0”) 1MBA61366
1MBA61366BGM
LTUs BLG/CRQ
Slots 114a/115a: Core LTU 81.2mm.(3.2”) 1MBA61724
1MBA61724ACG
ADY/AER

29.12 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS

29.12.1 Ethernet Network Specifications

The following table gives the 10Base5, 2 and T network specifications.

Marconi (Page 441) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

Table 29.4: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications

Item/parameter 10Base5 (thick) 10Base2 (thin) 10BaseT
Data rate 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband
Segment length max 500m 185m 100m
Network span max 2500m 925m –
Nodes per segment max 100 30 –
Node spacing 2.5m 0.5min –
Capacitance per node 4pF max 8pF max –
0.4I dia, 50W, double 0.2I dia, 50W, single 24 AWG telephone wire,
Cable
shielded, rugged shielded, flexible twisted pair (x2)
Connectors Beesting or N series BNC RJ45

29.12.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’

‘Thick’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable, tapped by ‘Beesting’ junctions or ‘N’ series
interconnectors, mounted on 10Base5 Transceivers at each ‘drop’ point. The drop
cables connect directly into the AUI port of the SMA or Element Manager.

ËË
ËË ËËË ËËË
ËË ‘Beesting’ junction (2.5m

ËËË ËËË
min cable spacing be-
tween units, in multiples of

ËËË
ËË ËËË
2.5m)

ËËË Transceiver unit

‘Drop’ Cables
(50m max)

Connected to AUI
port on SMA–N
SMA1/4c

ÎÎÎÎÎ Connected to AUI

ÎÎÎÎÎ
port on Element

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Element
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Element Manager
To next element in chain. (End System)
Note: a 2.5m cable segment
terminated in 50W must be
used at the end of the chain

Figure 29.2 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 442) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.12.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet

‘Thin’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable interconnected by BNC ‘T’ junctions, on

10Base2 Micro–transceivers which are connected directly to the element AUI port.

‘Thin’ Coax
Segment
(min 0.5m)
Micro–transceiver with ‘T’
piece LAN through connec-
tion and installed on SMA AUI
interface connector)

Micro–transceiver with LAN

SMA1/4c ‘T’ piece terminated with 50W
and installed on Element
Manager AUI connector at
rear of unit

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Element
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Element Manager
To next element in chain (End System)
Note: for last element in chain
the spare ‘T’ port must be ter-
minated with 50W

Figure 29.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 443) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 29: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4C and /UC SUB–RACKS

29.12.4 10BaseT Ethernet

10BaseT Ethernet – All NEs on Ethernet Link connected in star configuration via
Network Hub using UTP cables terminated with RJ45 connectors

Network Hub

SMA1/4c

Element
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Micro–transceiver
terminated by a RJ45
connector at rear of unit

Figure 29.4 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub

Marconi (Page 444) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

CHAPTER 30:
INSTALLATION–SMA1/4(4+4) AND SMA1/4(8)
SUBRACKS

WARNING
Do not attempt to fit cards into the sub–rack prior to fixing the sub–rack
into a rack, as the weight of an equipped sub–rack exceeds 18kg.

30.1 INTRODUCTION

30.1.1 Equipment Complement

The sub–rack with a selection of cards (listed in Chapter 3 of this section) is

installed in the rack using the procedure outlined in this chapter. The information
provided is that needed when installing a sub–rack into a main rack. In this
context, ‘installing’ means fitting the sub–rack assembly into the rack, equipping
the assembly with cards, making all necessary external connections, and generally
readying the equipment for commissioning.

30.2 EQUIPMENT RACK

The SMA subrack was designed to be fitted into an ETSI or 19” rack. Other racks
may be used but consideration must be given to the provision of mounting
brackets, co–axial/fibre optic cable access and adequate ventilation air flow.

The rack chosen must allow for the SMA to have rack front covers fitted in normal
operation to provide ESD protection and assist air flow through the rack for natural
convection cooling.

30.2.1 Multiple Subrack Mounting

It is possible to mount up to two SMA–1/4(4+4) or up to two SMA–1/4(8) subracks

in one framework, however consideration must be given to the following:

a) The maximum permissible power dissipation in the equipment rack.

b) The maximum rise in temperature under which the upper SMA will operate.

c) The ETS Climatic limits. (This equipment has been tested as compliant with ETS
300 019–2 Class 3.1)

Note: The use of two SMA–1/4(4+4) or two SMA–1/4(8) subrack/s with power dissipations
exceeding 350W should not normally be used without forced air cooling or thermal modelling
verification, Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF) could be reduced as a result.

Marconi (Page 445) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.3 SUBRACK DETAILS

30.3.1 Variations

Variations to the basic subrack are achieved using a combination of optional Cards
and LTUs.

30.3.2 Construction

The subrack is a card cage mechanical design meeting the ETSI standard ETS
300 119 Part–4 and screened for EMC according to ETSI requirements ETS 300
119 Part2/4.

30.3.2.1 Mechanical Details

SMA–1/4(4+4) DimensionsHeight: 499.6mm (side plate maximum height)
Width: 444mm nominal including rear cover (subrack will fit into a
444mm opening)
Depth: 280mm nominal
SMA–1/4(8) Dimensions Height: 638mm (side plate maximum height)
Width: 444mm nominal including rear cover (subrack will fit into a
444mm opening)
Depth: 280mm nominal

WARNING
The subrack should only be lifted by hand with all cards removed.
SMA–1/4(4+4) Weight Exceeds 18.0 kg
SMA–1/4(8) Weight Exceeds 18.0 kg

30.3.2.2 Slide–in Cards

Card Type DIN 41494 Eurocard Extended Double Euro
Height: 234mm
Depth: 220mm
Edge Connector: Metral (2mm pitch)

30.4 EXTERNAL SUB–RACK CONNECTIONS

30.4.1 Slide In Cards

Details on the range of slide in card units which can be fitted are listed in the
chapter on Slide–In Card Units.

30.4.2 Ancillary LTUs

All external sub–rack connections, except those made to the cards themselves,
are made via a series of Ancillary Line Termination Units (LTUs). All functions and
interfaces previously carried out by the Ancillary Unit are now carried out by a
dedicated LTU. Details of the LTUs which may be fitted in SMA Sub–racks can be
found in the chapter on LTUs.

Marconi (Page 446) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.4.3 Power LTUs

Power LTUs can be Dual Feed with 2 x D–type 3W3A or Triple feed with D–type
8W8A connectors.

30.5 SUB–RACK BASIC ASSEMBLY

The sub–rack is supplied as a metal framework and Backplane assembly with

pre–fitted Local Terminal LTU (see Figure 30.1) .

The sub–rack assembly consists of:

• Card–cage – with slots for plug–in cards.

• Fibre management area – mounted above the card cage.
• Tributary LTU area – with slots for plug–in Traffic LTUs.
• Ancillary LTU area – mounted between the card cage and the Traffic LTUs are
the external interfaces for local alarm, external sync, local terminal (LCT) power
input, alarm, auxiliary and EOW. These are provided on separate plug–in LTUs
(see Figure 30.1).

30.5.1 Card–Cage Areas

The card–cages can house up to twenty six plug–in cards of DIN 41494 Eurocard
Dimensions standard. Card slots are identified by numbers shown in Figure 1,
counting from the left when facing the front of the sub–rack. Each slot is dedicated
to a particular function and, with the exception of ‘Tributary’ slots, to a particular
type of card. A mechanical keying arrangement prevents the insertion of invalid
card types (slot numbers are used extensively for identification purposes in
commissioning, monitoring, and control procedures).

Card front plates are an integral part of the EMC screening. If the equipment
configuration calls for any slot to be vacant, an appropriate sized dummy cover
must be fitted. A range of such covers are available and are included in the parts
coding system.

30.5.2 Fibre Management Area

Fitted above the card–cages are fibre guides and retaining clips for mounting the
optical fibre cable guides. These guides are included in the rack mounting KOP.
Additional guides can be ordered.

Note: If a fibre tray is fitted into a rack containing SMA sub–racks, care must be taken to
avoid any blocking of air flow from the rack intakes past the sub–rack to the exhaust. If blocking
is unavoidable, then consideration should be given to its effect on increased sub–rack
operating temperatures.

Marconi (Page 447) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.6 SYSTEM MEMORY

System Memory is no longer located within the sub–rack frame on SMCs. It now
resides on the Controller function of the Comms/Controller Card and must be
ordered specific to the alarm scheme employed.

30.6.1 SMA–1/4(4+4) Subrack (1HAG60596AAT)

TRIB 5 TRIB 6 TRIB 7 TRIB 8

Power
LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4

USER I/O
2M TEST

AUX 3/4
AUX 1/2
MAT AUX

AUX 5/6

ALARM
SYNC

LCT
AUI
Blank

Optical Fibre Management

COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD

POWER SUPPLY UNIT A

POWER SUPPLY UNIT B

AUXILIARY / EOW
CORE ADM UNIT

CORE ADM UNIT

AUXILIARY
TRIB 3 FPU
TRIB 4 FPU
TRIB 1 FPU
TRIB 2 FPU

TRIB 5

TRIB 6

TRIB 7

TRIB 8

401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415

Optical Fibre
Management

Figure 30.1 SMA–1/4(4+4) Sub–Rack Arrangement

Marconi (Page 448) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.6.2 SMA–1/4(8) Subrack (1HAG60594AAP)

Blank
TRIB 1 TRIB 3 TRIB 5 TRIB 7
LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4

TRIB 2 TRIB 4 TRIB 6 TRIB 8

Power
LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4 LTU1–4

USER I/O
2M TEST

AUX 3/4
AUX 1/2
MAT AUX

AUX 5/6

ALARM
SYNC

LCT
AUI
Blank

Optical Fibre Management

COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD

A A

POWER SUPPLY UNIT B

UNIT
AUXILIARY / EOW
CORE ADM UNIT

CORE ADM UNIT

UNIT
AUXILIARY

SUPPLY
TRIB 1
TRIB 2

TRIB 5

TRIB 6

TRIB 7

TRIB 8
TRIB 3
TRIB 4

SUPPLY
POWER
POWER
401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415

Optical Fibre
Management

Figure 30.2 SMA–1/4(8) Sub–Rack Arrangement

Note: Unless otherwise stated, all connectors referred to are on separate Ancillary LTUs.

30.7 BASIC INSTALLATION SEQUENCE

For reasons associated with safety and access it is recommended that the
following restrictions on the sequence of installation operations are observed:

• Fit the sub–rack into the main rack before equipping the sub–rack with cards.
The weight of a sub–rack fully equipped with cards will exceed 18 kg.

Marconi (Page 449) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

• Fit the power LTU before connecting external power The battery supplies must
be disconnected before removal of this LTU.
Note: PSUs do not require external connection. It should be noted however, that the PSUs
have a mechanical interlock device which ensures that the unit cannot be inserted (or
withdrawn) unless the On/Off switch is in the Off position.

• Make the Power, Traffic interface and Ancillary area connections before
equipping the sub–rack with cards.

30.7.1 Fitting the Sub–Rack

A subrack mounting kit of parts for the SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) is available
depending on the type of equipment rack used. 1MBB60887AAS is the preferred
option for ETSI racks and 1MBB60888AAU for 19 inch racks.

The sub–rack should be positioned and aligned with the rack locating pegs on the
rack and fixed to it by M6 screws. All of the cards and cables are supplied
separately, and should be fitted/connected as explained in this chapter.

Note: Before installing any cards into the shelf, connect the external power supply leads,
and the Rack Alarm cable (TEP1E only) to the alarm connector. They should be fitted in the
connector area. The external cables should then be connected.

30.7.2 Ancillary Connections

All external sub–rack connections, except those made to the cards themselves,
are made via a series of separate Ancillary Line Termination Units (LTUs).

Note: When populating a subrack for the first time, it is advisable to ensure that all units are
fully inserted before tightening any of the knurled securing screws.

30.7.3 Ancillary and Traffic Blanking LTU Facias

Ancillary and/or traffic blanking LTU facias need to be fitted as appropriate to the
areas labelled “Blank” in Figure 30.1 and Figure 30.2. These facias are listed in
Table 30.1.

Table 30.1: Ancillary and Traffic Blanking LTU Facias

Position to Fit Size Description Code Subrack
Slot 117 1.2” Grey Facia 1MAE61753AEY SMA1/4(8)
Slot 117 1.2” Silver Grey Facia 1MAE61933ACW SMA1/4(8)
Slots 302–307 6.0” Grey Facia 1MAE61767ABV SMA1/4(4+4)(8)
Slots 302–307 6.0” Silver Grey Facia 1MAE62791AAG SMA1/4(4+4)(8)

30.7.4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The fuses for each of the –48V supply feeds to the equipment sub–rack should be
anti–surge, rated at 10A (GPT code 1CFA20033AHY), or a circuit breaker with a
rating of 10A (GPT code 1CFB20019AAW). The 10A rating type II circuit breaker
should be used with a DIN to G rail adapter (GPT code 1MAA20442AAV).

Marconi (Page 450) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
 1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

Alternatively or a Siemens circuit breaker with a rating of 8A may be used if

appropriate , the Siemens code is V42278–Z52–A10. The connecting cables
should have a minimum 10A continuous rating.

Note: A 20A fuse rating is recommended for a dual feed LTU when the rack is fully loaded
using appropriate connecting cables.

30.8 CARD CONFIGURATION

Table 30.2: SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) Subrack Configuration

Slot Slot Card
Position Name Options

TRIB1 For SMA–1/4(8), any Series 4 tributary card.

401 (Trib Position 1) For SMA–1/4(4+4), any Series 4 tributary card not requiring LTUs (ie Front Plug
Up tributary)

TRIB2 For SMA–1/4(8), any Series 4 tributary card.

402 (Trib Position 2) For SMA–1/4(4+4), any Series 4 tributary card not requiring LTUs (ie Front Plug
Up tributary)

TRIB3 For SMA–1/4(8), any Series 4 tributary card.

403 (Trib Position 3) For SMA–1/4(4+4), any tributary card not requiring LTUs (ie Front Plug Up
tributary)

TRIB4 For SMA–1/4(8), any Series 4 tributary card.

404 (Trib Position 4) For SMA–1/4(4+4), any Series 4 tributary card not requiring LTUs (ie Front Plug
Up tributary)
405 CORE CARD SLOT Core ADM Card (any variant)
406 CORE CARD SLOT Core ADM Card (any variant)
TRIB5
407 (Trib Position 5) Any Series 4 tributary card.

TRIB6
408 (Trib Position 6) Any Series 4 tributary card.

TRIB7
409 (Trib Position 7) Any Series 4 tributary card.

TRIB8
410 (Trib Position 8) Any Series 4 tributary card.

COMMS/CONTROLLER
411 SLOT Comms/Controller Card

AUX 1
412 (Auxiliary Card 1) Auxiliary 0/0.1

AUX / EOW
413 (Auxiliary Card 2) Auxiliary 0/0.1/EOW

PSU A
414 (Power A ) PSU

PSU B
415 (Power B) PSU

Note: 1. See the chapter on Slide–In Card Units for further information on cards.

2. See the chapter on Optical Modules for further information on optical

modules which can be fitted to Core Cards and Dual STM–1 Cards.

Marconi (Page 451) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.9 PSU, COMMS/CONTROLLER CARD, CORE CARD

SWITCHING AND ROUTEING FUNCTIONS

30.9.1 Power Supply Unit (1HAK60669AAW)

Power Supply Units are fitted in slots 414 and 415.In the case of Power Supply
Units the terms ‘operational’ and ‘standby’ are not strictly applicable, all units are
used in parallel and if one fails the other(s) can maintain the supply. Power LTUs
must be fitted according to the equipping scheme. A PSU is illustrated in
Figure 30.3.

30.9.1.1 PSU Protection

PSU protection is provided as standard on SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8).

30.9.1.2 Power LTUs

A Triple Feed Power LTU 1HAM60778ABH is supplied as standard, featuring a

Power D–Type 8W8 connector for triple power inputs and three station supply
green LEDs.

A Dual Feed Power LTU 1HAM60779ABK containing 2 off Power D–Type 3W3A
connectors for both power inputs, there are two station supply green LEDs.

Note: Should a Dual Feed Power LTU be used, the current drawn will be higher in each
power lead than a corresponding Triple Feed Power LTU.

30.9.2 Comms/Controller Card (1HAT60876AAP)

One Comms/Controller Card (illustrated in Figure 30.3) is required per SMA shelf.
The Card also carries the System Memory (previously held on SMCs (System
Memory Cards). The microprocessor based controller card carries out the core
control functions within the SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) equipment. It also
carries out the communications functions previously carried out by separate
communications cards. The Card receives commands and status requests from
one of three sources:

• From a Local Terminal connected via the ‘F’ interface

• From messages carried in the embedded DCC control channels of an STM1
line signal via the overhead access buses (Qecc I/F)
• From an Element Manager via the ‘Q’ interface and the message passing
interfaces which reside between the Mux Controller function and Comms
function.

CAUTION
The Comms/Controller Card must not be removed from the sub–rack
when its amber LED is flashing (i.e. when it is performing a write sequence), this
can cause EEPROM corruption.

Marconi (Page 452) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

There are no external connections. If the sub–rack power supply is on at the time
the card is inserted, the Comms/Controller Card will go into a start–up process
which may take up to ten minutes. For the duration of this process the amber LED
on the card will be flashing then lit steady when completed.

A Comms/Controller card may be removed and the original card immediately

replaced with no additional action other than resetting of the time clock. All
communications will be lost on removal of the card, re–fitting the card will restore
the communications. Should a replacement card be fitted then the procedure
detailed in the Card Replacement section of the Maintenance Manual should be
followed.

Note: The User Alarms LTU, 1HAM60782AAS, (if required) should be inserted into a shelf
before powering up.(If it is inserted into a live shelf it will cause the Comms/Controller Card to
reset. See section 23.4.7.)

Marconi (Page 453) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

AMBER RED

RED
ALARM
AMBER
COMMS IN TFC
AMBER
MONITOR MUX IN TFC
POINTS
AMBER
SMC FAIL

COMMS/CONTROLLER

ON/OFF
SWITCH &
INTERLOCK

OFF

ON

POWER SUPPLY COMMS/

UNIT CONTROLLER
CARD

Figure 30.3 PSU and Comms/Controller Card Front Layout

30.9.3 Core Card Switching and Routeing Functions

Switching functions and switching protection are provided on the Core Card and
not on separate switch cards. This includes all switch core processing, tributary
interface conversion, synchronisation and microprocessor dc to dc conversion.

Marconi (Page 454) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

Routeing functions (eg between Line cards and tributary cards) are also provided
on the Core Card. The Core Card also provides the multiplexer timing generator,
timing synchronisation source selection and timing distribution for both the internal
traffic interfaces and the outgoing STM–N Line signals.

30.10 SMA–1/4 (4+4) AND SMA–1/4(8) SOFTWARE

30.10.1 Software

Details of SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) software are given in Table 30.3. A

Software Upgrade Information document is supplied with each Series 4 release.
Table 30.3 also shows LCT software. Note that LCT software is common to all
Series 4 products.

Table 30.3: SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) Software

Code Release Name Comments
1HGC60867AAY R1.1.2 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) TEP1E Alarm Scheme
Software
1HGC60933AAB R1.1.2r2 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) TEP1E Alarm Scheme
Software
1HGC60919AAJ R1.1.3 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) TEP1E Alarm Scheme
Software
1HGC60868AAB R1.1.2 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) BW7R Alarm Scheme
Software
1HGC60934AA R1.1.2r2 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) BW7R Alarm Scheme
D Software
1HGC60920AAE R1.1.3 SMA–1/4(4+4) and SMA–1/4(8) BW7R Alarm Scheme
Software
1HGC60923DA R1.1.2 LCT Software
B
1HGC60921DA R1.1.3 LCT Software
W
1QDE61748AAJ Software Upgrade Information For all Series 4 prod-
ucts

30.10.2 System Memory KOP

Software for all cards (excluding VC–AM, CellSpan, PacketSpan) is held on a

System Memory Card (SMC), which is programmed in the factory and is supplied
as the System Memory KOP within the Core. For VC–AM, the software is held on
the VC–AM card and not on the System Memory card.

A different KOP is required, one per subrack, depending on the alarm scheme
employed ( Bw7R or TEP1E) and is ordered specific to release and alarm
requirements. All the parts are fitted during factory or site installation. Application
software is downloaded to Traffic cards from the System Memory Card when the
subrack is commissioned,. A Software Upgrade Information document is supplied
with each release which covers all the Series 4 SMAs.

Marconi (Page 455) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.10.3 System Backup Software

System Backup Software (ordered specific to release and alarm requirements) is

available on CD–ROM, containing the System Memory Software for downloading
from the Local Terminal or EMOS (VC–AM software is included).

30.10.4 Local Terminal Software

The Local Terminal Software is executed from the hard–disk on the PC to provide
the Local Terminal functions for the SMA. The software is supplied on CD–ROM
and should be ordered specific to requirements.

30.11 EMC COVERS

To maintain EMC screening integrity, a range of dummy covers, in sizes to fit

specific card–cage slots, and a Traffic LTU Dummy for use in the traffic interface
area, are available. Details are given in the following table:

Table 30.4: EMC Panels

Position to Fit Size Plain With Grey/Silver
Grey Facia
Card EMC Covers

1MBA61102
Slot 412: Aux Card 19.62mm (0.8”) 1MBA61102AAX
ABQ/ACH
Slot 413: Aux/EOW Card
Slot 401 to 404: Tributary Cards
1MBA61103
Slot 407 to 410: Tributary Cards 24.7mm (1.0”) 1MBA61103AAA
ABS/ACK
Slot 411: Comms/Controller Card
Slots 405 and 406: Core Cards 55.2mm.(1.4”) 1MBA61104AAC 1MBA61104
Slots 414 and 415: PSU A and B ABU/ACM
Traffic LTU EMC Covers
All associated Trib LTU slots 24.7mm.(1.0”) Same size 1MBA61366
1MBA61366BGM
as one traffic LTU. BLG/CFR
All associated Trib LTU slots 50.1mm.(2.0”) Same size 1MBA61395
1MBA61395BAB
as two single traffic LTUs. BBT/BCL
Completely unused Trib position 100.9mm.(4.0”) Same
1MBA61396
size as four single traffic 1MBA61396BAD
BBV/BCN
LTUs.
Ancillary LTU EMC Covers
Auxiliary, EOW, Sync and 24.7mm.(1.0”) Same size 1MBA61366
1MBA61366BHE
User Alarms LTU. as one traffic LTU. BMY/CEY
Rack Alarms LTU 55.2mm.(2.2”) Same size 1MBA61381
1MBA61381BBU
as one traffic LTU. BCM/BDE

Marconi (Page 456) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.12 ETHERNET CONNECTIONS

30.12.1 Ethernet Network Specifications

The following table gives the 10Base5, 2 and T network specifications.

Table 30.5: 10Base5, 10Base2 and 10BaseT specifications

Item/parameter 10Base5 (thick) 10Base2 (thin) 10BaseT
Data rate 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband 10Mbit/s baseband
Segment length max 500m 185m 100m
Network span max 2500m 925m –
Nodes per segment max 100 30 –
Node spacing 2.5m 0.5min –
Capacitance per node 4pF max 8pF max –
0.4I dia, 50W, double 0.2I dia, 50W, single 24 AWG telephone wire,
Cable
shielded, rugged shielded, flexible twisted pair (x2)
Connectors Beesting or N series BNC RJ45

Marconi (Page 457) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.12.2 ‘Thick Ethernet’

‘Thick’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable, tapped by ‘Beesting’ junctions or ‘N’ series
interconnectors, mounted on 10Base5 Transceivers at each ‘drop’ point. The drop
cables connect directly into the AUI port of the SMA or Element Manager.

ËËË
ËË
ËËË ËËË
‘Beesting’ junction (2.5m
min cable spacing be-

ËËË
ËË ËËË
tween units, in multiples of
2.5m)

ËËË
ËË ËËË
ËËË SMA1/4(4+4)(8)
Transceiver unit

‘Drop’ Cables
(50m max)

Connected to AUI
port on SMA–N

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Connected to AUI
port on Element

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ Element

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Element Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
To next element in chain. (End System)
Note: a 2.5m cable segment
terminated in 50W must be
used at the end of the chain

Figure 30.4 ‘Thick’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 458) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.12.3 ‘Thin’ Ethernet

‘Thin’ Ethernet – uses coaxial cable interconnected by BNC ‘T’ junctions, on

10Base2 Micro–transceivers which are connected directly to the element AUI port.

‘Thin’ Coax Micro–transceiver with ‘T’

Segment piece LAN through connec-
(min 0.5m) SMA1/4(4+4)(8) tion and installed on SMA AUI
interface connector)

Micro–transceiver with LAN

‘T’ piece terminated with 50W
and installed on EM–OS AUI
connector at rear of unit

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Element
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
To next element in chain
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Note: for last element in chain
the spare ‘T’ port must be ter- Element Manager
minated with 50W (End System)

Figure 30.5 ‘Thin’ Ethernet Connections

Marconi (Page 459) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 30: INSTALLATION – SMA1/4 SUB–RACKS

30.12.4 10BaseT Ethernet

10BaseT Ethernet – All NEs on Ethernet Link connected in star configuration via
Network Hub using UTP cables terminated with RJ45 connectors

Network Hub
SMA1/4(4+4)(8)

Element
Manager

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Micro–transceiver
terminated by a RJ45
connector at rear of unit

Figure 30.6 10BaseT Ethernet using UTP cables and a Network Hub

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 460) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 31: SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 31:
SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION

CAUTION
The whole of the relevant procedure for the task to be performed, as given
in this chapter, must be read and fully understood before any upgrade (or downgrade) is
performed.

To upgrade equipment requires the installation and commissioning of replacement

Slide–in Card Units. It may also require the fitting of a further Power Supply Unit.
This information should be supplied by the network planning authority. Care
should also be taken to ensure, wherever possible, the following occurs:–

• The time that the equipment is left without the EMC dummy covers is minimised
• Traffic down time is minimised by re–routeing traffic during the upgrade
process.

31.1 STM–1 OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER, STM–4 OPTICAL

INTERFACE CARD SAFETY

CAUTION
The STM Optical Multiplexer or Optical Interface Cards must not be
removed from the sub–rack or disconnected without firstly taking into consideration the
Optical Safety rules outlined in Safe Working Practices section of this manual and
relevant Card Replacement details in the associated Local Terminal (LCT) Operator
Manual. Optical Safety precautions and relevant information which is outlined in the
Card Installation section must also be observed before performing an upgrade or
downgrade.
The area that is to be used must have:–

• Sufficient grounding points to provide a safe ESD environment.

• Suitable mains power supply.
• Suitable dc supply (60V 5A).

31.2 PROTECTION

Where 1+1 MSP line protection has been utilised this must be be disabled, the
protection cards unconfigured and removed at both ends of the line section before
upgrade commences.

Marconi (Page 461) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 31: SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION

31.3 SMA–1/4CP STM–N UPGRADE

! WARNING

For safety reasons, the power supply for the SMA–1/4CP must be switched
off before the following optical module upgrade procedure is carried out.
The power supply must only be reconnected after the optical module has
been changed – see Figure 31.1.

The EM/LT allows an STM–N section to be upgraded, not in service, between

STM–1 and STM–4 operation.

The user can upgrade whilst maintaining the existing cross–connection

configuration i.e. without having to logically delete all associated
cross–connections and then having to re–apply them.

The upgrade, carried out on a per section basis, is achieved as follows:

a. Divert traffic from the STM–N ports forming the section to be upgraded.

•
If possible, the user should re–route the traffic, via spare (i.e. unused) capacity
or protection capacity (e.g. through the application of forced/manual switching),
onto a physically diverse section. The module cannot be protecting traffic, so
the user must remove all protection configuration for that line. If MSP is
configured for that Line, then the Upgrade option is not allowed. However, if
SNCP is supported on that line, the Upgrade option is allowed.

b. Physically replace the STM–N Card/Unit.

c. Configure the STM–N Card/Unit.

•
If the STM–N card/unit is selected as a source in any of the synchronisation
priority tables then the user is required to reconfigure the priority tables as part
of the upgrade procedure.
• The user has the option to upgrade the slot(s) for the new STM–N card/unit.
That is, the user can upgrade between STM–1/4 modules without having to
logically delete all associated cross–connections, delete cards/unit, add
cards/units and add cross–connections. The upgrade allows the user to
maintain existing cross–connection configuration.
• The mappings used are fixed as follows:
• East/West module
⇒
STM–1
• Alternatively, the user can reconfigure cross–connections.
• Alarms are identified to the STM–1 stream, within the STM–N signal to which it
pertains, through the use of alarm descriptors.

Marconi (Page 462) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 31: SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION

d.Restore traffic to new STM–N section.

Note the following points:

• There is one build of software for STM–1 and STM–4 line modules.
• The Line modules are not in–service replaceable, but field replaceable. The Unit
has to be powered down before the modules are replaced.
• The operation of mixed STM–N line interfaces is allowed (e.g. Line East
operating at STM–1 and Line West operating at STM–4).

Figure 31.1 highlights the process for performing a Line module upgrade.

UPGRADE Only
Power Down

Replace mod
STM–1/4

Power –up

User configuresVia ‘ Upgrade’option

line module(s)

uPt reads G.C.T Only STM–4 options:

reports to uPc –STM–4 L4.1
–STM–4 L4.2 etc

No Configured
= G.C.T
Yes
uPc raises
‘Wrong card fitted’ uPc D/Ls
alarm configto mod.

Figure 31.1 Process for Performing Line Module Up-

grade
Note: MSP needs to be disabled before an ‘Upgrade’ can be configured. The CCF will
reject the upgrade message if MSP is enabled.
Upgrade shall be allowd if SNC protection is configured.
The upgrade option is only available from LT.

31.4 SMA–1/4C, /UC AND SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) STM–N UPGRADE

In contrast to SMA–1/4CP, SMA–1/4(4+4)(8) and SMA–1/4c/uc can be upgraded

in–service from STM–1 to STM–4.

The user can upgrade, whilst maintaining the existing cross–connection

configuration i.e. without having to logically delete all associated
cross–connections and then having to re–apply them. Upgrade from STM–1 to
STM–4 results in existing connections being in STM–1.

Marconi (Page 463) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 31: SMA UPGRADE INFORMATION

Note the following points:

• There is one build of software for STM–1 and STM–4 line modules. This is
required for upgrade.
• The Line modules are ’service’ replaceable. The Core Cards have to be
removed from the shelf before the modules are replaced but traffic continues
on the protection card.
• The operation of mixed STM–N line interfaces is allowed (e.g. Line East
operating at STM–1 and Line West operating at STM–4).
This also applies between the A and B interfaces.
• Any MSP or Core Card protection must be removed before the Upgrade
sequence can begin.

In outline the upgrade procedure is shown below.

UPGRADE Only
Force all
TraffictoA/B

Remove other Core

Card and upgrade Optics

Replace core

User configures Via ‘Upgrade’option

line module(s)

uPt reads G.C.T Only STM–4 options:

reports touPc –STM–4 L4.1
–STM–4 L4.2 etc

No Configured
= G.C.T

Yes
uPcraises
‘Wrong card fitted’ uPc D/Ls
alarm configto mod.

Figure 31.2 STM–N Upgrade Procedure

After upgrade any existing traffic will be in STM–1 of the STM–4.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 464) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 6: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

SECTION 6:
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 32 . . . . . COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 467

Marconi (Page 465) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 6: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 466) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 32:
COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

32.1 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

This chapter details the tests to be performed when commissioning a Marconi

SMA type Synchronous Digital Multiplexer.

The tests detailed are intended to demonstrate that the equipment is functionally
operational and no damage has occurred during transportation or installation.

32.2 SAFE WORKING PRACTICES

Safe working practices as described at the beginning of the section on Installation

Information must be adopted when working on this equipment.

32.3 CLEANING PROCEDURES FOR OPTICAL

CONNECTORS

It is essential that all fibre optic mating surfaces are kept scrupulously clean. If the
optical couplers are disconnected for any length of time ie more than a simple
disconnect/reconnect, then the instructions for cleaning optical connectors detailed
in the section on Maintenance Procedures should be carried out. Contamination of
the mating surfaces can have serious detrimental effects on performance.

32.3.1 Optical Measurements

It is important to use only calibrated non–attenuating SM optical fibre test leads

fitted with the appropriate connectors.

32.3.2 Static Sensitive Warning

Equipment referred to in this specification contains static sensitive devices

therefore an ESP wristband MUST be worn and clipped to the rack at all times.

32.4 TEST EQUIPMENT

The following items of test equipment will be required during commissioning tests.

a) A PDH Pattern Generator/Error Detector, with bit by bit comparison, capable of

operating at 2, 34, 45 and 140 Mbit/s. Suitable instruments are the Wandel &
Goltermann PF4 or ANT–20, or the Hewlett Packard 3764A.

Marconi (Page 467) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

Note: The instrument in (a) should be capable of monitoring errors over a 24 hour period
with an associated printout of the result.

b) A Single Mode Optical Power Meter with a wide area sensor capable of operating
in the range 0 to –50 dbm at 1300nm–1550nm, such as the Photodyne 2250XF. It
should also have a suitable optical patch cord.

c) A Single Mode, Variable or Fixed Optical Attenuator capable of operating in the

range 12dBm "2dBm at a wavelength of 1300nm–1550nm.

d) A Personal Computer to be used as the LCT and as specified in the LCT Operator
Manual, together with suitable LCT cable

e) One optical patch cord per Optical Multiplexer fitted in the shelf.

f) Suitable coaxial test cords.

Note: All instruments must conform to the appropriate safety regulations and have valid
calibration certification.

32.5 PRELIMINARY SMA EQUIPMENT CHECKS

CAUTION
The following checks assume that the SMA rack is yet to be powered up.
Do not power up the rack until instructed to do so in the following text.

32.5.1 Visual Inspection

The equipment is to be visually inspected to ensure that it has not suffered any
obvious damage during transportation or installation.

32.5.2 Card/LTU Link and Switch Settings

Check that the link and switch settings are as detailed in the sections on Line
Termination Units and Slide–in Card Units.

32.6 POWER SUPPLY CHECK

32.6.1 Fuse Rating

The fuses for each of the –48V supply feeds to the equipment sub–rack should be
rated at 10A (anti–surge). Alternatively a circuit breaker with a rating of 10A is
available, the GPT code is 1CFB20019AAW or a Siemens circuit breaker with a
rating of 8A may be used if appropriate, the Siemens code is V42278–Z52–A10.

Note: A 20A fuse rating is recommended for a dual feed LTU when the rack is fully loaded
using appropriate connecting cables.

Marconi (Page 468) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

32.6.2 Power Connector Wiring

Check that the shelf power connector is wired correctly.

32.7 SHELF CONFIGURATION

The shelf should only be populated with such cards and LTUs as required in
accordance with the shelf configuration tables listed in the section on Slide–In
Card Units.

32.8 SYSTEM POWER–UP

CAUTION

The following restrictions, regarding switching the Power Supply Units on or off,
should be observed during system power–up:

• A PSU must not be switched off (whether or not one of a group) when the
Comms/Controller Card amber LED is still flashing (i.e. during the period it is
performing a write sequence). Such an action is likely to result in corruption of
the Controller EEPROM data.
• When more than one Power Supply Unit is fitted, they should not be switched
between the On/Off states in rapid succession as such action can cause a
‘Laser Trip’ condition on the Optical Cards.
• The power–up sequence MUST be followed ie A,B,C. Failure to use the
correct sequence may result in partial powering of unsupplied cards through
logic connections and the Local Terminal (LCT) failing to communicate with the
Comms/Controller card. Should this occur, a re–commissioning sequence, as
detailed in the LCT Operators manual should be undertaken. This will cause all
previous connections to be lost.

Procedure 1: Powering up an SMA

To power–up the SMA correctly, take the following steps:

1. Apply power to the Sub–rack and check that the primary supplies are
present, this is indicated by the Green LEDs on the Power LTU.

2. Switch PSU A on.

3. Check that the Amber power LED is lit and the Red LED extinguishes. If
the Red LED remains lit and the Power LTU indications are correct, switch
the unit off immediately and remove it from the shelf.
Do not leave a Power Supply Unit in the shelf if the Red LED remains lit
after switching on.

4. If the LED indications for PSU A are good, switch PSU B on (if fitted) and
repeat the LED checking procedure for PSU B as in 3.

Marconi (Page 469) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

Note: Where there is more than one PSU specified in the rack configuration, ensure that all
the PSUs are powered–up within ten minutes of each other; i.e., whenever possible, do not
leave a single PSU powering the whole rack for any longer than is required to correctly follow
this powering–up procedure.

Note: Immediately after power–up, the sub–rack cards will undergo an initialisation period
controlled by the Comms/Controller Card. During this period, it is normal for a number of the
card LEDs to flash on and off. This process stops when the Comms/Controller Card has
completed its initialisation cycle.

32.8.1 Power Supply Monitor Points

! ALERT/CAUTION

Early models of the SMA–1/4c PSU (1HAK60729AAS) may have the monitor
points inverted ie facia reads +12.5V actual measured –12.5V.

Measure the voltage level at the PSU monitor points and ensure that they meet
the limits given in Table 32.1.

Table 32.1: Voltage

Limits
Supply Limit
+5.5V 0.1V
-5.7V 0.1V
+12.4V 0.2V

AMBER LED LEDs

When lit indicates
Unit switched on
and functioning
correctly

RED LED
+12.4V Test Point
When lit indicates either:
a) Unit switched off
b) Fault condition
+5.5V Test Point

0V Test Points -5.7V Test Point

Figure 32.1 PSU Front Panel LED Indica-

tions and Monitor Point

Marconi (Page 470) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

32.9 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The shelf and cards should be logically configured and brought to the operational
state by use of the LCT (Refer to the LCT Operator Manual for the correct
procedures). Configuration can also be carried out remotely from any other SMA
element on the same network (provided the Comms/Controller Card has
previously been commissioned locally).

Note: During commissioning the Sync Mode defaults to Freerun.

Note: The Comms/Controller must be initially configured in order to recognise the presence
of cards in the shelf. If a card is being configured with the Comms/Controller in the off–line state
then a ‘Card missing’ message will be displayed even if the card is present in the shelf. The
Comms/Controller is brought ‘on line’ at the end of commissioning by bringing the N.E.
‘on–line’.

32.10 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AT SMA NODES

The followings checks should be made on each SMA, prior to connection into the
network.

Procedure 2: Alarm Checks

Refer to the relevant LCT Operator and Maintenance Manual for instructions on
displaying and interpreting system alarms.

32.10.1 Alarm Clear Check

Set the date and time for the SMA.

The following alarms will need to be inverted to make the SMA appear ‘Alarm
Free’.

a) Invert all equipped Tributary ‘Loss Of Trib Input’ alarms.

b) Invert the ‘LAPD Disconnected alarms’.

The SMA should now appear ‘Alarm Free’, any alarms that are still raised should
be investigated and cleared before proceeding further.

Procedure 3: Traffic Path Integrity

In order to check for traffic path integrity PRBS signal can be injected into a
Tributary LTU input and monitored at the Tributary output.

This test should be carried out on at least one port from each of the equipped
Tributary Cards.

1. Using suitable optical test leads, loop the LINE WEST A Transmit and the
LINE WEST A Receive optical ports via a 12dBm "2dBm attenuator .

Marconi (Page 471) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

2. Referring to the LCT Operator Manual, make cross–connections from Line

West to the Trib port under test.

3. Apply an HDB3 215–1 PRBS (2/34Mbit/s Tribs) or CMI 223–1 PRBS

(140Mbit/s Trib) to a Tributary I/P appropriate to the card under test and
set the appropriate ‘Loss of Trib Input’ alarm to normal.

4. Check that error free PRBS is present at the port O/P.

5. Repeat the procedure for each of the Trib/Line cards fitted.

Procedure 4: Stability Period

With the SMA set up as in Procedure 3, monitor the error performance of the
PRBS signal for a period of one hour. There should be no errors.

The PRBS signal should remain error free for the duration of the 1 hour stability
period and no alarms should occur.

If any alarms or errors occur, the cause should be investigated and cleared and
the stability run repeated.

32.11 NETWORK CHECKS

Following the completion of the functional checks, the SMA node should now be
interconnected into the network configuration as required by the customer (refer to
the network diagram applicable to the contract). The SMA will be configured as per
the customer requirement by referring to the information supplied by the
appropriate Network Operating Authority.

6. Reconnect the Rx optical fibre tail to the Optical I/P of the card.

32.11.1 Information Required from the Network Operating

Authority

The appropriate Network Operating Authority are responsible for providing the
following information prior to interconnecting the SMA into the network:

a) The Ethernet MAC address if the SMA node is a Gateway.

b) The Local NSAP Address for the SMA node.

c) The timing and synchronisation information for the SMA node.

d) The LAPD configuration for the SMA node.

e) If applicable, fibre loss figures for the network that the SMA node is to be
connected into.

Marconi (Page 472) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

32.11.2 Element Manager

Refer to the Element Manager User Manual as necessary for the following checks.

32.11.2.1 Remote SMA Communication

Verify that the Element Manager can remotely communicate with and exercise the
SMA.

32.11.2.2 Remote SMA Alarm

Verify that an alarm is raised at the element manager in response to a failure at an

SMA in the system.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 473) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 32: COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 474) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 7: MAINTENANCE

SECTION 7:
MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 33 . . . . . GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . . . PAGE 477

Marconi (Page 475) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
SECTION 7: MAINTENANCE

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 476) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 33: GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 33:
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

33.1 INTRODUCTION

The procedure for identifying and replacing faulty cards is located in the
associated Maintenance manual. The rest of this chapter covers cleaning
procedures for optical connectors.

33.2 CLEANING PROCEDURES FOR OPTICAL

CONNECTORS

33.2.1 General

All optical fibre connectors must be treated with the utmost care and a very high
standard of cleanliness maintained, otherwise their performance may be seriously
affected.

As soon as a connector is disconnected the free ends must be protected with dust
caps.

All optical connectors must be inspected immediately before a connection or

re–connection is made and cleaned if necessary.

WARNING
Before any inspection of an optical connector it is essential that the electrical
power supply to the laser is disconnected. This is achieved by removing the optical unit
concerned. This must be confirmed by using an optical power meter to ensure there is no
optical power present at the connector before using the microscope.

33.2.2 Materials Required

• Microscope with adapter suitable for connector type.
• Suitable Optical Power Meter capable of measuring 1300nm–1550nm
(50nm). The optical interfaces on the cards conform to those outlined in
G.957 and G.958.
• Appropriate Optical Test Leads.
• Optical Cleaning Kit.
• Lint Free Anti–static Lens Tissues
• Cotton Buds
• Approved Cleaning Solvent
• Anti–static Aerosol Dust Remover

Marconi (Page 477) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 33: GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

33.2.3 Cleaning Procedures

33.2.3.1 Inspection

Inspect the connector using the microscope.

The two main dirt problems affecting optical connectors are dust and the grease to
which dust can stick. Dust appears as lumps, flakes or possibly fibres (from
clothes or hair). Grease appears as smears or ‘blobs’ and is most commonly
introduced from the fingertips.

Where possible the sides as well as the end of the ferrule should be inspected for
serious scores or scratches (visible to the naked eye). The ferrule end should then
be inspected using the microscope.

Particular attention should be given to the core area of the fibre. If the fibre end is
generally smooth and free from cracks the ferrule is acceptable. Slight chipping in
the cladding is permissible, but not obvious cracks or any damage that extends
into the core area.

There will always be some score marks present on the ferrule end–face since all of
these connectors are of the epoxy/polish type. However, obvious deep score
marks are usually evidence of damage by foreign bodies. If these marks are
pronounced or extend near to or into the fibre then the connector should be
rejected and the fibre end re–terminated.

33.2.4 Cleaning of Optical Connector

Blow dust clear from the connector using the aerosol dust remover.

Inspect the connector again. In the case of persistent dirt or grease (finger marks
etc) apply a small amount of solvent from a dispenser onto a tissue then wipe the
plug with the tissue.

Blow the connector dry and clear of dust using the aerosol dust remover.

Re–inspect connector and repeat the cleaning procedure if necessary.

33.2.5 Cleaning of Optical Coupler – Where Practical

Blow dust clear from the coupler using the aerosol dust remover.

Inspect the coupler again. In the case of persistent dirt or dust use a clean dry
tissue (or cotton bud) to remove.

Note: Do not use solvent on couplers

Blow the coupler dry and clear of dust using the aerosol dust remover then
re–inspect the coupler.

Marconi (Page 478) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 33: GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Repeat the cleaning procedure if necessary.

zzzzz END OF CHAPTER zzzzz

Marconi (Page 479) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
CHAPTER 33: GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 480) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

A
Access Network A system implemented between the Local Exchange(LE) and user,
replacing part or whole of the local line distribution network
Access SDH The general term applied to the range of new SDH multiplexers which
includes: SMA–1/4CP (Customer ADM), SMA–1/4c (Compact ADM),
SMA–1/4(4+4) (midsize ADM) and SMA–1/4(8) (fullsize ADM).

Acknowledge Alarm state applied to individual alarms from the Local Terminal
(LCT) or EMOS Receive attention is applied to all other unserviced
alarms as a secondary action.
Add–Drop Multiplexer (ADMUX) –Transmission equipment through which a number of
lower–bit rate channels may be passed in two directions, as a single
higher bit–rate channel in each direction. Lower bit–rate channels
may be added or removed via local traffic interfaces.
Adjacency A relationship formed between selected neighbouring routers and
end nodes for the purpose of exchanging routeing information.
Administration Functions which permit the management of human and other re-
sources.
Administrative Unit The information structure which adapts between the higher–order
path and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information pay-
load and a pointer which indicates the offset of the start of the pay-
load frame relative to that of the multiplex frame.
Administrative Unit Group One or more Administrative Units occupying fixed, defined positions
within an STM payload. An AUG consists of a homogeneous, byte–
interleaved assembly of AU–3s or an AU–4.
Alarm Indication given to an operator to indicate the existence of a fault
condition either within or detected by the Multiplexer.
Alarm Bit Image String of binary digits (bits), each bit representing the processed out-
put from an individual fault detector. The identity of the originating
fault detector is implied by the position of the bit in the string.
Alarm Configuration Priority, inversion status and category of each possible fault as well
as overall configuration.
Alarm Destination Ultimate sink of alarm information. Can be Element Manager, Local
Terminal or alarm log.
Alarm Indication Signal An alarm condition indicating that the source equipment has de-
tected a failure of the transmitted traffic.
Alarm Log Historical store showing changes of state of alarms together with a
time stamp.
Alarm Management Functions of the system in which the detection, correction of network
failures and real–time detection are managed such that threats to the
normal operation of the network are avoided.
Alarm Severity The category which defines the impact of an alarm on the network.
Alarm Source The identity of the monitored entity with which the fault detector caus-
ing the alarm indication is associated; e.g. STM–1 West, AU/VC–3
number 2 West.
Alarm State The defined state within the alarm life–cycle.
Alarm Type The fault type detected by the fault detector which causes that alarm
indication to be given.
AP Title Part of the Communications Address.
Archive This means to move to a long–term storage medium, rather than
copy, which implies back–up.
Available Time Any time not deemed Unavailable Time (UAT)

Marconi (Page 481) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

B
Bidirectional When used in the context of protection, the switching of traffic in both
directions of transmission for the section or trail. Also known as
double–ended.
Binary Interleaved Parity (BIP) – An error monitoring code.
Block A set of consecutive bits associated with a path; each bit belongs to
one and only one block (ITU–T Recommendation G.826).
Block Error A Block Error is counted whenever there are one or more BIP–n Er-
rors detected in a BIP Check Block, a REI Count of one or more is
detected, one or more CRC–n errors are detected in a CRC Check
Block or a Frame word is detected as being in error.
Broadcast Address A group address that by convention means ‘everyone.
Broadcast Trail A type of trail originating from a single source, which may be termin-
ated at one or more trail sinks. Broadcast is achieved by fanning out
from connection Termination Points, along the trail, which have the
capability to support broadcast cross–connections. The return direc-
tion of a broadcast trail is blocked and unavailable for use.

C
Cacoethes Telecomia Occasional tendency of data in some systems to follow inadvisable
routeing paths.
Card Protection Group A group of protected cards.
Category Attribute assigned by an operator to each possible fault. This attribute
is used by the local alarm scheme to determine the visual indication
to be given to the operator with respect to the type of maintenance
action required. This attribute is also used to determine whether a
particular fault is monitored by the entire alarm processing scheme.
Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) – Call control signalling transmitted within the bandwidth of the
call it controls; also known as in–band signalling. In T1 transmission,
channel associated signalling is performed by bit–robbing. Each
channel has its own dedicated signalling sub-channel.
Clear Change of state from active to inactive of an alarm that has been
serviced. also
The clearing of a protection switching command.
Client/Server Defines the recursive dependency which exists between paths man-
aged by the NCL. A section or trail may be referred to as a server. A
server is able to support one or more client trails which are hierarchi-
cally dependent on that server.
Code Violation An error that is counted whenever there are one or more BIP–n Er-
rors detected in a BIP.
Commissioning Bringing a new Multiplexer into a state where it is ready to be provi-
sioned.
Common Channel Signalling (CCS) Out-of-band signalling protocol for signalling between processor
equipped switches using signalling channels that are separate from
the from the users voice (or data) channels.
Concatenation A procedure whereby a number of virtual containers are associated,
with the result that their combined capacity can be used as a single
container across which the bit–sequence is maintained.
Connection A Transport–entity which is capable of transferring information be-
tween connection termination–points.
Connectionless Network Protocol Connectionless Network Protocol CLNP (ISO8473), has been
evolved for packet data transfer in network architectures that have
multiple distributed paths. Data transfers between nodes have transi-
ent relationships one to another, that only last for the transfer of any
particular Protocol Data Unit (PDU).
Connection Orientated A service in which a connection set up procedure must be implem-
ented before data can be exchanged between the same pair of
users.

Marconi (Page 482) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Container The information structure which forms the network–synchronous in-

formation payload for a virtual container.
Control Bus A bus which connects the Mux. Controller to the traffic (i.e. line, tribu-
tary and switch) cards and the auxiliary card.
Cross–connection A logical connection between two connection termination points on
the same Network Element. Cross–connections may be fixed (as for
some PDH multiplexers) or switchable (as in an SMA– and/or
C–MUX).
Consecutive Severely Errored Sec- A series of consecutive seconds in available time in which the
onds number of Block Errors or Code Errors exceeds the threshold for
SES. During Performance Monitoring, Severely Errored Seconds are
a ‘subset‘ of Errored Seconds, i.e. ES are still counted if the second
is declared a SES.
Data Communications Channel Channel within the section overhead which is dedicated to data com-
munications between network elements.
Datagram A self–contained, entity of data carrying sufficient information to be
routed from the source to the destination without reliance on on
earlier exchanges between the source and destination devices and/
or the transporting network
De–commission The process by which the user can reset the system parameters to a
default, non–functional system state.

D
DEG Performance A user configurable condition which may be generated when the
number of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES) for a par-
ticular Error Performance Monitored Entity exceeds a preset thresh-
old. The DEG defaults are a half of SES default value used for USE.
Disabled Alarm Traffic alarm the source of which is a monitored entity which is not
carrying traffic or a card fault which has not been added to the equip-
ment configuration.
Disconnected A category which can be assigned to an alarm which prevents that
alarm raising indications on the end–of–shelf and rack alarm units.
Domain Specific Part (DSP) – In DECnet, the part of an NSAP address assigned by the
addressing authority identified by the Inter–Domain Policy (IDP).

E
Element Manager Prime method of controlling an NE. A workstation which may com-
municate with and control all elements within a network,
Element Manager Interface An interface (also known as ‘Q’ interface) provided by the communi-
cations card for the comms link between the equipment and the El-
ement Manager.
EMOS LAN The LAN used to interconnect EM–OS to Gateway Elements.
Enabled Alarm Traffic fault the source of which is a monitored entity which is carrying
traffic or a card fault from a card which has been added to the multi-
plexer configuration.
End of Shelf Display Module located at right hand end of the shelf containing alarm indica-
tors and receive attention button.
Errored Second Any Second in Available Time in which Block Errors (BEs) are de-
tected.
Errored Seconds Clear This defines a threshold for the ES count. In the particular Threshold
Crossing Notification scheme where this is used ES threshold cros-
sing Exception reporting is done only once until the ES count falls
below this threshold in a 15 minute reporting period containing no
UATs.
Errored Second Count A cumulative count lndicating the number of seconds of Available
Time or a particular errored performance data reporting period.
Errored Second Ratio The long term ratio of the number of Errored Seconds (In Available
Time) to the total number of seconds in a measurement period.

Marconi (Page 483) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Engineer Order Wire A channel between NEs over which communication between main-
tenance staff is carried.
Entity A logical partition, either of a traffic processing path or SMA hardware
(i.e. STM–N, AU, HO Path, TU, LO Path, Port, Slot or Card).
Ethernet A Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD) LAN,
developed by Xerox and standardised by Digital, Intel and Xerox.
ES–IS Protocol As defined in ISO 9542, the protocol for handshaking between
routers and end nodes and for mapping network layer addresses to
data link layer addresses.
Extender II Current VCTM product.
External Network A source and sink of traffic not under the control of EM–OS.

F
Fallback Mode Stand–alone operation due to absence or failure of Element Man-
ager. In this mode, the Local Terminal (LCT) assumes the control of
the Network Element.
Fallback Working Mode One of two equipment working modes. It indicates that either the
communications link between the equipment and the Element Man-
ager has failed or the Element Manager has read only access (i.e.
EM_Control is disabled).
Far End Block Error The occurrence of errors (CV’s) in a BIP Check Block signalled back
to the remote end as a count (Higher Order Path) or as a single bit
flag (Lower Order).
Far End Receive Fail An Indication sent over Multiplex Section, Higher Order and Lower
Order Paths to indicate failure of the receive data.
Fault Detector A circuit which detects either the occurrence or subsidence of a par-
ticular fault condition.
Fault Event A condition, detected by a Network Element, which is indicative of a
fault.
Fault Signal The output of a fault detector.
Fault Source That attribute of a fault which identifies the entity being monitored by
a particular fault detector.
Fault Type A specific condition which requires a unique type of fault detector to
detect it. e.g. LOS, AIS etc
F Interface Communications interface between a network element and its Local
Terminal (LCT) or workstation.
Fixed Window Processing Performance processing in which the aggregation period is of fixed
length and starts at fixed times. Examples of these are the 15Min and
24Hr Performance Records.

G
Gateway The network element which provides a physical interface to the El-
ement Manager and hence can act as a path (communications gate-
way) routeing messages between the EM and other NEs via the DCC
interfaces.
Gateway Network Element See Gateway.

H
Hello Identifies multiple simultaneous recipients of data. Used when the
Elements of a network wish to identify all users in that network and
maintain neighbour relationships
Higher Order Traffic path which provides transport for lower order paths; Pertaining
to the VC–3/4 monitored entity.
Holdover A timing mode in which an outgoing signal is maintained accurately
at the frequency and phase of its designated timing source after loss
of that timing source.

Marconi (Page 484) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Hop The passage of a packet through one router.

Hop count A routeing metric used to measure the distance between a source
and a destination.

I
Importance The significance of a particular fault in relation to all others as per-
ceived by an operator. This can be configured into the Multiplexer
and used to characterise the display of alarms to an operator.
Incoming VC Monitoring Incoming VC Monitoring is the unobtrusive monitoring of BIP errors
for a selected VC within and STM–n signal without termination.
Inter–Domain Resilience Resilience between Domains is achieved by providing and configur-
ing, more than one point of interconnection between the Domains.
First and second choice routes between IS–IS Domains and ISRA
Domains are given the names Internal and External. All IS–IS Bound-
ary Nodes should be internally interconnected with two Level–2
routes to reinforce Inter Domain Resilience.
Initial Domain Identifier (IDI) – In DECnet, the part of an NSAP address which identifies the
authority responsible for the assignment of the DSP.
Initial Domain Part (IDP) – In DECnet, the part of an NSAP address assigned by the first
level of the addressing authority.
In–Traffic One of two traffic states for traffic cards. It indicates that extraction of
this card may result in a loss of this traffic.
Initial System Parameters The basic equipment configurations (i.e. multiplexing method, card
and slot allocation and synchronisation modes and priorities) required
by the Multiplexer Controller to enable it to set–up the working envi-
ronment of the multiplexer.
Inoperative One of two operation states of the Mux. Controller. It indicates that
the Mux. Controller does not have the initial system parameters confi-
gured.
Inversion State The nominated state of a fault signal which is to be interpreted as a
no fault condition. The nominated state can be either active or inac-
tive, a fault only being raised upon a change to the complementary
state
IS–IS Block An IS–IS Block is said to be formed when IS–IS Boundary Nodes of
IS–IS Composites are interconnected. The IS–IS Block prevents IS–
IS protocols being exchanged over the link, whilst still allowing com-
munication to take place between the IS–IS Boundary Nodes. The
block is not essential but sometimes needed to enable IS–IS net-
works to be constructed. The block circumvents a limitation with IS–
IS that only allows two RAPs to a single destination under complex
situations. The block is introduced into the IS–IS network by marking
the communication interface as ‘external’.
IS–IS Boundary Node IS–IS Boundary Nodes define the entry and exit points of IS–IS
Centre Nodes at Level–1/2 routeing, and form the boundary between
IS–IS Areas, Interim Static Routeing Algorithm elements and the EM–
OS LAN.
IS–IS Centre & Boundary
Composite Consists of a single IS–IS Centre with one or more Boundary Nodes.
If more than one Boundary Node is incorporated there must be a
resilient Level–2 connection between every Boundary Node.
IS–IS Centre Node or IS–IS Area A collection of IS–IS network elements that share the same Area ad-
dress.
IS–IS Domain A collection of connected Areas. Routeing Domains provide full con-
nectivity to all End Systems within them.

Marconi (Page 485) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

IS–IS Element Routeing Intermediate System (IS) elements route inter–network information
one to another using a dynamic routeing protocol (ISO 10589). IS–IS
Element Routeing takes place when one IS element communicates
with others, and each element creates routeing tables within them-
selves containing information about the Network Topology these el-
ements are interconnected into. Routeing Tables constructed in this
manner are said to be dynamic.
IS–IS Multiple Area Working IS–IS routeing allows the use of multiple Area addresses for any indi-
vidual Network Element. Therefore Network Elements can have mul-
tiple NSAP addresses. Interconnected IS–IS elements each contain-
ing multiple NSAP addresses, and sharing at least one Area address
one to another, will adopt or share all of the Area addresses, forming
a common set of area
IS–IS Partition Repairs The IS–IS Partition Repair function allows Level–1 communication to
be maintained following a Level–1 break, between two isolated is-
lands of the same Area. This Level–1 communication repair uses a
‘Virtual’ Level–1 path, which is actually between Level–2 elements. A
Level–2 path must however be made available between the isolated
islands.
IS–IS Routeing Domain When IS–IS Centre Nodes are directly interconnected they form an
IS–IS Routeing Domain. IS–IS protocols are exchanged within an
IS–IS Routeing Domain.
IS–IS Routeing Metrics IS–IS uses the concept of assigning a positive integral numerical
value to every circuit , link or path. These numerical metric values are
added to determine the ‘cost’ of an overall route. Only one metric
type (default metric) is supported by GPT SDH products. Routes are
selected on a lowest overall ‘cost’ basis.
IS–IS Protocol The ISO standard intra–domain routeing protocol, documented in
ISO 10589.

L
Lamp–lock Method by which transient alarms may be latched.
Level 1 Routeing IS–IS Routeing within an Area.
Level 1 Routeing Table A Level–1 Routeing Table contains all the System IDs of the IS–IS
network elements that share the same Area, plus topological informa-
tion of the readability of these network elements.
Level 2 Routeing IS–IS Routeing between Areas.
Level 2 Routeing Table A Level–2 Routeing Table contains all Area addresses and address
Prefixes that can be reached from that network element. A Level–2
Routeing Table also contains information of all routes over which
Areas/Prefixes can be reached, plus these routes cost or metric.
Link Connection A logical connection between connection termination points on two
different Network Elements.
Link State Package LSP – A packet that is generated by a router operating a link state
routeing protocol (e.g. ISO 10589) listing the routers neighbours.
Local Alarm Indication State of rack alarm Buses coupled with visual display provided by
LEDs on end–of–shelf unit and cards.
Local Alarm Scheme The hardware used to indicate local alarms. This includes end of
shelf indicators and on–card fail indicators.
Local Craft Terminal Interface An interface provided by the Multiplex Controller for the communica-
tions link between the equipment and the Local Terminal (LCT).
Local Alarm Status Indicates what local alarm scheme actions have been performed on
a specific alarm.
Local Exchange (LE) An exchange on which user lines are terminated by an AN.
Locked An operator–controlled administrative state indicating that a resource
is being used, i.e. carrying traffic and, therefore, is not to be
amended.
Loop Timing A mode in which the Multiplexer uses the recovered line timing from a
given direction to time the outgoing signal in the same direction.

Marconi (Page 486) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Loss–of–Frame Alarm condition indicating loss of alignment of the data received.

Loss–of–Signal Alarm condition indicating a detected loss of an incoming line signal.
Lower Order SDH traffic–path which cannot be further sub–divided. Pertaining to
the VC–1/2 monitored entity.

M
Mapping Distribution of data from one multiplexing frame structure into defined
positions in another frame of the same rate.
Man–Machine Interface The mechanism by which an operator may communicate with one or
more network elements.
Manual Adjacency (MA) A method of interworking between an IS–IS Domain and an ISRA
Domain, where the ISRA Domain nodes share the same Area Ad-
dress as the IS–IS Border Node the Manual Adjacency originates
from. A Manual Adjacency is therefore a Level–1 static route.
Maximum Transmission Unit MTU – the largest packet size that can be transmitted between
source and destination.
Medium Access Control MAC – a sub–layer of the data link layer, defined by the IEEE 802
committee, that deals with issues specific to a particular type of LAN.
The identity of the GPT ‘EM–OS’ product within a network will have a
designated ‘MAC’ address, as its link with the network will always be
via an Ethernet LAN.
Message Passing Bus This is a bus which connects the Mux. Controller to the communica-
tions card. It is used for all communications between these two cards.
Metric A measure, as in ‘Routeing Metric’, where the measure (eg. reliability,
delay, bandwidth, load, hop count) is used by a routeing algorithm to
determine whether one route is better than another.
Monitored Entity (ME) – An entity within the Multiplexer with which faults can be asso-
ciated. The identifiable entities are :– slot card, port, STM–N, AU–3/4,
VC–3/4, TU–1/2 or VC–1/2.
Multicast To poll or transmit common information to a known group of recipi-
ents, usually with a single message transmission. Sometimes re-
ferred to as ‘Hello’ messages.
Multiplex Section A Multiplex Section is the part of a line system between two Multiplex
Section Terminations.
Multiplex Section Overhead The Multiplex Section Overhead comprises of rows 5 to 9 of the
Overhead of the STM–n signal.

N
Negative Pointer Justification Event A Negative Pointer Justification Event is defined when the frame rate
of the VC is too fast with respect to the associated AU/TU requiring
an extra data byte to be transmitted and the pointer values decrem-
ented.
Network Element A multiplexer, line system terminal, regenerator, or any equipment
which switches, multiplexes or regenerates traffic.
Network Management Interface An interface between a network element or gateway network element
and the element manager or Local Terminal (LCT).
Network Service Access Point NSAP - the ISO term for the quantity that specifies a client of a netĆ
work layer running at a particular node.
Non–worker Card which is in ‘Standby’ mode (i.e. not carrying traffic) in a pro-
tected arrangement.
Normal Working Mode This is one of two equipment working modes. It indicates that com-
munications link between the equipment and the Element Manager
has been established and the Element Manager has read/write ac-
cess (i.e. EM_Control is enabled).
Not–in–Traffic This is one of two traffic states for traffic cards. It indicates that extrac-
tion of this card will not result in a loss of traffic.

Marconi (Page 487) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

O
On–Card Fault LED An LED on a particular card that is lit, either autonomously or under
control of the Mux Controller, to indicate that the card is detecting a
Fault Condition. It is not necessarily an indication that the card itself is
faulty.
On–line This is one of two control states of the Mux. Controller. It indicates
that the Mux. Controller recognises the SMC as belonging to the
Shelf. Communication between the Mux. Controller, traffic cards and
comms cards is enabled.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) – The OSI model provides the basis for connecting ‘open’ sys-
tems for distributed applications processing, where the term ‘open’
denotes the ability of any two systems conforming to the reference
model and the associated standards to connect.
Operative This is one of two operation states of the Mux. Controller. It indicates
that the Mux. Controller has the initial system parameters configured.
Operator The user of an Element Manager or Local Terminal (LCT).
Overhead Buses Buses between the various SMA–n cards carrying Overhead (STM–n
and some HO VC overhead) information in a proprietary frame at a
data rate of 6.48Mbit/s.

P
Parked The state of an alarm in which it will cause no indication (other than
receive attention or acknowledged) to be given on the end of shelf
and rack alarm Buses.
Path Overhead Provides for integrity of communication between the point of assem-
bly of a virtual container and that of its disassembly.
Path Trace A mechanism provided for the purpose of confirming that an SDH trail
is provisioned between desired end–points. The NEs at each end of
the trail inject and monitor an operator provided byte sequence into
the path overhead.
Performance Primitive A particular aspect of the System Performance monitored by the
Equipment, used as the basic data for the generation of performance
parameters and data reports.
Performance Record Stored Performance Data Report pertaining to a performance data
reporting period that has expired.
Ping Packet Internet Groper, an echo message and its reply, used to test
the reachability of a network device.
Ping Techniques Ping Techniques use the principle of sending and receiving test
messages to determine routeing paths, and the response to test
messages by interconnecting and target nodes.
Pointer (SDH) Provides the off–set of the start of the SDH traffic signal from the start
of the frame.
Point–to–point A connection, usually a trail, with exactly two ends (as opposed to a
point–to–multi–point connection, which may have three or more
ends, e.g. Multi–drop or Broadcast).
Positive Pointer Justification Event A positive pointer justification event is defined when the frame rate of
the VC is too slow with respect to the associated AU/TU requiring a
data byte to be omitted and the pointer values incremented.
Presentation Service Access point (PSAP) – An addressable point at which the presentation service
(sixth layer of the OSI model) is made available.
Primary Multiplexer An element (SMA, SLT, C–Mux) in which traffic is multiplexed/demulti-
plexed up to 2Mbit/s.
Priority Numeric value reflecting the importance attached to a fault. Can be in
the range 1 (highest) to 255 (lowest).
Protection Card Card which provides an alternative path to the worker under fail or
forced switch conditions.

Marconi (Page 488) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Q
Q–interface The interface between the gateway network element and the element
manager. Only available at the gateway network element.
Qecc Interface The data communications interface which uses the embedded data
communications channels within the STM–1 section overhead.

R
RAP Metrics Reachable Address Prefix Metrics, is the metric associated with the
Level–2 Static Data, which in mixed ISRA/IS–IS routed networks
would normally be produced by the RTC. The metrics are associated
with a route, as opposed to a link. The metric types are referred to as
‘Internal’ and ‘External’ which are terms relating to the associated
IS–IS Domain.
Re–provisioning Altering the configuration of an Multiplexer to accommodate different
or new traffic.
Receive Attention Alarm state, invoked by pressing a button on the end–of–shelf unit,
applied to all currently unserviced alarms.
Regenerator Section A Regenerator section is the part of a Line System between two Re-
generator Section Terminations (RST).
Regenerator Section Overhead The Regenerator Section overhead comprises of rows of 1 to 3 of the
Section Overhead of the STM–n signal.
Remote Defect Indication This term replaces ‘FERF’ in later versions of ITU–T recommenda-
tions.
Remote Error Indication This term replaces ‘FEBE’ in later versions of ITU–T recommenda-
tions.
Ringmaster One Multiplexer providing synchronisation for a number of Multi-
plexers connected together to form a ring.
Route One or more traffic–sections between the same two NEs or sub–net-
works. The constituent sections may or may not take the same geo-
graphical path.
Routeing Junction Any node (SMA/SLA) connected to a LAN or has more than two DDC
connections. Has a routeing table.

S
Section A single connection between two Network Elements which supports
a client link connection. It can be a traffic section, or a management
section (the latter may possibly be a digital user–loop section). It can
be used to build a Trail.
Service Access Point SAP – the address of a user of a service, a field that further defines
an address (hence ‘NSAP’).
Section Overhead Contains information added to the information payload to create an
STM–N, and comprises of rows 1 to 3, columns 1 to 9xn, and rows 5
to 9, columns 1 to 9xn, of the STM–N signal. Used for checking traffic
integrity and to provide the data comms channels.
Serial Event Hand off Facility A facility to monitor the logged asynchronous alarm data available at
the serial interface port of an Element Manager work station.
Serviced Referring to an alarm in either the receive attention or acknowledged
state.
Severity The significance of a particular fault in relation to all others as per-
ceived by an operator. This can be configured into the Network El-
ement and used to characterise the display of alarms to an operator.
Severely Errored Second Any second in available time in which the number of Block Errors or
Code Errors exceeds the threshold for SES. During Performance
Monitoring, Severely Errored Seconds are a ‘subset‘ of Errored Sec-
onds, i.e. ES are still counted if the second is declared a SES.

Marconi (Page 489) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

Severely Errored Second Count A cumulative count lndicating the number of seconds of Available
Time in a particular performance data reporting period that were
deemed to be Severely Errored.
Severely Errored Second Ratio The long term ratio of a number of Severely Errored Seconds of
Available Time in a measurement period.
Severely Errored Second Threshold The presettable threshold for the number of Block Errors recorded in
a second that will lead to the second being declared a Severely Er-
rored Second and the SESC incremented.
Shelf Alarm Status A summary of the states of all the alarm sources in the Multiplexer,
suitable for display on the end of shelf display and rack alarm units.
Shelf Local Alarm I/F The interface via which access may be gained to the shelf and rack
alarm Buses.
Shelf Local Alarm O/P Outputs available for driving external alarm indicator circuitry.
Sliding Window Processing Performance processing in which the aggregation period is of fixed
length but can start at any time. Examples of these are the SUE and
TUE window processing.
SMA–1/4CP Customer located SDH add–drop multiplexer.
SMA–1/4c A compact shelf based SDH add–drop multiplexer in the Access
SDH range, which accepts different Trib card options and protected
Core cards.
SMA–1/4(4+4) A shelf based SDH add–drop multiplexer in the Access SDH range,
with a single row of LTUs, limited LTU access for Trib cards, and pro-
tected Core cards.
SMA–1/4(8) A shelf based SDH add–drop multiplexer in the Access SDH range,
with two rows of LTUs, full LTU access for Trib cards, and protected
Core cards.
Start of Unavailability Event Count A count kept of the number of SUEs in a particular period.
Subside Change of state from active to inactive of an alarm that is unserviced.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Set of digital transport structures, standardised for the transport of
suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
Synchronous Multiplexer Add/Drop (SMA) Transmission equipment through which a number of lower–bit
rate channels may be passed in two directions, as a single higher
bit–rate channel in each direction. Lower bit–rate channels may be
added or removed via local traffic interfaces.
Synchronous Transport Module The information structure used to support section–layer connections
in the synchronous digital hierarchy. Comprises of the information
payload and the section overhead information.

T
Termination of Unavailability Event An event which occurs when the threshold for consecutive non–SES
is reached.
Through Timing A timing mode in which the line timing is passed through a Multi-
plexer from west to east and /or east to west.
Time slot A 64kbit/s channel within a framed 2Mbit/s signal (ITU–T Recommen-
dation G.704).
Time slot number This identifies a 64kbit/s time slot within the 2048kbit/s V5.1 interface
(ref. ETS 300 167 [2]).
Trail An end–to–end path of a specified type across a network and is
made up of one or more link connections connected together by
cross– connections.
Traffic Cards Those cards occupying the line, switch and tributary card slots.
Tributary Unit Information structure which adapts between the lower–order path–
layer and the higher–order path–layer.
Tributary Unit Group One or more Tributary Units occupying fixed positions within a
higher–order virtual container payload.
Turnaround A timing mode in which the line timing of the output is derived from
that of the received line in a Network Element.

Marconi (Page 490) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

U
Unacceptable Short–term Errors A event occurring when the number (‘n’) of consecutive SES for a
particular Error Performance Monitored Entity exceeds a preset
threshold.
Unserviced State of a new alarm prior to being receive attention or acknowl-
edged.
Unavailable Seconds Count A cumulative count lndicating the number of seconds of a particular
performance data reporting period during which the entity being
monitored was deemed Unavailable.
UnAvailable Time A period starting at the beginning of the first second of a period of
SES that exceeds the SUE threshold and ending at the beginning of
the first second of a period of non–SES which exceeds the TUE
threshold.

V
Validated Faults Fault signals that have been validated by alarm inversion and have
not been forced to inactive either by an operator or by the Multiplexer.
Virtual Container Information structure used to support the path–layer connections in
the synchronous digital hierarchy.
Virtual State Description of the Network Element as set up in EM–OS but com-
munications with real NE have not been established.

W
Watchdog Circuitry which monitors for correct operation of the operating soft-
ware.
Windows A graphical user interface implemented on Microsoft MS–DOS.
Worker Card Card which is carrying data in a protected arrangement.
Worker Section A section, either a protected or protection section, which is currently
carrying traffic.

Marconi (Page 491) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
GLOSSARY OF TERMS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 492) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

A
ADC Auxiliary Data Channel
ADMX Add–Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AIC Auxiliary Interface Card for a C2000 Shelf
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU Administrative Unit
AUI Access Unit Interface

B
BCD Binary Coded Decimal
BE Block Error
BER Bit Error Rate
BSHR Bidirectional Self Healing Ring
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
BSI British Standards Institute

C
C2000 The ‘Century 2000’ range of PDH Multiplexer and Transmission Equipment
CAS Channel associated signalling in TS16
CC Communications Card
CCITT ( now ITU–T ) Comite Consultatif Internationa lTelegraphique et Telephonique.(International
Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee)
CLE Customer Located Equipment
CLK Clock
CLNP Connectionless Network Protocol
CLNS Connectionless Network Layer Service
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CS Chip Select
CSES Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds
CTP Connection Termination Point
CV Code Violation
C–MUX2 Backplane version of compact multiplexer
C–MUX+OLTE 2Mbit/s OLTE derived from C–MUX+

D
DAT Digital Audio Tape (4mm)

Marconi (Page 493) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

D
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCC(M) Data Communication Channel (Multiplexer)
DCC(R) Data Communication Channel (Regenerator)
DCN Data Communication Network
DEG Degrade
DFB Distributed Feedback
DFW Dual Fibre Working
DGNE Domain Gateway Network Element
DIN Deutsche Industrie–Norm
DIT or D&IT Data and Information Technology Limited
DMA Direct Memory Access
DNIC Data Network Identification Code
DRA Data Rate Adapter (ASIC)
DSP Domain Specific Part
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMX Dual Terminal Multiplexer
DU Display Unit

E
EBER Equivalent Binary Error Rate
ECC Embedded Communications Channel
EFS Error Free Second
EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
EM Element Manager
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EML Element Management Layer
EM–OS Equipment Management Operations System
EOS End Of Shelf
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
ES Errored Seconds
ESC Errored Second Count
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESSD Electrostatic Sensitive Device
ESO Elastic Store Overflow
ESP Electrostatic Protection
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F
FEBE Far End Bit Error
FERF Far End Receive Failure
FTAM File Transfer and Access Management

Marconi (Page 494) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

G
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface

H
HB High Bandwidth
HCI Human–Computer Interface
HDLC High–level Data Link Control
HMI Human–Machine Interface
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HO High Order
HO–DSP High Order – Domain Specific Part
HP Hewlett Packard

I
Id or ID Identifier
DI Initial Domain Identifier
IDP Initial Domain Part
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
I/F Interface
IP Internet Protocol
IPS Integrated Planning System
ISDN Integrated Digital Services Network
ISE Intermediate Station Equipment, alternative term for SLR
ISO International Standards Organisation
ITU–TS International Telecommunication Union,Telecommunications Sector (formerly
CCITT)

L
LAN Local Area Network
LCN Local Communications Network
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOA Loss of Alignment
LOF Loss of Frame
LOI Loss of Input
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOPP Lower Order Path Processor
LOS Loss of Signal
LT or LCT Local Craft Terminal
LTE or LTU Line Termination Equipment (Unit)

Marconi (Page 495) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

M
m Metre
MAC Media Access Control
MAU Media Access Unit
MC Multiplex Controller
MCC Management Communications Card
MCU Management Communications Unit
ME Manufacturable Entity
MIB Management Information Base
MM Multimode
MMI Man–machine Interface
MO Managed Object
MOFTE Multiplexer/Optical Fibre Terminating Equipment
MS Multiplex Section
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

N
NACC Network Administration Computer Centre
NB Narrow bandwidth
NCL Network Control Layer
NE Network Element
NEC Network Element Controller
NM Network Management (or Manager)
NMI Network Management Interface
NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit
NSDU Network Service Data Unit
NRZ Non–Return to Zero
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NT Network Terminal
NTE Network Termination Equipment
NTU Network Terminating Unit
NUA Network User Address
NVM Non–Volatile Memory

O
OFTE Optical Fibre Terminating Equipment, or:
OH/POH Overhead/Path Overhead
OLTE Optical Line Terminating Equipment (alternative term for SLT)
OLTU Optical Line Transmission Unit
OOS Out Of Service

Marconi (Page 496) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

O
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OTRU Optical Transmit/Receive Unit

P
PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler
PC Personal Computer (IBM compatible)
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLP Packet Layer Protocol
PM Process Manager
POH Path Overhead
PRAI Path Remote Alarm Indication
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PSU Power Supply Unit
P–SWITCH Primary Rate Switch

Q
Q Interface Interface designation for network management, often Ql, Q2 or Q3
Qecc Interface designation for Embedded Data Comms Channel
QoS Quality of Service

R
RMF Receive Multiframe
RNW Read / Not Write
ROM Read Only Memory
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RS(T) Regenerator Section (Termination)
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
REI Remote Error Indication
RTB Recovered Timing Bus
Rx Receive or Receiver

S
SA System Administrator (for EM–OS).
SAIS Section AIS
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SD Signal Degrade
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SE Saleable Entity

Marconi (Page 497) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

S
SEM System Error Monitor
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Seconds
SF Signal Fail
SFW Single Fibre Working
SID System Identity
SISA Supervisory & Information System for Local & Remote Areas
SIU Slide In Unit
SL Synchronous Line Apparatus (also used to refer to a Synchronous Line System)
SLR Synchronous Line Regenerator
SLT Synchronous Line Terminal
SMA Synchronous Multiplexer – Add/Drop
SMC System Memory Card
SMLT Single–ended Maintenance Local Terminal
SMN–OS SDH Management Network Operations System
SMT Synchronous Multiplexer, Terminal
STM Synchronous Transport Module
SNC Subnetwork Connection
SNPA Subnetwork Point of Attachment
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SO System Operator (for EM–OS).
SOH Section Overhead
SPN Service Protection Network
SPS–155 155.52 Mbit/s Radio Protection Equipment
SRA Synchronous Radio, Access
SRT Synchronous Radio, Trunk
SRT–1 Synchronous Radio, Terminal (155.52Mbit/s)
STM–1 Synchronous Transport Module (155.52Mbit/s)
STM–4 Synchronous Transport Module (622 Mbit/s)
STM–16 Synchronous Transport Module (2.5 Gbit/s)
SUE Start of Unavailability Event

T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/InternetProtocol
TP Termination Point
TMF Transmit Multiframe
TMX Terminal Multiplexer
TNS Transmission Network Surveillance
TS Timeslot
TSAP Transport Service Access Point

Marconi (Page 498) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

T
TSS Telecommunications Standardisation Sector
TTP Trail Termination Point
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group

U
UAS Unavailable Second
UITS Unacknowledged Information TransferService
USE Unacceptable Short–term Errors

V
V.11 UK primary mux management interface for C–Mux
VC Virtual Container
VCAM Virtual Container Access Module
VCTS Virtual Container Transport System
VPN Virtual Private Network

W
WAN Wide Area Network
WIMP Windows, Icons, Menus, Pointer

Marconi (Page 499) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page
1PHA60071AAY User MANUAL
Issue: 05
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

This page intentionally blank to facilitate correct printing

Marconi (Page 500) Return to Contents

COPYRIGHT – Refer to Title Page